, ' vt y . Y a 7
" 4 Lins Lt Iriya? Were yi» 4 ' ) “A fi Wi" Lyi eniyent vita
a AY. Cae ea | ae ‘ ee tae ie BF oft ad" . ai “ ae Pa he ge a Gat SOME’ ay " . AYES Wie
|
.
KP _ .
4 =
\ Crete ar :
rR'WeGibson:lave “4! eS.
,
4,
a >
~s
ee =
<7
~~
mi
pial) hob
TE ei
ie) P
LP n
ANNALS
OF THE
NEW YORK
ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VOLUME XV
1904
Editor:
CHARLES LANE POOR
New York
Published by the Academy
The New Era Printing Company
Lancaster, Pa.
NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
OFFICERS, 1905
President—J AMES F. Kemp, Columbia University. i
Recording Secretary—HErmon C. Bumpus, American Museum.
Corresponding Secretary——RicHARD E. Doves, Teachers College.
Treasurer—CHuAkLES F. Cox, Grand Central Depot.
Librarian—Ratru W. Tower, American Museum.
Editor—CHARLES LANE Poor, 4-East 48th Street.
SECTION OF ASTRONOMY, PHYSICS, AND CHEMISTRY
Chairman—ERNEST R. voN NARDROFF, 3600 Tompkins Ave.,
Brooklyn. —
Secretary—C. C. TRowpripGE, Columbia University.
SECTION OF BIOLOGY
Chairyman—W. M. WHEELER, Ameéticani. Museum.
Secretary—M. A. BiceLtow, Teachers College.
QV /
SECTION OF GEOLOGY AND MINERALOGY
Chairman—Epmunp O. Hovey, American Museum.
Secretary—A. W. GraBau; Columbia University.
SECTION OF ANTHROPOLOGY AND PSYCHOLOGY
Chairman—F, J. E. WooppripGe, Columbia University.
Secretary—R. S. WoopwortH, Columbia University.
SESSION OF 1905
The Academy will meet on Monday evenings at 8.15 o'clock,
from October to May, in the American Museum of Natural
History, 77th Street and Central Park, West.
ANNALS
OF THE
NEW YORK
Sew ERMY OF SCIENCES
VOLUME XV
1904
Editor:
CHARLES LANE POOR
New York
Published by the Academy
The New Era Printing Company
Lancaster, Pa.
PABLE OF -CONTENTS OF Vor. XV.
1.—Crampton, Henry E., Recording Secretary. Rec-
ord of Meetings of the New York Academy
of Sciences, January, 1902, to December, 1902
2.—Crampton, Henry E., Recording Secretary. The
Organization of the New York Academy of
Sciences. (Appendix) . ;
-3.—Crampton, Henry E., Recording Secretary. Rec-
ord of Meetings of the New York Academy
of Sciences, January, 1903, to December, 1903
4.—Poor, Charles Lane. Researches as to the Iden-
tity of the Periodic Comet of 1889g—1896—1903
(Brooks) with the Periodic Comet of 1770
(exelll).
5.—Index
PAGE
L—1eo
. 109-152
x a. er
a &
oe ew
= a
~l
+ Po iia
: ie) a
: AW
i
, nd
1! a ae 7
| 0 ote, tee a
a] ¥ . ny , 7 -
= Chat i ar
“af ve » 0 .
: ae a >
, ri - dat
j PAY
ar ita
: oe yan eee 7
he . }
S , ra
»
ji
. é
> ue
- fw til
. *
'
4
=
XY
at
a
j
“ ihe
‘ on!
- pa
(
Vou. XV Part I
ANNALS
OF THE
NEW YORK
ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Edior:
CHARLES LANE POOR
The New Era Printing Company
Lancaster, Pa.
[ANNALS N. Y. Acan. Sct., XV, No. 1, pp. 1-108, August 31, 1903. ]
RECORD OF MEETINGS
OF THE
NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES.
January, 1902, to December, 1902.
Henry E. Crampton, Recording Secretary.
BUSINESS MEETING.
JANUARY 6, 1902.
Academy met at 8:15 P. M., Professor William Hallock pre-
siding. The minutes of the last business meeting were read
and approved.
There being no business to come before the Academy, the
Academy adjourned at once.
RICHARD E. DOonGeE,
Recording Secretary.
4 RECORDS
SECTION OF ASTRONOMY, PHYSICS AND
CHEMITS Tika
JANUARY 6, 1902.
Section met at 8:20 P. M., Professor Hallock presiding. The
minutes of the last meeting of Section were read and approved.
The following program was then offered :
William Hallock, THe Macnetic DisturBANCE OF STEEL
WIRE PLUMB-BOBS.
William Hallock, A THERMOGRAPH FOR SOIL TEMPERATURE.
H. ©. Parker, THE VarRIATION OF Contact RESISTANCE
WITH CHANGE OF ELECTROMOTIVE FORCE.
SUMMARY OF PAPERS.
Professor Hallock stated that in the course of the work in the
very deep shaft of the Tamarack Mining Co. on Lake Superior it
had been found desirable to plumb down certain points from the
surface. The plumb-lines used were of No. 24 piano wire and
the weights were fifty pounds of iron. At first the lines were
16.33 feet apart at the top and they were later moved to 17.66 feet
The remarkable observation was made that in the first case they
were 0.08 feet and in the second case 0.07 feet farther apart at the
base than at the top. It was pointed out that a deflection of
such an amount could not be explained as due to the gravita-
tional attraction of the walls of the shaft for the nearer plumb-
bob. Professor Hallock suggested that the effect was probably
due to the magnetization of the wire and the consequent repul-
sion of the north poles at the bottom. In order to test the
possible applicability of this theory a number of experiments
were made in the research shaft at Columbia University which
gave much corroborative evidence. Two plumb lines, about
85 feet long, were suspended in the shaft. One was of copper
wire and the other of iron wire about 0.03 inch in diameter.
Lead weights were attached and it was found that the lines
were about +, in. closer together, at the bottom, when the
iron line was south of the copper than when it was north. Two
lines of iron wire were also used and the distance apart at top
RECORDS 5
and bottom measured. The deflections obtained were of the
same order of magnitude as those produced by the earth’s field.
The deflections thus obtained give evidence of magnetic forces
of sufficient magnitude to explain the deviations observed in the
plumb-lines in the Tamarack shaft.
Professor Hallock also described a form of recording ther-
mometer which he had lately devised. It consists of a large cop-
per bulb connected by means of capillary copper tubing toa
series of cells similar to those used in the construction of aneroid
barometers. The bulb, tube and cells were filled with oil and
the recording mechanism attached to the aneroid cells.
Mr. H. C. Parker gave the results of some experiments he
had made on the variation of contact resistance with change of
electromotive force. The resistance used in the experiments
consisted of oxide of manganese on cobalt glass, the new form
of standard high resistance described in a previous paper given
before the academy. The electromotive force employed con-
sisted of 1c, 50, and 100 dry cells, respectively. It was found
in every case that the resistance decreased with increase of elec-
tromotive force. This decrease might be only a small per cent.
or the resistance might be reduced to a small fraction of the
original value. Improving the contacts rendered this change
in resistance much less marked. It was suggested that this
decrease in resistance when the electromotive force was increased
might be due to a kind of coherer action taking place at the con-
tacts. Very high resistances measured by the electrometer
method were found practically to obey Ohm’s law. It was
pointed out that in such cases the contact resistance was prob-
ably only a small portion of the entire resistance.
Section adjourned.
Bie Rumas
Secretary.
SECITION..OF -BIOLOGY.
JANUARY 13, 1902.
Section met at 8.15 P. M., Professor C. L. Bristol presiding.
The minutes of the last meeting of Section were read and
approved.
6 RECORDS
The following program was then offered:
Franz Boas, THE RELATION BETWEEN THE VARIABILITY OF
CELLS AND THAT OF ORGANISMS.
Gary N. Calkins, DEGENERATION IN PARAMCECIUM AND SO-
CALLED REJUVENESCENCE WITHOUT CONJUGATION.
Henry E. Crampton, Natura SELECTION IN SAMIA CECROPIA.
SUMMARY OF PAPERS.
Professor Boas, in his paper, which has been printed in full
in Sczence for January 3, 1902, established the following con-
clusions: ‘‘(1) The elements of organisms are more variable
than the organisms themselves. (2) The elements of organisms
vary in correlated groups. (3) The characteristics of the varia-
bility of an organism depend upon the correlations of its con-
stituent elements, so that a knowledge of these correlations will
enable us to determine the characteristics of the variability of
the organism.’ (4) It was also pointed out that skew distribu-
tion of variations does not necessarily indicate selection, or
instability of type, but may occur in stable forms.
Dr. Calkins presented the history of two individuals, A and
B, of Paramecium caudatum, from different localities, which
were isolated February 1, 1901. These were fed on twenty-
four hour hay-infusion and the number of divisions recorded at
periods of from one to three days throughout the year, one
individual being isolated each time. Conjugation occurred for
the first time, among the extras, in May. This period was fol-
lowed, in July, by well-marked degeneration of both 4 and 4,
which went so far that nearly all of the stock was lost. The
survivors were stimulated to renewed activity by treatment with
extract of lean beef. After three months of normal and active
divisions, another period of conjugation occurred. This again
was followed by degeneration and again the cultures were saved
by treatment with beef-extract. At the present date (Jan. 13),
A is in the 416th generation and 4 in the 375th generation,
and no conjugation has taken place in the direct line of the cul-
tures. Thus far the experiments have yielded the following
results: (1) Paramacium unquestionably passes through more
RECORDS 7
or less regular cycles of activity and weakness. (2) The period
of weakness is preceded by one of greater dividing-activity. (3)
The period of weakness ends in death, provided the diet (hay-
infusion) remains the same. (4) Beef-extract, without conjuga-
tion, restores the weakened functions of growth and division.
(5) Exogamous conjugation of A and JB, if followed by the
same diet (hay-infusion), does not restore these weakened activ-
ities, but is soon followed by death. (6) Exogamous conjuga-
tion between wild gametes, and followed by hay-infusion diet,
results in normal growth, division, and life. (7) Endogamous
conjugation does not differ from exogamous conjugation. The
ex-conjugants live and divide normally if fed for a time with
beef-extract, but die if fed directly with hay-infusion. (8) One
intra-cellular effect of beef-extract upon weakened Paramecium
is the formation of ‘‘excretory granules.’’ Another is the dis-
integration of the old macronucleus. (g) A few conclusions to
be drawn are: (a) a change of diet is necessary for the contin-
uance of vital activities; (0) the equivalent of parthenogenesis
in higher animals may be induced by change in diet ; (c) conju-
gation, by itself, does not “ rejuvenate’”’; (@) conjugation prob-
ably has some other significance than that usually accepted,
though what this significance may be is not indicated, thus far,
by the experiments.
Professor Crampton presented the results of a statistical
study upon pupz of Sama cecropia. Twenty-five characters
were determined for a lot of 456 pupz, the measurements were
tabulated, and the usual constants of the curves of variation
were ascertained, viz., the range, mode, mean, standard devia-
tion, and coefficient of variability. It was found that only 349
of these pupz produced perfect moths at the time of metamor-
phosis, the others being imperfect to a greater or less degree,
and therefore presumably eliminated as far as reproduction is
concerned. When, now, the former class was compared, sex
by sex, with the whole group of pupz, it was found to be a
selected class of the less variable individuals, while the more
variable ones were eliminated. Selection is therefore “periodic”
in the sense of Pearson. The fact of primary interest appears
8 RECORDS
when this case is contrasted with that of the introduced P.
cynthia. As reported last spring, selection in the latter species
is similarly of the less variable individuals, but is ‘‘ secular’’ as
well, that is, the perfectly metamorphosing pupz form a class
by themselves, with a type which differs from that of the whole
group. It was pointed out that the real basis of selection was
probably a correlative one, a physiological “ fitness’’ depending
upon the proper coordination or correlation of the various parts
of the organism.
Henry E. Crampton,
Secretary.
SECTION OF GEOLOGY AND MINERALOGY.
JANUARY 20, 1902.
Section met at 8:15 P. M., Dr. A. A. Julien presiding. The
minutes of the last meeting of Section were read and approved.
The following program was then offered :
R. P. Whitfield, OssERVATIONS ON AND EMENDED DESCRIP-
TION OF HETEROCERAS SIMPLICOSTATUM WHITF.
R. P. Whitfield, Drescriprion or A NEw TEREDO-LIKE SHELL
FROM THE LARAMIE GROUP.
James Douglas, NoTEs oN THE Rio TINTO Copper DIsTRICT.
SUMMARY OF PAPERS.
In the first paper Professor Whitfield emended and elaborated
the description of the ammonite, eteroceras simplicostatum
which he gave originally in the Newton and Jenney Report on
the Black Hills;' the new observations being based upon ma-
terial collected in July, 1901, for the American Museum of
Natural History by Dr. E. O. Hovey. The present material
shows conclusively that the three genera, Hamutes, Ancyloceras
and Heteroceras, have no independent existence, because single
individuals possess the distinguishing characters of all three
genera combined. The fact that these genera were not inde-
1 Report on the Geology and Resources of the Black Hills of Dakota. With
atlas. By Henry Newton, E.M., and Walter P. Jenney, E.M., Washington,
1880, Paleontology by R. P. Whitfield.
RECORDS 9
pendent was suspected by the author when at work upon the
Newton material twenty-five years ago, and the compound
character of some ammonites has been stated by Professor
Alpheus Hyatt, but these seem to be the first specimens to be
described which actually show the combination in a single
individual.
Professor Whitfield’s second paper described a new Teredo-
like shell from the Laramie group of eastern Wyoming, collected
by Mr. Barnum Brown, of the American Museum. This teredo,
to which the author has given the name Xy/ophomya laramiensis,
is more than an inch in diameter, thus ranking as the largest
species of the family known.
These two papers may be found in full in the current volume
(Vol. XVI) of the Bulletin of the American Museum of Natural
History. :
The third paper of the evening was by Professor James
Douglas, and gave a description, illustrated by topographic
map and numerous lantern slides, of the famous Rio Tinto
group of the copper mines of the Huelva district in Spain.
These mines have been worked from time immemorial, the
earliest knowledge of them dating from the Phcenicians, who
occupied the country in the eleventh century, B. C. The
Romans also obtained a large amount of copper from these de-
posits, and it is an interesting fact that the slags which they left
are purer, that is, freer from copper, than those which are made
there to-day. The ore is a copper-bearing pyrite, carrying
some silica. The copper-bearing portions run irregularly
through the iron pyrites, and the Rio Tinto Company has re-
moved millions of tons of forty-two per cent. iron ore in getting
at its copper ore. The iron ore is not profitable at the present
time, although it may become so in the distant future. There
are some remains of the workings of the ancients here. At
Tharsis in particular the old shafts are very peculiarly con-
structed, one at least being spiral, to enable the miners to carry
the ore on their backs. Shelves are excavated at intervals in
the walls of the shaft to enable the men to rest their loads on
their weary journey to the surface.
10 RECORDS
The mines are worked now as open-air diggings in circular
terraces. They produce about two million tons of ore per year,
and it is estimated that there are one hundred and sixty million
tons in sight. Some silver-bearing galena is associated with the
copper ore. The old-fashioned method of roasting the ore
in heaps was kept up until 1893, but the ore is now leached by
means of water. This is a long process, requiring four years
for its thorough completion, but the copper is leached out so
that less than one fourth of one per cent. is left in the tailings.
The great bulk of the world’s supply of sulphuric acid is ob-
tained from the Rio Tinto pyrite, which is shipped all over the
world forthe purpose of manufacturing the acid. Five hundred
thousand tons per year are utilized in this way.
The paper was discussed by Dr. Julien and Mr. Howe, and
the section passed a hearty vote of thanks to Professor Douglas
for his kindness in giving the paper.
Epmunp O. Hovey,
Secretary.
SECTION ‘OF ‘ANTHROPOLOGY AND PSYGHOLOGY:
JANUARY 27, 1902.
Section met at 8:30 P. M., Professor Farrand presiding. The
minutes of the last meeting of Section were read and approved.
After opening the meeting, the chairman called on General
James Grant Wilson to preside.
The following program was then offered:
F. 8. Dellenbaugh, Ture Location or Historic Towns anp
“ Nations’ oF NEw MEXICO PRIOR TO 1630.
Harlan I. Smith, A Recentty DiscovERED EARTHWORK IN
OcEmMAw County, MICHIGAN.
John R. Swanton, MyrHoLocy AND ORIGIN OF THE HAIDA
INDIANS.
SUMMARY OF PAPERS.
Mr. F. 8. Dellenbaugh explained his understanding of the
location of the historic towns and “ nations’”’ of the Rio Grande
valley in New Mexico prior to 1630. This differs radically
RECORDS 11
and entirely from the present accepted arrangement. He main-
tains that the location of Tiguex, rather than Cibola, is the key
to the correct solution of this problem, and from strong evidence
derived from Benavides, Espejo, Castaneda and others, he
locates Tiguex near San Antonio station. The site at Ber-
nalillo, for this central town, so long advocated by Bandelier
and his followers, he declares is impossible. With Tiguex at
San Antonio station, the famous ‘“‘ Seven Cities of Cibola,’’ which
Bandelier piaced on the site of modern Zuni, are thrown instead
into southwestern New Mexico, either on the Gila near Old
Camp Vincent, or Old Fort West, or between these and the
Florida Mountains, with the balance in favor of a site on the
Gila. Cicuyé, instead of being at Pecos, was apparently a
Tompiras town, either what has been erroneously called Gran
Quivira or some village of that locality. The Braba of Coro-
nado would fall in the vicinity of the present Cochiti, instead of
at Taos, and Tusayan instead of being at the Moki towns,
would fall in its position 20 leagues (50 or 60 miles) northwest
of the position of Cibola.
Mr. Harlan I. Smith presented a paper on the ‘‘ Hauptman
Earthwork,” in Ogemaw County, Michigan. The discovery of
this earthwork was first announced by him in Sczence, June 21,
1901 (p. 991). Personal observation in July enabled him to
correct its location somewhat. It is on Section 33 or 34, or
both E22 "Ne“(nstead:ofp21), K.1, E:- It was found to lie
in a lumbered pine area, and, unlike most such earthworks, far
from any watercourse. It is covered by dense undergrowth
and fallen timber. It is composed of a rounded embankment
of earth, about two feet high and twelve feet wide, encircling an
area about 197 by 177 feet; outside this is a ditch, two feet
deep, six feet wide at the top, but narrowing towards the bottom.
Signs of another embankment were seen outside the ditch, and
within the enclosed area were several hummocks which may
prove to be mounds or similar works. There are three open-
ings in the embankment. The antiquity of the work is indicated
by the presence of large pine stumps on the embankment and
in the ditch ; the largest stump measured thirteen feet four inches
in circumference.
12 RECORDS
An effort is being made to have this ancient work enclosed in
a state, county or township park. The land, now worth per-
haps less than $10 an acre, can easily be secured. If neglected,
the road to be built on the line between sections 33 and 34 will
probably destroy the work.
Dr. John R. Swanton reported some results of his investiga-
tions into the mythology and origin of the Haida Indians of
northern British Columbia. The whole Haida people is divided
into two clans, Raven and Eagle, each of which is strictly exo-
gamic with descent in the female line, and has its own crests,
its own names, its independent traditional centers of origin.
Each is subdivided into a number of families. The Raven clan
traces its origin from a single legendary ancestress, who is re-
puted to have emerged from the waters with the Haida island.
Some families of that clan, however, trace their descent from
other sources. The Eagle clan has much less traditional unity
of origin, and there are certain indications in the tradition that
this clan is of foreign origin or at least has received considerable
admixture of foreign blood. One important fact that seems to
point to the Raven clan as the indigenous element is the great
preponderance of Ravens among the supernatural beings of the
island.
R. S. WoopwortH,
Secretary.
BUSINESS MEETING.
FEBRUARY 3, 1902.
Academy met at 8:20 P. M., President Woodward presiding.
The Secretary reported from the Council as follows :
That the Council had nominated the three following Honorary
Members, to be voted upon at the forthcoming Annual Meeting.
James Dewar, M.A., LL.D., F.R.S., Jacksonian Professor of
Experimental Philosophy, University of Cambridge, England.
William James, M.D., LL.D., Ph.D.,. Litt.D., Professor: of
Philosophy, Harvard University, Cambridge, Mass.
Wilhelm Wundt, Ph.D., M.D., Professor of Philosophy, Uni-
versity of Leipzig, Germany.
RECORDS 138
That the Council had voted to nominate no corresponding
members.
That the Council had voted to nominate the following Fel-
lows to be voted upon at the Annual Meeting:
Maurice A. Bigelow, Herman C. Bumpus, O. B. Hay, E. O.
Hovey, W. D. Matthew, S. J. Meltzer.
The Recording Secretary read the list of nominations of
Officers prepared by the Council, and announced that it would
be mailed to members of the Academy two weeks before the
Annual Meeting.
The proposed bill for amending the Charter, which is here-
with appended! was submitted by the Council, with the recom-
mendation from the Council that it be approved by the Academy,
and that if approved the Academy authorize the Charter Revision
Committee to take such steps as are necessary to have the bill
enacted into law.
It was voted to approve the bill, and to give the Charter Re-
vision Committee the authorization requested.
Adjourned.
RIcHARD E. DoncE,
Recording Secretary.
SEGLRON OF ASTRONOMY, PHYSICS, AND
CHEMISTRY.
FEBRUARY 3, 1902.
Section met at 8:40 P. M., Professor Hallock presiding.
The minutes of the last meeting of Section were read and ap-
proved.
The following program was then offered :
Mr. G. B. Pegram, ExperimMENTAL METHODS OF STUDYING
RADIO-ACTIVITY.
SUMMARY OF PAPERS.
The paper of the evening consisted of a description of the
methods which have been employed in studying radio-active
substances, and also a brief summary of the more important
results which have been obtained.
1See Appendix.
14 RECORDS
The discussion of the paper was confined chiefly to questions
regarding these methods and results.
Section adjourned.
Epics Torts:
Secretary.
SECTION, OF -BIOLGGY,
FEBRUARY I0, 1902.
Section met at 8:15 P. M., Professor Stratford presiding.
The minutes of the last meeting of Section were read and ap-
proved.
The following program was then offered :
W. B. Scott, THE OriGIN AND DEVELOPMENT OF SOUTH
AMERICAN MAMMALS.
SUMMARY OF PAPERS.
Professor Scott began by expressing his great obligation to
Dr. F. Ameghino, as also to Dr. Moreno, Director, and to the
Curators of the La Plata Museum, for their kindness in giving
him the freest use of their collections, and enabling him to
examine all the types of the Santa Cruz mammals.
The fauna of every continent is made up of two elements,
the indigenous forms which were developed in that continent,
and the immigrants from other regions. In South America this
distinction is easy to draw, because of the remarkable series of
Tertiary deposits which are wonderfully rich in well-preserved
fossils. The Santa Cruz beds, which are referable to the lower
Miocene, contain an assemblage of mammals altogether different
from those of the northern hemisphere. The fauna consists of
Primates and Insectivora, very scantily represented, very nu-
merous Rodents (though all referable to the Hystricomorphs),
Marsupials, Edentates, and the peculiar South American hoofed
animals. The Edentates of this period represent the Gravi-
grada, Glyptodonts, and Armadillos, but no members of the
true sloths or Anteaters have yet been found, a lack of which is
probably due to climatic conditions. The Gravigrada, which
are very abundant, have forerunners of all the great Pleistocene
groups, but are, of course, much less specialized and are rel-
RECORDS 15
atively small in size. The Glyptodonts, though numerous and
well preserved, are not so easily brought into relations with
the later genera of the same group.
The paper concluded with a brief examination of the remark-
able Ungulates, all of which are peculiar to South America and
especial attention was called to Ameghino’s discovery, yet un-
published, that in Vesodon there are three sets of functional in-
cisors and canines. Incredible as such an observation may be,
it seems to be well established.
Henry E. Crampton,
Secretary.
SECTION OF GEOLOGY AND MINERALOGY.
FEBRUARY 17, 1902.
Section met at 8:30 P. M., Dr. Alexis A. Julien presiding.
The minutes of the last meeting of Section were read and
approved.
The following program was then offered :
0. P. Hay, Tue Snout-FisHes oF Kansas.
A. A. Julien, THe Errecr or Various Kinps or Hone-
STONES ON THE CUTTING EDGE oF TOOLS.
SUMMARY OF PAPERS.
Dr. O. P. Hay presented a brief history of our knowledge of
the genus Protosphyrena and a statement showing what por-
tions of the skeleton were still unknown. The parts which are
best known are the skull, especially the elongated snout, the
jaws, the shoulder-girdle and the caudal and the pectoral fins.
These parts have seldom been found associated, and there have
been established three series of species, one on the teeth, another
on the snout and a third on the fins. It is certain that, as new
collections are made and studied, some of these new species
will be reduced to synonymy. The author pointed out several
errors on the part of writers in the interpretation of different
elements of the skeleton and illustrated his points by means of
specimens.
In his impromptu paper Dr. A. A. Julien gave a summary of
16 RECORDS
the results of some recent investigations he had made on a series
of chisels which had been sharpened on several kinds of hones.
In the course of his remarks he said that the quality of a hone
depended on the size and shape of its component particles, and
upon the cement joining the whole together. An exception
was noted in the case of the novaculites from Arkansas, in
which the honing quality is due to the sharp edges of minute
cavities left by the solution of calcite ; and in the case of Turkey-
stone, in which the honing quality is due to veinlets of quartz
intersecting a rock which has been formed by silica replacing a
granular limestone. A microscopic study shows that the edge
ot a tool is not regularly serrated, part of it being smooth and
part undulatory. Viewed on edge the sharpest tools are prac-
tically straight, while the others are more or less irregularly
wavy. Viewed in the cross-section, a fine edge is seen to be a
perfect wedge, while the duller tools show a minute shoulder.
Epmunp O. Hovey,
Secretary.
‘ ANNUAL MEETING.
FEBRUARY 24, 1902.
The Academy met for the Annual Meeting at 8:15, President
Woodward in the chair.
Reports of the officers for the past year were called for and
presented in the following order :
The Recording Secretary read a report from the Correspond-
ing Secretary to the effect that no correspondence with Honor-
ary or Corresponding Members had been conducted during the
year.
The report of the Recording Secretary, filed herewith, was
read.
The accompanying report of the Treasurer was read and re-
ferred to the Finance Committee for auditing.
The accompanying reports of the Librarian and Editor were
read.
The following nominations for Honorary Members, selected
by the Council according to the By-Laws, were read, and the
RECORDS 17
Secretary was empowered to cast an affirmative ballot of the
Academy therefor, which was done.
James Dewar, M.A., LL.D., F.R.S., Jacksonian Professor of
Experimental Philosophy, University of Cambridge, England,
21 Albemarle St., London, England.
William) james; M.D:, LIL: Ph.D: Litt.D., Professor of
Philosophy, Harvard University, Cambridge, Mass.
Wilhelm Wundt, Ph.D., M.D., Professor of Psychology,
Leipzig, Germany.
The following list of Fellows, nominated by the Council ac-
cording to the By-Laws, was read, and the Secretary was em-
powered to cast the affirmative ballot of the Academy therefor,
which was done.
Maurice A. Bigelow.
Hermon C. Bumpus.
Orr. Hay:
EO. Elovey:
W. D. Matthew.
5: ). Meltzer:
The President then appointed Professors Charles Lane Poor
and J. K. Rees as tellers; ballots were distributed, votes re-
ceived and counted, and the following list of officers elected :
President : J. McKeen Cattell.
First Vice-President: Nathaniel L. Britton.
Second Vice-President: Richard E. Dodge.
Corresponding Secretary : Bashford Dean.
Recording Secretary : Henry E. Crampton.
Wreasurer: Charles FE. Cox:
Librarian: Livingston Farrand.
Councillors : Franz Boas, Hermon C. Bumpus, D. W. Hering,
Frederic S. Lee, Charles Lane Poor, L. M. Underwood.
Curators: larson G, Wyar, Alexis A. julien, George F.
Konz, Wouis EH. Laudy, E. G...Love.
Finance Committee: John H. Caswell, John H. Hinton, C.
EX Ost:
Three nominations for resident membership were read and
referred to the Council according to the By-Laws.
18 RECORDS
The President and Recording Secretary elect then took the
Chair, and President Woodward delivered his Annual Address,
entitled ‘‘ Measurement and Calculation.”
At the close of the address a vote of thanks to the retiring
President was moved by ex-President Osborn, and carried.
Adjourned.
RIcHARD E. DopGE,
Recording Secretary.
REPORT OF THE RECORDING? SECRETARY.
During the last academy year the Council and the several
sections of the Academy have held their customary meetings,
and the academy work has progressed in many ways favorably
along the usual lines.
At the meetings there have been 68 papers presented, di-
vided as follows :
Anthropology 7. Paleontology 6.
Archeology 3. Photography 1.
Astronomy 4. Physics 8.
Botany I. Physiography 4.
Geology 9. Physiology 2.
Mechanics 3 Psychology 8.
Miscellaneous 3. Zoology 9.
There are at present 298 Resident Members, 92 Fellows, and
the election of six Fellows is pending.
At the May meeting, on recommendation of the Council, Dr.
Franz von Leydig, of Wurzburg, Germany, was elected an
Honorary Member, and in October, the Executive Committee
of the Council sent a letter of congratulation to Dr. Rudolf
Virchow on the occasion of his eightieth birthday. The Academy
has lost during the year one of its leading workers, Dr. Theo-
dore Greeley White, who died in July; a suitable minute con-
cerning Dr. White is printed in the Records for the year.
Twelve members of the Academy have been dropped from the
rolls for non-payment of dues.
RECORDS 19
The leading task that the Council has had to consider for
the year has been that of modifying the Constitution and By-
Laws to suit existing conditions. It was found necessary, in
order to bring this about, to have the charter revised, and by
vote of the Academy, February 3, a committee of the Council
was authorized to have a bill presented to the Assembly and
Senate of New York to this end. Word has just come of the
passage of the bill by both members of the legislative body.
In accordance with the bill a new Constitution must be adopted
by the Academy within three months, and a committee is al-
ready at work on this problem.
The other serious matter now under discussion by the Coun-
cil is the question of the method of printing the short papers of
the Academy, which will go into effect at the beginning of the
current volume of the ANNALS.
Respectfully submitted,
RicHarD E. DopGeE,
Recording Secretary.
REPORT OF THE TREASURER.
RECEIPTS.
Balance as per last Annual Report... $4,337.20
Mortgage on 113th St. property paid off 9,000.00
mcome srermanent Fundy sy22452 4.2 $489.70
co AVUCUDOMAPMING. 5222.5. sas 47.95
eS Publication: Puneet 3s ss 4s 98.45 636.10
ite Nemibershipeiee << sti 2 2 fect, 2k. 100.00
LRTI O WERSE SUAS Aas ane 25.00
PMMA DOCS TOS 2.375 «wi cps = sue mn) e 10.00
W 11251012) See ae Siesr s 50.00
» jG (G]Ohew A Opeth e peake tho srs Or 110.00
ty TiO Es eee cee ee SOF cee 2,225.00
- HOO 2 secs niet of alah quay eens 30.00 2,425.00
20 RECORDS
DISBURSEMENTS.
Invested in Bond and Mortgage @ 5 %
On 205) 587A Ss AVenle i. oer 12,000.00
Publication of Annals...... $1,499.12
Wess Salesaacrs..). 22 t.. 8 24750.» 1,251.26
Publication of Memoirs..... 530.97
SSMS AES ty n aaeyie tl roe 23022 497.75
Rent Ol ROOMIS: 232.0% 6h See eee 325.00
Dues to Scientific Alhance cr were 50.12
ecpenses of [reasuter..\i--,. eee 20.78
¢ Juibrariati;...cat eee 191.23
os Recording Secretagy tims. 211.94
(Generalibsxpenses)..). in .fyaest ater 51.90
WSC HUES. s5.5 iss G Aes ae BP es cae Se 34.25 $14.645.23
Balance, Cash onshlandiceeecwee 1,878.07
BALANCE SHEET.
FEBRUARY 24, 1902.
Dr. Cre
Renmmanent. und. < pee oe och eee $10,551.43
uplication: Fund... 2.2.4. obese 1,823.69
Aordubon, Fund. ..\. chs. iets cette 1,897.25
Invested in Bond and Mortgage at
BIDE COME as...) octet ity ae $12,000.00
Income Account (Due Permanent
JDC) PAIRED CO coo ees So FSO 394.30
Sagivon. Eland .:....7. 5. ae 1,878.07
plane oh Vee
CHARLES F. Cox,
Treasurer.
RECORDS 21
rea PrOR OF “thir LIBRARIAN.
The work in the Library during the past year has been
directed toward clearing up the accumulations in exchanges
during the period of financial stress through which the Academy
has been passing ; and the Librarian is glad to be able to state
that through the energy of the present assistant, Mr. W. M.
Erb, all material up to date is now sorted, catalogued and filed
on the shelves and open to reference to members of the
Academy.
The great need of the Library is still, as it has been for a
number of years past, an appropriation for the binding of books.
Hundreds of volumes of periodicals have now accumulated and
while every effort is made to preserve them intact considerable
injury and loss is unavoidable. A second need is adequate
cataloguing by expert hands. The usefulness of the Library
would be much increased if this could be provided. With the
limited appropriation at present at the disposal of the Librarian
it has seemed wiser to concentrate the energy upon keeping
the accessions in order rather than to divert any portion of the
funds to the two purposes suggested. The same policy will
doubtless be pursued during the coming year.
Respectfully submitted,
LIVINGSTON FARRAND,
Librarian.
REEOR TL OF THE EDITOR,
Volume XIII of the ANNALS, Parts 2 and 3, comprising four
papers, together with the Records of the Meetings of the
Academy, from January, 1900, to December, 1900, have been
printed and distributed. This completes Volume XIII of the
Annats, which consists of seven papers, together with the
Records forming a volume of 542 pages and 16 plates.
Volume XIV of the Annats, Part 1, has also been printed
and distributed, and this Part consists of four papers of 84 pages
and 5 plates. Volume XIV, Part 2, containing the Records
of the Meetings of the Academy for the year January, I9o1,
22 RECORDS
to December, 1901, is now in press, and will be distributed to
the members within a very short time.
Volume II, Part 3, of the Memoirs, entitled “ Palzontolog-
ical Notes,” by Bashford Dean, 4to, pages 87-123 ; plates 3 to
8, has also been printed and distributed. This J/emotr was in
part paid for out of the Audubon Fund.
When the Editor was appointed, in December, 1900, the
funds of the Academy available for publication had been ex-
hausted, and the year was begun with a large deficit. During
the year the accounts have been straightened out, the deficit
met, and the year will close with practically a clean balance
sheet. Respectfully submitted,
CHARLES LANE Poor,
Editor.
PRESIDENDTS: ADDEPSS:
MEASUREMENT AND CALCULATION.
In my address of a year ago I sought, in a summary way,
and by concrete illustration, to indicate how science originates
in and advances with observation and experiment. I would now
invite your attention to a similar consideration of the role which
measurement and calculation play in the higher developments
of science.
All sciences are at first qualitative. They pass in their
growth from the fact-gathering stage of unrelated qualities to
the orderly stage of related qualities and thence upward to the
stage of quantitative correlation under theory. Such, at any
rate, has been the course of all sciences hitherto developed, and
it seems safe to predict that such will be the course of those
which may arise in the future. The recognition of this fact is
of prime importance. It helps us to understand the great rela-
tive diversity in perfection among the sciences; it affords a
basis for rational optimism with respect to the continued
progress of science ; and it ought to make the specialists of the
older sciences less contemptuous than they sometimes are in
their attitude toward the newer ones which have not yet passed
the ‘ rock-naming and bug-hunting stage.”
RECORDS 23
Whenever a quantitative relation between the factors of phe-
nomena is observed, then measurements may be made in re-
sponse to the question, What is the magnitude of the relation,
if constant, or what are the extent and law of variation of the
relation if it is not constant ? When the law of relation is known,
related quantities are subject to calculation, the measured values
of some of them sufficing, through computation, to give the
values of the others. All calculations, therefore, presuppose a
knowledge of the laws of connection of related quantities or
quantitative theories of the phenomena considered.
Measurements and calculations are of all grades of definite-
ness, ranging from the smallest probabilities of the doctrine of
chances up to the rigorous certainties of mathematical deduc-
tion. Thus the degree of precision attainable in the measured
and computed quantities of a science is commonly taken as a
gauge of its perfection. But it would be a mistake to infer
complete perfection from the precision attainable in one or
more branches of science. Astronomy, for example, is a mar-
velously perfect science in certain of its branches, but never-
theless some of its fundamental constants, notably the gravita-
tion constant and the aberration constant, are known with only
a low degree of precision." Whether any quantity may be
1The gravitation constant is the factor by which the product of two masses
divided by the square of their distance asunder must be multiplied in order to ex-
press the force exerted by those masses on one another. Thus, if m, and m,
denote two masses, s their distance asunder, / the force of attraction between them,
and & the gravitation constant, then
MMs
ie 9he
2
It should be remarked that 2 is not a mere numeral, as many eminent writers on
the law of gravitation would seem to imply, but that it is the cube of a distance
divided by the product of a mass and the square of a time ; or that its dimensions
are shown by the exponents in (Z+8J/—-17—?) if Z, M7, T denote the units of
length, mass and time respectively.
It should be remarked also that the above expression of Newton’s law of gravi-
tation lacks the precision essential for mathematical calculations, To make the
statement definite and general, 7, and , must be regarded as infinitesimals, so
that the resultant attraction between two finite bodies requires, in general, a sum-
mation, or integration, for its exact expression. A widespread error exists in the
notion that the above equation is exact if the distance s is the distance between the
24 RECORDS
measured or calculated with precision depends, in general, on
the degree of complication of its connections with other quan-
tities, and on the applicability of methods already applied in
the determination of other quantities. Frequently, a quantity
may be measured directly ; but it oftener happens, either by
reason of the inapplicability or of the disadvantage of a direct
method, that resort is had to an indirect method.
It is a remarkable fact, illustrating the essential unity which
pervades the apparent diversity of nature, that all of the numer-
ous quantities with which physical science has to deal may be
expressed in terms of a certain very limited number of arbi-
trarily chosen quantities, or units. The units most commonly
used, and those which seem best suited to the present require-
ments of science, are the units of length, mass and time. All
other quantities, however complex, may be expressed readily in
terms of these arbitrarily assumed fundamental quantities. It
is by no means certain, however, that these units will best
satisfy the requirements of science in the future. On the con-
trary, it seems rather probable that advancing knowledge will
find some other system of units preferable, if it does not find
several different though interconvertible systems essential. We
have, in fact, already attained two such diverse systems in the
units of electromagnetic science.
The study of such systems by the aid of the theory of dimen-
sions, which shows algebraically how the assumed units enter
into more complex quantities, is very instructive, not only to
the mathematical physicist, but to the general student of physical
science.' To illustrate this idea by some simple examples, it is
centers of gravity of the masses. This is true, indeed, for the class of bodies called
centrobaric, like homogeneous spheres ; but masses in general are not centrobaric,
The gravitation constant is in C.G.S. units, about 667 Io—1!?, with some un-
certainty in the last significant figure.
The aberration constant, which is (if it is nothing more than a kinematical
quantity) the ratio of the velocity of the earth in its orbit to the velocity of light
multiplied by the number of seconds in a radian, is about 20.5” with some uncer-
tainty in the next significant figure. ‘
1 Designating the units of energy, length, mass and time by 2, Z, JZ, 7 re-
spectively, the dimensions of some of the most frequently used quantities in me-
chanics are shown in the following tables. In the first of these length, mass and
RECORDS 25
well known that all quantities used in rational mechanics are
commonly expressed in terms of length, mass and time. But
these quantities might be expressed equally well, so far as alge-
braical statement is concerned, in many other ways. Thus we
might take energy as one of the fundamental quantities instead
of either length, mass or time; in which case our mechanical
TABLE I.
Quality. c 7 | Length Factor. Mass Factor, | Time Factor,
ICI GREE enter in aeaeaeaiiatebacns soda dcantie Vina DES | fi
Pecel eratlomamecsatesasecncnes osnaes soeerenee Tia M° 1
TE S)¥ tind BA Gee et an Be Ee nee Toa Se he
Wiomiemttinaweee re. rac< sea ce soncesencesn es eye on Aire ig?
ECM eeee eee de eis Se natetonabena'esctes I fae Secu 2 MEA ie
OW CU iets fea vacdunstecsccesdtes's sue aisoensoees Y ie eee Nie eS a
TaB_e II.
Quality, Energy Factor.| Mass Factor, Time Factor.
BB ICILV A ee stat. nasace see xccatatchasohes <ieses E+% M-~% Ze
(Necelerationenceseae niece aetioreecteaten: Tita M-% f=
ORC CH ere nase ere ee he ce aceemeceschenscuent Vas: Mt+% If
Moment ttiessree dascemancesescearieemracessiec Toa M+ % aD
IME ayis cane Aooatle ss cSedausedoaeondansuscmes sos Pci? nae | i fi
TRoNG Hei? snc Gn B ECP BACHCR ELLE © T OeeoDEDDoeeeee Jase M° oe
‘TAsrE DIF
Quality, | Energy Factor. | Length Factor, | Mass Factor.
| | — =
Wisloviby react haha hosp agli soem cots Pacpn dase Ets 1M Ihe ls
INccelerationuntes sees ste ccieesee cere tcsca Ei stias 2 et, ey got
IBONCEA ss ceek esac = csakevesssseceeescces sce. sae 7 ie Mo
Momentus yaeeeawetaccctanesseseneseatecrs's Bs oN | M+ y
BIRRTOR oie s oiyavnes loses wan tes saskaesoaaseess ns tee az
OEE Ea teon seen esata nce teexeascl oie Era | Yo a ic eld
quantities would be expressed in terms of energy, length and
- mass ; or ofenergy, length and time; or of energy, mass and time.
A consideration of these simple systems shows us, among other
things, that rational mechanics might have been developed along
time appear explicitly ; in the second length does not appear explicitly ; and in the
last, time does not appear explicitly. A glance at the exponents (dimensions) of
the symbols shows clearly how definite the meanings of the terms force, energy,
power, etc., may be in comparison with the utter ambiguity attaching to them in
common parlance.
26 RECORDS
lines of thought very different from the lines followed by our prede-
cessors ; and the fact that we do not visualize equally clearly all
these systems shows the experience of humanity with physical
phenomena has been extremely limited. Most curious and in-
structive are the system in which length does not appear explicitly
and the system in which time does not appear explicitly. May
we not see in these systems opportunities respectively for the
development of those individuals of our race who seem to possess
no realization of distance or no conception of time ?
Confining attention to the simpler and more familiar units of
length, mass, and time, and to a few of the more complex quan-
tities expressed thereby, let us first consider briefly the present
status of these fundamental units and the possibility of maintain-
ing their invariability. The standards of length and mass which
are now universally adopted in science are the meter and the kilo-
gram respectively, carefully intercompared copies, or “ proto-
types,’ of which have been distributed by the international
bureau of standards to the nations contributing to the cost
thereof. The United States possesses two copies of each of
these prototypes, and they are, as a matter of fact, our effective
working standards, even for the production of standard yards
and pounds. It is to be hoped, therefore, that the end of the
barbaric system of ‘“‘ weights and measures,”’ we have inherited
from an unscientific ancestry, is near at hand, and this not so
much in the interest of men of science as in the interests of those
less well fitted to struggle with the ingenious intricacies of the
British system.
These prototype meters and kilograms are known in terms of
the adopted standards, and hence in terms of one another, with
a degree of precision which verges close to the limits of the con-
stancy of matter itself. Thus the lengths of the meters are
known with an uncertainty expressed by a probable error of
only one part in five millions. This degree of refinement cor-
responds to about one hundredth of an inch in a mile, or to
about nineteen miles in the mean distance of the earth from the
sun. But this admirable precision is greatly surpassed by that
of the kilograms, whose uncertainty falls to one part in five hun-
RECORDS 27
dred millions. It is well known, of course, that the operation
of weighing by means of the balance secures a precision superior
to that of every other species of physical measurement ; but it
is not easy to visualize directly the five-hundred-millionth part
of a kilogram. One may get a tolerably definite idea of this
magnitude, however, by observing that with the degree of pre-
cision in question it would be essential in comparing two kilo-
gram masses to keep the pans of the balance closely at the same
level, for a centimeter difference in their altitudes would be ap-
preciable by reason of the variation of the attraction of the earth
with distance from its center.’
For present purposes, therefore, our standards of length and
mass leave little, if anything, to be desired. But it is a matter
of great importance to the future progress of science that these
standards be preserved for an indefinitely long period; and al-
though such a contingency seems remote enough now, one can
hardly suppress the query as to what would happen to us if our
standards should be lost, or if they should unexpectedly prove
unstable with the lapse of time. It is quite certain that our
standard of length could be recovered with a high degree of
precision if such a calamity should befall us during the next
ten thousand, or possibly during the next hundred thousand
years. Numerous bars of other metals than the alloy used in
the construction of the prototype meters are known in terms of
the latter. Many base lines scattered at widely separated points
of the earth’s surface are also known in terms of the meter with
a precision of about one part in a million; and although the
1 Denoting the mass of a kilogram by 7, and the mass of the earth by m,, the
weight of #z, by w, and the distance from the balance to earth’s center by s (since
the earth is nearly centrobaric), the Newtonian law gives
mm,
Oo Rk aale =.
52
whence the relation of a small change Aw in w to the corresponding change As in
s is expressed by
Since Azw/w is here 1/500,000,000, and since s is about 630,000,000 centimeters,
As = = 0.63 centimeter.
28 RECORDS
foundations of the earth are far from stable, we can hardly ex-
pect such lines to become systematically shorter or longer in so
brief a terrestrial interval as a million years. Better still, prob-
ably, is the check on the invariability of the meter afforded by
Professor Michelson’s measurement of it in terms of the wave-
lengths of particular rays emitted by the metal cadmium.’ In
this, apparently, we have a cosmic standard, although it remains
to be proved that the wave-lengths used will remain invariable
in the unexplored parts of the universe into which we are
journeying along with the solar system at the rate of some
kilometers per second.
Our standard of mass is likewise connected directly with
various masses which may serve as checks on its stability, and
indirectly with the masses of definite volumes of many substances.
It is especially well known in terms of the mass of a cubic deci-
meter of water at a standard temperature. It is less definitely
known in terms of the atomic masses of the so-called elements,
and it is roughly known in terms of the enormous though slowly
varying mass of the earth.? But, on the whole, our standard
1See Tome XI, Zravaux et Mémoires du Bureau International des Poids. et
Mesures, Paris, 1895. It is remarkable that the ratios of the three wave-lengths
used to the meter were measured with a precision requiring seven significant figures,
the uncertainty amounting to a few units only in the last figure. Thus the values of
the wave-lengths used (designated as red, green and blue respectively) are as fol-
lows, in microns, or millionths of a meter :
0.643,847,2,
0.508,582,4,
0.479,991,1.
2Tf we could measure the gravitation constant with a precision extending to five
significant figures, the mass of the earth would at once become known to the same
degree of precision, provided only that the law of gravitation is exact to the same
number of figures, For I have shown that the product of that constant and the mean
density of the earth is known with a precision expressed by five significant figures.
Thus, calling the gravitation constant 4 and the mean density of the earth p,
kp = 36,797 X 10-1! / (second)?.
This relation may be otherwise expressed by the following theorem: Let 7 be the
periodic time of an infinitesimal satellite which would revolve about the earth close
to the equator (assuming no atmospheric resistance). Then the theorem asserts that
Apt? = 3r
where 7 is the ratio of the circumference to the diameter of a circle. The value of
ris 1 hour, 24 minutes, and 20.9seconds. See Astronomical Journal, Vol. XVIII.,
No. 16.
RECORDS 29
of mass must be regarded as less secure than our standard of
length, although the prototype kilograms are less likely to
change in mass with the lapse of time than the prototype
meters are to change in length; for while such a general varia-
tion in volume as is known to occur in metals, especially alloys,
need not affect the former, it would almost certainly affect the
latter.
Our unit of time is also known with a definiteness that meets
in most cases the highest demands of science at the present
epoch. The period of rotation of the earth, or the sidereal day,
is the standard interval of time, though it has been found con-
venient for many purposes to use the shorter interval of a mean
solar second, of which there are 86,164.1 in a sidereal day.
That the earth rotates with wonderful regularity is a fact of the
highest importance to science. Without that regularity the
development of sidereal and planetary astronomy, with all they
have entailed, would have been impossible except by the dis-
covery of some other equally trustworthy timekeeper. But the
laws of mechanics, which show us plainly why the earth rotates
with such remarkable regularity, also show us that its period
of rotation is subject to sources of disturbance, some tending to
increase and some tending to decrease that period, whose effects,
though too minute to be appreciable in such intervals as are
known to human history, must certainly become considerable
in the course of terrestrial history. Thus, the contraction of
the earth due to secular loss of heat tends to shorten the day,
while accumulations of meteoric dust and tidal friction tend to
lengthen it.’ There exists also a graver source of disturbance
1] have discussed the effects of secular cooling and meteoric dust on the length
of the day in a paper published in the Astronomical Journal, Vol. XXI., No. 22,
July, 1901. From this paper it appears that the change in length of the day from
secular cooling cannot be perceptible during any such brief interval as that of human
history (twenty centuries, say); but that in the course of complete cooling, or in a
million million years, say, the change in length of the day may amount to as much
as six per cent. of its original length.
From the same paper it appears that accumulations of meteoric dust will only
begin to be perceptible in their effects on the length of the day when the process of
secular cooling has been substantially completed. In a subsequent number of the
Astronomical Journal (Vol. XXII., No. 11), Dr. G. Johnstone Stoney has shown
that if the compression produced by a layer of meteoric dust is taken into account
the effect will be still less than that just indicated.
30 RECORDS
in the slow rising and sinking of the crust of the earth in different
latitudes so often pointed out by geologists. Such movements
are only partly compensating in their effects on the day, and it
seems highly probable that they may cause irregularities amount-
ing to a few seconds in a century without entailing any note-
worthy fluctuations of the relative positions of the land and sea.'
It appears, then, that our time unit is the least stable of the
three fundamental units and hence the most in need of checks
on its stability. Various other standards of time have been pro-
posed, but none of them meets the requisites of permanency
and availability. The interests of astronomical science espe-
cially demand that efforts be made to find in the solar system
some better timekeeper than the earth. Possibly the fifth satel-
lite of Jupiter may serve as a control on the constancy of rota-
tion of the earth.
Turning now to a consideration of the more complex quanti-
ties which are expressed in terms of length, mass and time, we
enter the boundless fields of physical science in which measure-
ment and calculation have revealed to us all ranges of magnitudes
from the vanishingly small to the indefinitely large. It is in
these fields that we learn something definite concerning the
limitations of our senses; for while measurements alone carry
us but a little way along lines of research, calculation discloses
not only the unseen, but also, in many cases, phenomena which
are quite beyond the reach of any direct sense perception.”
To begin with quantities near the lower limit of determination,
think, for a moment, what is going on in the air which for the
present is the main medium of communication between us. No
one has ever seen the particles of the atmosphere in the sense
that we have all seen the particles, or corpuscles, of the blood.
But we probably know more about the molecules of gases than
1 See ‘‘ Mathematical and Physical Papers of Lord Kelvin,’’ Vol. III, pp. 333-
335, Cambridge University Press, London, 18go.
2The reader may be referred to a very instructive paper by Dr. G. Johnstone
Stoney, entitled ‘‘ Survey of that Part of the Range of Nature’s Operations which
Man is Competent to Study.’’ Sviestifie Proceedings of the Royal Dublin Society,
Vol. IX, No. 13; Phrlosophical Magazine, Fifth Series, No. 294, November, 1899;
published also in Report of Smithsonian Institution for 1899.
RECORDS dL
we do about blood corpuscles. By actual count it is known
that there are four to six millions of the latter in a cubic milli-
meter; and with equal definiteness calculation shows us that
there are about a million million million molecules in a cubic
millimeter of the air around us. Notwithstanding this appar-
ently crowded assemblage, the individual molecules move about
in the liveliest manner, their average speed being about five hun-
dred meters per second, and this in spite of the fact that the
average length of an unimpeded journey is barely visible by the
aid of the best microscopes. Each molecule must therefore
collide with its neighbors astonishingly often, the encounters
occurring, in fact, about five thousand million times per second."
More surprising still than the properties of assemblages of
molecules forming gases are the properties of the individual
molecules, especially when they are made up of two or more
atoms. Such miniature systems, comparable, probably, in com-
plexity with the Martian and Jovian subsystems of the solar
system, exhibit degrees of constancy which rival the invariable-
ness of the fixed stars themselves. This is particularly the
case with their rates of vibration as disclosed by the spectro-
scope. These rates afford one of the most delicate tests of the
properties of matter, whether it is found on the earth or on the
most distant star; and yet the vibrations, which recur with a
regularity equal to, if not surpassing, the regularity of the rota-
tion of the earth, are executed at the rate of some hundreds of
millions of millions per second.” Herein, perhaps, we may find
a cosmic unit of time as well as a cosmic unit of distance,
though both appear to be inconveniently small for terrestrial
purposes.
But the smaller bodies of the universe do not end with mole-
1 See, for example, ‘‘ The Kinetic Theory of Gases,’’ by Dr. Oskar Emil Meyer,
translated by Robert E. Baynes, Longmans, Green & Co., New York, 1899.
2 The number of vibrations per second corresponding to any given wave-length
of light may be easily computed, For the velocity of light is about 300,000 kilo-
meters, or 3 >< 10! microns per second, and this divided by the wave-length in
question gives the number of vibrations per second. ‘Thus the average wave-length
of the cadmium rays used by Professor Michelson (cited above) is about half a mi-
cron. The material sources'of. these rays must vibrate, therefore, about six hun-
dred million million times per second.
32 RECORDS
cules and atoms of gases. Recent investigations point to the
conclusion that there is another order of bodies of much smaller
dimensions and possessing still more wonderful properties.
These have been called corpuscles.' Their density is only
about one thousandth as great as that of the lightest gas, hydro-
gen; they are freely given off by several of the so-called radio-
active substances; and they move about with speeds of the
same order as the velocity of light. It appears not improbable
that they play a most important role in cosmic as well as in ter-
restrial physics, and the amount of attention being given to
them justifies the hope that their study may illuminate many
obscure corners in the realm of molecular science.
Passing per saltum from the smallest measurable and calcu-
lable quantities to those with which we have an every-day fa-
miliarity, I would direct your attention to the great number of
articles of commerce which are now weighed, measured and
rated with precision and sold at a cost which, a half century ago,
would have been thought quite impossible. Standard yards,
meters, pounds and kilograms, and pocket time-pieces that will
run within a few seconds per day, are available at prices within
the reach of all who need them. Screws and screw gauges
which will easily measure a hundredth of a millimeter (or four
ten-thousandths of an inch) are articles of trade; beautifully
true spheres of steel or bronze may be had fora few cents each ;
helical springs of the finest steel and of remarkable uniformity
are sold for a dollar a dozen; while articles like wire, tubing,
sheet metal, and an indefinite variety of tools and machinery are
made with a degree of perfection and at a cheapness of cost
which would have been regarded as quite unattainable by the
1 See a paper by Professor J. J. Thomson, ‘‘ On Bodies Smaller Than Atoms,”’
Popular Science Monthly, August, 1901.
See also a paper by Professor John Cox on ‘‘ Comets’ Tails, the Corona and the
Aurora Borealis,’ Popular Science Monthly, January, 1902.
A fact of great interest in connection with the ‘‘ corpuscles ’’ considered in these
two papers is the repulsion of light impinging on bodies, the amount of which has
been actually measured recently by several observers. This repulsion between the
sun and the earth is very great, amounting to about a hundred million million dynes ;
but the gravitational attraction between these bodies is about forty million million
times as great as that repulsion.
?
RECORDS 33
founders, for example, of the New York Academy of Sciences.
The ready availability of, and the constant demand for, all these
products to meet the daily needs of the complex civilization of
our time affords a sufficient answer to him who would question
the efforts spent in attaining those products or the efforts applied
in subjecting new objects of study to the rigorous tests of meas-
urement and calculation.
But the principles of measurement and calculation are not
limited in their application to external objects, or to the proper-
ties of what we are sometimes pleased to call ‘‘ gross matter.”’
They apply equally aptly in many ways to man himself, and it
is clear that with advancing civilization we may confidently ex-
pect such application to be greatly extended. While we have
not yet attained formulas which will comprehend the vagaries of
the individual, we have many formulas which will accurately ex-
press the resultant of those vagaries as manifested in racial types.
A life insurance company, forexample, may not assert at the be-
ginning of a year that any individual of ten thousand men of the
same class will die within the year, but it may assert with prac-
tical certainty that a definite number of this class will die within
the year. Such “ facts and figures”’ are trite enough, of course,
but what we commonly fail to see and appreciate is the solid
basis on which they rest, and how greatly it would be to our
advantage to extend the same sort of reasoning that has built
up great systems of fire and life insurance into other departments
of human affairs. Most people, I fear we must infer, are like
Thomas Carlyle, still scoffers at statistics, and few, even of the
educated, have any adequate conception of the order which the
principles of probability will bring out of the apparent disorder
of statistical data.
Of the larger objects of the universe to which measurement
and calculation have been applied with success, the earth easily
surpasses all others in interest and importance. So great has
been this success that one may assert that we know more of the
earth than we do of any other body to which science has given
attention. Its size, its shape, the amount and arrangement of
its mass, its magnetic properties, its speeds of rotation and trans-
34 RECORDS
lation, its precession and nutation, and the lately discovered
wabbling of its axis of rotation are all known with a definite-
ness which is truly surprising when one considers its magnitude
and the degree of complexity of those properties. That the
eight thousand miles in its diameter should be known within a
few hundred feet, that the two hundred millions of square miles
in its surface should be known within a few hundred square
miles, or that the acceleration of gravity at any point on its sur-
face should be known within a few millimeters per second per
second, are results little short of marvelous when one reflects
that they have all been attained within the brief interval of two
hundred and fifty years. It would be quite wrong, however, to
consider these achievements of geodesy as marvelous from the
point of view of science. They are, rather, just such results
as persistent scientific investigation has always produced, and
such as we may safely predict will be uniformly produced by
persistent scientific investigation in the future. The element of
the marvelous comes in only when one takes account of the
fact that these grand results were attained by a very small num-
ber of men, mostly members of academies, struggling, like our
own, to maintain an existence, in whose work the general pub-
lic took little interest, and whose names, even now, are much
less known than the names of the obscure philosophers and the
obscene poets of antiquity.
Geodesy is undoubtedly the most advanced of the sciences in
which measurement and calculation have attained a high order
of certainty. It has made modern commerce possible, and it
seems destined to play a still more important role than it has
hitherto in the advancement of terrestrial affairs. It has also
made modern astronomy possible, for the certainty of its data
enables us to measure not only the dimensions of the solar sys-
tem, but also the approximate dimensions of the visible universe.
Not less important to the progress of science and to the gen-
eral advance in human enlightenment are the achievements of
the allied science of geology. It cannot boast, as yet, like
geodesy, of a high degree of precision in measurement and calcu-
lation, for it deals, in general, with phenomena which have not
RECORDS 390
yet been reduced to simple laws. But, on the other hand, its
subject-matter is more obvious and tangible, and it appeals
therefore more forcibly and continuously to the average mind.
No science seems comparable with geology in the completeness
with which its history and its main processes are contained in
the subjects and objects of investigation. Whoso would read
the story of the earth’s crust will find it written and illustrated
in infinite detail in the rocks themselves. No vivid or perfervid
imagination of the historian has concealed the facts or misin-
terpreted their sequence ; they are all recorded with a truthful-
ness that shames the straightest human testimony and with a
permanency which permits comparison and verification in end-
less repetition.
Geology illustrates more clearly, perhaps, than any other
science the value of measurement and calculation when the
order only of the quantity sought can be attained. The deter-
mination of the fact, for example, that nothing short of a million
years is a suitable time unit for measuring the age of the earth,
was an achievement whose importance can hardly be overesti-
mated ; indeed, our race may yet require decades, if not cen-
turies, to appreciate its full significance, for in spite of the great
advances in our times it appears probable that not one in a
thousand of the good people with whom we live realizes how
profoundly definite acceptance of such a fact must modify
thought.
A criticism which the devotees of the so-called humanistic
learning often apply to such matters of fact, and which is still
occasionally accepted by men of science, helps us to see the
absolute need of countless recurrences to the evidence so well
exhibited in the crust of the earth. ‘Ah!’ says the humanist,
“‘T observe that the physicists and the geologists do not agree
on the age of the earth. Some say it is ten million years,
others that it cannot be more than two hundred million years,
and others that it cannot be less than a thousand million years.
I conclude, therefore, that so long as your doctors disagree in
this manner, we may continue to accept the age recorded in our
sacred books.” ‘Thus easy is it to mistake the order of a quan-
tity for the quantity itself.
36 RECORDS
When we pass from terrestrial limitations to celestial phe-
nomena the field for measurement and calculation is immensely
enlarged, though the results attainable are less easy of ready
appreciation. The Jovian, the Saturnian and the Martian sub-
systems, which have been pretty thoroughly explored by the
observer and the computer, present to us the type, apparently,
not only of the solar system, but of the galaxy of systems
within telescopic view. And the surveys of the heavens now in
progress indicate likewise that isolated stars are the exception
rather than the rule, and that the visible stars are generally at-
tended by one or more satellites, which are probably oftener
dark than bright bodies. Visual and photographic measure-
ments have, in fact, united in recent years in the demonstration
that the number of material bodies: in the universe is enormously
greater than we have hitherto imagined. Here again, however,
as in the case of the geological phenomena just referred to, we
must be content to a great extent for the present with a knowl-
edge of the order of the quantities measured and calculated.
But to be able to state what is the order of the distances which
separate the fixed stars from one another, the order of the
volume of the visible universe, the order of the quantity of mass
in that volume, and the order of the time unit requisite for the
expression of the historical succession of celestial events, seems
little short of a stupendous contribution to knowledge when one
reflects on the obstacles, material and intellectual, that have
stood in the way of its attainment.
The distances asunder of the stars are so great that the hun-
dred and ninety odd millions of miles in the diameter of the
earth’s orbit about the sun make an inconveniently small base
line for the measurement of the least of those distances and a
hopelessly inadequate one for the measurement of the greatest
of them. It would appear more fitting, in fact, to express such
distances indirectly in the number of years it takes light moving
at the rate of 300,000 kilometers per second to traverse them.
Assuming with Lord Kelvin that the visible universe is com-
prised within a sphere whose radius is equal to the distance of
a star whose parallax is one thousandth of a second, this dis-
vy)
~I
RECORDS
tance would require light about three thousand years to pass
over it, while the average distance asunder of the visible stars
is considerably less, but still of the same order. Lord Kelvin
has shown also in a profound mathematico-physical investiga-
tion recently published’ how we may assign limits to the amount
of mass in the visible universe. It appears from this investiga-
tion that there are something like a thousand million masses of
the magnitude of our sun within that universe. The figures
for this amount of mass have little meaning to most of us when
expressed in ordinary units. The mass of the earth, for exam-
ple, with its 6,000 x 10" metric tons,” is a mere trifle, for the
sun has about 327,000 times as much mass as the earth. The
mass of the sun therefore is the obviously convenient unit in
this case ; and we have only to imagine our solar system sur-
rounded by a thousand million such suns, each in all probability
attended by a group of planets, to get a sufficiently clear idea
of the quantity of mass within visual range of our relatively
insignificant terrestrial abode. And the time scale for the
varied events which take place in the interaction of these mil-
lions of suns is not less imposing when expressed in familiar
terms. A million years is the smallest unit suitable for esti-
mating the history of a star, although the record of that his-
tory is transmitted to us through the interstellar medium by
vibrations whose period is so brief as almost to escape detection.
Measurements and calculations have thus made known to us
a range of phenomena which is limited only by our sense per-
ceptions, sharpened and supplemented by the refinements of
mathematical analysis. In space and mass relations these phe-
nomena exhibit all gradations from the indefinitely small to the
indefinitely large; and in time they point backward to no epoch
which may be called a beginning and forward to no epoch
which may be called an end. Dealing chiefly with those as-
pects of phenomena which possess permanence and continuity,
1«On Ether and Gravitational Matter through Infinite Space,’? PAz/osophical
Magazine, August, 1901. ‘‘On the Clustering of Gravitational Matter in any Part
of the Universe,’’ ature, Vol. 64, No. 1669.
2The metric ton of 1,000 kilograms, or 2,205 pounds, is about the same as our
**long ton’’ of 2,240 pounds.
38 RECORDS
or at least a permanence and a continuity compared with which
all human affairs appear ephemeral and fleeting, measurement
and calculation tend to raise man above the level of his environ-
ment. They bid him look forward as well as backward, and
they assure him that in a larger study of the universe lies
boundless opportunity for his improvement.
But while that sort of knowledge which has been reduced
to quantitative expression has done more, probably, than all
else to disclose man’s place in and his relations to the rest of
the universe, it would appear that mankind makes relatively
little use of this knowledge and that we are not yet ready, as a
race, to replace the indefinite by the definite even wherein such
substitution is clearly practicable. It is a curious and a puz-
zling, though perfectly obvious, fact that mankind as a whole
lives less in the thought of the present than in the thought of
the past, and that as a race we have far more respect for the
myths of antiquity than we have for the certainties of exact
science. Our ships, for example, are navigated with great suc-
cess by aid of the sextant, the chronometer, and the nautical
almanac; but what company would dare set Friday as the day
for beginning the transatlantic voyage of a passenger steamer ?
From time immemorial tradition has dominated reason in the
masses of men. Each age has lived, not in the full possession
of the best thought available to it, but, rather, under the sway
of the thought of some preceding age. We are assured even
now, by some eminent minds, that the highest sources of light
for us are nearly all found in the distant past; and a few go so
far as to assert that modern science is merely furbishing up the
half-lost learning of ages long gone by.
The work of academies and other scientific organizations is
therefore nowhere near completion. Great strides toward intel-
lectual emancipation have been made during recent times, but
they have served only to enlarge the field for, and to increase
the need of, that sort of knowledge which is permanent and
verifiable. Measurement and calculation have furnished an
invaluable fund of such knowledge during the two centuries
just past, and we have every reason to anticipate that they will
RECORDS 39
furnish a still more valuable contribution to such knowledge in
the centuries to come. R. S. Woopwarb.
PUBLIC EE CIURE:
On February 26, a public lecture was presented under the
auspices of the Section of Biology, by Professor Bashford Dean,
of Columbia University, entitled “‘ Journeyings of a Naturalist
through Japan and the Philippines.”
Professor Dean referred to the zoological relations of the
Japanese archipelago with the adjacent continent on the one
hand, and with the island series on the other; z. ¢., first, the
Aleutian, second, through the Bonin Islands with the region of
New Guinea, and third, through the Liu Chiu Islands with
Formosa and the Philippines. The importance of the Line of
Blakiston separating the Hokkaido from the southern islands
was emphasized.
Special attention was called to the favorable facilities for
zoological work which are offered in the region of Misaki, near
the mouth of the Bay of Yokyo, and to the work of the Marine
Laboratory of the Imperial University in this region. Dr.
Dean had an opportunity of examining the centers of animal
artificialization, an art in which the Japanese have been so emi-
nently successful. Especially praiseworthy is the method of
oyster-culture practiced in the Inland Sea near Hiroshima ;
hardly less interesting were the establishments in which varie-
ties of gold fish are propagated, and even more striking were
those for the cultivation of the breed of Tosa fowls, in favor-
able specimens of which the tail features attain the great length
of fifteen feet. Success in the maintenance of this breed ap-
pears to be due to the selection of those fowls in which moult-
ing occurs irregularly, and the effort is made to suppress en-
tirely the moult in that region of the fowl where long feathers
are to be produced. In referring toa journey in the Philip-
pines, Professor Dean described many interesting experiences,
particularly, those at Maujuyod, where living specimens of
Nautilus were obtained. Henry E. CRAMPTON,
Secretary.
40 RECORDS
SECTION. OF ANTHROPOLOGY AND PSY CHOLOGN#
FEBRUARY 28, 1902.
Section met at 8:30 P. M., R. S. Woodworth presiding.
The minutes of the last meeting of Section were read and
approved.
The following program was then offered :
J. H. Bair, QuANTITATIVE RELATIONS BETWEEN MoToR AND
SENSORY ASSOCIATIONS.
J.B. Miner, InvoLunrary MuscuLar RESPONSES TO RHYTHMIC
STIMULI.
Clark Wissler, THE ErGoGrRAPH : COMPARATIVE RESULTS
WITH SPRINGS AND WEIGHTS.
SUMMARY OF PAPERS.
Mr. J. H. Bair reported on some quantitative studies in sen-
sory and motor association. His experiments have been carried
out by aid of a typewriter, the subject reacting to different stimuli
by striking different keys. Curves were presented showing the
rate of formation of association. If, after the stimuli have been
presented many timesin the same order, the order is then
changed, the association is interferred with, and the more so the
firmer it has become. If the typewriter keys are interchanged,
so that the reaction to each stimulus must be changed, this inter-
feres still more with the association. These results showed,
then, that the association of definite sense impressions with defi-
nite motor reactions was more persistent than the association of
sense impressions with other sense impressions following in
serial order, or than the association of movements with other
movements following in serial order.
In the discussion of this paper, several other facts were men-
tioned, showing the importance of motor reactions in the for-
mation of association. Professor Thorndike had observed that
good visualizers, who are able to picture mentally a page of
printed matter that they have read, yet cannot read off the
pictured words ; apparently because the visual images are not
associated with motor responses.
RECORDS 4]
Mr. J. B. Miner spoke on “ Involuntary Muscular Responses
to Rhythmic Stimuli.” He described some experiments con-
ducted by himself at Columbia and Minnesota universities, in
which tracings were obtained for non-voluntary hand and head
movements when the subjects listened to a series of uniform
sounds. It has been noted by Thaddeus L. Bolton and others
in their investigation of rhythm that such a series of sounds ap-
pears not uniform, but as if coming in groups of two or more
sounds. The muscle responses obtained correspond with this
perception of rhythm, one wave coinciding with each rhythmic
group. The movements recorded strikingly agree with another
phenomenon of rhythm in that a motor wave shows for each
stimulus when the sounds came slowly (forty per minute), but
when the rapidity of the sounds was increased the wave encom-
passed two, three and even four sounds. This agrees with the
introspective observation that the subjective group includes
more units as the sounds come more rapidly. On the basis of
the data of muscular responses Mr. Miner believes that an ad-
equate physiological explanation of rhythm may be formulated,
while organic rhythms alone would not furnish a completely
correlated activity.
Dr. Clark Wissler reported some ergograph experiments
showing that the contracting muscle presents a power series
which is constant, whether the resistance is applied by a spring
or bya weight. While this power series is weakened by fatigue,
the resistance value of any point in the muscle series is the same
for a weight or for a spring. In other words, there appears no
difference between the fatigue produced by weights and springs
when estimated in terms of the muscle series.
R. S. WoopworTH,
Secretary.
BUSINESS MEETING.
MARCH. 3,::1902.
Academy met at 8:25 P. M., Professor Hallock presiding.
The minutes of the last business meeting were read and
approved.
492 RECORDS
The following candidates for resident membership, approved
by the Council, were duly elected :
Frederic Peterson, M.D., 4 West 5oth street.
Adolf Meyer, M.D., Pathological Institute.
George I. Finlay, Columbia University.
S. Alfred Mitchell, Ph.D., Columbia University.
Adjourned.
Henry E. CRAMPTON,
Recording Secretary.
SECTION—OF ASTRONOMY, PHYSICS AND
CHEMISTRY.
MARCH 3, 1902.
Section met at 8:30 P. M., Professor Hallock presiding.
The minutes of the last meeting of Section were read and
approved.
The following program was then offered :
C. C. Trowbridge, THE Puysicat NATURE OF PERSISTENT
METEOR TRAINS.
S. A. Mitchell, OsservaTIONS ON THE FLASH SPECTRUM AT
THE SUMATRA ECLIPSE.
SUMMARY OF PAPERS.
Mr. Trowbridge gave a list of forty meteor trains which had
remained visible to the naked eye for from two minutes to over
one hour, all of them seen by reliable observers. Several
tables were exhibited, giving the size, shape and color of re-
cently observed meteor trains.
Mr. Trowbridge gave his views as to the most probable com-
position of meteor trains, and presented several hypotheses
which might account for their long-continued luminosity. These
are the following: (1) Incandescence of the particles of the
train; (2) phosphorescence of the train; (3) clectrical dis-
charges; (4) Reflection of the light from the sun, moon, or
stars, by the particles of the train; (5) electrons striking the
meteoric dust or the air particles in or about the train, causing
RECORDS 43
a fluorescent glow similar to that in a Crookes tube. The
source of the electrons may be either the highly-heated meteor
—in which case the long-continued luminosity of the train
must be accounted for by a retardation of the fluorescence pos-
sibly due to the low temperature — or the electrons may come
from the sun —in which case the explanation would be sim-
ilar to that lately given by Arrhenius for the light of the au-
rora. The author stated that this last hypothesis has not, to
his knowledge, been previously advanced. The balance of evi-
dence seemed to show that the luminosity of the persistent
trains must be primarily caused by energy of an electrical
nature. The subject is one of practical importance owing to
its bearings on meteorology.
The paper by Dr. Mitchell gave the results of observations
on the flash spectrum, made by him at Sawah Loanto, Sumatra,
during the eclipse of May 18, 1901. Through the courtesy of
the Astronomical Director of the Naval Observatory, Dr.
Mitchell became a member of the expedition sent out by the
government to observe this eclipse. The spectroscope em-
ployed was a Rowland objective plane grating of 15,000 lines,
used in connection with a ccelostat. The weather experienced
at Sawah Loanto was like that at almost every other astronom-
ical station in Sumatra, cloudy during totality. Through the
clouds, nevertheless, a spectrum of the flash at the third con-
tact was obtained, which showed 374 bright lines between /
and H. Investigations into the reasons for the differences in
intensities in the flash and the Fraunhofer spectrum, showed
that the intensities depended upon the heights to which the re-
versing layers of the different metallic elements around the sun,
extend. It was found possible to arrange the elements in three
groups according to their atomic weights.
Comparisons were made with Norman Lockyer’s list of “en-
hanced”’ lines, or those stronger in the spark than in the arc,
to confirm, if possible, Lockyer’s idea that the “enhanced”
lines play an important role in the chromosphere spectrum.
Fifty-seven per cent. of the ‘“‘enhanced”’ lines of titanium were
found in the flash, but at the same time all of these lines cor-
44 RECORDS
respond without exception to strong lines in the sun. On the
other hand, so many cases were found where a strong ‘ en-
hanced ”’ line was not marked in the sun by a strong Fraunhofer
line, nor by any line in the flash spectrum, that Lockyer’s
opinion does not seem to be supported.
Ei Roms
Secretary.
SECTION *OF BIOEOGX:
MARCH 10, 1902.
Section met at 8:20 P. M., Professor Bashford Dean presiding.
The minutes of the last meeting of Section were read and
approved.
The following program was then offered :
Henry F. Osborn, THE Four PuyLa oF TITANOTHERES.
Bashford Dean, THe Earty DEVELOPMENT OF SHARKS FROM
A COMPARATIVE STANDPOINT.
Maurice A. Bigelow, THr CyroLoGicAL PHENOMENA OF
MATURATION AND FIRST CLEAVAGE IN THE CIRRIPED EGG.
C. C. Trowbridge, THE Errecr OF THE WIND oN BirpD
MIGRATION.
SUMMARY OF PAPERS.
Professor Osborn presented some results recently obtained
for the U. S. Geological Survey Monograph. The lower Oli-
gocene Titanotheres prove to belong to four distinct phyla, to
which the prior generic names 7itanotherium, Symborodon,
Megacerops and Brontotherium may be applied. The chief dis-
tinctions are found to be in the dolichocephalic or brachycephalic
form of the skull, in the shape, length, position and mechanical
relations of the horns, and in the number and form of the incisor
and canine teeth. Each genus obviously had distinctive modes
of fighting, locomotion and feeding. Titanotherium extends
from the base to the summit of the Lower Oligocene. It is
distinguished by its long narrow skull, short horns, powerful
canines, vestigial incisors. /egacerops, on the contrary, is
broad-skulled, short-horned, with obtuse canines, and with at
least one upper incisor. Symborodon is distinguished by the
RECORDS 45.
narrowing of the anterior portion of the premaxillaries, reduc-
tion of all the anterior teeth, and by elongate horns placed im-
mediately over the eyes. In Brontotherium, the horns are by
far the largest and most powerful, and acquire an extreme an-
terior position, absorbing the free portion of the nasals; all the
upper cutting teeth persist; great buccal plates are evolved ;
and the skull measured along the base line is extremely brachy-
cephalic. The four types were illustrated by models and
diagrams.
Professor Bashford Dean considered briefly some points in
the development of sharks, and attempted to reduce the type
of the early development of the recent types to that of their
holoblastic ancestor. This form probably occurred within the
strict limits of the group Elasmobranchii — for the absence of
clasping organs in the palzozoic genera of Acanthodians and
Cladoselachids predicates external fertilization, and eggs many
in number and of small size. In the line of this comparison,
reference was made to the early development of the Japanese
‘“pavement-toothed”’ shark, Cestracion japonicus, in which, as
the author showed in a recent number of the “ Annotationes
Zoologice,”’ surface furrows are present traversing the yolk,
and are best interpretable as reminiscent of holoblastic cleavage.
In the peculiar type of early development in Chimera, total
cleavage is suppressed until about the time of gastrulation,
when cleavage furrows appear in the region of the lower pole
and come to divide the egg into a number of distinct blasto-
meres, only one mass of which, however, become enclosed in
the yolk-sac of the embryo. The remaining blastomeres, by a
process of continued division, provide nutriment for the embryo,
via gills and gut. Dr. Dean announced the presence in
Chimera of a true archenteric invagination, occurring early and
at some distance from the margin of the blastoderm. It is
small in size, and has a distinct cellular floor. Its (anterior)
dorsal wall was compared to the dorsal lip of the archenteron
of sharks, as described by Rickert and others. The ventral
wall of the archenteron of modern types of sharks has thus
lost its cellular character during the process by which the em-
46 RECORDS
bryo acquired a more perfect and specialized (canogenetic)
mode of obtaining nourishment from the yolk.
The paper by Dr. Bigelow dealt chiefly with protoplasmic
movements and associated displacements of the yolk-materials —
in various cirripede eggs during maturation and first cleavage.
The telolecithal distribution of the egg-substances, the forma-
tion and disappearance of a yolk-lobe, and precleavage move-
ments associated with differential distribution of the entoblastic
materials were described. Finally, a turning of the first cleav-
age spindle from a transverse to an oblique axis of the ellipsoidal
egg was compared with similar more extensive movements in
nematode eggs.
Mr. ©. C. Trowbridge presented the results of systematic
observations on the effect of the wind on the migration of hawks
and many other birds along the Atlantic coast. The principal
points of the paper were illustrated by means of diagrams giving
the directions taken by the migrating birds under the influence
of different winds. It was shown that a knowledge of meteor-
ology was necessary in considering this subject, because the
effective winds depend on storm centers travelling eastward.
In one case, in the height of the southward migration, a storm
center off the coast of Maine caused northerly winds through-
out 800,000 square miles in the eastern portion of the United
States and Canada, the velocity of the wind area averaging 20
miles per hour. A former paper on the subject was briefly re-
viewed, in which the author showed that flights of hawks and
other land birds during the migrations were due to the crowd-
ing of the birds in a narrow coast-line path by the wind. The
recent observations, now, warrant the conclusion that hawks
and many other birds regularly depend on a favorable wind as
a help in their migratory movements, and as a rule, migrate
only when favorable winds occur. A brief account was given
also of a retrograde movement of migrating swallows in the
spring, evidently due to a return flight of the birds after they
had been blown far out of their course by a strong wind from
the west.
An election of sectional officers being held, Professor Bash-
RECORDS 47
ford Dean was elected Chairman, and Professor H. E. Crampton
Secretary for the coming academy year.
Henry E. CRAMPTON,
Secretary.
SECTION OF GEOLOGY. AND MINERALOGY:
MarcH 17, 1902.
Section met at 8:20 P. M., Dr. A. A. Julien presiding.
The minutes of the last meeting of Section were read and
approved.
This being the annual meeting of the Section, the first busi-
ness of the evening was the election of officers for the ensuing
year. Professor R. E. Dodge nominated Prof. J. J. Stevenson
for chairman and Dr. E. O. Hovey for secretary. On motion
of George F. Kunz, W. H. J. Sieberg was directed by unani-
mous vote of the Section to cast one affirmative ballot for the
nominees. He did so and they were declared elected.
The following program was then offered :
George F. Kunz, Exuisirion oF SPECIMENS.
THE CENTENARY OF JOHN PLAYFAIR’S DEFENSE OF JAMES
Hurton’s THEORY OF THE FORMATION OF RIVER VALLEYS:
MEMORIALS BY PROFESSORS STEVENSON, KEMP AND DODGE.
Richard E. Dodge, An INTERESTING LANDSLIDE IN THE
Cuaco Canon, NEw Mexico. Illustrated with lantern slides.
Richard E. Dodge, Arroyo Formation. Illustrated with
lantern slides.
Gilbert van Ingen, THe AusaBLeE CuHasm, NEW York.
Illustrated with lantern slides.
George F. Kunz gave an exhibition of specimens illustrating
the finding of epidote, grossularite garnet and twinned crystals
of quartz of the Japanese type, associated with chalcopyrite,
malachite and other ores of copper in a contact vein in limestone
in the Green Monster Mining Co.’s mine near Solzer, Prince of
Wales’ Island, Alaska.
RECORDS
MEMORIALS OF HuTTON AND PLAYFAIR.
Prof. Stevenson after speaking of the conditions prevailing in
in British geology prior to the publication of Hutton’s memoir
in 1785, gave briefly the characteristic features of Hutton’s doc-
trines, and accounted for the ease with which his work could be
misunderstood and misinterpreted. He described the conflict
to which the memoir led, and emphasized the bitterness of those
who opposed the doctrines on theological grounds. The pre-
paration of Playfair’s work was due as much to a desire to
defend Hutton as to support his theory. Playfair appealed to
those opponents whose knowledge of the theory had been
derived chiefly from attacks made upon it. For them he
showed that the theory was beautiful, symmetrical and in no
sense inconsistent with the Scriptures. In dealing with the
other class of opponents, led by Kirwan and DeLuc, he used
vigorous language, exposing their ignorance and insincerity, and
denouncing the virulence with which they had given a theologi-
cal turn to the controversy. In defending Hutton’s theory,
Playfair brought his own great resources to bear, now correct-
ing errors, now elaborating the doctrine, and in some places
hardly anticipating some of the great works of later days.
The inviting style gained many readers for Playfair’s book,
among them Greenough and his associates, who founded the
Geological Society of London, that theory might be replaced
by observation. Hutton’s theory obtained final triumph in
1830, when Lyell published his “ Principles.” Playfair’s work
hastened the birth of geology as now understood by a full
quarter of a century, and finally divorced our science from
cosmogeny.
Professor Kemp’s memorial was more in the nature of a re-
view of Hutton’s personal history. He said in part: James
Hutton was born in 1726, and, after his school and university
course, entered a lawyer’s office to prepare for the bar. He
disliked the law, however, and gave up the study after a year.
Being greatly interested in chemistry, he took up the study
of medicine, attending lectures at Edinburgh and Paris and tak-
ing his degree at Leyden in 1749. The career of a physician
RECORDS 49
did not attract him much, after all his preparation, and in 1752
he went to Norfolk to learn agriculture. There his mind first
turned definitely to mineralogy and geology. In 1754 he set-
tled on his ancestral estates in Berwickshire, where he remained
fourteen years, with occasional visits to Edinburgh and more
distant parts of the kingdom. In 1768 he gave up country
life and removed to Edinburgh to devote himself entirely to the
study of geology and kindred sciences. His untiring industry
enabled him to accomplish a marvelous amount of work in
chemistry and finally to elaborate his essays in geology, revo-
lutionizing that science and, with the elucidation given his work
by Playfair’s “Illustrations of the Huttonian Theory of the
Earth,” raising it to the high plane which it has occupied ever
since. Modern geology dates from the publication in the spring
_ of 1802 of John Playfair’s explanation, elaboration and defense
of Hutton’s theories.
Professor Dodge, in his memorial of Playfair, said in brief :
To James Hutton we owe many fundamental truths now rec-
ognized in physiography, and to John Playfair we owe the eluci-
dation of these ideas, and their amplification.
The doctrine that rivers are the cause of their valleys, and
the proof thereof is perhaps the most important foundational
idea that we owe to the combined labor of these two geological
worthies. Playfair’s clear exposition of the possible origin o1
river terraces, his acute description of the relation of lakes to
rivers, his analysis of the varied forms of shore-lines, and his
emphasis of the importance of initial shore-lines, all clearly ex-
ploited in his illustrations, deserve to take rank with the much
quoted passage on rivers and their valleys, as being accepted
geographical truths far in advance of their time.
SUMMARY OF PAPERS.
Richard E. Dodge, An INTERESTING LANDSLIDE IN THE
Cuaco Canon, New MExico.
On a high mesa to the southeast of the Chaco Cajon, and
about four miles below Putnam, New Mexico, is a series of
stone monuments about five feet high and four feet in diameter.
50 RECORDS
These monuments stand on the edge of the rim rock of an old
escarpment nearly 300 feet high. The rim rock of the escarp-
ment is a coarse brown sandstone capped by about two feet of
thin-bedded dark-brown sandstone containing shark’s teeth.
The face of the escarpment has recently slipped along a series
of joints running approximately parallel to face of escarpment,
and in a general direction of S. 30° E. The recesses between
slipped blocks can be sounded to a depth of over fifty feet, and
are wider at base than top as a rule.
In the slipping an ancient rock “ hogan’”’ 20 feet in diameter
has slid 2.5 feet vertically and 8.3 horizontally without displac-
ing the rock walls to any serious extent.
Richard E. Dodge, Arroyo FORMATION.
An arroyo is a steep-sided, narrow gulch cut in a previously
filled gravel and adobe valley in the arid West.
The study of process of formation of arroyos, some of which
have been under observation for several years, seems to show
that the work has changed from aggradation to degradation
because of some influence that has caused the focusing of the
running water. Such a concentration of water is made possible
by overfeeding of the land, which removes the help of roots in
holding soil particles, combined with the habit of cattle to move
in processions along trails that make natural channels for
water.
The study of the rate of valley filling or erosion is difficult,
because of the tendency of arroyos cut in adobe to maintain
nearly vertical walls, and because a fallen block of adobe may
be sealed over in the next flood, so that it looks in place. This
problem is of especial importance, because the adobe deposits
in some places contain relics of human occupation to a depth
of many feet. The exact or even the approximate antiquity of
the deposits cannot be definitely determined, because of the
several ways in which the order of events in such a case may
be interpreted.
Gilbert van Ingen, THE AusABLE CHASM.
This paper was a description of the geological and physical
features of this celebrated locality, which incorporated the results
RECORDS 51
of the author’s own observations with those which had been
arrived at and published by others.
EpmunpD O. Hovey,
Secretary.
SECON OF ANTHROPOLOGY AND PSYCHOLOGY:
MARCH 24, 1902.
Section met at 8.30 P. M., Livingston Farrand presiding.
The minutes of the last meeting of Section were read and
approved.
The name of one candidate for resident membership was read
and referred to the Council according to the By-Laws.
The following program was then offered :
Clark Wissler, THE Growru or Boys.
W.S. Kahnweiler, A Trip rHrouGH FRENCH INDO-CHINA
TO THE ANGKOR WaT.
On motion of Professor Boas, the Section reélected Living-
ston Farrand as Chairman and R. S. Woodworth as Secretary.
Dr. Clark Wissler reported on the growth of boys. The
annual physical measurements of some three hundred school
boys were correlated to discover tendencies and directions of
growth. It appeared from the data that growth was rather
uniform, as for example, when a boy’s legs were growing rap-
idly, his arms were also growing at a corresponding rate. By
correlating the stature with its increment for the following year
it was seen that the sign of correlation changes when the puber-
tial maximum of growth is crossed. This means that boys
who are growing rapidly at twelve, for example, continue to
grow rapidly until fourteen or fifteen, when they slow down,
while those growing slowly before this period now grow rap-
idly. Thus it appears that the point of pubertial maximum
rate of growth, as determined by mass measurements, is really
the point dividing the boys who mature early from those who
mature late. The relation is yet more in evidence when the
annual increments are correlated without regarding the abso-
lute measurements. The results as a whole seem to show that
52 RECORDS’
the rate of growth in any particular year is of no special sig-
nificance except as an index of the relative maturity of the
individuals concerned.
Mr. W. 8. Kahnweiler reported on a trip that he made last
summer through French Indo-China to the Angkor Wat. His
paper was illustrated with lantern views of the trip, and of the
architecture and sculpture of the ancient temple. The history
of the temple was briefly outlined. R. S. Woopworts,
Secretary.
BUSINESS MEETING.
APRIE. 7, 1902:
The Academy met at 8.15 P. M., President Cattell presiding.
The minutes of the last business meeting were read and
approved.
The President stated that the Academy was coéperating with
the American Institute of Electrical Engineers, Columbia Uni-
versity, and other scientific societies, in tendering a reception
to Lord and Lady Kelvin on the evening of April 21; and
that the members of the Academy would receive due notice
with regard to tickets, etc.
The Committee on Constitution reported the document filed
herewith,' which was read by the Recording Secretary. It was
stated that a special meeting of the Academy, to take action
upon this Constitution, would be called for some evening of the
week of April 21st.
The Academy then adjourned. Henry E. Crampton,
Recording Secretary.
SECTION OF - ASTRONOMY; PHYSICS AND
CHEMISTRY.
APRIL 7, 1902.
Section met at 8:30 P. M., Charles Lane Poor presiding.
The minutes of the last meeting of Section were read and ap-
proved.
1See Appendix.
RECORDS 53
The following program was then offered :
Percival Lowell, MopERN Mars.
SUMMARY OF PAPERS.
Map making began with Beer and Madler in 1840. Since
then many charts have been constructed of the planet. Some
of them are so old as to have been more or less forgotten,
some are so new as not yet to be known. Collection and com-
parison of such of these maps as have marked advances in the
subject lead to some not uninteresting conclusions. Such are
presented in the accompanying series.
The series consists of twelve maps :
PGCE ANCE Wadler: sigs. . tse. Spey sous 1840
CISC CM h gore rat ia zie se she) wn eieoh setoesla Bhs 1864
Fe DAWESEDNG EROCLOM sates o.4 Sinldce Wie ota este 1867
Ae Resume my hlamimarions <2 2\s-\.0.8 4) « 1876
Fra SIG Mia MING acs acts is:e ‘stave niece greees ® apenas 1877
OM DMA MALG LITE LP eters oq 6:4. 20c a es aysraue seis, Ao 1879
Vira SIGMA IAMCMU ye fa, 4s, ae sh aCe \n ayaa e she ads 1882
SPP CUTE PAG SNA oy crha ieee csler tote wage ao wher aha lang 1884
Game OIe ine se Aa acre aisles e E8il OS suare a sai ele 1894
Motu Were Wer sence shoes occ, a7 Wn aia ols thasahd sharers 1897
TRE SMRUE MMe Lees sd. eto lek a eon. 8h 6) 3 ab loos ope at al ne 1899
MARE OW CI ets cr abst Pesels a sls lee) wf sav av os wafers. one 19OI
These maps fall naturally into three groups, dividing the his-
tory of areography into as many stages.
I. Those from 1840-1877.
II. Those from 1877-1892.
III. Those from 1892-1902.
The maps of the first group are characterized by large
patches of light and dark areas. Maps 1-4 show these patches,
and by their agreement prove that the patches are permanent
in place. For the maps are the work of different observers
made at different epochs of time.
The maps of the second group are distinguished by a net-
work of fine, straight lines covering the bright areas of the
54 RECORDS
disk, the ‘canals’? of Mars. This was the work of Schiapa-
relli.
The maps of the third group are differentiated by a similar
system of ‘‘canals’’ in the dark regions. This is the work since
Schiaparelli. It has resulted in a complete change in the belief
as to the character of these ‘‘seas”’ ; the permanency of the
lines showing that the background must be land not water.
Inspection of the series results in three directions :
That the whole series are in fundamental agreement. The
basic features appear directly throughout the first period, and as
a groundwork upon which subsequently discovered detail is im-
printed in the second and third.
The second deduction from these data is that the almost in-
conceivable regularity in the ‘‘canals’’ was an evolution in per-
ception forced upon Schiaparelli by the objects themselves ; not
a feature imputed by him to them. His first map in 1877
showed them as arms or inlets of the sea penetrating the con-
tinents to great distances, but not characterized by remark-
able regularity of form. His second map in 1879, shows
them narrower, straighter, and in every way more peculiar. His
third map, in 1882, presents them as of geometric precision ; as
he himself remarks, as if laid down by rule and compass. His
fourth map shows that they afterward kept such a character.
Had this precision been of his devising, they should not have
gained in it as time went on and as his eye grew versed in de-
cipherment. That they did so, implies that the recognition was
forced upon him from without.
The third deduction is that the evolution in detail marks the
series, and can be traced steadily on from the beginning to the
end. The additions made in each period find themselves super-
posed upon the work of the period before. Similarly each map
of any given period adds to its predecessor and is corroborated
and extended by its successor. Thus a chain of evidence is
made by them whose strength depends upon this very inter-
twining of results.
S. A. MITCHELL,
Secretary.
RECORDS 55D
SECTION: OF - BIOLOGY.
Section met at 8:15 P. M., Professor Bashford Dean presiding.
The minutes of the last meeting were read and approved.
The following program was offered :
J. H. McGregor, THE ANCESTRY OF THE ICHTHYOSAURIA.
A. G. Mayer, Cotor PATTERNS IN LEPIDOPTERA.
C. C. Trowbridge, THE Function oF INTERLOCKED EMARGI-
NATE PRIMARIES IN SOARING FLIGHT.
SUMMARY OF PAPERS.
Dr. McGregor accepted Baur’s view that the Ichthyosauria
are derived from Permian Rhynchocephalia, but stated that in
a study of the Belodontia he had found new evidence as to the
nature of the intermediate forms. The latter group is of un-
doubted Rhynchocephalian origin, and may almost be con-
sidered as a subdivision including forms modified for aquatic life.
A comparison of Belodonts and Ichthyosaurs shows that both
have evolved in the same direction, though modification has
proceeded further in the Ichthyosaurs, which were marine in
habit. Almost all of the skeletal features of the two orders are
reducible to a common type, and, although not directly ances-
tral, the Belodonts must be considered as standing very near
the line of descent of the Ichthyosaurs ; the two orders prob-
ably had as a common ancestor some aquatic Rhynchocephalian
of the upper Permian or lower Trias. The Ichthyosauria are
thus brought into relation with the Archosaurian branch of the
Reptilia.
Dr. Mayer presented the results of his study of the color
patterns of 1,173 species of lepidoptera: 453 Papilio, 30 Orni-
thoptera, 643 Hesperide, and 47 Castiva. Counting sexual
differences, 1,340 individual insects were examined ; 542 Papilio,
59 Ornithoptera, 688 Hesperide, and 51 Castiua. The num-
ber of rows of spots, bands, or combination markings upon the
wings were counted, and as well the number of spots in each
individual row, and the number of interspaces over which each
56 RECORDS
band extended; the results show that each row of spots or
bands exhibits a decided tendency to be of uniform color
throughout, that rows very rarely break at or near the middle
of their extent, and that the end spots of a row are more variable
than those spots near the center. ‘‘ Frequency polygons”’ were
obtained from the above-mentioned data, for the rows of mark-
ings, for the number of spots in each row, and for the extent of
bands measured in interspaces. Eight such frequency polygons
were determined for the spots and bands on the upper and
lower surfaces of the wings in the group of Papilio Ornithoptera.
Of the four representing the conditions in the fore-wing, three
exhibit two well-marked maxima, the numbers being arranged
in descending series on either side of each. These maxima are
three and nine spots, or bands extending over three or nine
interspaces. If, now, Papilio be divided into the three sub-
genera Papilio s. str., Cosmodesmus, and Pharmacophagus, and
be still further separated into the African, Indo-Australian,
Europ-Siberian, and American forms, it is found that the insects
of the subgroups still display the tendency to have three or
nine spots, or bands extending over three or nine interspaces.
This is not a matter of correlation, for only 32 of the 453 species
of Papilio display doth three and nine spots upon their fore-
wings. It is somewhat difficult to explain this condition upon
the hypothesis of natural selection, owing to the fact that
Papilios of widely separated regions show the same tendency to
produce these two maxima in the same manner. The Hes-
peridze and Castiva show no such tendency, hence it is not uni-
versal for Lepidoptera. If it be due to natural selection acting
upon /apilios and restricting them to this condition, such selec-
tion must be universally operative in the case of Papilio, but not
in the other species. It is easier, therefore, to assume a race
tendency in Papzlo to produce either three or nine spots upon
the fore-wing, or bands extending over three or nine interspaces.
Other results, quantitatively expressed, were brought out by the
author.
Mr. Trowbridge gave the result of observations on flying
birds for the purpose of showing that the emarginate primaries
RECORDS 57
of hawks, eagles and certain other birds are interlocked in
flight. The speaker referred to his original paper on the subject
in which the theory was set forth, which was presented by the
late Professor W. P. Trowbridge before the National Academy
of Sciences and the New York Academy of Sciences. The
paper created some discussion in Science at the time, partici-
pated in by Dr. Elliot Coues, Professor Newberry, Professor
Trowbridge and others. Mr. Trowbridge showed by a number
of diagrams and photographs that the primary feathers of a
number of birds are emarginate near their ends, and that the
webs of the feathers are so shaped that when they are over-
lapped, a curved and rigid aéroplane is formed at the end of the
wing, which, he considered, is of considerable advantage in
swift sailing flight. The emarginations of the primaries of
hawks and eagles are particularly pronounced, and permit firm
interlocking. A table of observations was given, showing that
the interlocking of the primaries does take place, the data hav-
ing been obtained at New Haven during the autumn flights of
hawks along the Connecticut coast. It appears that in the case
of one species of hawk examined, ten wings out of forty had
all five primaries interlocked, and that the number of wings
having 60 per cent. of the primaries interlocked was twenty-
nine, or 72 per cent. of the total number, forty. It was concluded
that emarginate primaries of hawks and other birds are inter-
locked in flight on the following grounds: (1) It has been found
that the webs of such feathers of hawks that had just been
killed usually show deep notches where they have rested against
one another, which notches could only result from habitual
interlocking of the primaries; and (2) in every case of over
twenty-five hawks killed while flying and examined immediately
after they fall some primaries were interlocked (several slightly
wounded birds not included). In the case of nineteen perfect
specimens on one species, 67.9 per cent. of all emarginate pri-
maries (190) were found to be interlocked. While it is not pos-
sible at present to show when the emarginate primaries are
interlocked in flight the indications are, however, that this occurs
when the wing is partly flexed, as in the case of hawks sailing
58 RECORDS
rapidly through the woods and flying in a strong wind. The
important functions of interlocking appear to be: (1) To make
more rigid the outer portion of the wing, that part of the aéro-
plane formed by the primaries, and (2) to produce a curve of
the wing which enables the bird to have a better control of its
swift flight through the air than the unlocked condition would
permit. The end of the bird’s wing when the primaries are in-
terlocked becomes shaped somewhat like the blade of a pro-
peller screw. The interlocking also would keep the primaries
extended without muscular exertion on the part of the bird.
Considerable discussion was aroused by Mr. Trowbridge’s
paper. Dr. Jonathan Dwight, Jr., presented a series of argu-
ments against the theory of the speaker, to the effect, in brief,
that in the absence of a proper controlling musculature, any
such interlocking as that described could be brought about only
by accident ; that habitual interlocking would bring about, fur-
thermore, conspicuous wearing of the vane in the areas of con-
tact, a phenomenon not observed in emarginate primaries ; and
that he concluded from his extensive studies upon feathers and
feather structure, that habitual interlocking did not take place.
Mr. Frank Chapman, with a series of fine lantern slides of
birds in actual flight, demonstrated that in some soaring birds,
at least, which possess emarginate primaries these feathers are
certainly spread and not interlocked. Mr. Chapman agreed
with Dr. Dwight that the facts tend to support Allen’s theory
of the origin of emargination, namely that aérial friction wears
down the web; and that no such function is to be attributed to
emarginate primaries such as that ascribed by Mr. Trowbridge.
Prolonged discussion followed, participated in by Mr. Trow-
bridge, Dr. Dwight, Mr. Chapman, Professor Dean, Professor
Crampton and others. Henry E. Crampton,
Secretary.
SPECIAL» BUSINESS? MEETING:
APRIL 24, 1GO2.
The Academy was called to order at 8:15 P. M., by President
Cattell. Professor Richard E. Dodge was elected Recording
Secretary, pro tem.
RECORDS 59
The President stated the object of the meeting, and that a
notice had been sent by the Recording Secretary to all resident
members and fellows entitled to vote, in accordance with the
requirements of Section 5 of the amended charter.
The proposed constitution, filed herewith,’ was then read by
the Recording Secretary, pro tem., and on motion of Professor
R. S. Woodward, seconded by Professor Francis E. Lloyd was
unanimously adopted.
The academy then adjourned.
RICHARD E. DODGE,
Recording Secretary, pro tem.
SECTION OF GEOLOGY AND MINERALOGY.
APRIL 24, 1902.
Section met at 8:30 P. M., Professor J. J. Stevenson presid-
ing. The minutes of the last meeting of Section were read and
approved.
The following program was then offered :
Lea McI. Luquer, ON THE DETERMINATION OF THE RELA-
TIVE REFRACTIVE INDICES OF MINERALS IN ROCK SECTIONS BY
THE BECKE METHOD.
Austin F. Rogers, THE MINERALS OF THE JopLiIN, Mo.,
LEAD AND Zinc DISTRICT.
SUMMARY OF PAPERS.
Lea McI. Luquer stated that in most schemes for the optical
determination of minerals in rock sections, the birefringence and
resulting interference colors are made the basis of the scheme of
classification. It is also desirable, however, to bring into con-
sideration an approximate knowledge of the indices of refrac-
tion, and where the relative differences in the indices of two ad-
joining minerals is required, the method devised by Becke is
found to be very convenient. This method depends upon the
principle of the total reflection of light, and with proper adjust-
ment of the microscope, which is to be focused sharply on the
1 See Appendix.
60 RECORDS
dividing plane between the two minerals, it is possible, by
slightly raising the objective, to observe a “ bright line”’ on the
side of the mineral having the higher index of refraction.
The main precautions to be observed are, that the cone ot
incident light be small, the sections very thin, the cementing
material not much lower in refractive index than either of the
minerals to be determined, and the plane of contact nearly ver-
tical and clear. When the contact plane is much inclined, the
method cannot be applied.
By this method very slight differences in refraction can be dis-
tinguished ; as for example, between quartz sections cut parallel
and at right angles to the optic axis; in which the difference
= 0.009, = 1.553, = 1.544.
Dr. Luquer’s paper has been published in the School of Mines
Quarterly for January, 1902, pp. 127-133.
Austin F. Rogers stated that the minerals of the Joplin Dis-
trict include sulphur, galena, sphalerite, covellite, greenockite,
wurtzite, chalcopyrite, pyrite, marcasite, quartz, cuprite, pyrolu-
site, limonite, calcite, dolmite, smithsonite, cerussite, aurichalcite,
hydrozincite, malachite, azurite, calamine, muscovite, chryso-
colla, allophane, pyromorphite, barite, anglesite, leadhillite, cale-
donite, linarite, gypsum, goslarite, chalcanthite, melanterite,
copiapite and bitumen, all of which have been found by the
writer.
Lamellar twinning has been observed in galena, the twinning
planes being vicinal tetragonal trisoctahedra. Covellite is found
replacing sphalerite. Wurtzite occurs in distinct hemimorphic
crystals — the first instance of the kind to be reported. Twin
crystals of marcasite are common, among them cyclic fivelings.
Quartz crystals are rare and small. Calcite presents an in-
teresting field for crystallographic study, about twenty-four
types, with a total of twenty-nine crystal forms, having been
noted. Twinning according to all of the four laws for calcite
have been observed. Some distinct crystals of aurichalcite con-
firm D’Archiardi’s observations that the mineral is monoclinic
RECORDS 61
and that the axial angle is not 90°. Calamine occurs in doubly
terminated crystals which show their hemimorphic character
plainly. Seamon’s theory as to the formation of calamine from
“tallow-clay’’ is not in all cases applicable. The rare copper-
lead basic sulphates, caledonite and linarite occur at one mine at
Galena, Kansas. This mine also furnishes covellite, cuprite and
aurichalcite.
The observed paragenesis generally follows this order : dolo-
mite, galena, sphalerite, chalcopyrite, marcasite, pyrite, barite,
calcite. The total absence of certain silicates and the rarity and
small size of the quartz crystals strongly precludes the theory
that the lead and zinc ores have been brought up from great
depths by hot water.
Attention was called to the coincidence in the location of the
ore deposits of this and neighboring districts and the border
areas of the Ozark uplift, as pointed out by Haworth.'
A fuller discussion of the minerals noted in this paper and
their occurrence will be found in the forthcoming Lead and
Zinc Report of the University Geological Survey of Kansas.
Section adjourned at 9:40.
EpmunD O. Hovey,
Secretary.
SeChON-OF ANTEROPOLOGY AND PSYCHOLOGY.
APRIL. 28, TOOL.
Section met at 8:25 P. M., Livingston Farrand presiding.
The minutes of the last meeting of Section were read and
approved.
The following program was then offered :
Robert MacDougall, Two ExperIMENTS IN COLOR VISION.
J. BE. Lough, Memory or ScHooL CHILDREN.
J. McKeen Cattell, Inrensiry or LiGHT AND THE ERROR OF
PERCEPTION.
E. L. Thorndike, Sex DIFFERENCES WITH RESPECT TO VARI-
ABILITY.
1 Bull. Geol. Soc. Amer., II: 231, 1900.
62 RECORDS
W. Bogoras, ETHNOLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS IN NORTHEAST-
ERN SIBERIA.
SUMMARY OF PAPERS.
The paper by Professor Robert MacDougall, in his absence,
was read by title. He found (1) that the subjective intensity
and saturation of a given constant objective color increases with
the retinal area illuminated by it. This increase is most marked
in case of green, least marked in case of red. A similar phe-
nomenon appears in the grays. The apparent difference in
brightness between a patch of gray and a light or a dark back-
ground is increased by enlarging the patch. (2) A given area
of illumination ‘produces a stronger subjective effect when this
area is divided and distributed over the retina than when it is
compact. This is perhaps because the area of irradiation is
increased by distributing the area of illumination.
Professor J. BE. Lough reported some experiments on the
memory of school children. He had tested 682 school girls,
ranging in age from g to 15. The method employed was the
same as that used by Lobsien in a similar investigation of the
school children at Kiel. A list of ten words was read to the
pupils, who then wrote down as much of the list as they could
remember. This was repeated with new classes of words until
eight lists had been given. These experiments show: (1) That
memory improves but slightly between the ages g and 15, being
62 per cent. at 9 and 64 per cent. at 13 and 15. This is in
sharp contrast with the results obtained by Lobsien — 38 per
cent. at 9, and 75 percent. at 13. (2) That the amount remem-
bered depends upon the class of words composing the list —
names of colors having an average of 87 per cent., names of
concrete things 75 per cent., words connected with tactile ex-
periences 70 per cent., emotions 68 per cent., sounds 58 per
cent., abstract words 50 per cent., numbers 45 per cent. (3)
That the usual retardation at 12 with accelerations at 13 is shown
in each class of words, with the exception of emotions, where
there is a marked retardation at 13, with acceleration at 14.
(4) That in each of the lower grades of school (4A—5B) the
RECORDS 63
brighter pupils have the better memory, while in each of the
higher grades (6A—7B) the duller pupils have the better memory.
In discussing this paper, it was remarked by Professor Thorn-
dike that grammar school girls of 14 to 15 do not fairly represent
all girls of that age, since the brighter individuals are apt to leave
the grammar school before reaching 14 years.
Professor Cattell, in a paper on the “ Intensity of Light and
the Error of Perception,” described experiments in which 211
shades of gray between white and black were sorted out into
the order of brightness. The steps were smaller than can be
perceived, and there was consequently an error of displace-
ment, measuring the just observable difference. For the more
accurate observers the error was six cards or about 0.03 of the
range between white and black. Observers differ within the
extremes of about 1:2. The just observable difference in-
creases with the magnitude of the stimulus, but not in direct
proportion as required by Weber’s law. The increase is more
nearly in proportion to the square root of the magnitude, which
the speaker has found to hold in other cases and has elsewhere
attempted to explain.
Professor E. L. Thorndike presented results bearing on the
question of “Sex Differences with Respect to Variability.” A
large number of psychological tests of school children has
afforded him the opportunity of comparing the variability of
boys and girls, as classes, and, on the whole, there is practically
no difference between them.
Dr. W. Bogoras reported some results of his recent obser-
vations, undertaken for the Jesup North Pacific Expedition, in
northeastern Siberia, among the Chuckchi, Koryak and Kam-
chadal peoples. These he found to resemble each other strongly
in the structure of their languages and in their folklore. What
is especially interesting is the striking similarity, almost iden-
tity, between some of their traditions and some of those cur-
rent among the North American Eskimos and the Indians of
British Columbia. It is not, however, the Asiatics living nearest
to Bering Strait, but more southerly tribes, that show most evi-
dence of kinship with the Indians. R. S. WoopwortTH,
Secretary.
64 RECORDS
BUSINESS MEETING.
May 5, 1902.
The Academy met at 8.15 P. M., President Cattell presiding.
The minutes of the last regular business meeting, and of the
special business meeting of April 24, were read and approved.
The Secretary reported from the Council as follows: That
arrangements had been made with the authorities of the Amer-
ican Museum of Natural History whereby the Academy would
meet in rooms of the Museum during the coming year ; that
the Committee on the Constitution was considering necessary
modifications of the by-laws, and would report at the meeting
in October; and that the Committee on the Budget for 1902
had presented the report, filed herewith, which had been adopted
by the Council.
The following candidate for membership, approved by the
Council, was duly elected:
Miss Ida H. Ogilvie, New York City.
The Academy then adjourned.
Henry E. CRAMPTON,
Recording Secretary.
REPORT OF THE COMMITTEE. ON THE BUDGE,
To THE CouncIL, NEw YorK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES:
Gentlemen — Your Committee, appointed for the purpose of
formulating the Budget for the Academy “year,” March 1 to
December 31, 1902, presents the following estimates. The
income for the above period is estimated at $3,000.00.
Rent, Chemist’s Club (March 1 to May 30)....... $ 125.00
IBecpenses, CCOLGING SSCL nie urs cele te enemas crete le 300.00
cf AES ASLATN cs ale yo felt ey pk ten eee teeth oa Eee 300.00
oY A EASUITEN. soc, shee aushend miee lees wees acai 45.00
Dues Serentihic Alliance vs ws, ncoudols cece tie eee ae 40.00
General VE RBeNSES He wip oo acs apie ual os 100.00
RECORDS 65
2 GULRON bs Boss eee Cae ee ORE EEERRI Oey OMT Pace oe 1,000.00
Masao 2s see aR eres pe Ue Sets) 3h $1,910.00
SSUONUIS.. fies i cham none ee me teats ithe es a's $1,090.00
Respectfully submitted,
J. McKeen CaTTELL,
CHARLES LANE Poor,
Henry E. CRAMPTON.
SECTION OF ASTRONOMY, PHYSICS AND
CHEMISTRY.
May 5, 1902.
Section met at 8:30 P. M., Charles Lane Poor presiding,
The minutes of the last meeting of Section were read and ap-
proved.
The following program was then offered :
R. W. Wood, AnomMatous DISPERSION AND ITS BEARING ON
ASTROPHYSICAL PROBLEMS.
W.S. Day, An ExpERIMENT RELATING TO THE APPLICATION
OF LAGRANGE’S EQuaTIONsS OF MOTION To ELECTRIC CURRENTS.
SUMMARY OF PAPERS.
Dr. Day’s paper was as follows :
The experiment was analogous to one mentioned by Max-
well in his ‘‘ Treatise on Electricity and Magnetism,” Section
574, Volume II. Maxwell’s experiment was made for the
purpose of discovering whether or not, in the expression for
the kinetic energy of an electric current, there was a term de-
pending on the product of the current and the velocity of the
conductor. Ina single linear circuit having only one degree
of mechanical freedom, the expression for the kinetic energy of
the system in the most general case would be of the form:
TH1/# + Kiy+ ily
in which ~ is the velocity of the mechanical coordinate, 7 is the
current, / is a quantity of the nature of a mass, Z is the self-
66 RECORDS
induction of the circuit, and XA is the coefficient of the term
consisting of products. Just what mechanical codrdinate is to
be represented by « is partly a matter of choice. Maxwell
chose one whose velocity means a motion of the wire in the
direction of its length. There is one other codrdinate which
seems to be geometrically possible, although it is not one that
is naturally suggested by the most satisfactory hypotheses now
in vogue as to the nature of an electric current. This other
coordinate is one such that its velocity means a rotation of the
wire carrying the current around its axis of figure. If x has
this meaning, then if the coefficient A is not zero, Lagrange’s
equations of motion show that if a current is suddenly started
or stopped in a wire there would be an impulsive torque acting
on the wire. The experiment was performed to look for such
an effect, if it existed. A straight piece of aluminium wire 30
cm. long and 0.25 cm. in diameter was suspended by a quartz
fiber in such a way that it was free to rotate, and by means of
mercury cups, a current could be passed through it at pleasure.
No effect of the kind considered was detected. If the value of
K expressed in C.G.S. electromagnetic units, and referred to a
centimeter of the wire, had been as great as 0.00002, it could
have been detected.
5, 7A, MircHELg
Secretary.
SECTION, OFS BIOLOGY.
NAY" 12; noo?
Section met at 8:15 P. M., Professor Dean presiding. The
minutes of the last meeting of Section were read and approved.
The following program was then offered :
Edmund B. Wilson, CeLtt-LINEAGE AND THE STUDY OF
HoMOLOGIES.
Gary N. Calkins, ArririciIAL PARTHENOGENESIS IN PARA-
MCECIUM.
Francis B. Sumner, FurtTHER EXPERIMENTAL STUDIES UPON
Fish DEVELOPMENT.
RECORDS 67
SUMMARY OF PAPERS.
Professor Wilson pointed out that in the analysis of cell-
homologies, as in genetic homologies in general, the essential
criterion is that of common ancestral descent. Cell-homologies
may be merely incidental or secondary to regional homologies
of the egg, and, owing to the plasticity of cleavage-forms, may
be more modified than other forms of homology, even becom-
‘ ing obliterated. It was proposed to denote as eguzvalent those
cells giving rise to homologous structures, irrespective of their
origin ; while those cells which are alike in ontogenetic origin
and position may, irrespective of their fate, be termed /omo-
blastic. The term homology is applicable in cleavages of like
pattern which have been derived from a common ancestral type,
and in which the corresponding cells are both homoblastic and
equivalent. When the cells, though homoblastic, wholly
change their equivalence, or when the cleavage-pattern itself
wholly changes, the original homology disappears.
Dr. Calkins presented the following results: The experi-
ments in cultivating Paramecium caudatum through long
periods seem to indicate that, after continued feeding on the
same diet, two originally different lines become so similar in
chemical composition that conjugation is practically ineffectual.
To illustrate, so-called “ wild’’ conjugations were captured, and
the ex-conjugants after separation were treated with the regular
culture medium; 84 per cent. of these continued living. In
the regular culture series (now, May 13, in the 567th and
523d generation, respectively), out of 48 exogamous ex-conju-
gants, only three continued to live, z.¢., about 6 per cent.;
while of the 32 endogamous ex-conjugants only two continued
to live, again about 6 per cent. The high percentage of fertile
wild, and the low percentage of fertile cultivated forms give
reason for the assumption that after continued treatment with
the same diet, the conjugants get no new chemical compound
by exchange of nuclei, and therefore no ‘“ rejuvenation” takes
place. Experiments with different kinds of reagents are now
in progress to ascertain, if possible, what is needed to make
such sterile conjugations fertile.
68 RECORDS
Dr. Sumner described his further experiments upon the eggs
of Exocetus, Salvelinus, Batrachus, and two species of Fundu-
lus. The methods employed were cautery and impalement with
glass needles. The results tended to prove that there is early
established in the embryo a definite region of growth, and that
the elongation of the body occurs through cell-multiplication in
this region. Additions from the germ-ring or other portions of
the blastoderm play at most a subordinate role. Destruction
of this region of growth led to cessation of embryo formation,
although the blastoderm continued to spread. On the contrary,
destruction at an early period of the entire embryonic sector of
the blastoderm was followed by the regeneration of a new
“embryonic shield.”’
Henry E. CRAMPTON,
Secretary.
SECTION OF GEOLOGY AND MINERALOGY.
May 19, 1902.
Section met at 8:15 P. M., Dr. A. A. Julien presiding.
The minutes of the last meeting of Section were read and
approved.
The following program was then offered :
George E. Ashby, Some IncLusions IN MICA AND THEIR
RELATION TO THE PERCUSSION FIGURE.
George I. Finlay, GrorocicaL OBSERVATIONS ALONG THE
NORTHERN BOUNDARY OF MONTANA.
SUMMARY OF PAPERS.
Mr. Ashby was able to show by a most interesting series
of specimens and lantern slides that definite geometrical rela-
tions exist between the percussion figures and the inclusions of
magnetite common in mica. The percussion figure often bisects
the same angle between the skeleton rays of magnetite.
Mr. Finlay dealt with the stratigraphy and petrography of
the district along the 49th parallel of latitude west from the
great plains. The sedimentary series is of Algonkian argillite,
RECORDS 69
sandstone and limestone. Intrusive and extrusive flows of dionite
and biabase were observed and a few dikes of diabase were
noted. The structure of the range at this point is simple, be-
ing that of a very gentle syncline, except for the anomalous con-
tact along the eastern face of the Rocky Mountains between the
Algonkian sediments above and the Cretaceous sandstones im-
mediately below. This condition is brought about by over-
thrust faulting along a warped plane dipping very gently to the
west. GEORGE I. FINLAY,
Secretary, pro tem.
BUSINESS MEETING.
OcTOBER 6, 1902.
The Academy met at 8:30 P. M., President Cattell presiding.
The minutes of the last business meeting were read and ap-
proved.
The Secretary reported from the Council that, in accordance
with the provisions of the new Constitution, a new set of By-
laws had been draughted by a special committee, and had been
accepted by the Council. By direction of the Council, these
By-laws were to be acted upon at the present meeting of the
Academy. The Secretary then presented the new By-laws,
which, by vote, were adopted. A copy is filed herewith."
The following candidate for active membership, approved by
the Council, was duly elected :
Alexander S. Farmer, C.E., 140 Rodney Street, Brooklyn.
The Academy then adjourned. Henry E. Crampton,
Recording Secretary.
SECTION OF; ASTRONOMY, PHYSICS AND
CHEMISTRY:
OcTOBER 6, 1902.
Section met at 8:45 P. M., Professor Hallock presiding.
The minutes of the last meeting of Section were read and ap-
proved.
1See Appendix.
70 RECORDS
The following program was then offered :
Informal Reports of the members upon work during the
summer in matters of interest to the section.
SUMMARY OF PAPERS.
George F. Kunz exhibited a section of the tusk of the ele-
phant Tip that was killed several years ago because he had be-
come so cross. The section of the tooth showed a large cavity
amounting to a couple of cubic inches —near the end of the
conical cavity at the root of the tooth. It was suggested that
possibly this cavity represented an ulceration of the tooth, and
that the bad humor of the elephant was really due to a bad
tooth. After discussion by Professor Cattell and others, it was
apparently the opinion of those best qualified to know, that this
cavity was not the result of any such ulceration, and that prob-
ably the elephant would not suffer from toothache in any case.
William Hallock made an informal report upon barometric
and boiling point observations made during the ascent of Mt.
Whitney during the month of August. He called attention to
the use of the boiling point apparatus as checking the barometer
and the necessity of taking into consideration the temperature
and humidity of the air, as well as the simple barometric pres-
sure. He also referred to certain interesting lava fields on
Whitney Creek to the southwest from Mt. Whitney.
G. B. Pegram gave an interesting account of the work done
at the magnetic observatories in this country, and especially at
the one at Cheltenham, Md., with which he was connected
during the summer vacation.
Dr. D. 8. Martin referred to the interesting minerals exhibited
at the Exposition of the South at Charleston, and showed a sam-
ple of the ash from Mt. Pelee which was brought to Charleston
on one of the incoming vessels. He will report upon this sub-
ject in the section of mineralogy later on.
Di Ss Maran,
Secretary, pro tem.
RECORDS ta:
SECTION. OF BIOLOGY.
OCTOBER 13, 1902.
The section met at 8:15 P. M., Professor Bashford Dean pre-
siding.
The minutes of the last meeting were read and approved.
The Secretary presented a letter from the Recording Secre-
tary of the Academy, calling attention to the fact that sectional
officers were to be elected at the November meeting, the officers
then chosen to take office at the first meeting in January follow-
ing. It was also stated that the election of a Chairman by the
section constituted his nomination to the Council as a candidate
for Vice-President.
The following nominating committee was appointed by the
Chair to report at the next meeting: Professors Bristol, Lee,
Lloyd, Drs. Mayer and Calkins.
The scientific program consisted of a series of reports by
members of the section upon their work during the summer.
Professor E. B. Wilson spoke of some of the results of his
successful work, carried on at first at the Beaufort, N. C. Fish
Commission Station, and later at the South Harpswell Labora-
tory in Maine. Complete embryological material of Rezz//a had
been obtained, after several years’ efforts. Important results were
also obtained by experiments upon the regeneration of the large
claw in Alpheus, the conclusions of Przibram being confirmed,
and the influence of the nervous system being determined. At
South Harpswell experimental work was carried on upon the
development of the normal eggs, of isolated blastomeres, and
of egg-fragments of the worm Cerebratulus, a form extremely
favorable for experimentation. In conclusion, the favorable
character of the fauna in general in this region was pointed
out.
Professor F. 8. Lee reported the results of investigations upon
the effect of alcohol on muscular work in Gonionema, which
agreed in essentials with his earlier work upon the effect of
alcohol on frog muscle. It was pointed out that the effect
72 RECORDS
might be due to the withdrawal of water from the muscle, or
to the action of the small number of ions present.
Dr. O. P. Hay described his summer’s work upon the fossil
fishes of the American Museum of Natural History, particular
attention having been given to the Cretaceous forms. Work was
also carried on upon the turtles.
Professor A. W. Grabau spoke of his collecting expeditions
for Silurian and Devonian fossils. _He mentioned also an inter-
esting case of non-conformity at Rondout, which he had been
able to explain. Explorations of the Palaeozoic coral reefs of
Wisconsin were also described.
Dr. G. N. Calkins referred to the investigations which had
been carried on at the Marine Biological Laboratory, under his
direction, upon the sporozoa associated with cancerous growth.
It was found that the genus Laszophre when introduced into the
body of a toad would cause the production of a tumor. Dr.
Calkins’s personal work upon Paramecium had been continued,
the action of various salts upon this form receiving particular
attention.
Dr. M. A. Bigelow reported upon his observations upon the
power of young birds to distinguish different colors, of interest in
connection with the problem of insect coloration. Much of the
summer had been utilized in the preparation of a manuscript for
a laboratory manual.
Mr. Naohide Yatsu described the results of his experiments
upon the eggs of the common starfish, which were carried on
at Woods Hole. Artificial parthenogenesis was induced by
ether, and larvz were reared up to the eighteenth day.
Mr. Raymond Osburn described the location and work of
the Vancouver Island Laboratory of the University of Minne-
sota, where he had spent the summer. His particular in-
terest concerned the invertebrata and birds of the Vancouver
region.
Professor Crampton referred to the work of the Woods Hole
Laboratory, and mentioned briefly his work at the Bayshore
Laboratory upon the development of Azd/a and of his experi-
ments upon moths.
RECORDS 73
Professor Dean reported progress upon several lines of re-
search. A paper dealing with Japanese oyster-culture had
been prepared for the government, and experiments upon in-
duced fossilization by means of calcium phosphate had been
pursued. The embryology of Chimera had received special
attention, a conclusion of particular interest being that the
breaking up of the extra-embryonic yolk is due to supernu-
merary sperm-nuclei. F
Henry E. CRAMPTON,
Secretary.
SECTION OF \GEOLOGY AND- MINERALOGY.
OcTOBER 20, 1902.
Section met at 8:15 P. M., Prof. J. J. Stevenson presiding.
The minutes of the last meeting of Section was read and ap-
proved.
Vhe following program was then offered :
William H. Hobbs, Grorocy oF THE RIVER CHANNELS
ABOUT MANHATTAN ISLAND. ;
James F. Kemp, ComMMENTS ON THE GEOLOGY OF BINGHAM
CaXNon, Uran. Illustrated with lantern slides and specimens.
Wallace G. Levison, Exnisirion oF SPECIMENS OF GNEISS
AND SERPENTINE FROM THE SOUTHERN END oF MANHATTAN
ISLAND.
Before the scientific program of the evening was taken up,
the Section proceeded to the election of officers for the year
1903, in accordance with the provisions of the new constitution
of the Academy.
James F. Kemp.was nominated for chairman, and, there
being no other nominations, the Section, by unanimous vote,
directed the Secretary to cast one affirmative ballot for the
nominee, and Professor Kemp was declared elected.
Edmund O. Hovey was nominated for Secretary, and, there
being no other nominations, the Section, by unanimous vote,
directed Professor R. E. Dodge to cast one affirmative ballot
for the nominee, and Dr. Hovey was declared elected.
74 RECORDS
SUMMARY OF PAPERS.
Wallace Goold Levison exhibited to the Section four speci-
mens of gneiss obtained from the bedrock in certain deep ex-
cavations at the southern end of Manhattan Island. One of
these was collected July 20, 1902, from a depth of fifty feet
below the surface at the corner of Broad and Exchange Streets ;
the second was collected in the excavations at 40 Exchange
Place, forty-five feet below the surface, on July 25; two
others were collected at 43-49 Exchange Place, forty-five feet
below the surface, on July 25. Mr. Levison also showed
several specimens of serpentine from boulders found in excava-
tions for the Stock Exchange building on Broad Street, be-
tween forty and sixty feet below the surface, on June 19.
In the absence of the author, the paper by Professor William
H. Hobbs was read in somewhat condensed form by the Secre-
tary of the Section. The paper was accompanied by a wealth
of detailed observations too extensive for reproduction, but a
summary of his conclusions is as follows:
In his introduction the author called attention to the unusual
opportunities now offered for studying the geology of Manhat-
tan Island through the numerous great engineering works in
progress. The waterways surrounding the island are deep
cafions, with a depth of nearly two hundred feet in the East
River and three hundred feet or more in the North River, now
partly filled with drift deposits, the amount depending upon the
velocity of the tidal currents.
In 1865 Stevens advanced the theory that the river channels
followed lines of faults (‘‘ longitudinal and transverse fractures ’’).
Newberry regarded the East River as the lowest reach of the
Housatonic River before it discharged its waters into the Hud-
son, which was then the outlet of the Lorentian series of lakes,
and he considered the Harlem River with Spuyten Duyvil
Creek a smaller tributary of the Hudson. Dana believed that
the relatively easy solution of certain beds of limestone deter-
mined the position of the river channels. This view of Dana’s
has been supported by Kemp and F. J. H. Merrill, while
Gratacap rejects the theory advanced by Stevens.
RECORDS 75
Professor Hobbs finds that no correspondence can be estab-
lished between the directions of the belts of limestone or dolo-
mite and of the New York water front, except within the stretch
from Kingsbridge to Macomb’s dam bridge. Along this line
too the observed facts point to the occurrence of a narrow strip
of limestone dropped down between vertical faults. The sec-
tions of the Harlem River which are furnished by the bridges
across it show clearly that it is not a simple erosion valley re-
sulting from cutting by the stream. The bed of the stream is
marked by sudden changes of level, and the Harlem seems to
have chosen its course quite independently of ridges of the
harder gneiss. Under the East River limestone has been found
at but two localities under the channel east of Blackwell's
Island, and in one of the drill holes underneath the Manhattan
pier of the East River bridge No. 3. The limestone east of
Blackwell’s Island is enclosed between parallel fault walls, and
appear to have been dropped down along them. The numerous
occurrences, however, of gneiss, and gneiss only along, in and
under the East River Jeave little doubt that the main portion of
the bed is composed of this rock.
Regarding the bedrock beneath the North River, compara-
tively little is known, but the origin of its channel is sufficiently
accounted for by its position along the contact of the Newark
system with the crystallines. This contact seems surely to be
a fault border, on account of its markedly rectilinear extension,
the great scarp of basalt, the much inferior position of the
newer terranes, and the evidence derived from the borings along
the route of the proposed tunnel of the Pennsylvania, New
York and Long Island Railroad Company.
The author holds that the directions of the channels of
Spuyten Duyvil Creek and Harlem and East Rivers have been
determined largely by lines of joining and displacement. Man-
hattan Island borders directly upon the Newark area, in which
the existence of a network of faults has been established by the
work of several observers, and the network probably extends
beyond the limits of the area. The striking rectilinear outlines
of the island, especially of the northern half of it, and its topo-
76 RECORDS
graphic development are favorable to the view that it represents
an orographic block left standing between down-thrown strips >
of the crust. The rectilinear gorge of the upper Harlem
between Washington Heights and Fordham Heights is con-
tinued, so far as its western wall is concerned, some two and a
half miles south of the river. It is parallel to the direction of
the scarp of the Palisades and of the Hudson. Besides the
cross fractures indicated by the different parts of the Harlem
River which were pointed out by Stevens, several other cross
fractures on and about Manhattan Island were pointed out by
the same author. Dana also considered that the Manhattan-
ville cross valley was formed by a cross-fracture. A consider-
able number of faults has been definitely established. Their
directions correspond in general to the elements in the courses
of the river channels. The exceptions to this rule are the
fissures in the East River east and west of Blackwell’s Island.
The author went on to cite a number of faults which have
been disclosed by numerous borings and tunnels, and in closing
called attention to the fact that the buried rock surface in the
lower part of the city (south of Twenty-third street), as well as
that below the area of the Harlem flats (north of One Hundred
and Tenth Street and east of Eighth Avenue) is characterized by
the most abrupt changes of level. In his opinion the area of
these portions of the island represent orographic blocks de-
pressed by faults, reefs of gneiss and limestone rising along the
Harlem area, while reefs of gneiss alone characterize the southern
district.
Professor Hobbs’ paper was discussed briefly by Professors
Kemp, Dodge and Stevenson, and it was evident that the
author's theory would not be accepted without considerable
further investigation.
At the outset of his paper on Bingham Canon, Professor
Kemp stated that the article was not a formal one for publica-
tion, and that he did not wish to forestall in any degree the
forthcoming Bingham folio by Mr. Boutwell of the United States
Geological Survey. He then described the geological forma-
tions in the vicinity of the large mines. These formations em-
RECORDS ie
braced the great section of quartzite with smaller exposures of
limestone and with intruded masses of eruptive rocks which
range from pronounced porphyries to granites. At least three
kinds of eruptives can be distinguished. The author described
in outline the faults and geological relations of the ores, and
stated that the ores especially favored the contact of the erup-
tive rocks with the quartzites. The evidences of contact meta-
morphism between the porphyries and the limestones were
commented upon. The ores in the great porphyry dike on the
claims of Colonel Wall were described, and were stated to be
secondary in their origin ——that is, they probably were intro-
duced in solution into a mass of crushed eruptive rock. The
data for the paper were gathered in connection with the field
instruction given to a class of students the past summer. The
paper was illustrated by means of lantern slides, maps and
specimens. EpmunD O. Hovey,
Secretary.
See LON OF ANTEHROEOLOY -AND’ PSYCHOLOGY.
OcTOBER 27, 1902.
Section met at 8.15 P. M.
At the preliminary business meeting Professor Edward L.
Thorndike, of Teachers College, Columbia University, was
elected as Chairman of the Section for 1903.
The program of the evening consisted of anthropological re-
ports of summer work. Dr. Clark Wissler described his re-
searches among the Sioux Indians in the interests of the Amer-
ican Museum of Natural History, paying particular attention to
their decorative art as compared with that of surrounding tribes.
Dr. A. L. Kroeber, of the University of California, spoke of the
field work carried on by that institution under his direction,
dwelling particularly upon the distribution of linguistic stocks
in California and the correspondence between linguistic and cul-
tured areas.
Dr. Maurice Fischberg, of New York, outlined a study in
which he is engaged involving the measurements of, and collec-
78 RECORDS
tion of information regarding the Jews of New York. Immi-
grants are examined particularly with regard to racial peculiari-
ties and observations on several generations in the same families
are made wherever possible. Dr. Fischberg discussed briefly
certain preliminary results from his research, promising fuller re-
ports at a later date.
Dr. Farrand closed the program with a few remarks on his
work during the summer on the Sahaptin stock of Indians for
the American Museum of Natural History.
LIVINGSTON FARRAND,
Secretary, pro tem.
BUSINESS MEETING.
NOVEMBER 3, 1902.
The Academy met at 8.20 P. M., Professor Charles L. Poor
presiding. The minutes of the last business meeting were read
and approved.
There being no business to come before the Academy, it was
voted to adjourn.
Henry E. CRAMPTON,
Recording Secretary.
SECTION. OF ASTRONOMY, PHYSICS AND
CHEMISTRY:
NOVEMBER 3, 1902.
Section met at 8:30 P. M., Charles Lane Poor presiding.
The minutes of the last meeting of Section were dispensed with.
The following program was then offered :
G. B. Pegram, ExprrRIMENTS ON THE ELECTROLYSIS OF
RADIOACTIVE SUBSTANCES.
SUMMARY OF PAPER.
When a solution of a thorium salt is electrolyzed, using plat-
inum electrodes, a temporary radioactivity is imparted to the
anode rather than to the kathode, which is remarkable in view
RECORDS 79
of the tact that in the air near dry thorium compounds a nega-
tively charged body, corresponding to the kathode, becomes
radioactive, while a positively charged body, corresponding to
the anode, is not made active. The activity of the anode used
in the electrolysis of a thorium nitrate solution can become much
more intense, for a given extent of surface, than that shown by
a thick layer of thorium oxide.
The solution under electrolysis rapidly loses its power of im-
parting radioactivity, so that after four hours of electrolysis with
a current of half an ampere, a solution of 20 g. of thorium ni-
trate in 100 c.c. water had lost 95 per cent. of its power of im-
parting activity to the anode. This radioactivity of the anode
increases for a while after being taken out of the solution, then
its intensity falls off at the rate of half its value in eleven hours,
which has been shown by Professor E. Rutherford to be the
rate of decay in the case of surfaces made active by exposure to
the emanation from a dry thorium compound. The radiation
is not homogeneous, as is shown by a study of its absorption
by successive layers of metal foil.
The activity of the anode seems to increase directly with the
concentration of the solution for short periods of electrolysis,
but its relation to the current strength and the duration of the
electrolysis appears to be less simple.
Solutions containing radium impart activity to both anode
and kathode, but this activity decays very rapidly, falling off
half its value in about 35 minutes.
S. A. MITCHELL,
Secretary of Section.
SPCLION “OF BIOLOGY.
NOVEMBER IO, 1902.
The Section met at 8:15, P. M., Professor Bashford Dean
presiding.
The minutes of the last meeting were read and approved.
The Nominating Committee appointed at the October meet-
ing presented the following nominations :
80 RECORDS
For Chairman and candidate for Vice-President, Professor
Bashford Dean.
For Secretary, Dr. M. A. Bigelow.
The Secretary was authorized by vote to cast a single affir-
mative ballot for these nominees. This was done, and the can-
didates declared duly elected.
The scientific program consisted of a lecture by Professor
R. T. Jackson, of Harvard University, entitled ‘‘ Localized
Stages in the Development of Plants and Animals.”’
SUMMARY OF PAPER.
Professor Jackson showed that in the study of organisms
marked stages in development are found throughout life from
the young to adult and old age. Such stages are of the high-
est importance in phylogenetic studies as affording the key to
genetic relations.
In addition to stages in the direct development, in many
plants and animals stages exist in localized parts throughout
the life of the individual, which are directly comparable to
stages found in the young, and to the adults of simpler and
more primitive fossil or living types.
Localized stages are typically seen in organisms that grow by
progressive addition of similiar parts, in which the young or
growing part temporarily or permanently presents characters
which are closely comparable to characters found in the young
and adults of simpler types.
In plants localized stages are seen in the distal and proximal
areas of the leaf, in suckers, ‘‘ witches’ brooms,” late, sickly or
otherwise feeble growths, and, as shown by Cushman (Amerz-
can Naturalist, November, 1902) in spring growths and leaves
below the flower. The last mentioned are particularly striking
as they present a localized senescence, repeating stages in in-
verse order of sequence from that seen in the seedlings.
In animals localized stages are seen in the newly-added dorsal
inter-ambulacral plates of the corona of Strongylocentrotus and
other sea-urchins. In young plates of the stem of some crinoids,
(Platycrinus, Pentacrinus) and as pointed out by Grabau, in the
RECORDS 81
distal ends of the arms of Zucrinus and Platycrinus. The septal
suture of Ammonites show striking localized stages, in that a
progressive complexity of the septum is traceable in passing
from the dorsal to the ventral border which series is comparable
to the progressive complexity seen in passing from the young to
adult, and from primitive to specialized types in the geological
series. . HeEnNryY E. CRAMPTON,
Secretary.
SECrTON OF GEOLOGY <AND. MINERALOGY.
NOVEMBER 17, 1902.
Section met at 8:15 P. M., J. J. Stevenson presiding.
The minutes of the last meeting of Section were read and
approved.
The following program was then offered :
A. W. Grabau, Limestone REGIONS oF MICHIGAN.
SUMMARY OF PAPER.
The limestones considered are of middle Devonian age, and
constitute the bedrock of the northern portion of the lower
peninsula of Michigan. They are of great economic importance
on account of their purity. They are chiefly used in the manu-
facture of Portland cement, and for chemical purposes. Through-
out them isolated reefs are found, which show all the char-
acters of modern coral reefs. The corals and coralines are in
the place they grew, while on all sides of them the fragmental
limestone derived from the erosion of the reefs is found. This
constitutes most of the bedded limestone of the region. On the
flanks of the reef it has a steep dip, while away from it, the dip
becomes low. The bedded limestone shows all the character of *
sandstones, but runs as high as 96 or even gg per cent of CaCO,,.
The fossils in the limestones show a mingling of Corniferous
and Hamilton types, in the lower beds. <A migration from this
region to the Ontario and New York region is indicated.
Illustrated with diagrams and specimens.
J. F. Kemp,
Secretary, pro tem.
io)
bo
RECORDS
SECTION OF ANTHROPOLOGY AND PSYCHOLOG
NOVEMBER 24, 1902.
Section met at 8:15 P. M., Professor Farrand presiding.
The minutes of the last meeting of Section were read and
approved.
The following program was then offered :
J. B. Miner, Time INTERvAts BOUNDED BY VARIED STIMULI.
J. H. Bair, THE GENERAL PRACTICE CURVE.
R. T. MacDougall, On tHE RELATION OF REACTIONS TO
CERTAIN SECONDARY STIMULI.
SUMMARY OF PAPERS.
Mr. J. B. Miner presented the results of some experiments
on the perception of time intervals bounded by varied stimuli.
Intervals of one, two, three, four and six seconds bounded by
sounds, lights, or one sound and one light, were given the sub-
ject, who then endeavored to reproduce the interval by taps on
a telegraph key. For intervals bounded by sounds, the repro-
duced interval changed from plus to minus at a point between
intervals of two and three seconds. There is very little differ-
ence between intervals bounded by sounds and those bounded
by lights ; but a considerable difference is given when the inter-
val is bounded by a sound followed by a light or vce versa.
The same interval bounded by varied stimuli seemed to the
subjects to be longer than where bounded by like stimuli.
Memory of intervals bounded by varied stimuli required more
effort. Mr. Miner believed that this represented the difference
in difficulty of muscular adjustment on which the memory of
the time interval depended. The increase in variability with
the longer intervals followed the law suggested by Cattell and
Fullerton, rather than Weber’s law.
The paper by Mr. Bair, on the general practice curve, was
read in his absence by Mr. Miner. This paper was based on
experiments made with a pack of 48 cards (six different pictures
and eight of each picture). The cards when dealt in the same
RECORDS 83
order and then immediately after in a different order required a
longer time for the second order. If dealt 2, 3, 4, 5--- times
in the same order before dealing in some new order, the succes-
sive practices in the same order followed the law of the practice
curve, which is an asymptotic approach to a physiological limit ;
and at the same time dealing the cards in any order required also
less and less time. This shows that practice in one order gives
practice ability in another order antagonistic to it, and the more
practice in one order the greater the ability to respond quickly
to the new order.
Professor MacDougal reported upon a series of experiments
showing the influence of variations in visual stimulation upon
reactions to auditory signals. Reaction time was shorter in
darkness than in light, in weak light than in strong light, and
in colored than in neutral light. Reaction time was more con-
stant under neutral than under colored light, and changes in
quality of light were followed regularly by increased rapidity of
reactions. These changes were apparently due to changes in
the attentive condition of the reactor, not to any immediate
organic influence of the intensity or quality of the light.
James E. Loueu,
Secretary.
BUSINESS MEETING:
DECEMBER 1, 1902.
The Academy met at 8:20 P. M., President Cattell presiding.
The minutes of the last business meeting were read and ap-
proved.
The Secretary reported from the Council as follows: that
the Council had voted to nominate the following as candidates
for Fellows, to be voted upon at the Annual Meeting: E. F.
Buchner, Esther F. Byrnes, R. H. Cunningham, A. W. Ches-
ter, William Dutcher, H. C. Dyar, G. I. Finlay, John Eyer-
man, W. J. Gies, A. W. Grabau, J. D. Irving, Gustav Lang-
mann, H.R. Linville, J. E. Lough, R. T. MacDougall, T. C.
Martin, Adolf Meyer, S. A. Mitchell, H. C. Parker, F. Peter-
S84 RECORDS
son, J. C. Pfister, J. D. Prince, H. G. Piffard, M. I. Pupin, Ivan
Sickels, M. A. Starr, -G. T. Stevens, C. A. Strone; iat
Sumner, W. G. Thompson, C. C. Trowbridge, J. F. Woodhull,
E. R. VonNardroff: that the Council had prepared a list of
nominations for officers (which was read), which would be mailed
to members or the Academy one week before the Annual Meet-
ing.
The Secretary read a letter from the Secretary of the Scien-
tific Alliance, relating to the establishment of The Herrman
Fund for scientific research. A copy of the letter is appended.
The Academy then adjourned.
Henry E. CRAMPTON,
Recording Secretary.
SECTION OF ASTRONOMY, PHYSICS AND
CHEMISTRY.
DECEMBER I, 1902.
Section met at 8:30 P. M., Charles Lane Poor presiding. The
minutes of the last meeting of Section were read and approved.
The following program was then offered :
G. W. Ritchey, REcENT REsULTs IN ASTRONOMICAL PHOTOG-
RAPHY WITH THE FoRTY-INCH REFRACTOR AND WITH THE Two-
FOOT REFLECTOR OF THE YERKES OBSERVATORY.
SUMMARY OF PAPER.
Mr. Ritchey exhibited with the lantern some excellent pho-
tographs taken by him with the instruments of the Yerkes
Observatory. The two-foot mirror of silver on glass was
ground some time ago by Mr. Ritchey himself, and the mount-
ing of it was made in the observatory workshop from his
designs. Since the reflector was mounted two or three years
ago, many exceptionally fine photographs have been taken of
star groups, clusters and nebulz, which rival those superb
photographs of Keeler. Especially interesting were the photo-
graphs of ova Persei, which showed the changes in the nebu-
losity which surrounds this interesting new star.
RECORDS 85
Another important piece of work taken up by Mr. Ritchey
was the application of a color screen to celestial photography,
thereby adapting a visual telescope to photographic work.
Such a screen was used with the great forty-inch refractor of the
Yerkes Observatory, and photographs were exhibited showing
the excellence of Mr. Ritchey’s work with this giant object
glass. S. A. MITCHELL,
Secretary.
SECTION OF BIOLOGY.
DECEMBER 8, 1902.
The Section met at 8:15 P. M., Professor F. E. Lloyd pre-
siding.
The minutes of the last meeting were read and approved.
The Secretary presented a letter from the Recording Secre-
tary, regarding the establishment by the Scientific Alliance of
the Herrman Research Fund, stating also the method of pre-
senting and forwarding applications for grants.
The following program was then offered :
Edmund B. Wilson, On THE RELATION BETWEEN LocaLiza-
TION AND CLEAVAGE AS ELUCIDATED BY EXPERIMENTS UPon
MEROGENY.
A. W. Grabau, THe PHYLOGENY OF THE FUSID®.
SUMMARY OF: PAPERS.
Professor Wilson presented the results of his experiments
upon the eggs of Cerebratulus, which dealt with the problem of
germinal localization. It was found that isolated blastomeres
of the two-cell stage developed by partial cleavage, but that
dwarf larva of a normal structure were finally produced. The
upper part of a blastula, however, produced a larva which
lacked a perfect archenteron ; and a ventral portion of a blas-
- tula became a pilidium which was devoid of an apical organ.
The development of egg-fragments obtained prior to the initial
cleavage, furnished particularly illuminating results. An egg-
fragment obtained before maturation, and fertilized later devel-
86 RECORDS
oped by total cleavage into a perfect larva of dwarf size. It
thus appears that localization is progressive, being practically
absent before the initial cleavage, appearing in the two-cell
stage, and becoming greater in the different regions of the blas-
tula. The relation between cell-division and differentiation was
discussed. It is expected that this paper will be published in
full at an early date.
Professor Grabau showed that the Fuside are among the
more highly accelerated types of marine gasteropods of the
modern fauna. /wsvs itself dates back to the Eocene, oc-
curring in the Paris and Hampshire basins. The American
Eocene species generally referred to /usus are shown by their
protoconchs to be more nearly related to Plewrotoma although
their adult form is like that of the typical Fusws. The proto-
conch of Fuss is highly accelerated, showing riblets on the last
portion. The typical conch ornamentation appears abruptly.
The earliest stage is characterized by round whorls, rounded
ribs extending from suture to suture, and simple spirals. These
are the characters of the adult of the most primitive Eocene
species, and also appear in the young of all later species. The
next stage is characterized by the appearance of an angulation
on the whorl, and a concentration of the ribs on the angle. In
the next stage the ribs are replaced by tubercles, and these later
unite to form a keel. This gives the type of the genus /usus
colus. Inthe old members of this species the keel is lost, and
the whorls become rounded. Finally in highly accelerated
types the adult is marked by the rounded keelless whorl, while
many of the intermediate stages are dropped out. Thus / /on-
gicauda has dropped the tubercled and keeled stage through a
process of acceleration in development. This may be consid-
ered as phylogerontism. In every genetic series of the Fusidz
types occur, which in their adult conditions, show characters
comparable to one or the other of the stages found in such
types as /. colus. In the chronogenesis of each series it is
found that types whose adults are comparable with the earliest
stage of F. colus appear first. All Eocene species of Fasus for
example are of the simplest type. The more complicated
RECORDS 87
types, whose adults correspond to later stages in the ontogene-
sis of /. colus, appear progressively later and later in time, while
at the same time primitive species persist to some extent. A
number of distinct lines of divergence or radiation have been
found within the genus /wsus, each paralleling the F. colus
series, so that for each member of this latter series a corre-
sponding member can be usually found in each of the other
series. Similar series have been worked out among the Eocene
Clavilithoids, and a number of other Eocene and later groups.
The ontogeny of hundreds of individuals has been worked out
with reference to the shell structure, and these data have served
as the basis for the determination of the phylogeny of the prin-
cipal series among the Fuside.
Henry E. CRAMPTON,
Secretary.
ANNUAL MEETING.
DECEMBER I5, 1902.
The Academy met for the annual meeting at 8:15 P. M.,
President Cattell in the chair.
The reports of the officers for the past year were called for
and presented as follows :
The Recording Secretary stated for the Corresponding Sec-
retary, that no correspondence had been carried on.
The report of the Recording Secretary, filed herewith, was
read.
The report of the Treasurer, filed: herewith, was received too
late for presentation.
The accompanying reports of the Librarian and Editor were
read.
No nominations for honorary members or corresponding
members were presented.
The following list of candidates for Fellows, nominated by
the Council according to the By-Laws, was read ; the Secre-
tary was empowered to cast an affirmative ballot of the Academy
therefor, which was done:
io)
w
Edward F. Buchner,
Esther F. Byrnes,
R. H. Cunningham,
Albert W. Chester,
William Dutcher,
Harrison G. Dyar,
John Eyerman,
George I. Finlay,
Wm. J. Gies,
Amadeus W. Grabau,
John D. Irving,
Gustav Langmann,
H. R. Linville,
J. E. Lough,
R. T. MacDougall,
T. Cumerford Martin,
Adolph Meyer,
S. A. Mitchell,
Herschel C. Parker
Frederick Peterson,
}2C. Paster
H.C, Pittard,
John: D, Pune,
Michael I. Pupin,
Iyan Sickels,
M. Allen Starr,
George T. Stevens,
C2 Aw Strong,
F. B. Sumner,
W. Gilman Thompson,
C. C. Trowbridge,
E. R. VonNardroff.
John F. Woodhull,
The election of officers for the coming year was then held.
Tellers were appointed, ballots were distributed, the votes re-
ceived and counted. The following officers were elected :
President, J. McKeen Cattell.
Vice-Presidents : Section of Geology and Mineralogy : James
F. Kemp. Section of Biology: Bashford Dean. Section of
Anthropology and Psychology: E. L. Thorndike. Section of
Astronomy, Physics and Chemistry, C. L. Poor.
Corresponding Secretary, R. E. Dodge.
Recording Secretary, Henry E. Crampton.
Treasurer. C.-F. Cox.
Librarian, Livingston Farrand.
Editor; GC. i. Poor:
Councillors : (Three years), Franz Boas, H. C. Bumpus ;
(two years), D. W. Hering, N. L. Britton; (one year), E. B.
Wilson, G. F. Kunz.
Finance Committee : John H. Caswell, John H. Hinton, C.
A. Post.
Vice-President Kemp then took the chair, and President
Cattell presented his annual address, entitled ‘‘ The Academy of
Sciences.”
RECORDS . 89
At the close of the address, a vote of thanks was. moved by
Professor Wilson, seconded by Professor Osborn, and carried.
The Academy then adjourned. HEnry E. Crampton,
Recording Secretary.
REEOR EOF THE RECORDING SECRETARY.
The present report deals with the work of the Academy from
February 24, 1902, to December 31, 1902.
During this period twenty-three meetings of Sections of the
Academy were held, at which four public lectures and forty-
two stated papers were presented. The subjects were distrib-
uted as follows :
Section of Astronomy, Physics and Chemistry —
Astronomy, 2 papers, 2 lectures.
Physics, 3 papers.
5 papers, 2 lectures.
Section of Biology —
Paleontology, 2 papers.
Zoology, IO papers, 2 lectures.
FZ papers, 2 lectures.
Section of Geology and Mineralogy —
Geology, 5 papers.
Mineralogy, 4 papers.
Physiography, 2 papers.
II papers.
Section of Anthropology and Psychology —
Anthropology, 3 papers,
Psychology, II papers.
14 papers.
Total, 42 papers, 4 lectures.
At present there are 300 Active Members, and of these 96
are Fellows, while the election of 33 Fellows is pending. Dur-
ing the period under consideration four members (J. Woodbridge
Davis, Dr. Benjamin Lord, Kev. E: A. Hofiman;.D:D., LL.D,
90 ; RECORDS
and Walter Shriver) have died. Five members have resigned,
and one has been dropped ; the total loss for the year is there-
fore ten. Eleven new members have been elected, one of them
a life member, and three have been reinstated. There is there-
fore a net gain of four.
An important change has been made in the method of publi-
cation. Hereafter each article will be published as a separate
brochure, to be distributed to those members who shall signify
a desire to receive the publications. Together with the pro-
ceedings of the Academy, all articles will be published in col-
lected form, when sufficient to make a volume of about 600
pages. By this procedure prompt publication is assured.
The past year has witnessed two events of primary impor-
tance to the Academy. In the first place, an entire formal
reorganization has been effected. At the time of the last An-
nual Meeting (Feb. 24) a new charter had just been granted
to the Academy by Act of Legislature; and by this instrument,
which replaced that of 1817, greater freedom for activity and
general expansion had been accorded the Academy. Pursuant
to its requirements, a Committee of the Council was constituted
for the purpose of drawing up a new Constitution and new
By-laws; these have been prepared, accepted by the Council,
and adopted by the Academy in business session. While the
changes which have been made are more in the letter than in
spirit, certain advantageous modifications have been introduced
in matters of organization, terminology, and procedure. Among
these may be mentioned the change of title of Resident Mem-
bers to Active Members, the abolition of the restriction to the
number of Fellows, the representation of the Sections in the
Council by making their Chairmen, Vice- Presidents of the Acad-
emy, the constitution of the Editor as an officer, and the intro-
duction of stated limitations to the terms of office of the Presi-
dent, Vice-Presidents and Councillors. In the By-laws, changes
have been made in the mode of electing Active Members, now
nominated directly to the Council, in the establishment of a
class of Non-resident Members, and in the chapter relating to
sectional organization.
RECORDS Of
The second event of importance is the change in the place of
meeting. After several years of a somewhat roving existence,
the Academy has found shelter with the American Museum of
Natural History, where it is hoped it may remain for some
time. The acknowledgments of the Academy are due to the
Director and other officers of the Museum, for the courtesy and
interest which have made this step possible.
Henry E. CRAMPTON,
Recording Secretary.
RE PORE, OF ThE EAS URE Rt
RECEIPTS.
Balance as per last Annual Report.. $1.878.07
Panwtal- wes fOr WOOO c. «svecr i os es §> ~ 10:00
“ ss TOY tere, cists oy arrose 10.00
: ; WOO Oise ote secre ss 10.00
ey 3 OOO rem sAa a oe as 30.00
: & MO OOr mec aes oes 50.00
: ; TG OM Ber tee rsa en acim = = 110.00
; 11 OF ee eee 1,965.00
i Ua telco a eee 30.00 2.20 OO
nti brAc OtNe CES: ha Sepa a esis aha oes ooe$ eee 6 35.00
ite Wiembership Peer i... wes 2 100.00
Interests tO» June 30 On SE Ann's
Avenue Mortgage of $12,000.... 292.00
SaleSnOie ODIICALIONS. nest. ott are'a' : 11.62
$4,032.19
DISBURSEMENTS.
Expenses of Recording Secretary... $ 200.25
es es as Librarian ... 166.65
¢ as Wreasubenecs 28.97
Generale <penses in. jcc. 5 3) had see 82.50
Levon qieria (aa 01 0¥2 Ke ees epee aeaeeree erera Raeg 22261
MB CE BMC ie daisy goon ih a Sees am toe thers 25.00
Duesetor Scientihe: Alliance... 2..-1- 50.12 876.10
Balance-on Hands, .'... $3,750.00
92 RECORDS
BALANCE SHEET.
DECEMBER 15, 1902.
Dr.
Invested in Bond and Mortgage.... $12,000.00
Casbron: Hand. 2. cetl es a 3,750.09
$15,750.09
Cr.
Permanent. Hind i.5:4-<2.00 <0 - ne xy $10,686.43
Pubheation® Fund <x: <.. 4.oras.<36 55% 1,823.69
PRRIGHMO MN FUMIE co. sas, F con sie rd ons 1,897.25
Income, Permanent Fund... 2’: . .. 219.37
Pubheation Fund .:-..2.% - 36.56
- Anduhon Puhid o% 5s - 36.57
(General Income ‘Account -.\2'. >. 2%. 1,056.22
$15,756.09 $15,756.09
CHARLES F. Cox,
Treasurer.
REPORT OF THE LIBRARIAN.
The work of the Librarian during the past year has been
concentrated upon the proper cataloguing and preservation of
exchanges. This task.has been chiefly in the hands of the Li-
brarian’s assistant, Mr. W. M. Erb, by whose energy the work
has been kept practically up to date. As much attention as
possible has also been given to the proper arrangement and care
of the volumes already in the possession of the library. Efforts
are being made to fill out the gaps in serial publications of value
with very gratifying results.
The total number of exchanges on the Academy’s list at
present is 410; of these 313 are foreign and 97 from the United
States and Canada.
The total number of volumes, parts of volumes and pamphlets
received during the year is 2,400.
RECORDS 93
The total number on the mailing list of the Academy is 720,
ot which 292 are members, 410 exchanges and 8 subscribers.
The great need of the library at present is, as for some years
past, an appropriation for binding, serious but unavoidable injury
and loss constantly resulting from the insufficient protection
afforded by the present arrangements.
Respectfully submitted,
LIVINGSTON FARRAND,
Librarian.
REFORT OF THE EDITOR.
During the last year, owing to lack of funds, no scientific
papers were published by the Academy. In March, the
Academy issued Part 2, Volume 14 of the Annals, containing
the Record of the Meetings of the New York Academy of
Sciences, January, 1901, to December, 1901, by Richard E.
Dodge, Recording Secretary. This was issued as a separate
(No. 5, Volume 14, pages 85 to 163) and was mailed to every
member of the Academy.
There is now a good balance in the hands of the Treasurer,
to the credit of the publication fund, and publication of scientific
papers may be resumed.
CHARLES LANE Poor,
L:ditor.
PRESIDENT’S ADDRESS.
THE ACADEMY OF SCIENCES.
Twenty-three centuries ago, when the first and fairest flowers
of civilization were in blossom, Plato and his friends met together
in an Athenian garden to talk of the things that appeared to
them to be beautiful, good and true. The garden was called
“The Academy,” and the word has ever since maintained the
high traditions of its origin, uniting the ideas of friendly social
intercourse and the search for truth. The philosophy of Plato
was passed on to his disciples, so that we read of fourth and
fifth academies; it was transplanted to Rome, where Cicero
named his country house ‘The Academy,” and to Alexandria,
where mystical neo-platonism long resisted the dogmatic rational-
ism of the church.
As part of the Italian renaissance, when civilization was once
~ more young, vigorous and beautiful, as in the Greek period, the
word “ academy”’ was revived and used to name a society of
scholars. Cosimo dei Medici, the Elder, established at Florence
in the fifteenth century a Platonic Academy, and academies of
letters by the hundred flourished in Italy during the sixteenth
century. In 1560 there was established at Naples by the ver-
satile Giambattista della Porta the first academy of sciences —
Academia Secretorum Nature —to which only those were ad-
mitted who had contributed to the advancement of science or
medicine. The academy at Naples was suppressed on the ac-
cusation that it practised the black arts; but soon afterwards
there was established at Rome, with Galileo as one of its mem-
bers, the Accademia det Lincet, which was later revived and is
now one of the great national academies.
The mere word “ academy ” is of course unimportant ; societies
of scholars are not always called academies, nor are all academies
societies of scholars. The beginnings of associations for the ad-
vancement of knowledge are to be found in savage tribes, de-
94
PRESIDENT’S ADDRESS 95
veloping with the state of civilization, usually in the form of
guilds of priests, until we reach the Greek period, whence we
date our philosophy and our science. The culture of Greece
was carried to Alexandria, where Ptolemy Soter, supposed to be
the son of Alexander the Great, established the beginning of the
povescov, based on the four corner-stones of science and cul-
ture, the university, the academy, the library and the museum ;
and this institition maintained its prestige for centuries. We
have here an association of scholars that surpasses anything to
be found in Greece or Rome, and one indeed that approaches
an ideal more nearly that any existing institution. Supported
by the government, we find men of science living together and
working together, a system of lectures, a library of 600,000 titles
and the like. To these conditions we may attribute the work of
Aristarchus, Eratosthenes, Hipparchus, Ptolemy, Archimedes,
Euclid, Herophilus and others, who in many ways established
the principles of science. Similar if less important centers of
learning arose in Bagdad, Damascus and elsewhere ; and there
was a series of Arabian astronomers, physicians and mathe-
maticians who never permitted the torch of learning to become
extinct until it was merged in the dawning light of modern
science.
The records of Roman history are chiefly of wars and poli-
tics; but its institutions still dominate the world. The names
of Pliny, Galen and Lucretius prove that science was cultivated.
It is said that there were twenty-eight public libraries in Rome
in the fourth century ; and the schools of the Roman Empire
never became extinct. Rome was the center whence first em-
pire and then the church spread civilization throughout Europe.
The removal of the seat of empire to Byzantium, the ever-re-
curring invasions of the barbarians from the north and the ten-
ets of the Christian church are supposed to have extinguished
learning and culture; and the period from the decline of the
Roman empire to the revival of learning in Italy is called the
dark ages. But perhaps these centuries are only dark in so far
as they are obscured from our sight. It may seem absurd for
an amateur in history to make an assertion contrary to the com-
96 PRESIDENT’S ADDRESS
mon views; but the scientific man, saturated with the doctrine
of evolution, is loth to accept a spontaneous generation of cul-
ture at the period of the late Italian renaissance. Students of
medieval history are indeed beginning to date back this period
of awakening to the thirteenth or even to the eleventh century ;
but there appears to be much evidence for a gradual extension
of civilization and culture throughout Europe from the sixth to
the eleventh centuries.
It is a long way from the love passages of the Phzdrus to
those of the Vita Nuova, from the fawn of Praxiteles to the
madonna of Giotto, from the Phrygian mysteries to the order of
St. Francis. The Christian church is said to have been inimical
to culture and science, but to it we owe the establishment of
monasteries, schools and libraries throughout Europe. It is
natural that the civilizations of Athens and of Rome should
have become merged in the surrounding peoples. We might
as well wonder why Shakespeare did not give rise to a line of
poets, as to wonder why the Athens of Pericles was not perma-
nent. When Rome came in contact with the peoples of the
north, an average resulted which was in the end an extension
of civilization. The barbarians who overran Italy and sacked
Rome were themselves converted to Christianity, and the tradi-
tions of culture were carried beyond the Rhine and the English
Channel.
Boetius, whose birth coincided with the fall of the western
empire, wrote on science as well as on philosophy. From his
death, in 525, education and learning were in the hands of the
church. Gregory the Great, pope from 590 to 604, encour-
aged primary education ; and monasteries, being at once schools,
libraries and academies of learned men, were established every-
where under the early popes. Bede, born about 673, wrote
on astronomy and medicine. At his school at Jarrow in North-
umbria there were 600 monks in attendance besides strangers
from a distance. Alcuin, born about the year that Bede died,
went from the directorship of the school at York to establish
the palace school for Charles the Great, making the court of
the emperor more nearly an academy of sciences and letters
/
PRESIDENT’S ADDRESS SE
than has happened elsewhere in history. Alfred the Great in
the following century also cultivated letters at his court, and
himself wrote on scientific as well as on literary subjects. He
established schools throughout his dominion, including an
academy at Oxford.
The traditions attributing the University of Paris to Charles
and Oxford University to Alfred are discredited ; but the schools
they supported and established certainly did not become extinct,
but developed into the medieval universities. The curriculum
of the monastic and cathedral schools may appear narrow and
trivial—the well-known seven arts, the elementary trivium—
grammar, rhetoric and dialectic, and the more advanced quad-
rivium—music, arithmetic, geometry and astronomy ; but if we
compare it with the curriculum of the American or English
college of a few years ago we should cast no stones. Indeed,
when we try to picture the state of affairs, the invasions of the
Northmen and Saracens, the wars and pillages, we can but ad-
mire the spirit that maintained schools and libraries in the
monasteries, the academies of sciences and arts of the time.
The Roman Church, the Holy Roman Empire, civic life and
independence and finally the universities were the offspring of
the so-called dark ages.
The medical school of Salerno, whose beginnings are traced
to the ninth century, seems to have descended directly from the
Greco-Roman period. It was secular in character, extending
its privileges to Jews and women. It is of interest to scientific
men that the first university should have been a school of medi-
cine, but it must be admitted that it did not contribute consider-
ably to the advancement of science —at Alexandria the living
human body was dissected, at Salerno Latin hexameters were
written on the urine — nor has its imperfectly known organiza-
tion the interest for us that attaches to the universities of
Bologna and Paris.
The medieval university is certainly one of the most notable
institutions known to history. It appears almost incredible that
10,000 students from all parts of Europe should have frequented
Bologna, when traveling was as expensive, difficult and dan-
98 PRESIDENT’S ADDRESS
gerous as was the case in the thirteenth century. The guilds
or trades unions of the students and teachers represent a kind
of organization that is of peculiar interest to those of us who are
concerned with the conduct of modern scientific societies. The
present period is marked by combinations of labor and of capital,
such as have not previously existed, but the guilds of the mid-
dle ages had a more complete organization, and the universities
of scholars have no modern counterpart. It seems to me that
we men of science suffer both in position and in character from
the dependence to which we submit, and that we could with ad-
vantage learn from the studium generale of the middle ages.
The centers at Bologna and Paris developed almost simul-
taneously. Bologna was primarily a law school and Paris a
theological school. The former was more strictly professional,
and its students were mostly men of maturity, already holding
positions in the church or state. The universities of students,
representing different nationalities, obtained control and imposed
their authority on the masters and on the city. The school at
Paris was less professional in the sense that theology and_phi-
losophy were the liberal studies of the age. There was at Paris
from the time of Abelard a vast number of teachers gathered
together from all quarters ; and the formation of a university ot
masters was followed in the thirteenth century by the complex
organization of nations and faculties.
Migrations from Bologna established universities throughout
Italy, while the influence of Paris led to the universities of Ox-
ford and Cambridge, of Prague and of the various French cities.
Science in the modern sense of the word did not play an im-
portant part in the medieval university; but Roger Bacon,
born in 1214, was intimately associated with Oxford and Paris,
and doubtless found encouragement as well as_ persecution
at these universities. The promise of Bacon was not ful-
filled for more than two centuries ; but there was a slow growth
of science at the universities. Copernicus found masters at
Cracow, Bologna and Padua and was himself professor at Rome.
Kepler and Galileo filled chairs at universities ; they bring us
to the period of the organization of academies of sciences. ,
PRESIDENT’S ADDRESS 99
Francis Bacon in his Vew Atlantis, published in 1627, pic-
tures Solomon’s House as an ideal academy of sciences. I have
already referred to the establishment of actual academies of sci-
ences in Italy during the sixteenth century. They were origi-
nally clubs of scientific men or men interested in science who
met together to discuss and perform experiments. Like the
early universities the academies were at first independent of the
state ; but they subsequently received charters and appropria-
tions of money. In the sixteenth and the first part of the
seventeenth century academies of sciences were founded through-
out Europe. The period was marked by extraordinary scientific
progress which was greatly stimulated by the interchange of
ideas made possible by the academies. The state of science
was such that each member could understand and take interest
in the work of all the others. Intellectual curiosity was wide-
spread, catholic and naive.
The Royal Society of London and the Academy of Sciences
of Paris arose at about the same time and under similar circum-
stances. At Paris a club counting among its members Desear-
tes, Gassendi and Pascal met at a private house for some thirty
years, until an academy of sciences was finally organized by Col-
bert on the model of the Académie Frangaise established earlier
under the auspices of Richelieu. The seven original members
included Huyghens, who was called to Paris. They received
pensions from the king and grants for instruments. The acad-
emy was reconstituted in 1699 with fifteen active members,
three each in geometry, astronomy, mechanics, anatomy and
chemistry. The academy of sciences became part of the Insti-
tute of France in 1795; at which time it was divided into
ten sections in each of which were six members and six as-
sociates in the provinces, the sections being: (1) mathematics,
(2) mechanics, (3) astronomy, (4) experimental physics, (5)
chemistry, (6) natural history and mineralogy, (7) botany
(8) anatomy, (9) medicine and surgery, and (10) agriculture.
An eleventh section — geography and navigation — was added
in 1803 with three members. As constituted since 1833, the
Institute of France contains five academies : (1) Frangaise, (2) In-
100 PRESIDENT’S ADDRESS
scriptions et belles-lettres, (3) Sciences, (4) Beaux-arts and (5)
Sciences morales et politiques. The academy of sciences con-
tains eighty members and the other academies forty. Each re-
ceives a pension. As we all know, the intellectual life of France
has been centered largely at Paris and in the academies.
The Royal Society of London resulted from a club that held
meetings as early as 1645 ; it was finally organized in 1660 and
charteredin 1662. The membership was larger and less exclu-
sive than in the case of the Paris Academy, and there has not
been a division into sections. Under the existing statutes fifteen
fellows are elected annually, and the membership numbers
about 450. The fellows do not receive pensions as in the con-
tinental academies, but pay dues. The society, however, ad-
ministers a government fund for research (£4,000 annually),
and has in many ways cooperated with the government. There
has been this year established a British Academy for the Pro-
motion of Historical, Philosophical and Philological Studies.
The Accademia del Cimento, begun in-Florence in 1657, and
the Collegium Curiosum begun in Altorff, Franconia, in 1672,
are types of the scientific clubs of the time. Somewhat later
academies were established in various centers—the Berlin
Academy in accordance with the plan of Leibnitz in 1700 and
the St. Petersburg Academy by Peter the Great in 1724. The
members receive salaries from the government; at St. Peters-
burg these are liberal, so that at one time eminent foreigners,
such as Nicholas and Daniel Bernoulli, were attracted to St.
Petersburg by membership. Similar academies were established
in the capitals and other cities of the continent — at Stockholm,
Copenhagen, Munich, Madrid and elsewhere. These imperial
and royal academies were patronized by kings and princes and
were part of the court life of the time.
The American Philosophical Society, modeled by Franklin
on the Royal Society, had its beginnings at Philadelphia in
1743; and the American Academy of Arts and Sciences, mod-
eled by Adams on the Paris Academy, was established at Bos-
ton in 1780. Both institutions were originally of national scope
and still maintain this character to a certain extent. Academies
PRESIDENT’S ADDRESS 101
more local in character were subsequently established in differ-
ent cities, the Connecticut Academy of Arts and Sciences,
founded at New Haven in 1799, being the oldest of these.
Our own academy of sciences was organized in 1817 as the
Lyceum of Natural History in the City of New York. The
National Academy of Sciences was incorporated by Congress
in 1863. It was born into a world that has changed, and we
may hope progressed, since the golden age of academies. The
differentiation of the sciences, the dispersal of our men of sci-
ence over a wide area and the general trend of democratic in-
stitutions are not favorable to the academy of the type that
flourished in the seventeenth and eighteenth centuries.
The nineteenth century witnessed an extraordinary develop-
ment of scientific activity throughout the world. Each science
has had its great leaders who have established new fundamental
principles and new lines of investigation, while the workers in
the ranks are now a great army. I have had occasion during
the past year to compile a biographical catalogue of the living
men of science of the United States. On my preliminary list
there are eight thousand who have published scientific papers,
with a few exceptions, admitted because they are engaged
in teaching or other scientific work of some importance. I
estimate that the scientific men of the world number about
50,000, not counting those physicians, engineers and others
who do not directly contribute to the advancement of science,
nor those who are engaged in historical, philological and
other studies, not commonly included in the natural and exact
sciences.
Under these circumstances scientific organization has been
compelled to adjust itself to new conditions. The two great
developments have been the establishment of large national
associations holding migratory meetings and of special societies
for the several sciences. The German Congress of Scientific
Men and Physicians was established in 1828 and the British
Association for the Advancement of Science in 1831. There
are similar associations in other European countries, in Austral-
asia and in South America. Our own association was estab-
102 PRESIDENT’S ADDRESS
lished in 1848, being a continuation of the Association of
American Geologists and Naturalists, founded in 1840.
The Linnean Society for zodlogy and botany was founded in
London in 1788 and received a royal charter in 1802. The
Geological Society of London was established in 1807, and the
Royal Astronomical Society in 1820. These societies were off-
shoots from the Royal Society, and were a necessary result of the
differentiation of science and the increase in the number of men of
science. At the time, however, they were supposed to weaken
the Royal Society, its president, Sir Joseph Banks, saying, ‘‘ All
these new-fangled associations will finally dismantle the Royal
Society, and not leave the old lady a rag to cover her.”
The scattering of scientific men in this country delayed the
establishment of special societies. The American Association
was divided into two sections in 1875 and into nine sections in
1882. The American Chemical Society was established in
1876, and we now have national societies for the principal
sciences—mathematics, physics, chemistry, astronomy, geology,
botany, morphology, ornithology, anatomy, physiology, bacteri-
ology, pathology, psychology and anthropology.
New York city and members of our academy have done their
share in establishing and supporting these societies. The Torrey
Botanical Club, begun in 1870, was the first of the special
societies. The Chemical Society was established in this city
and has its headquarters here. The American Mathematical
Society began as the New York Mathematical Society and still
has its main center in New York, as has also the American
Physical Society. The secretaries of the American Physiolog-
ical Society and of the American Psychological Association are
officers of our academy, and the secretary of the American
Geological Society was formerly one of our most active mem-
bers. The societies for civil, mining, mechanical and electrical
engineering have their headquarters in New York city.
Apart from scientific societies this city has, during the past
fifteen years, witnessed an unusual, perhaps unparalleled, devel-
opment of its scientific and educational institutions. Columbia
University has become one of the dozen great universities of
PRESIDENT’S ADDRESS 103
the world. Its new grounds and buildings, costing $8,000,000,
are but a symbol of its educa-
tional position. New York Uni-
versity, with its beautiful new site
and buildings, has grown in equal
proportion. The City College is
erecting new buildings, and high
schools have been established.
Our libraries have been consoli-
dated, the building for the great
public library is in course of
erection and numerous branch
libraries have been founded.
The American Museum of Nat-
ural History has more than quad-
rupled the value of its buildings
and collections, and the Metro-
politan Museum of Art has
equally increased its galleries
and endowment. The Botanical
Garden, the Zoological Park and
the Aquarium have arisen as by
miracle. Hospitals, asylums and
all kinds of public institutions
have increased even more rapidly
than the wealth of the city. In
spite of Tammany Hall, in spite
of reform administrations, our
public, educational and scientific
institutions have developed in a
way that has perhaps never been
equalled hitherto or elsewhere.
In this marvelous development
ty
f)
(
LS]
N.Y. Univers
Columbia
=
Lib rary
there are two failures that we
A gs avyLuUmMN
must all regret — one, the sta-
tionary condition of our Academy
of Sciences, the other, the dispersal of our institutions over such
104 PRESIDENT’S ADDRESS
an area as to detract greatly from their usefulness. All the
way from the Battery to the Bronx — some twenty miles as the
trolley car goes — separated by almost impassable streets and
overshadowed by tenements and apartment houses, our institu-
tions may be found or at least looked for. Fifteen years ago
the city had a great opportunity, but no leader being at hand it
was lost. The situation of some of our scientific institutions is
shown on the one chart ; what might have been is shown on the
other.
The city could have bought the blocks from the American
Museum to the North River for about $10,000,000. These
remaining one half park, half the part of Central Park between
the American and the Metropolitan Museums might have been
used as a site for public buildings without decreasing the
= E
et % 5 ee
5S 3 abies paar cat
=e g Sale ae | Pubbtie
Sts oe $ Institutions
Col (eee
[
MMU, Central
Statin
Central
City
Hall,
etc.
East Rivet
amount of open space, while at the same time greatly increas-
ing its value for all the purposes of a park. The plan shows
what might have been done on the west side. The wasteful
duplication of libraries and the rest would have been avoided,
and there would have been a strengthening through cooperation
for which it is not easy to find words. The site of the_ park
and buildings would, of course, have been above the thorough-
fares, and all the buildings would have been within five minutes’
ride on an underground railway.
The cross arm of Central Park should have extended to the
East River, and there should have been a park along the river,
facing Blackwell's Island and corresponding to Riverside Park.
PRESIDENT’S ADDRESS 105
Hospitals and eleemosynary institutions could have been built
on this arm of the park and facing it, while the various institu-
tions for the defective classes would have been on the islands in
the East River. The cross arm of Central Park would always
have been near the center of population of the city, and if it had
been made a center for its intellectual and higher social life a
gain would have resulted which it would scarcely be possible
to overestimate. Fifteen years ago this could have been done
as far as the west side is concerned with little or no expense to
the city ; now it would cost $30,000,000. I should gladly ex-
pend one third the yearly income of the city for the purpose ;
as Iam helpless and harmless I suppose there is no danger that
I shall be put in the institution on Ward’s Island.
The atrophied condition of the New York Academy of Sciences
is as lamentable as the dispersal of our scientific institutions, but
fortunately it is not so irremediable. The university, the library,
the museum and the academy are, as I have already said, the
four corner-stones of science and culture. They should be parts
of one over-institution, and should, in my opinion, be one of the
chief cares and adornments of the state, being no less essential
than the police or army and the courts. As the institutions of
the city can not now be brought together, we must do the best
we can to give the Academy the position it should have. It is
immaterial whether the institution be called the New York
Academy of Sciences or the Scientific Alliance of New York.
We must have an institution that will coordinate the scientific
work accomplished in the city. We must have a building for
our meetings and other work, and should have as part of it or
adjacent to it a club-house. The building should be situated
near the Museum of Natural History, this being without doubt
the most central position. Let us get money from millionaires
if we can, but it seems to me that for the honor of the city the
building should be built by the city. I see no; reason why it
should not be part of the American Museum. The large lecture
halls could be used in common, and we should need only two
or three rooms of moderate size, one seating about a hundred
people, for ordinary society meetings, and others for a commit-
106 PRESIDENT’S ADDRESS
tee room and a room for the archives and secretariats of the
different societies. The libraries and any collections there may
be could with advantage be merged in those of the museum.
Such rooms, if part of a wing of the museum, would cost the
city perhaps $100,000. Then we should collect one or two
hundred thousand dollars for a club-house to be placed across
the street.
A few words remain to be said in regard to the functions of
an academy of sciences under the conditions that obtain at the
beginning of the twentieth century. Libraries, laboratories and
museums are no longer our charge. We are primarily guilds
of scientific men. The organization of science in America
toward which I believe we are moving is this: We shall have a
national society for each of the sciences; these societies will be
affiliated and will form the American Association for the Ad-
vancement of Science, which will hold migratory meetings.
Winter meetings will be held in large centers where all the
societies will come together, and summer meetings will be held
at points of educational and other interest when the societies
will scatter somewhat. The council of the American Associa-
tion composed of delegates from all the societies will be our
chief deliberative and legislative body. Our national societies
will consist of local sections, and these sections will unite to
form an academy of sciences. The men who are in one neigh-
borhood and engaged in the same kind of work are the natural
unit. They should unite on the one hand with those in other
neighborhoods to form a national society ; they should join on
the other hand with the men of science of the same neighbor-
hood to form an academy of sciences. This plan of organiza-
tion may appear to be almost too logical for a world that is
somewhat careless of logic, but it is in part already realized.
It will in my opinion result as a necessary condition from the
state of affairs. Our academy has already contributed to it,
and it seems to me that we should continue to do consciously
what we have hitherto done rather blindly.
We have two main external functions —our meetings and
our publications. For both of these the men of science inter-
PRESIDENT’S ADDRESS 107
ested in the same subjects are the natural group. We neednot
increase the number of our sections; but should allow subsec-
tions for each of the sciences, letting those who are immediately
concerned meet as they find it most advantageous. These
groups should maintain their own autonomy, and we should
not require the members to join the academy, least of all so
long as our present dues are maintained. The academy should
provide convenient places for meeting, arrange for joint meet-
ings of several groups, provide general lectures of interest to
more than one group, support a club-house, give receptions and
exhibitions and the like.
In regard to publications I am somewhat heterodox. Pro-
ceedings and transactions were an important function of the
academy of the eighteenth century, but there is no longer any
_ excuse for printing researches on utterly diverse subjects in one
volume, because the authors happen to be members of the same
academy. We might as well make up volumes according to
the cranial index of the contributors. The national society for
each science should directly or indirectly have charge of the
publications in that science. We need in every science: (1) A
series of monographs, each of which should be published as a
unit, (2) a “‘ Centralblatt’’ containing abstracts of the literature
with a complete bibliography, and (3) a journal for shorter
articles, general discussions, critical reviews, etc. The abstracts
and bibliography should be an international undertaking, each
country contributing its share. What is now printed in the
annals, transactions and proceedings of our academies, should
be contributed to the series or journals. In the series of psy-
chological monographs, which I am glad to say exists, should,
for example, be printed any monographs that are prepared by
our members, and if the academy has funds for publication, it
should share the expense. These monographs can be parts of
our proceedings and can be given to those members who are
interested. Their existence will be known to every specialist
throughout the world. They will be purchased by individuals
and libraries, and will ultimately become self-supporting. It is
to be hoped that the academies of the country will unite in a
108 PRESIDENT’S ADDRESS
plan of this character, and that our academy will initiate the
movement. .
When we review the whole subject of the history and present
status of the academy of sciences we must, I think, come to
the conclusion that the function of the modern academy is now
modest. Libraries, museums, research laboratories, govern-
ment departments and universities have developed in a way that
leaves no excuse for the academy of sciences to attempt com-
petition with them. The university in its modern form seems
to me most suitable for the central institution, and when our
universities are controlled and supported by the state and when
there is only one university in a region, it seems to me that the
university should administer the libraries, museums, research
laboratories and the like, and that the academy of sciences will
be essentially a part of the university. The national and local
societies for each branch of science are the natural groups for
meetings and discussion and for publication. Membership in
an academy as an honor, the presidency as a distinction, foreign
members, medals, prizes and the like, seem to me to belong
to the childhood of science. So long as we are still in this
state let us rejoice in our innocence, but what is charming in
the child is intolerable in the man.
Has the academy of sciences then played its part in the
world? Must it, like the mastodon and elephant, give way to
organisms better suited to a changed environment? I have al-
ready indicated that I believe the academy to have important if
modest functions, and have stated what I think them to be.
They are essentially those of a guild. We need a center in
each community for organization and social intercourse. As
capitalists unite in corporations and laborers in trades unions,
so men of science should unite in their academies. We should
not profess unselfish philanthropy, but we may reasonably
claim that whatever is accomplished to improve the condition
of men of science, to increase their influence or to forward
their work is of benefit to the community and for the welfare
of society.
J. McKeen CATTELL.
THE ORGANIZATION
OF THE
NEW YORK
ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
ORIGINAL CHARTER, ORDER OF COURT, AMENDED
CHARTER, CONSTITUTION, BY-LAWS
AND LIST OF MEMBERS
(APPENDIX, VOL. XV, PART 1)
EDITOR
CHARLES LANE POOR
1903
[Annas N. Y. AcaD. Sct., Vol. XV, Part I, pp. 109-152, September 2, 1903.
SHE ORGANIZATION OF TE NEW YORK
ACADEMY OF “SCIENCES.
THE ORIGINAL CHARTER.
AN ACT TO INCORPORATE THE
LYCEUM OF NATURAL HISTORY IN THE CITY OF NEW YORK.
Passed April 20, 1818.
WHEREAS, The members of the Lyceum of Natural History
have petitioned for an act of incorporation, and the Legislature,
impressed with the importance of the study of Natural History,
as connected with the wants, the comforts, and the happiness of
mankind, and conceiving it their duty to encourage all laudable
attempts to promote the progress of science in this State — there-
fore,
Be wt enacted by the People of the State of New York repre-
sented in Senate and Assembly, That Samuel L. Mitchill, Casper
W. Eddy, Frederick C. Schaeffer, Nathaniel Paulding, William
Cooper, Benjamin P. Kissam, John Torrey, William Cumber-
land, D’Jurco V. Knevels, James Clements and James Pierce,
and such other persons as now are, and may from time to time
become members, shall be, and hereby are constituted a body
corporate and politic, by the name of Lyceum or NATURAL
HisTory IN THE City oF New York, and that by that name
they shall have perpetual succession, and shall be persons
capable of suing and being sued, pleading and being impleaded,
answering and being answered unto, defending and being de-
fended, in all courts and places whatsoever; and may have a
common seal, with power to alter the same from time to time ;
and shall be capable of purchasing, taking, holding and enjoy-
ing to them and their successors, any real estate in fee simple
a
9b ORGANIZATION
or otherwise, and any goods, chattels and personal estate, and
of selling, leasing, or otherwise disposing of said real or personal
estate, or any part thereof, at their will and pleasure : Provided
always, that the clear annual value or income of such real or
personal estate shall not exceed the sum of five thousand dol-
lars: Provided, however, that the funds of the said corporation
shall be used and appropriated to the promotion of the objects
stated in the preamble to this act, and those only.
2. And be it further enacted, That the said Society shall, from
time to time, forever hereafter, have power to make, constitute,
ordain, and establish such by-laws and regulations as they shall
judge proper, for the election of their officers; for prescribing
their respective functions, and the mode of discharging the same ;
for the admission of new members ; for the government of the
officers and members thereof; for collecting annual contribu-
tions from the members towards the funds thereof; for regulat-
ing the times and places of meeting of the said Society; for
suspending or expelling such members as shall neglect or refuse
to comply with the by-laws or regulations, and for the manag-
ing or directing the affairs and concerns of the said Society :
Provided such by-laws and regulations be not repugnant to the
Constitution and laws of this State or of the United States.
3. And be it further enacted, That the officers of the said So-
ciety shall consist of a President and two Vice-Presidents, a
Corresponding Secretary, a Recording Secretary, a Treasurer,
and five Curators, and such other officers as the Society may
judge necessary ; who shall be annually chosen, and who shall
continue in office for one year, or until others be elected in their
stead; that if the annual election shall not be held at any of
the days for that purpose appointed, it shall be lawful to make
such election at any other day; and that five members of the
said Society, assembling at the place and time designated for
that purpose by any by-law or regulation of the Society, shall
constitute a legal meeting thereof.
4. And be it further enacted, That Samuel L. Mitchill shall
be the President ; Casper W. Eddy the First Vice-President ;
Frederick C. Schaeffer the Second Vice-President ; Nathaniel
ORGANIZATION 113
Paulding, Corresponding Secretary ; William Cooper, Record-
ing Secretary; Benjamin P. Kissam, Treasurer, and John
Torrey, William Cumberland, D’Jurco V. Knevels, James
Clements and James Pierce, Curators ; severally to be the first
officers of the said corporation, who shall hold their respective
offices until the twenty-third day of February next, and until
others shall be chosen in their places.
5. And be it further enacted, That the present Constitution of
the said Association shall, after passing of this Act, continue to
be the Constitution thereof; and that no alteration shall be
made therein, unless by a vote to that effect of three-fourths of
the resident members, and upon the request in writing of one-
third of such resident members, and submitted at least one
month before any vote shall be taken thereupon.
State of New York, Secretary's Office.
I certiFy the preceding to be a true copy of an original Act
of the Legislature of this State, on file in this Office.
ARCHED CANERBELE:
Dep. Sec’ y.
Asany, April 29, 1818.
ORDER OF COURT.
ORDER OF THE SUPREME COURT OF THE STATE OF NEW YORK
TO CHANGE THE NAME OF
THE LYCEUM OF NATURAL HISTORY IN THE
CITY OF NEW YORK |
TO
THE NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES.
WHEREAS, in pursuance of the vote and proceedings of this
Corporation to change the corporate name thereof from ‘“‘ The
114 ORGANIZATION
Lyceum of Natural History in the City of New York” to ‘‘ The
New York Academy of Sciences,” which vote and proceedings
appear of record, an application has been made in behalf of said
Corporation to the Supreme Court of the State of New York to
legalize and authorize such change, according to the statute in
such case provided, by Chittenden & Hubbard, acting as the
attorneys of the Corporation, and the said Supreme Court, on
the 5th day of January, 1876, made the following order upon
such application in the premises, viz :
At a special term of the Supreme
Court of the State of New York,
held at the Chambers thereof,
in the County Court House, in
the City of New York, the 5th
day of January, 1876:
Present — Hon. Gro. C. BARRETT, /ustice.
In the matter of the applica-
tion of the Lyceum of Nat-
ural History in the City of
New York to authorize it to
assume the corporate name
of the New York Academy
of Sciences.
On reading and filing the petition of the Lyceum of Natural
History in the City of New York, duly verified by John S. New-
berry, the President and chief officer of said Corporation to
authorize it to assume the corporate name of The New York
Academy of Sciences, duly setting forth the grounds of said
application, and on reading and filing the affidavit of Geo. W.
Quackenbush, showing that notice of such application had been
duly published for six weeks in the State paper, to wit, Zhe A/-
bany Evening Journal, and the affidavit of David S. Owen, show-
ing that notice of such application had also been duly published
in the proper newspaper of the County of New York, in which
ORGANIZATION 115
county said Corporation has its business office, to wit, in the
Daily Register, by which it appears to my satisfaction that such
notice has been so published, and on reading and filing the
affidavits of Robert H. Brownne and J. S. Newberry, thereunto
annexed, by which it appears to my satisfaction that the appli-
cation is made in pursuance of a resolution of the managers of
said Corporation to that end named, and there appearing to me
to be no reasonable objection to said Corporation so changing
its name as prayed in said petition: Now on motion of Gros-
venor S. Hubbard, of Counsel for Petitioner, it is
Ordered, That the Lyceum of Natural History in the City of
New York be and is hereby authorized to assume the corporate
name of The New York Academy of Sciences.
Indorsed: Filed January 5, 1876.
ee COBY. WM. WALSH, Clerk.
Resolution of THE ACADEMY, accepting the order of the Court,
passed February 21, 1876.
And whereas, The order hath been published as therein re-
quired, and all the proceedings necessary to carry out the same
have been had, Therefore :
Resolved, That the foregoing order be and the same is hereby
accepted and adopted by this Corporation, and that in con-
formity therewith the corporate name thereof, from and after the
adoption of the vote and resolution hereinabove referred to, be
and the same is hereby declared to be
THE NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES.
116 ORGANIZATION
THE AMENDED CHARTER.
MARCH IQ, 1902.
CHAPTER I8I OF THE Laws OF 1902.
An Act to amend chapter one hundred and ninety-seven of
the laws of eighteen hundred and eighteen, entitled “‘ An act to
incorporate the Lyceum of Natural History in the City of New
York,” a corporation now known as the New York Academy
of Sciences and to extend the powers of said corporation.
(Became a law March 19, 1902, with the approval of the
Governor. Passed, three-fifths being present.)
The People of the State of New York, represented in Senate
and Assembly, do enact as follows :
Section I. The corporation incorporated by chapter one
hundred and ninety-seven of the laws of eighteen hundred and
eighteen, entitled ‘‘ An act to incorporate the Lyceum of Natural
History in the City of New York,” and formerly known by that
name, but now known as the New York Academy of Sciences
through change of name pursuant to order made by the
supreme court at the city and county of New York, on Janu-
ary fifth, eighteen hundred and seventy-six, is hereby author-
ized and empowered to raise money for, and to erect and main-
tain, a building in the city of New York for its use, and in
which also at its option other scientific societies may be admitted
and have their headquarters upon such terms as said corpora-
tion may make with them, portions of which building ‘may be
also rented out by said corporation for any lawful uses for the
purpose of obtaining income for the maintenance of such build-
ing and for the promotion of the objects of the corporation ; to
establish, own, equip, and administer a public library, and a
museum having especial reference to scientific subjects ; to pub-
lish communications, transactions, scientific works, and _peri-
odicals ; to give scientific instruction by lectures or otherwise ;
to encourage the advancement of scientific research and dis-
covery, by gifts of money, prizes, or other assistance thereto.
The building, or rooms, of said corporation in the city of New
York used exclusively for library or scientific purposes shall be
ORGANIZATION 1 8
subject to the provisions and be entitled to the benefits of sub-
division seven of section four of chapter nine hundred and eight
of the laws of eighteen hundred and ninety-six, as amended.
Section II of said chapter one hundred and ninety-seven of
the laws of eighteen hundred and eighteen, entitled “An act
to incorporate the Lyceum of Natural History in the City of
New York,” is hereby amended so as to read as follows :
Section II. The said corporation shall from time to time
forever hereafter have power to make, constitute, ordain, and
establish such by-laws and regulations as it shall judge proper
for the election of its officers; for prescribing their respective
functions, and the mode of discharging the same; for the ad-
mission of new members; for the government of officers and
members thereof ; for collecting dues and contributions towards
the funds thereof; for regulating the times and places of meet-
ing of said corporation ; for suspending or expelling such mem-
bers as shall neglect or refuse to comply with the by-laws or
regulations, and for managing or directing the affairs or con-
cerns of the said corporation: and may from time to time alter
or modify its constitution, by-laws, rules and regulations.
Section III. Section three of said act is hereby amended so
as to read as follows:
The officers of the said corporation shall consist of a presi-
dent and two or more vice-presidents, a corresponding secre-
tary, a recording secretary, a treasurer, and such other officers
as the corporation may judge necessary ; who shall be chosen
in the manner and for the terms prescribed by the constitution
of the said corporation.
Section IV. Section V of said act is hereby amended so as
to read as follows:
SEecTION V. The present constitution of the said corporation
shall, after the passage of this act, continue to be the constitu-
tion thereof until amended as herein provided. Such constitu-
tion as may be adopted by a vote of not less than three quarters
of such resident members and fellows of the said New York
Academy of Sciences as shall be present at a meeting thereof,
called by the Recording Secretary for that purpose, within forty
118 ORGANIZATION
days after the passage of this act, by written notice, duly mailed,
postage prepaid, and addressed to each fellow and resident
member at least ten days before such meeting, at his last known
place of residence, with street and number when known, which
meeting shall be held within three months after the passage of
this act, shall be thereafter the constitution of the said New
York Academy of Sciences, subject to alteration or amendment
in the manner provided by such constitution.
A new section is hereby added to said act to be known as
Section VI thereof, which shall read as follows:
Section VI. The said corporation shall have power to con-
solidate, to unite, to cooperate, or to ally itself with any other
society or association in the city of New York organized for the
promotion of the knowledge or the study of any science, or of
research therein, and for this purpose to receive, hold, and ad-
minister real and personal property for the uses of such con-
solidation, union, cooperation or alliance, subject to such terms
and regulations as may be agreed upon with such associations
or societies.
Section VI. This act shall take effect immediately.
STATE OF NEw York,
OFFICE OF THE SECRETARY OF STATE.
I have compared the preceding with the original law on file
in this office, and do hereby certify that the same is a correct
transcript therefrom, and the whole of said original law.
Given under my hand and the seal of office of the Secretary of
State, at the city of Albany, this eighth day of April, in the year
one thousand nine hundred and two.
Joun T. McDonoucu,
Secretary of State.
ORGANIZATION 119
CONSTITUTION.
ADOPTED, APRIL 24, 1902.
Article I. The name of this Corporation shall be The New
York Academy of Sciences. Its objects shall be the advance-
ment and diffusion of scientific knowledge, and the center of
its activities shall be in the City of New York.
ArtTIcLE II. The Academy shall consist of four classes of
members, namely: Active Members, Fellows, Corresponding
Members and Honorary Members. Active Members shall be
the members of the Corporation who live in or near the City of
New York, or who, having removed to a distance, desire to re-
tain their connection with the Academy. Fellows shall be
chosen from the Active Members in virtue of their scientific at-
tainments. Corresponding and Honorary Members shall be
chosen from among the men of science of the world who have
attained distinction as investigators. The number of Corre- |
sponding Members shall not exceed two hundred, and the num-
ber of Honorary Members shall not exceed fifty.
Article III. None but Fellows and Active Members who
have paid their dues up to and including the last fiscal year,
shall be entitled to vote or to hold office in the Academy.
ArtTIcLE IV. The officers of the Academy shall be a Presi-
dent, as many Vice-Presidents as there are sections of the
Academy, a Corresponding Secretary, a Recording Secretary,
a Treasurer, a Librarian, an Editor, and six Councillors. The
annual election shall be held on the third Monday in December,
the officers then chosen to take office at the first meeting in
January following.
There shall also be elected at the same time a Finance Com-
mittee of three.
ArtIcLe V. The officers named in Article IV shall consti-
tute a Council, which shall be the executive body of the Acad-
emy with general control over its affairs, including the power
to fill ad interim any vacancies that may occur in its offices.
Past Presidents of the Academy shall be ex-officio members of
the Council.
120 ORGANIZATION
ArtTIcLe VI. The President and Vice-presidents shall not be
eligible to more than one reélection until three years after re-
tiring from office ; the Secretaries and Treasurer shall be eligi-
ble to reélection without limitation. The President, Vice-pres-
idents and Secretaries shall be Fellows. The terms of office of
Councillors shall be three years, and these officers shall be so
grouped that two, at least one of whom shall be a Fellow, shall
be elected and two retired each year. Councillors shall not be
eligible to reelection until after the expiration of one year.
ArTIcLE VII. The election of officers shall be by ballot,
and the candidates having the greatest number of votes shall
be declared duly elected.
ArtTIcLE VIII. Ten members, the majority of whom shall be
Fellows, shall form a quorum at any meeting of the Academy
at which business is transacted.
ArticLe IX. The Academy shall establish By-laws, and may
amend them from time to time as therein provided.
ARTICLE X. This constitution may be amended by a vote of
not less than three fourths of the fellows and three fourths of
the active members present and voting at a regular business
meeting of the Academy, provided that such amendment shall
be publicly submitted in writing at the preceding business
meeting, and provided also that the Recording Secretary shall
send a notice of the proposed amendment at least ten days be-
fore the meeting, at which a vote shall be taken, to each fellow
and active member entitled to vote.
ORGANIZATION 121
BY-LAWS.
ADOPTED, OCTOBER 6, 1902.
CHAPTER I.
OFFICERS.
1. President. It shall be the duty of the President to pre-
side at the business and special meetings of the Academy ; he
shall exercise the customary duties of a presiding officer.
2. Vice-Presidents. In the absence of the President, the senior
' Vice-President, in order of Fellowship, shall act as the presid-
ing officer.
3. Corresponding Secretary. The Corresponding Secretary
shall keep a corrected list of the Honorary and Corresponding
Members, their titles and addresses, and shall conduct all cor-
respondence with them. He shall make a report at the Annual
Meeting.
4. Recording Secretary. The Recording Secretary shall
keep the minutes of the Academy proceedings ; he shall have
charge of all documents belonging to the Academy, and of its
corporate seal, which he shall affix and attest as directed by the
Council ; he shall keep a corrected list of the Active Members
and Fellows, and shall send them announcements of the meet-
ings of the Academy ; he shall notify all Members and Fellows
of their election, and committees of their appointment; he
shall give notice to the Treasurer and to the Council of matters
requiring their action, and shall bring before the Academy
business presented by the Council. He shall make a report at
the Annual Meeting.
5. Zreasurer. The Treasurer shall have charge, under the
direction of the Council, of all moneys belonging to the
Academy, and of their investment. He shall receive all fees,
dues, and contributions to the Academy, and any income that
may accrue from property or investment; he shall report to
the Council at its last meeting before the Annual Meeting the
names of members in arrears; he shall keep the property of
rZ2 ORGANIZATION
the Academy insured, and shall pay all debts against the
Academy the discharge of which shall be ordered by the
Council. He shall report to the Council from time to time the
state of the finances, and at the Annual Meeting shall report
to the Academy the receipts and expenditures for the entire
year.
6. Librarian. The Librarian shall have charge of the library,
under the general direction of the Library Committee of the
Council, and shall conduct all correspondence respecting ex-
changes of the Academy. He shall make a report on the con-
dition of the library at the Annual Meeting.
7. Editor. The Editor shall have charge of the publications ~
of the Academy, under the general direction of the Publication
Committee of the Council. He shall make a report on the con-
dition of the publications at the Annual Meeting.
CHAPTER II.
COUNCIL.
1. Meetings. The Council shall meet once a month, or at
the call of the President. It shall have general charge of the
affairs of the Academy.
2. Quorum. Five members of the Council shall constitute a
quorum.
3. Officers. The President, Vice-Presidents, and Recording
Secretary of the Academy shall hold the same offices in the
Council.
4. Committees. The Standing Committees of the Council
shall be : (1) an Executive Committee consisting of the President,
Treasurer, and Recording Secretary ; (2) a Committee on Pub-
lications; (3) a Committee on the Library, and such other
committees as from time to time shall be authorized by the
Council. The action of these committees shall be subject to
revision by the Council.
CuapTer III.
FINANCE COMMITTEE.
1. The Finance Committee of the Academy shall audit the
ORGANIZATION 123
Annual Report of the Treasurer, and shall report on financial
questions whenever called upon to do so by the Council.
CHAPTER IV.
ELECTIONS.
1. Active Members. (a) Active Members shall be nominated
in writing to the Council by at least two Active Members or
Fellows. If approved by the Council, they may be elected at
the succeeding business meeting.
(4) Any Active Member who, having removed to a distance
from the City of New York, shall nevertheless express a desire
to retain his connection with the Academy, may be placed by
vote of the Council on a list of Non-resident Members. Such
members shall relinquish the full privileges and obligations of
Active Members. (Vide Chapters V and X.)
2. Fellows, Corresponding Members, and Honorary Members.
Nominations for Fellows, Corresponding Members and Hono-
rary Members may be made in writing either to the Recording
Secretary or to the Council at its meeting prior to the Annual
Meeting. If approved by the Council, the nominees shall then
be ballotted for at the Annual Meeting.
3. Officers. Nominations for Officers, with the exception of
Vice-Presidents, may be sent in writing to the Recording Sec-
retary, with the name of the proposer, at any time not less
than thirty days before the Annual Meeting. Each section
of the Academy shall nominate a candidate for Vice-Presi-
dent, who, on election, shall be Chairman of the section; the
names of such nominees shall be sent to the Recording Secretary
properly certified by the sectional secretaries, not less than
thirty days before the Annual Meeting. The Council shall
then prepare a list which shall be the regular ticket. This list
shall be mailed to each Active Member and Fellow at least one
week before the Annual Meeting. But any Active Member or
Fellow entitled to vote shall be entitled to prepare and vote an-
other ticket.
124 ORGANIZATION
CHAPTER V.
FEES AND DUES.
1. Fees and Dues. Every Active Member shall pay an ini-
tiation fee of $5 within three months after his election, or such
election shall be void. The annual dues of Active Members
and Fellows shall be $10, payable in advance at the time of the
Annual Meeting; but new members elected after ey 1 shall
pay $5 for the remainder of the fiscal year.
Non-resident Members shall be exempt from dues, so long
as they shall relinquish the privileges of Active Membership.
(Vide Chapter X.)
2. Members in Arrears. Vf any Active Member or Fellow
whose dues remain unpaid for more than one year, shall neg-
lect or refuse to pay the same within three months after notifi-
cation by the Treasurer, his name may be erased from the rolls
by vote of the Council. Upon payment of his arrears, how-
ever, such person may be restored to Active Membership or
Fellowship by vote of the Council.
3. Renewal of Membership. Any Active Member or Fellow
who shall resign because of removal to a distance from the City
of New York, or any Non-resident Member, may be restored by
vote of the Council to Active Membership or Fellowship at any
time upon application without payment of an initiation fee.
CHAPTER VI.
PATRONS AND LIFE MEMBERS.
1. Patrons. Any person contributing at one time $1,000 to
the general funds of the Academy shall be a Patron, and, on
election by the Council, shall enjoy all the privileges of Active
Members.
2. Life Members. Any Active Member or Fellow contribut-
ing at one time $100 to the general funds of the Academy shall
be a Life Member, and shall thereafter be exempt from annual
dues. Any person becoming a Life Member immediately upon
his election as an Active Member shall be exempt from an initia-
tion fee.
ORGANIZATION 125
CHAPTER VII.
SECTIONS.
1. Sections. Sections devoted to special branches of science
may be established or discontinued by the Academy on the
recommendation of the Council. The present sections of the
Academy are the Section of Astronomy, Physics and Chemistry,
the Section of Biology, the Section of Geology and Mineralogy,
and the Section of Anthropology and Psychology.
2. Organization. Each section of the Academy shall have a
Chairman and a Secretary, who shall have charge of the meet-
ings of their Section. The regular election of these officers
shall take place at the October or November meeting of the
section, the officers then chosen to take office at the first meet-
ing in January following.
3. Affiliation. Members of scientific societies affiliated with
the Academy, and members of the Scientific Alliance, or men
of science introduced by members of the Academy, may attend
the meetings and present papers under the general regulations
of the Academy.
CHAPTER VIII.
MEETINGS.
1. Business Meetings. Business meetings of the Academy
shall be held on the first Monday of each month from October
to May inclusive.
2. Sectional Meetings. Sectional meetings shall be held on
Monday evenings from October to May inclusive, and at such
other times as the Council may determine. The sectional
meeting shall follow the business meeting when both occur on
the same evening.
3. Annual Meeting. The Annual Meeting shall be held on
the third Monday in December.
4. Special Meetings. A special meeting may be called by
the Council, provided one week’s notice be sent to each Active
Member and Fellow, stating the object of such meeting.
126 ORGANIZATION
CHAPTER IX.
ORDER OF BUSINESS.
1. Business Meetings. The following shall be the order of
procedure at business meetings :
1. Minutes of the previous business meeting.
Report of the Council.
Reports of Committees.
. Elections.
. Other business.
2. Sectional Meetings. The following shall be the order of
procedure at sectional meetings :
1. Minutes of the preceding meeting of the section.
2. Presentation and discussion of papers.
3. Other scientific business.
3. Annual Meetings. The following shall be the order of
procedure at Annual Meetings:
1. Annual reports of the Corresponding Secretary, Record-
ing Secretary, Treasurer, Librarian, and Editor.
2. Election of Honorary Members, Corresponding Mem-
bers, and Fellows.
. Election of officers for the ensuing year.
4. Annual address of the retiring President.
rt ASS (OSs 1)
W
CHAPTER X.
PUBLICATIONS.
1. Publications. The established publications of the Acad-
emy shall be the Aznals and the Memoirs. They shall be
issued by the Editor under the supervision of the Committee on
Publications.
2. Distribution. One copy of all publications shall be sent
to each Patron, Life Member, Active Member and Fellow, jpro-
vided, that upon enquiry by the Editor such Members or Fel-
lows shall signify their desire to receive them.
3. Publication Fund. Contributions may be received for the
publication fund, and the income thereof shall be applied toward
ORGANIZATION 127
defraying the expenses of the scientific publications of the
Academy.
CHAPTER XI.
GENERAL PROVISIONS.
1. Debts. No debts shall be incurred on behalf of the Acad-
emy unless authorized by the Council.
2. Bills. All bills submitted to the Council must be certi-
fied as to correctness by the officers incurring them.
3. l/nvestments. All the permanent funds of the Academy
shall be invested in United States, or in New York State securi-
ties, or in first mortgages on real estate, provided they shall not
exceed sixty-five per cent. of the value of the property. All
income from patron’s fees, life membership fees, and initiation
fee shall be added to the permanent fund.
4. Expulsion, etc. Any Member or Fellow may be censured,
suspended or expelled, for violation of the Constitution or By-
Laws, or for any offence deemed sufficient, by a vote of three
fourths of the Members and three fourths of the Fellows pres-
ent at any business meeting, provided such action shall have
been recommended by the Council at a previous business meet-
ing, and also, that one month’s notice of such recommendation
and of the offence charged shall have given the Member ac-
cused.
5. Changes in By-Laws. No alteration shall be made in ~
these By-Laws unless it should have been submitted publicly in
writing at a business meeting, shall have been entered on the
Minutes with the names of the Members or Fellows proposing
the same, and shall be adopted by two thirds of the Members
and Fellows present and voting at a subsequent business meet-
ing. :
128 ORGANIZATION.
LIST OF MEMBERS
OF THE
NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES.
June 1, 1903.
LIST OF FELLOWS AND ACTIVE MEMBERS.
JUNE I, 1903.
F = Fellows; L = Life Members; P = Patrons.
Adams, Edward D. (L.), 455 Madison Avenue.
Adler], M.).; 22 Bast 62d sitect:
Allen, J. A. (F.), American Museum of Natural Histo ry.
Allis, Edward Phelps, Jr., Ph.D. (F.), Palais Carnoles Men-
tone, France.
Amend,.B. G. (F.), 120 Hastobh Street.
Anderson, A. A., 80 West 4oth Street.
Andreini, Jose M., 29 West 75th Street.
Anthony, R. A. (L.), 591 Broadway.
Arnold, E. S. F. (F.), M.D., care of Edward M. Wright, 280
Broadway.
Astor, John Jacob, 23 West 26th Street.
Bailey, James M. (L.), 77 Madison Avenue.
Beach, Frederick C., 361 Broadway.
Beard, Daniel C., 204 Amity Street, Flushing, Long Island.
Beck, Fanning, C. T. (F. L.), 78 East 56th Strect.
Beers, M. H., 408-410 Broadway.
ORGANIZATION 129
Berry, Edward W., Haws Building, Passaic, N. J.
Bickmore, Prof. A. S., Ph.D. (F.), American Museum of Nat-
ural History.
Bien, Julius, 140 Sixth Avenue.
Bigelow, Maurice A., Ph.D. (F.), Teachers College.
Biggs, Charles, 13 Astor Place.
Blake, Joseph A., M.D. (F.), 437 West 59th Street.
Bliss, Prof. Charles B. (F. L.), Hockanum, Conn.
Boas, Dr. Franz (F.), American Museum of Natural History.
Bolton, H. Carrington, Ph.D. (F. P.), Cosmos Club, Washing-
ton, D.C;
Boyd, James, 408 West 26th Street.
Bristol, Prof. Charles L. (F.), University Heights.
Bristol, John I. D., 1 Madison Avenue.
Britton, N. L., Ph.D. (F. P.), N. Y. Botanical Garden, Bronx
Park.
Brown, Hon. Addison, LL.D. (F. P.), 45 West 89th Street.
Brown, Alfred S., 160 West 76th Street.
Brown, E. C., 741 St. .Nicholas Avenue.
Brownell, Silas B. (F.), 322 West 56th Street.
Bryan, Walter, M.D., 215 St. John’s Pl., Brooklyn.
Buchner, Prof. Edw. F. (F.), University of Alabama, Univer-
sity, Ala.
Bumpus, Prof. Herman C. (F.), American Museum of Natural
History.
Burnett, Douglass, 42 Livingston Street, Brooklyn, N. Y.
Byrnes, Miss Esther F., Ph.D. (F.), Girls High School, Brook-
lyn, N. Y.
Calkins, Prof. Gary N., Ph.D. (F.), The Beresford, West 81st
Street.
Casey, Major Thomas L., U.S. A. (F. P.), P. O. Drawer 71, St.
Louis, Mo.
Caswell, John H. (F.), 11 West 48th Street.
Cattell, Prof. John McK. (F.), Columbia University.
Chamberlain, Rev. L. T., M.D., The Chelsea, 23d Street, bet.
7th and 8th Avenues.
130 ORGANIZATION
Chandler, Prof. Chas. F., Ph.D., M.D. (F.), Columbia Uni-
versity.
Chapin, Chester W. (P.), 34 West 57th Street.
Chapman, Frank M. (F.), American Museum of Natural His-
tory.
Cheesman, Timothy M., M.D. (F.), Garrisons, N. Y.
Collingwood, Francis (F.), Elizabeth, N. J.
Conkling, Hon. Alfred R., 27 East 1oth Street.
Constant, S. Victor (L.), 420 West 23d Street.
Cooper, Hon. Edward, 12 Washington Square, N. Y.
Cox, Charles F. (F.), 54. Hast 67th Street
Crampton, Prof. Henry E. (F.), Columbia University.
Cunningham, Richard H., M.D. (F.), 200 West 56th Street.
Curtis, Prof. John G., M.D: (F_),°327) West 58th Sirect,
Daily, W. H., 32 Old Jewry, London, E. C., England.
Davies, Wm. G., 34 Nassau Street.
Davis, Charles H., 99 Cedar Street.
Davis, William H., Columbia University.
Day, Wm. S. (F.), 551 West End Avenue.
Dean, Prof. Bashford, Ph.D. (F.), Columbia University.
Delafield, M. L., Jr. (L.), care of Jos. L. Delafield, 35 Nassau
Street.
Devereux, W. B., 99 John Street.
Devoe, F. W., 101 Fulton Street.
DeWitt, W. G., 88 Nassau Street.
Dickerson, Edward N., Washington Life Building, 141 Broad-
Way.
Dix, Rev. Morgan, D.D., 27 West 25th Street.
Dodge, Prof. R. E., M.A. (F.), Teachers College, West 120th
Street.
Dodge, Hon. Wm. E. (P.), 262 Madison Avenue.
Donald, James M., Hanover Nat. Bank, 11 Nassau Street.
Doremus, Prof. Chas. A., Ph.D. (F.), 59 West 51st Street.
Doremus, Prof. R. Ogden, M.D. (F.), 241 Madison Avenue.
Douglas, James (L.), 99 John Street.
Douglass, Alfred, 170 West 59th Street.
ORGANIZATION 131
Draper, Mrs. M. A. P., 271 Madison Avenue.
Drummond, Jsaac W., M.D., 436 West 22d Street.
Dudley, P. H. (F.), 80 Pine Street.
Dunham, Edward K., M.D., 338 East 26th Street.
Dutcher, William (F.), 525 Manhattan Ave.
Du Vivier, Charles L., 22 Warren Street.
Dwight, Jonathan, Jr., M.D. (F.), 2 East 34th Street.
Dyar, Harrison G. (F.), U. S. National Museum, Washing-
fon. DG.
Elliott, Prof. A. H., Ph.D.( L.), 4 Irving Place.
English, George L., 201 East 16th Street.
Eno, Wm. Phelps, 111 Broadway.
Eyerman, John (F.), Easton, Pa.
Fargo, James C., 56 Park Avenue.
Farmer, Alexander S., 140 Rodney Street, Brooklyn.
Farrand, Prof. Livingston, M.D. ( F.), Columbia University.
Fi¢gld, C. de Peyster ( P.), 21 East 26th Street.
Finlay, George I. ( F.), Columbia University.
Foley, Ernest, 108 East 62d Street.
Ford, James B. (L.), 4 East 43d Street.
Franklin, Fred. W., 346 Broadway.
Brssell Ajo.) 530) Pith Avenue:
Gallatin, Frederick, 670 Fifth Avenue.
Gies, Prof. William J. ( F.), 437 West 59th Street.
Gould, Edwin ( P.), Dobbs Ferry, N. Y.
Gould, Frank J., Irvington, N. Y.
Gould, George J. ( P.), 195 Broadway.
Gould, Miss Helen M. (P.), Irvington, N. Y.
Grabau, Prof. Amadeus W. ( F.), Columbia University.
Green, Hon. Andrew H., 214 Broadway.
Hall, James P., Tribune Building, Editorial Rooms.
Hallock, Prof. William ( F.), Columbia University.
Havemeyer, William F., 29 West roth Street.
132 ORGANIZATION
Hay, O. P., Ph.D. ( F.), American Museum of Nat. Hist.
Heller, Max, 312 West goth Street.
Hering, Prof. Daniel W. (F.), University Heights.
Herrman, Mrs. Esther (P.), 20 West 72d Street.
Herter, Christian A., M.D. (F.), 839 Madison Avenue.
Hewitt, Edward R., Garden City, L. I.
Finton, John EH. °M-Di-(F~ Pia Westte2d Stree
Hitchcock, Miss F. R. M., Ph.D. (F.), 4038 Walnut Street,
Philadelphia, Pa.
Hitchcock, Romyn, 20 Broad Street.
Hoffman, S. V., Morristown, N. J.
Hollick, Arthur, Ph.D. (F.), N. Y. Botanical Garden, Bronx
Park.
Holst, 1. J. RK. 52 Union Square, i
Holt, Charles, 255 West 45th Street.
Holt, Henry (L.), 29 West 23d Street.
Hoppin, Wm. W., 111 Broadway.
Hornaday, Wm. T. (F.), 183d Street and Southern Boulevard.
Hovey, Edmund Otis, Ph.D. (F.), Am. Mus. Nat. Hist.
Howe, Prof. Henry M. (F.), Columbia University.
Howe, Marshall A. (F.), N. Y. Botanical Garden, Bronx Park.
Hoyt, Alfred M., 1 Broadway.
Hubbard, Walter C., Room 25, Cotton Exchange.
Huntington, Geo. S., M.D. (F.), 50 East 73d Street.
Hyde, B. Talbot B. (L.), 82 Washington Street.
Hyde, E. Francis, Hotel Netherlands.
Hyde, Fr. E., M.D. (.)) zo West 53d Street:
Hyde, Henry St. J., 210 East 18th Street.
Iles, George (L.), 5 Brunswick Street, Montreal, Can.
Irving, John D., Ph.D. (F.), U. S. Geological Survey, Washing-
ton;.2).2€.
Jacobi, Abram, M.D. (F.), 110 West 34th Street.
Jacoby, Prof. Harold (F.), Columbia University.
James, D. Willis, 40 East 39th Street.
Jesup, Morris K., 197 Madison Avenue.
ORGANIZATION 1338
Julien, Alexis A., Ph.D. (F. P.), Columbia University.
Kane, S. Nicholson, Knickerbocker Club.
Kemp, Prof. James F. (F. L.), Columbia University.
Kendig, Rev. A. B., 69 Centre Street, Brookline, Mass.
Kennedy, John S., 6 West 57th Street.
Keppler, Rudolph (L.), 28 West 7oth Street.
Keyser, Samuel K., 14 East 36th Street.
Kunz, George F. (F.), care of Tiffany & Co., 15 Union Square.
Lamb, Osborn R. (L.), 356 West 22d Street.
Langdon, Woodbury G., 719 Fifth Avenue.
Langmann, Gustav, M.D., 121 West 57th Street.
Laudy, Louis H., Ph.D. (F.), Columbia University.
Lawrence, Amos E., 1 West 81st Street.
Lawton, James M. J. (L.), care of Mr. Joseph Seeley, Produce
Exchange Building.
ieeao, Es Garera PS Brazilian; Consulate, 17; State Street:
Medeties Ernest), 7bhe). 471 West pasd Street:
Medouss, Albert Ke; Ph.D: (F-),-99 John Street:
Wee, Prot. Frederic S: (F:), 437 West Soth Street.
Leeds, Prof. A. R. (F. P.), g00 Hudson Street, Hoboken, N. J.
Lembke, Chas. F., 21 Union Square.
Levison, W. Goold, Ph.D. (F. P.), 1435 Pacific Street, Brook-
lyn; Ne ¥-
Lichtenstein, Paul, 48 Exchange Place.
Linville, H. R., Ph.D. (F.), 60 West 13th Street.
Lloyd, Prof. Francis E. (F.), Teachers College, 120th Street,
West.
Eoeb, Prof. Motris, Ph.D. (F.), 118 West 72d Street.
Loeb, Solomon, 37 East 38th Street.
Lough, Prof. J. E. (F.), School of Pedagogy, N. Y. University,
ove, HG. PhoD. (F.), 80 Hast.5 5th’ Street.
Low, Hon. Seth (L.), Columbia University.
Luquer, Lea McL. (F.), Columbia University.
Lusk, Prof. Graham F., N. Y. Univ. and Med. College.
McClintock, Emory (F.), Mutual Life Insurance Co., 32 Nassau
Street.
134 ORGANIZATION
McCook, Col. J. J. (L.), to West 54th Street.
McKim, Rev. Haslett, 9g West 48th Street.
McMillin, Emerson, 40 Wall Street.
McNulty, Prof. John J., 17 Lexington Avenue.
MacDougall, Prof. Robert (F.), School of Pedagogy, N. Y.
University.
MacHaughton, James, 16 Central Park West.
Maitland, Alexander, 45 Broadway.
Marble, Manton, Bedford, Westchester Co., N. Y.
Marston, Edwin S., 291 Clinton Avenue, Brooklyn, N. Y.
Martin, Prof. Daniel S. (F. L.), 756 Quincy Street, Brooklyn,
1. a
Martin, T. Cumerford (F.), The Monterey, West 114th Street.
Mathew, W. D., Ph.D. (F.), Amer. Mus. Nat. Hist.
Mason, Wm. L., 170 Fifth Avenue.
Mayer, Alfred Goldsborough, Ph.D., 34 Plaza Street, Brooklyn.
Mead, Walter H. (P.), 67 Wall Street.
Meltzer, S. J., M.D. (F.), 166 West 126th Street.
Merrill, Fred. J. H. (F.), N. Y. State Museum, Albany, N. Y.
Meyer, Adolph, M.D. (F.), Pathological Institute.
Meyer, Thomas C., Union Club.
Miller, Geo. N., M.D., 811 Madison Avenue.
Mitchell, Edward, 31 East 50th Street.
Mitchell, John Murray, 17 Broad Street.
Mitchell, S. Alfred, Ph.D. (F.), Columbia University.
Morgan, J. Pierpont, 219 Madison Avenue.
Mortimer, W. Golden, M.D., 504 West 146th Street.
Moses, Prof. Alfred J. (F.), Columbia University.
Munsell, C. E., Ph.D., 2110 Horatio Street.
Niven, William, P. O. Box 681, High Bridge, N. Y.
Nott, F. J., M.D., 544 Madison Avenue.
Ogilvie, Miss Ida H. (L.), Sherman Square Hotel.
Olcott, E. E. (L.), 38 West 39th Street. |
Osborn, Prof. Henry F., Sc.D., LL.D. (F.), 850 Madison
Avenue.
ORGANIZATION 135
Parker, Prof. Herschel C. (F.), Columbia University.
Parsons, John E., 111 Broadway.
Patten, John (L.), 19 Liberty Street.
Peckham, Wheeler H., 685 Madison Avenue.
Pell, Mrs. Alfred, 206 Madison Avenue.
Pellew, Prof. Chas. E. (F.), 68 East 54th Street.
Peterson, Frederic, M.D. (F.), 4 West 50th Street.
Pettigrew, David Lyman, Box 75, Worcester, Mass.
Pfister, ‘J. C. (F.), Columbia University.
Phoenix, Lloyd, 21 East 33d Street.
Pierson, Israel C. (F.), 21 Cortlandt Street.
Piffard, Henry G., M.D. (F.), 256 West 57th Street.
Pitkin, Lucius (F.), 47 Fulton Street.
Poor, Charles Lane, Ph.D. (F.), 4 East 48th Street.
Post, C. A. (F.), 16 Exchange Place.
Post, George B. (F.), 11 West 21st Street.
Prime, Temple (P.), Huntington, L. I.
Prince, Prof. John D. (F.), 31 West 38th Street.
Prudden, Prof. T. Mitchell (F.), 437 West 59th Street.
Pupin, Prof. M. I., Ph.D. (F.), Columbia University.
Quackenbos, Prof. J. D., 331 West 28th Street.
Rees, Prof. John K. (F.), Columbia University.
Reuter, L. H., M.D., Merck Building.
Ricketts, Prof. Pierre de P. (F.), 104 John Street.
Riederer, Ludwig, 251 West 95th Street.
Ries, Heinrich (F.), Cornell University, Ithaca, N. Y.
Riley, R. Hudson, Bensonhurst, N. Y.
Robb, Hon. J. Hampden, 23 Park Avenue.
Rogers, Henry H., 26 East 57th Street.
Rusby, Henry H., M.D. (F.), 809 De Graw Avenue, Newark,
N. J
Russak, Frank, 46 Exchange Place.
Schermerhorn, F. A. (L.), 61 University Place.
Schuyler, Philip, Nevis, Irvington P. O., N. Y.
136 ORGANIZATION
Senff, Charles H. (P.), 300 Madison Avenue.
Shiland, Andrew, Jr., 262 West 78th Street.
Shultz, (Chas-'S:, Hoboken; NEE
Sickles, Ivan, M.D. (F.), 17 Lexington Avenue.
Sieberg, W. H. J., Hotel Winthrop, 7th Ave. and 125th Street.
Sloan, Samuel (P.), 26 Exchange Place.
Smith, Ernest E., M.D., Ph.D., 262 Fifth Avenue.
Starr, Prof. M. Allen (F.), 5 West 54th Street.
Stetson, Francis Lynde (L.), 4 East 74th Street.
Stevens, George T., M.D., 22 East 46th Street.
Stevenson, Prof. J. J. (F. 12))503 West Mind Awente:
Stokes, James, 49 Cedar Street.
Stone, Mason A., 161 Broadway.
Stratford, Prof. Wm., Ph.D. (F.), 17 Lexington Avenue.
strong, Prof. Chas. A., Ph.D. (F.), Lakewood, N- j.,)Box 208.
Stuyvesant, Rutherford (F.), 246 East Fifteenth Street.
Sumner, Francis B., Ph.D. (F.), 17 Lexington Avenue.
Taggart, Rush, 319 West 75th Street.
Watlock, John, Jr°(E. Le RROs Boxcst94:
Terry, James (L.), New Haven, Conn.
Thompson, Prof. W. Gilman (F.), 44 East 34th Street.
Thorndike, Edw. L., Ph.D. (F.), Prof., Teachers College.
Townsend, Charles H., New York Aquarium.
Tows, C. D., 34 West 52d) Street.
Tripler, Chas. E., 121 West 89th Street.
Trotter, Alfred W. (F.), 71 Broadway.
Trowbridge, Chas. C. (F.), Columbia University.
Tuckerman, Alfred, 1123 Broadway.
Underwood, Prof. L. M., Ph.D. (I.), Columbia University.
Van Beuren, Fred. T., 21 West 14th Street.
Van Brunt, Cornelius (F.), 319 East 57th Street.
van Ingen, Gilbert (F.), N. Y. State Mus., Albany, N. Y.
Van Slyck, George W. (L.), 120 Broadway.
Von Nardroff, E. R. (F.), 360 Tompkins Avenue, Brooklyn.
ORGANIZATION 137
Wainwright, John W., M.D., 177 West 83d Street.
Waller, Prof. Elwyn, Ph.D. (F.), 7 Franklin Place, Morristown,
INA
Warburg, F. N., 18 East 72d Street.
Ward, Delancey W., 247 Sanford Avenue, Flushing, N. Y.
Washington, H. S., M.D. (F.), Locust, N. J.
Waterbury, John I., Morristown, N. J.
Whitfield, Prof. R. P. (F.), American Museum of Natural
History.
Whitman, Alvord A., 305 West 78th Street.
Wicke, William, 36 East 22d Street.
Wiener, Joseph, M.D., 1046 Fifth Avenue.
Wiggin, Frederick H., 55 West 36th Street.
Wills, Chas. T., 156 Fifth Avenue.
Wilson, Prof. Edmund B., Ph.D., LL.D. (F.), Columbia Uni-
versity.
Wolff, Alfred R., 15 West 89th Street.
Wood, William H. S., 45 East roth Street.
Woodbridge, Prof. F. J. E. (F.), Columbia University.
Woodward, Prof. R. S. (F.), Columbia University.
Woodhull, Prof. John F., Ph.D. (F.), Teachers College, West
120th Street.
Woodworth, R. S. (F.), N. Y. Univ. Med. College, Bellevue
Hospital.
Wortman, J. L. (F.), Yale Univ., New Haven, Conn.
Younglove, John, M.D., 407 Jefferson Avenue, Elizabeth, N. J.
Zabriskie, George, 21 Broad Street.
138 ORGANIZATION
PATRONS.
JUNE I, 1903.
Bolton, H. Carrington, Cosmos Club, Washington, D. C.
Britton, Dr. Nathaniel Lord, Director Botanical Garden, Bronx
Park, New York City.
Casey, Major Thomas L., P. O. Drawer 71, St. Louis, Mo.
Chapin, Chester W., 34 West 57th Street, New York City.
Dodge, William E., 262 Madison Avenue, New York City.
Field, C. de Peyster, 127 Water Street, New York City.
Gould, Edwin, Dobbs Ferry, N. Y.
Gould, George J., 195 Broadway.
Gould, Miss Helen, Dobbs Ferry, N. Y.
Herrmann, Mrs. Esther, 59 West 56th Street, New York City.
Hinton, John H., M.D., 41 West 32d Street, New York City.
Leeds, Prof. Albert R., g00 Hudson Street, Hoboken, N. J.
Levison, W. Goold, Ph.D., 1435 Pacific Street, Brooklyn, N. Y.
Mead, Walter H., 67 Wall Street, New York City.
Senff, Charles H., 300 Madison Avenue, New York City.
Sloan, Samuel, 26 Exchange Place, New York City.
ORGANIZATION 139
HONORARY MEMBERS.
JUNE I, 1903.
1887. Agassiz, Alexander. Director Museum Comparative
Zoology, Harvard University, Cambridge, Mass.
1898. Auwers, Arthur. Professor of Physics and Mathe-
matics, University of Berlin, Berlin, Germany.
1889. Barrois, Charles, M.D. Professor of Geology, Uni-
versity of Lille, President Geological Society of France, Rue
Pascal 37 -Lille, France.
1898. Brooks, William K. Professor of Invertebrate Zool-
ogy, Johns Hopkins University, Baltimore, Md.
ige7. Wallinger, Kev. Wm. Henry. DID DW Se:;. Di Cu,
DED Sel ix. Ingleside) Lee, Mondon Soe.) England:
1899. Darwin, George Howard, M.A., F.R.S., Professor of
Astronomy, Trinity College, Cambridge, England.
1876. Dawkins, W. Boyd. Professor of Geology and Pale-
ontology, Victoria University, Owens College, Manchester,
England.
1876. Geikie, Sir Archibald, F.R.S. Former Director Gen-
eral of Geological Survey of Great Britain and Ireland, 28
Jermyn Street, London S. W., England.
1889. Gibbs, Wolcott, LL.D. Professor Emeritus of the
Application of Science to the Useful Arts, Harvard University,
Newport, R. I.
1898. Gill, David, LL.D., F.R.S. His Majesty’s Astrono-
mer, Royal Observatory, Cape of Good Hope, Africa.
1889. Goodale, George Lincoln, M.D., LL.D. Professor of
Natural History and Botany, Harvard University, Cambridge,
Mass.
food. paaeckel, Ernst, .M.Dy; PhD, "Se). 1D: Pro-
fessor of Zoology and Director of Zoological Institute in the
University of Jena, Jena, Weimar, Germany.
1889. Hall, Asaph. Professor of Mathematics (retired), U. S.
Navy, Norfolk, Conn.
1899. Hann, Julius, Ph.D. Professor of Meteorology, Uni-
versity of Vienna, Vienna, Austria.
140 ORGANIZATION
1864. Hartlaub, Gustav, M.D. Assistant Director, Museum
of Natural History, Bremen, Germany.
Toos.. Hill, Geo. W., LL.D. ~ West Nyack IN. Y-
1896. Hubrecht, Ambrosius, A. W. Professor of Zoology
and Comparative Anatomy in the University of Utrecht,
Utrecht, Netherlands.
1670.~ Kelvin, The Right) ion Word. iG@l ono
G.C.V.O. President of the Royal Society of Edinburgh, 28
Chester Square, London, England.
1896. Klein, Felix, Ph.D. Professor of Mathematics in the
University of Gottingen, Wilhelm Weber, Strasse 3, Gottingen,
Germany.
1876. Lang, Victor E. von. Professor of Physics in the
University of Vienna, Secretary Imperial Academy of Sciences,
Vienna, Austria.
1887. Langley, Samuel Pierpont, LL.D. Secretary of —
sonian Institution, Washington, D. C.
Faos. Lankester, Ey Ray, Law: P.R IS, Wirector = brisk
Museum of Natural History, Cromwell Road, S. W., London,
England. |
1880. Lockyer, Sir Norman, L.D:, FR:S- Professervef
Astronomy in the Royal College of Science, Solar Physics
Observatory, South Kensington, England.
1901. Leydig, Prof. Franz von. Professor in the School of
Medicine, Bonn, Germany (retired), Wurzburg, Germany.
1898. Moissan, Henri. Professor of Chemistry in the Uni-
versity of Paris, Rue Vauguelin 7, Paris, France.
1898. Nansen, Fridtjof, M.D. Professor of Zoology in the
Royal Fredericks University, Christiania, Norway.
1891. Newcomb, Simon. Professor of Mathematics (re-
tired), U. S. N., 1620 P Street, Washington, D. C.
1898. Penck, Albrecht. Professor of Geography in the
University of Vienna, Vienna, Austria.
1898. Pfeffer, Wm. Professor of Botany in the University
of Leipzig, Leipzig, Germany.
1900. Pickering, Edward Charles, LL.D. Paine Professor
of Practical Astronomy, Harvard University, Cambridge, Mass.
ORGANIZATION 141
1900. Poincare, Jules Henri, F.R.S. Professor of Mathe-
matical Physics, Faculty of Science, Paris, France.
1899. Rayleigh, Lord, LL.D., F.R.S. Professor of Natural
Philosophy in the Royal Institution of Great Britain, Albemarle
Street, W., London.
1898. Reusch, Hans H., M.D. Professor of Geology;
Head of Norwegian Geological Investigations, Christiania,
Norway.
Hoo veekoscoe, oltre henry Enteldeiore. 1, EL. De PORES,
Vice Chancellor University of London, 10 Braham Gardens,
London S. W., England.
1887. Rosenbusch, Karl Henry Ferdinand. Professor of
Mineralogy and Geology, University of Heidelberg, Heidelberg,
Germany.
reoo. Lhomson, Joseph, John, Se Dee EL Ds LR.S. \Pro-
fessor of Experimental Physics in Cambridge University, Caven-
dish Laboratory, Cambridge, England.
ro00, Dylon Edwardiburett, LED, DC. Ess: »Pro-
fessor of Anthropology, Balliol College, University of Oxford,
Oxford, England.
oye. Young, Charles, Aucustus,, LL.D: | Professor «of
Astronomy in Princeton University, Princeton, N. J.
1898. Zittel, Karl Alfred Ritter von. Professor of Geology
and Paleontology in the Royal Bavarian Ludwig-Maximilian
University, Munich, Germany.
142 ORGANIZATION
CORRESPONDING MEMBERS.
JUNE I, 1903.
1883. Abbe, Cleveland. Professor of Meteorology in Colum-
bian University, Editor Monthly Weather Review, Weather
Bureau in the Department of Agriculture, Washington, D. C.
1883. Abbott, Charles Conrad, M.D. Trenton, N. J.
1883. Acosta, Antonio Gordon y, M.D. President of the
Dispensaries of Havana, San Nicolas 54, Havana, Cuba.
1898. Adams, Frank D. Professor of Geology in McGill
University, Montreal, Canada.
1891. Aguilera, Jose G. Escuela de Mineria, Mexico, Mex.
1890. Alexander, Wm. DeWitt. Surveyor General of the
Hawaiian Islands, Honolulu, Hawaii.
1899. Andrews, C. W., M.D. Ass’t Keeper of Geology,
British Museum of Natural History, Cromwell Road, London
Sree ng.
1876. Appleton, John Howard, M. A. Professor of Chemis-
try, Brown University, 209 Angell Street, Providence, R. I.
1899. Baker, J. G. Keeper of the Herbariums and the
Library, Royal Botanic Gardens, Kew, England.
1898. Balfour, I. B. Professor of Botany in the University
of Edinburgh, Edinburgh, Scotland.
1878. Bell, Alexander Graham. President National Geo-
graphic Society, Washington, D. C.
1889. Beaumont, J. Vineland, N. J.
1867. Berthoud, Edward L., M.A., M.E. Golden, Jeffer-
son Co., Col:
1883. Bertrand, Emile. Professor of Geology in the Ecole
des Mines, Paris, France.
1897. Bolton, Herbert, F.R.S.E. Curator and Secretary,
Bristol Museum, Bristol, England.
1899. Boltzmann, Ludwig. Professor of Physics in the
University of Leipzig, Leipzig, Germany.
1863. Bombicci-Porta, Cav. Com. Louis. Professor of
Mineralogy and Applied Geology in the University of Bologna,
Bologna, Italy.
ORGANIZATION 143
1899. Boulenger, G. A. Assistant Keeper in Zoology, Brit-
ish Museum of Natural History, London, England.
1874. Brandegee, T.S. San Diego, California.
1884. Branner, John G., Ph.D., LL.D. Professor of Geology
and Vice-President of the Leland Stanford Jr. University, Stan-
ford University, Cal.
1894. Branner, Bohnslor, Ph.D. Professor of Chemistry,
Bohemian University, Prague, Bohemia.
1874. Brewster, William. Ornithologist, 145 Brattle Street,
Cambridge, Mass.
1899. Brogger, W. C. Professor of Geology and Mineral- |
ogy in the Royal Fredericks University, Christiania, Norway.
1876. Brush, George Jarvis. Professor of Mineralogy, Yale
University, New Haven, Conn.
1876. Caldwell, George Chapman. Professor of Chemistry
in Cornell University, Ithaca, N. Y.
1876. Carmichael, Henry, Ph.D. Analytical Chemist, 12
Pearl Street, Boston, Mass.
1898. Carruthers, Wm. C., M.D. Consulting Botanist
Royal Agricultural Society of England, British Museum, Lon-
don, England.
1898. Chamberlin, T.C. Head Professor of Geology in the
University of Chicago, Chicago, IIl.
1876. Chandler, W. H. Professor of Chemistry, Librarian
of Lehigh University, Bethlehem, Pa.
1876. Clarke, Frank Wigglesworth, Chief Chemist U. S.
Geological Survey, Washington, D. C.
1891. Clerc, L. Professor of Botany, Ekaterinburg, Russia.
1877. Comstock, Theo. B., Sc.D. (President Mining Co.).
535 Stimson Block, Los Angeles, Cal.
1868. Cooke, M. C., M.A. Former Keeper of Herbarium,
Royal Botanical Garden, Kew, 53 Castle Road, Kenlish Town
N.W., England.
1876. Cornwall, H. B. Professor of Analitical Chemistry
and Mineralogy, Princeton University, Princeton, N. J.
1880. Cory, Charles B. Professor of Natural History, Field
Columbian Museum, Chicago, Ill., 160 Boylston Street, Boston,
Mass.
144 ORGANIZATION
1877. Crawford, Joseph, Ph.G. 2822 Frankford Avenue,
Philadelphia, Pa.
1866. Credner, Hermann, Ph.D. Professor of Geology and
Paleontology in the University of Leipzig ; Director of Geolog-
ical Survey of the Kingdom of Saxony, Leipzig, Germany.
1895. Cushing, Henry P. Professor of Geology in Western
Reserve University, Adelbert College, Cleveland, O.
1890. D’Achiardi, Antonio, Ph.D. Professor of Mineralogy
in the University of Pisa, 12 Via San Martino, Pisa, Italy.
1879. Dale, T. Nelson. Geologist of the U. S. Geological
Survey ; Instructor in Geology and Botany in Williams Col-
lege, Wiiliamstown, Mass.
1870. Dall, Wm. Healey, M.A. Curator Department of
Mollusks in the U. S. Nat. Mus., Smithsonian Institution,
Washington, D. C.
1885. Dana, Edward Salisbury, Ph.D. Professor of Physics
in Yale University, 119 Grove Street, New Haven, Conn.
1898. Davis, Wm. M., Sturgis Hooper. Professor of Geol-
ogy, Harvard University, Cambridge, Mass.
1894. Deane, Ruthven. President Illinois Audubon Society,
30 Michigan Ave., Chicago, II.
1899. Depéret, Charles, Ph.D. Professor of Physical Geog-
raphy in the University of Lyons, Lyons, France.
1890. Derby, Orville A., F.G.S. Chief of Geographical and
Geological Commission, Sao Paulo, Brazil.
1899. Dollo, Louis, Ph.D. Conservateur Musée Royal
d’ Histoire Naturelle, Brussels, Belgium.
1876. Drown, Thomas Messinger, LL.D. President of
Lehigh University, South Bethlehem, Pa.
1868. Duns, J., D.D., BOR .S a9 (Professor of Naturals see
ence in College of Edinburgh, Edinburgh, Scotland.
1876. Elliot, Henry W. Naturalist and Artist, U. S. Geol.
Survey, Lakewood, Cuyahoga County, O.
1880. Elliott, John B. Professor of Theoretical and Practical
Medicine in Tulane University, New Orleans, La.
1869. Engelhardt, Francis E., Ph.D. Chemist to Syracuse
Board of Health, 7 Clinton Block, Syracuse, N. Y.
ORGANIZATION 145
1878. Ernst, A., Ph.D. Professor of Natural History in the
University of Caracas and Director of Museum, Caracas, Vene-
zuela.,
1879. Fairchild, Herman LeRoy, B.S. Professor of Geology
in the University of Rochester, Rochester, N. Y.
1887. Fensi, Sebastiana. Florence, Italy.
1879. Fittica, Friedrich Bernhard, Ph.D. Professor of Chem-
istry in the University of Marburg, Marburg, Germany.
1885. Fletcher, Lazarus, M.A., F.R.S. Keeper of Minerals
in the British Museum, 36 Woodville Road, Ealing, London
W., England.
1899. Fraas, Eberhard, Ph.D. Trustee of Kgl. Naturalien-
Kabinet, Stuttgart, Germany.
ogo, Franchet, A:, PhD. Paris); France.
1879. Fritzgartner, Reinhold, Ph.D., M.E. State Geologist
of Honduras, Director National Mint, Tegucigalpa, Honduras.
1670. (Gilbert; G», Ke. “Geologist of the U-)S:i-Geological
Survey, Washington, | Dies Ge
1858. Gill, Theodore N., M.D. Professor of Zoology, Co-
lumbian University, Washington, D. C.
1876. Gilman, Daniel C., LL.D. President of the Carnegie
Institution, Washington, D. C.
1865. Goessmann, Charles A., Ph.D., LL.D. Professor of
Chemistry in the Massachusetts Agricultural College, Amherst,
Mass.
1888. Gooch, Frank Austin. Professor of Chemistry in
Yale University, New Haven, Conn.
1883. Grattarola, Guiseppe. Professor of Mineralogy,
School of Pharmacy, Florence, San Marco, Florence, Italy.
1868. Greenleaf, R. C. Honorary Professor, Military and
Public Hygiene in the University of California, care of Surgeon
General, U. S. A., Washington, D. C.
1883. Gregorio, Marquis Antonio de, Ph.D. Editor of the
Annals of Geol. and Palaeon., Palermo, Sicily, Italy.
1877. Groth, Paul Heinrich. Professor of Mineralogy in
the Royal Bayr. Ludwig-Maximilians University, Hamburg,
Germany.
146 ORGANIZATION
1890. Gudeman, Edward, M.D. Associate Professor Clas-
sical Philology, University of Pennsylvania, Philadelphia, Pa.
1898. Hale, George E. Professor of Astronomy and
Physics in the University of Chicago, Yerkes Observatory,
Williams Bay, Wis.
1882. Hesse-Wartegg, Count Ernest von. New York,
NY.
1867...Hitchcock, C. H., LEAD: > Professor of \Geolosy mim
Dartmouth College, Hanover, N. H.
1900. Holmes, William Henry. Curator U. S. National
Museum (Anthropology), Washington, D. C.
1890: Hoskold, H. D., C. ct NE. F.GSs.” \DirectonsGen-
eral National Department of Mines and Geology, Santa Fe
2043, Buenos-Ayres, Argentine Republic.
1877. Howard, Thomas D., Jr. Perth Amboy, N. J.
1899. Howes, G. B., LL.D., F.R.S. Professor of Compar-
ative Anatomy, Zoology, University of London, London, Eng-
land.
1876. Hyatt, James, Sc.D. Stanfordville, Duchess Co., N. Y
1896. Iddings, J. P. Professor of Patrology in the Univer-
sity of Chicago, Chicago, Ill.
1875. Iles, Malvern W. Metallurgist, Globe Smelting Co.,
Denver, Colorado.
1899. Innes, Walter, M.D. School of Medicine, Cairo,
Egypt.
1892. Jack, Robert L. Director Geological Survey of
Queensland, Brisbane, Queensland.
1899. Jaeckel, Otto, Ph.D. Professor Geology in Konig-
lichen Museum fiir Naturkunde, Invalidenstrasse 43, Berlin,
Germany.
1883. Jannettaz, Pierre Michel Edouard. Instructor of
Geology in School of Architecture, Boulevard Saint Germain
86, Paris, France.
1876. Johnson, Samuel W., M.A. Professor Emeritus of
Agricultural Chemistry in Yale University, 24 Turnbull Street,
New Haven, Conn.
1876. Jordan, David Starr, M.D., Ph.D:, LED: “President
of Leland Stanford Jr. University, Stanford University, California.
ORGANIZATION 147
1876. Koenig, George A., Ph.D. Professor of Chemistry
and Metallurgy in the Michigan College of Mines, Houghton,
Mich.
1899. Kohlrausch, Friedrich, Ph.D. (Prof.). President of the
Physikalish-Technische Reichsanstalt, Charlottenberg, March-
strasse 23, Berlin.
1887. Koltzoff-Massalsky, Princess Helene. Florence, Italy.
1890. Kroutschoff, Baron K. de. St. Petersburg, Russia.
1888. Kukio, Baron R. Privy Counsellor and President-
General of the Imperial Museum of Japan, Tokio, Japan.
Wego. KulibingS:; MB. \- Mining) Dept.; St Petersburg;
Russia.
1890. Lacroix, Alfred. Professor of Mineralogy in the
Museum of Natural History of Paris, Rue Cuvier 57, Paris,
France.
1876. Langley, John W., Ph.D. Professor of Electrical
Engineering in the Case School of Applied Science, Cleveland,
Ohio.
1900. L’apparent, Albert de. Professor of Mineralogy,
Geology and Physical Geography, Ecole Libre des Hautes
Etudes, Paris, France.
1876. Lattimore, S. A. Professor of Chemistry, in Univer-
sity of Rochester, 271 University Avenue, Rochester, N. Y.
1890. Laussedat, Col. Aimé. Director of the National Con-
servatory of Arts and Sciences, Rue St. Martin 292, Paris,
France.
1876. Le Jolis, Auguste Francois. Directeur de la Societe
National des Sci. Nat. et Math. of Cherbourg, Rue de la Duche
29, Cherbourg, France.
1894. Libbey, Wm. Jr. Professor of Physical Geography,
Princeton University, Princeton, N. J.
1899. Liversidge, Archibald, Ph.D. Professor of Chemis-
try, University of Sydney, Sydney, New South Wales.
1869. Mackie, Simon F., M.A. Salt Lake City, Utah.
1876. Macloskie, George. Professor of Biology in Prince-
ton University, Princeton, N. J.
noo: Malle ‘John William). MDL Phi. e:D:F-R.S.
148 ORGANIZATION
Professor of Chemistry in the University of Virginia, Charlotte-
ville, Va.
1871. Mann, Charles Riborg. Associate in Physics, Uni-
versity of Chicago, Chicago, III.
1867. Matthew, George F., Sc.D., LL.D., F.R.S.C. Curator
of Natural History Museum Society New Brunswick Museum,
St. John N. B., Canada.
1874. Maynard, Charles Johnson. Naturalist of Newton
Natural History Society, 477 Crafts Street, West Newton,
Mass.
1974. Mead, Theodor Luquer, ‘CE Oviedo, Mala,
1888. Meek, Seth E., Curator, Department of Zoology, Field
Columbian Museum, Chicago, IIl.
1892. Mendizabal-Temborrel, J. de. Sociedad Alzate,
Mexico.
1374. Merriam, Clinton Tart), M.D. (Chief of U.S: 381e-
logical Survey, Washington, D. C.
1898. Merriman, Mansfield, C.E. Professor .of Civil Engi-
neering, Lehigh University, Bethlehem, Pa.
1890. Meyer, A. B., M.D. Director of the Royal Zoologi-
cal, Anthropological and Ethnological Museum, Dresden,
Germany.
1885. Michie, P. S. Professor of Mathematics at the U. S.
Military Academy, West: Point, N. Y.
1900. Mitsakuri, Kakichi, Ph.D. Professor of Zoology, Im-
perial University of Tokyo.
1878. Minot, Charles Sedgwick, LL.D. Professor of His-
tology and Human Embryology in the Harvard Medical
School, Boston, Mass.
1876. Mixter, William Gilbert. Professor of Chemistry in
the Sheffield Scientific School of Yale University, New Haven,
Conn.
1890. Moldehnke, Richard G. G., E.M., Ph.D. Consulting
Metallurgist, Box 432, N. Y. City.
1895. Morgan, C. Lloyd, A.M. Professor of Anatomy,
University College, Bristol, England.
1864. Morse, Edward S., Ph.D. Director of the Peabody
Academy Science, Salem, Mass.
ORGANIZATION 149
1898. Murray, George R. M.,:M.C. Keeper of Botany,
British Museum, London, England.
Netto, Ladislaus. Professor of Mathematics, Hes-
sische-Ludwigs University, Giessen, Germany.
1866. Newton, Alfred, F.R.S. Professor of Zoology and
Comparative Anatomy in the University of Cambridge, Mag-
dalen College, Cambridge, England.
1882. Nichols, Henry Alfred Alford, M.D., M.R.C.S. Med-
ical Officer of Public Institutions, Domincia, Br. West Indies.
1884. Nicolis, Enrico de. Professor and Custodian in Museo
Civico, Verona, Italy.
1881. Niles; Wm. H. Emeritus Professor of Geology and
Geography in Massachusetts Institute of Technology, Boston,
Mass.
1880. Nolan, Edward J., M.D. Recording Secretary and
Librarian of the Academy Natural Sciences of Philadelphia,
Logan Square, Philadelphia, Pa.
1879. Ober, Frederick A. Ornithologist, Smithsonian Insti-
tution, Washington, D. C.
1876. Ordway, John M. Professor of Chemistry and Engi-
neering, Tulane University, New Orleans, La.
1898. Ostwald, Wilhelm, Professor of Chemistry, University
of Leipzig, Leipzig, Germany.
1866. Packard, Alpheus Spring, M.D. Professor of Zool-
ogy and Geology, Brown University, 275 Angell Street, Provi-
dence: kT.
1900. Parker, George Howard, Ph.D. Professor of Zodlogy
Harvard University, Cambridge, Mass.
1876. Peckham, Stephen F., M.A. Chemist, 286 Broad-
way, N. Y. City.
1876. Perkins, Maurice F. Professor of Analytical Chem-
istry Union College, Schenectady, N. Y.
fes2) -rhene, john Samuel, LED!) 5\Carlton Terrace;
Oakley Street, London, England.
1883. Pisani, F. Professor of Chemistry and Mineralogy in
the Naples University, Naples, Italy.
1368. Post) Rev) George’ &., M.A., M.D) Professor _ of
Surgery in the Syrian College, Beirut, Syria.
150 ORGANIZATION
1871. Potter, W. B. Mining Engineer, 1225 Spruce Street,
St. Louis, Mo.
1894. Poulton, Edward Bagnall. Professor of Zoology,
Oxford University, Oxford, England.
1876. Prescott, Albert B. Professor of Organic Chemistry
and Director of the Chemical Laboratory in the University of
Michigan, Ann Arbor, Mich.
1877. Prime, Frederick, Ph.D. Secretary American Philo-
sophical Society, Philadelphia, Pa.
1868. Pumpelly, Raphael. U.S. Geological Survey, New-
post, kK. I.
1876. Pynchon, Thomas Ruggles, D.D., LL.D. Professor
of Moral Philosophy in Trinity College, Hartford, Conn.
1876. Randall, Burton A. Clinical Professor of Ear Diseases,
University of Pennsylvania, Philadelphia, Pa.
1888. Reade, T. Mellard, F.G.S. Park Corner, Blundell-
sands, Liverpool, England.
1876. Remsen, Ira, M.D., Ph.D., LL.D. President of Johns
Hopkins University, Baltimore, Md.
1874. Ridgway, Robert. Curator Division of Birds in the U.
S. National Museum, Smithsonian Institution, Washington, D. C.
1886. Robb, William L. Professor of Physics in Trinity
College, Hartford, Conn.
1879. Russell, Israel Cook, LL.D. Professor of Geology
in the University of Michigan, Ann Arbor, Mich.
1876. Sadtler, Samuel P.,)Ph.D. Professor of ‘Chemista,
Philadelphia College of Pharmacy, Philadelphia, Pa.
1876. Schaeffer, Charles A. President of the University of
Iowa, Iowa City, Iowa.
1899. Schlosser, D. Max, Alte Akademie, Munich, Germany.
1867. Schweitzer, Paul, Ph.D., LL.D. Professor of Agri-
cultural Chemistry in the University of Missouri, Columbia, Mo.
1898. Scott, W. B. Professor of Geology, Princeton Uni-
versity, Princeton, N. J.
1876. Scudder, Samuel H., Entomologist and Palaeontologist,
Cambridge, Mass.
1894. Sedgwick, W. T. Professor of Biology, Massachu-
setts Institude of Technology, Boston, Mass.
ORGANIZATION 151
1876. Sherwood, Andrew. Assistant State Geologist in
Second Geological Survey of Pennsylvania, Mansfield, Penn.
1885. Slosson, Charles. Buffalo, N. Y.
1883. Smith, J. Ward. 144 Monmouth Street, Newark, N. J.
18g5. Smyth, Charles H., Jr. Professor of Geology and
Mineralogy in Hamilton College, Clinton, N. Y.
1890. Spencer, Rev. J. Selden. Tarrytown, N. Y-
1896. Stearns, Robert E. C., Ph.D. Associate in Zoology
U. S. National Museum, Washington, D. C.
. Stevens, Walter LeConte. Professor of Physics, Wash-
ington and Lee University, Lexington, Va.
1876. Storer, Francis H. Professor of Agricultural Chemis-
try in Bussey Institute, Harvard University, Jamaica Plain,
Mass.
1885. Tagore, Rajah Sir Sourindro Mohun. Mus. Director
(Oxon.), Calcutta, India.
1893. Thomson, J. P. President Royal Society of Queens-
land, Brisbane, Queensland, Australia.
1876. Thurston, Robert Henry. Director Sibley College,
Cornell University, Ithaca, N. Y.
1885. Thwing, Rev. Edward P. President of the Western
Reserve University, Cleveland, O.
1899. Traquair, R. H. Keeper of Natural History Depart-
ment of Museum of Science and Art, Edinburgh, Scotland.
1877. Trowbridge, John. Rumford Professor of the Appli-
cation of Science to Useful Arts in Harvard University, Cam-
bridge, Mass.
1670, Luttle, DUK. UsS. Mint; Philadelphia, Pa.
1871. Van Hourck, Henri, M.D. Professor of Botany and
Director of Botanical Gardens, Rue de la Sante 8, Antwerp,
Belgium.
1867. Verrill, Addison Emery. Professor of Zodlogy in
Yale University, 86 Whaley Avenue, New Haven, Conn.
1890. Vogdes, Anthony Wayne. Captain 5th U. S.
Artillery, Fort Wadsworth, Staten Island, N. Y.
1900. Van Hise, Charles Richard, Ph.D. Professor of
Geology, University of Wisconsin, Madison, Wis.
AS ORGANIZATION
1898. Walcott, Charles Doolittle. Director of the U. S.
Geological Survey, Washington, D. C.
1876. Waldo, Leonard. Metallurgist and Electrical Engi-
neer, 71 Broadway, N. Y. City.
1888. Ward, Henry Augustus, LL.D. Rochester, N. Y.
1876. Warring, Charles B., Ph.D. 288 Mill Street, Pough-
keepsie, NZ Y.
1900. Watase, She, Ph.D. Professor of Histology, Imperial
University of Tokyo.
1887. Weber, Thomas. Kelleyville, Ireland.
1883. Weisbach, Albin, Ph.D. Professor of Mineralogy in
the School of Mines, Freiberg, Saxony, Germany.
1897. Weller, Stuart, Ph.D. Assistant in Paleontologic
Geology, University of Chicago, Chicago, Ill.
1874. White, I. C., Ph.D. State Geologist, Morgantown,
W. Va.
1898. Whitman, C. O. Head Professor of Zoology and
Director of the Marine Biological Laboratory of the University
of Chicago, Chicago, IIl.
1898. Williams, Henry Shaler. Professor of Geology in
Yale University, New Haven, Conn.
. Winchell, N. H., M.A. Professor of Geology in the
University of Minnesota, State Geologist, 120 State Street.
Minneapolis, Minn.
1866. Wood, Horatio C., M.D., LL.D Professor of Materia
Medica University of Pennsylvania, Philadelphia, Pa.
1899. Woodward, A. Smith, M.D. Assistant Keeper of
Geology, British Museum of Natural History, London, England.
1869. Woodward, Henry, LL.D., F.R.S. Keeper of Geol-
ogy in British Museum, 129 Beaufort Street, Chelsea, London
S. W., England.
| 1874. Wright, Albert A. Professor of Geology and Zool-
ogy in Oberlin College, 123 Forrest Street, Oberlin, O.
1876. Wright, Arthur Williams. Professor of Experimental
Physics in Yale University, 73 York Square, New Haven, Conn.
1876. Yarrow, Harry Crecy, M.D. Professor of Dermatol-
ogy, Columbian University, Washington, D. C.
»
pi
ee PUBLICATIONS
OF THE
NEW YORK ACADEMY OF. SCIENCES
[Lyceum or Naturat History 1818-1876]
-
The publications of the Academy consist of two series, viz :—
(1) The Annals (octavo series), established in 1823, contain
the scientific contributions and reports of researches, together
with the records of meetings, annual exhibitions, etc.
Publication of the Transactions of the Academy was discon
tinued with the issue of Volume XVI, 1898, and merged in the
“Annals. A volume of the Annals will hereafter coincide with
the calendar year and will be distributed in three parts, during
the year. The price of current issues is one dollar per part or
three dollars per volume. Authors’ reprints are issued as soon
as the separate papers are printed, the dates appearing above the
title of each paper.
(2) The Memoirs (quarto series), established in 1895, are is-
sued at irregular intervals, It is intended that each volume shall -
be devoted to monographs relating to some particular depart- -
ment of science. Volume I is devoted to Astronomical Mem-
oirs, Volume II, to Zoological Memoirs, etc. The price is one
dollar per part, as issued.
All publications will hereafter be sent’ free to fellows and
members who desire to receive them, but other fellows and
members will only receive the Records, issued as a separate
from the Annals. The Annals will be sent, as before, to
honorary and corresponding members desiring them.
Subscriptions and inquiries concerning current and back
numbers of any of the publications of the Academy should be
addressed to THE LIBRARIAN
New York Academy of Sciences
Columbia University
New York City.
PRICES OF PUBLICATIONS
Annals of the Lyceum (Vols. I-XI), . . . per Vol., $5.00
Proceedings “ EV Olsy. d= Eb yp eares ah eneel rc |5O@
Trans. of the Academy (Vols. I-XVI), . . ‘“ “5.00
Preiae ea. ys EE (Vols. I-X), <( Re en ae Le ty O,QO
Annals “ .? (Vol. XI e¢ sq), 3.00
Memoirs ‘‘ ef vet I, Pt. I, Vol. I, Pts, L, II, MD),
Mem Patt ae tes 1.00
“Crampton, Henry E., Recording Secretary. Record
: of Meetings of the New York Academy of Sci-
ences, January, 1902, to December, 1902, :
preset, Henry E., Recording ‘Secretary. The
- Organization of the New en ‘Academy of E
Sciences. (Appendix.) . Rae SP WO
Tre
; w
_
; -
J
¢
THE ORGANIZATION
OF THE
NEW YORK
ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
ORIGINAL CHARTER, ORDER OF COURT, AMENDED
CHARTER, CONSTITUTION, BY-LAWS
AND LIST OF MEMBERS
(APPENDIX, VOL. XV, PART 1)
EDITOR
CHARLES LANE POOR
1903
THE ORGANIZATION
OF THE
NEW YORK
BCADEMY OF SCIENCES
ORIGINAL CHARTER, ORDER OF COURT, AMENDED
CHARTER, CONSTITUTION, BY-LAWS
AND LIST OF MEMBERS
(APPENDIX, VOL. XV, PART 1)
EDITOR
CHARLES LANE POOR
1903
THE ORGANIZATION OF THE NEW YORK
ACADEMY, OF <S@ILENCES:
THE ORIGINAL CHARTER.
AN ACT TO INCORPORATE THE
LYCEUM OF NATURAL HISTORY IN THE CITY OF NEW YORK.
Passed April 20, 1878.
Wuereas, The members of the Lyceum of Natural History
have petitioned for an act of incorporation, and the Legislature,
impressed with the importance of the study of Natural History,
as connected with the wants, the comforts, and the happiness of
mankind, and conceiving it their duty to encourage all laudable
attempts to promote the progress of science in this State —there-
fore,
Be it enacted by the People of the State of New York repre-
sented in Senate and Assembly, That Samuel L. Mitchill, Casper
W. Eddy, Frederick C. Schaeffer, Nathaniel Paulding, William
Cooper, Benjamin P. Kissam, John Torrey, William Cumber-
land, D’Jurco V. Knevels, James Clements and James Pierce,
and such other persons as now are, and may from time to time
become members, shall be, and hereby are constituted a body
corporate and politic, by the name of Lyceum oF NATURAL
History IN THE City oF New York, and that by that name
they shall have perpetual succession, and shall be persons
capable of suing and being sued, pleading and being impleaded,
answering and being answered unto, defending and being de-
fended, in all courts and places whatsoever; and may have a
common seal, with power to alter the same from time to time ;
and shall be capable of purchasing, taking, holding and enjoy-
ing to them and their successors, any real estate in fee simple
3
4 ORGANIZATION
or otherwise, and any goods, chattels and personal estate, and
of selling, leasing, or otherwise disposing of said real or personal
estate, or any part thereof, at their will and pleasure: Provided
always, that the clear annual value or income of such real or
personal estate shall not exceed the sum of five thousand dol-
lars: Provided, however, that the funds of the said corporation
shall be used and appropriated to the promotion of the objects
stated in the preamble to this act, and those only.
2. And be it further enacted, That the said Society shall, from
time to time, forever hereafter, have power to make, constitute,
ordain, and establish such by-laws and regulations as they shall
judge proper, for the election of their officers; for prescribing
their respective functions, and the mode of discharging the same ;
for the admission of new members ; for the government of the
officers and members thereof; for collecting annual contribu-
tions from the members towards the funds thereof; for regulat-
ing the times and places of meeting of the said Society; for
suspending or expelling such members as shall neglect or refuse
to comply with the by-laws or regulations, and for the manag-
ing or directing the affairs and concerns of the said Society :
Provided such by-laws and regulations be not repugnant to the
Constitution and laws of this State or of the United States.
3. And be it further enacted, That the officers of the said So-
ciety shall consist of a President and two Vice-Presidents, a
Corresponding Secretary, a Recording Secretary, a Treasurer,
and five Curators, and such other officers as the Society may
judge necessary ; who shall be annually chosen, and who shall
continue in office for one year, or until others be elected in their
stead; that if the annual election shall not be held at any of
the days for that purpose appointed, it shall be lawful to make
such election at any other day; and that five members of the
said Society, assembling at the place and time designated for
that purpose by any by-law or regulation of the Society, shall
constitute a legal meeting thereof.
4. And be it further enacted, That Samuel L. Mitchill shall
be the President ; Casper W. Eddy the First Vice-President ;
Frederick C. Schaeffer the Second Vice-President ; Nathaniel
ORGANIZATION 5
Paulding, Corresponding Secretary ; William Cooper,. Record-
ing Secretary; Benjamin P. Kissam, Treasurer, and John
Torrey, William Cumberland, D’Jurco V. Knevels, James
Clements and James Pierce, Curators; severally to be the first
officers of the said corporation, who shall hold their respective
offices until the twenty-third day of February next, and until
others shall be chosen in their places.
5. And be tt further enacted, That the present Constitution of
the said Association shall, after passing of this Act, continue to
be the Constitution thereof; and that no alteration shall be
made therein, unless by a vote to that effect of three-fourths of
the resident members, and upon the request in writing of one-
third of such resident members, and submitted at least one
month before any vote shall be taken thereupon,
State of New York, Secretary's Office.
I certiFy the preceding to be a true copy of an original Act
of the Legislature of this State, on file in this Office.
ARCH D CAMPBELL,
Dep. See’y.
Apany, April 29, 1818.
ORDER OF COURT.
ORDER OF THE SUPREME COURT OF THE STATE OF NEW YORK
TO CHANGE THE NAME OF
THE LYCEUM OF NATURAL HISTORY IN THE
CITY OF NEW YORK
TO
THE NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES.
WHEREAS, in pursuance of the vote and proceedings of this
Corporation to change the corporate name thereof from ‘The
6 ORGANIZATION
Lyceum .of Natural History in the City of New York ”’ to ‘‘ The
New York Academy of Sciences,” which vote and proceedings
appear of record, an application has been made in behalf of said
Corporation to the Supreme Court of the State of New York to
legalize and authorize such change, according to the statute in
such case provided, by Chittenden & Hubbard, acting as the
attorneys of the Corporation, and the said Supreme Court, on
the 5th day of January, 1876, made the following order upon
such application in the premises, viz :
At a special term of the Supreme
Court of the State of New York,
held at the Chambers thereof,
in the County Court House, in
the City of New York, the 5th
day of January, 1876:
Present — Hon. Geo. C. BARRETT, /ustice.
In the matter of the applica-
tion of the Lyceum of Nat-
ural History in the City of
New York to authorize it to
assume the corporate name
of the New York Academy
of Sciences.
On reading and filing the petition of the Lyceum of Natural
History in the City of New York, duly verified by John S. New-
berry, the President and chief officer of said Corporation to
authorize it to assume the corporate name of The New York
Academy of Sciences, duly setting forth the grounds of said
application, and on reading and filing the affidavit of Geo. W.
Quackenbush, showing that notice of such application had been
duly published for six weeks in the State paper, to wit, Zhe Al-
bany Evening Journal, and the affidavit of David S. Owen, show-
ing that notice of such application had also been duly published
in the proper newspaper of the County of New York, in which
ORGANIZATION 7
county said Corporation has its business office, to wit, in the
Daily Register, by which it appears to my satisfaction that such
notice has been so published, and on reading and filing the
affidavits of Robert H. Brownne and J. S. Newberry, thereunto
annexed, by which it appears to my satisfaction that the appli-
cation is made in pursuance of a resolution of the managers of
said Corporation to that end named, and there appearing to me
to be no reasonable objection to said Corporation so changing
its name as prayed in said petition: Now on motion of Gros-
venor S. Hubbard, of Counsel for Petitioner, it is
Ordered, That the Lyceum of Natural History in the City of
New York be and is hereby authorized to assume the corporate
name of The New York Academy of Sciences.
Indorsed: Filed January 5, 1876.
A copy. WM. WALSH, Clerk.
Resolution of THE ACADEMY, accepting the order of the Court,
passed February 21, 1876.
And whereas, The order hath been published as therein re-
quired, and all the proceedings necessary to carry out the same
have been had, Therefore :
Resolved, Vhat the foregoing order be and the same is hereby
accepted and adopted by this Corporation, and that in con-
formity therewith the corporate name thereof, from and after the
adoption of the vote and resolution hereinabove referred to, be
and the same is hereby declared to be
THE NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES.
ORGANIZATION
o/2)
THE AMENDED CHARTER.
MARCH IQ, 1902.
CHAPTER I8I OF THE Laws OF 1902.
An Act to amend chapter one hundred and ninety-seven of
the laws of eighteen hundred and eighteen, entitled ‘‘ An act to
incorporate the Lyceum of Natural History in the City of New
York,” a corporation now known as the New York Academy
of Sciences and to extend the powers of said corporation.
(Became a law March 19, 1902, with the approval of the
Governor. Passed, three-fifths being present.)
The People of the State of New York, represented in Senate
and Assembly, do enact as follows :
Section I. The corporation incorporated by chapter one
hundred and ninety-seven of the laws of eighteen hundred and
eighteen, entitled ‘‘ An act to incorporate the Lyceum of Natural
History in the City of New York,” and formerly known by that
name, but now known as the New York Academy of Sciences
through change of name pursuant to order made by the
supreme court at the city and county of New York, on Janu-
ary fifth, eighteen hundred and seventy-six, is hereby author-
ized and empowered to raise money for, and to erect and main-
tain, a building in the city of New York for its use, and in
which also at its option other scientific societies may be admitted
and have their headquarters upon such terms as said corpora-
tion may make with them, portions of which building "may be
also rented out by said corporation for any lawful uses for the
purpose of obtaining income for the maintenance of such build-
ing and for the promotion of the objects of the corporation ; to
establish, own, equip, and administer a public library, and a
museum having especial reference to scientific subjects ; to pub-
lish communications, transactions, scientific works, and _peri-
odicals ; to give scientific instruction by lectures or otherwise ;
to encourage the advancement of scientific research and dis-
covery, by gifts of money, prizes, or other assistance thereto.
The building, or rooms, of said corporation in the city of New
York used exclusively for library or scientific purposes shall be
ORGANIZATION 9
subject to the provisions and be entitled to the benefits of sub-
division seven of section four of chapter nine hundred and eight
of the laws of eighteen hundred and ninety-six, as amended.
Section II of said chapter one hundred and ninety-seven of
the laws of eighteen hundred and eighteen, entitled “An act
to incorporate the Lyceum of Natural History in the City of
New York,” is hereby amended so as to read as follows :
Section II. The said corporation shall from time to time
forever hereafter have power to make, constitute, ordain, and
establish such by-laws and regulations as it shall judge proper
fot the election of its officers; for prescribing their respective
functions, and the mode of discharging the same; for the ad-
mission of new members; for the government of officers and
members thereof; for collecting dues and contributions towards
the funds thereof; for regulating the times and places of meet-
ing of said corporation ; for suspending or expelling such mem-
bers as shall neglect or refuse to comply with the by-laws or
regulations, and for managing or directing the affairs or con-
cerns of the said corporation: and may from time to time alter
or modify its constitution, by-laws, rules and regulations.
Section III. Section three of said act is hereby amended so
as to read as follows :
The officers of the said corporation shall consist of a presi-
dent and two or more vice-presidents, a corresponding secre-
tary, a recording secretary, a treasurer, and such other officers
as the corporation may judge necessary ; who shall be chosen
in the manner and for the terms prescribed by the constitution
of the said corporation.
Section IV. Section V of said act is hereby amended so as
to read as follows:
Section V.. The present constitution of the said corporation
shall, after the passage of this act, continue to be the constitu-
tion thereof until amended as herein provided. Such constitu-
tion as may be adopted by a vote of not less than three quarters
of such resident members and fellows of the said New York
Academy of Sciences as shall be present at a meeting thereof,
called by the Recording Secretary for that purpose, within forty
10 ORGANIZATION
days after the passage of this act, by written notice, duly mailed,
postage prepaid, and addressed to each fellow and resident
member at least ten days before such meeting, at his last known
place of residence, with street and number when known, which
meeting shall be held within three months after the passage of
this act, shall be thereafter the constitution of the said New
York Academy of Sciences, subject to alteration or amendment
in the manner provided by such constitution.
A new section is hereby added to said act to be known as
Section VI thereof, which shall read as follows:
Section VI. The said corporation shall have power to con-
solidate, to unite, to cooperate, or to ally itself with any other
society or association in the city of New York organized for the
promotion of the knowledge or the study of any science, or of
research therein, and for this purpose to receive, hold, and ad-
minister real and personal property for the uses of such con-
solidation, union, cooperation or alliance, subject to such terms
and regulations as may be agreed upon with such associations
or societies.
Section VI. This act shall take effect immediately.
STATE OF NEw YorK,
OFFICE OF THE SECRETARY OF STATE.
I have compared the preceding with the original law on file
in this office, and do hereby certify that the same is a correct
transcript therefrom, and the whole of said original law.
Given under my hand and the seal of office of the Secretary of
State, at the city of Albany, this eighth day of April, in the year
one thousand nine hundred and two.
Joun T. McDonovueu,
Secretary of State.
ORGANIZATION 11
CONSTITUTION.
ADOPTED, APRIL 24, 1902.
Article I. The name of this Corporation shall be The New
York Academy of Sciences. Its objects shall be the advance-
ment and diffusion of scientific knowledge, and the center of
its activities shall be in the City of New York.
ArTIcLE II. The Academy shall consist of four classes of
members, namely: Active Members, Fellows, Corresponding
Members and Honorary Members. Active Members shall be
the members of the Corporation who live in or near the City of
New York, or who, having removed to a distance, desire to re-
tain their connection with the Academy. Fellows shall be
chosen from the Active Members in virtue of their scientific at-
tainments, Corresponding and Honorary Members shall be
chosen from among the men of science of the world who have
attained distinction as investigators. The number of Corre-
sponding Members shall not exceed two hundred, and the num-
ber of Honorary Members shall not exceed fifty.
ArtIcLE III. None but Fellows and Active Members who
have paid their dues up to and including the last fiscal year,
shall be entitled to vote or to hold office in the Academy.
ArTICLE IV. The officers of the Academy shall be a Presi-
dent, as many Vice-Presidents as there are sections of the
Academy, a Corresponding Secretary, a Recording Secretary,
a Treasurer, a Librarian, an Editor, and six Councillors. The
annual election shall be held on the third Monday in December,
the officers then chosen to take office at the first meeting in
January following.
There shall also be elected at the same time a Finance Com-
mittee of three.
ArtTICLE V. The officers named in Article IV shall consti-
tute a Council, which shall be the executive body of the Acad-
emy with general control over its affairs, including the power
to fill ad zxterim any vacancies that may occur in its offices.
Past Presidents of the Academy shall be ex-officio members of
the Council.
2 ORGANIZATION
ArticLe VI. The President and Vice-presidents shall not be
eligible to more than one reélection until three years after re-
tiring from office ; the Secretaries and Treasurer shall be eligi- .
ble to reélection without limitation. The President, Vice-pres-
idents and Secretaries shall be Fellows. The terms of office of
Councillors shall be three years, and these officers shall be so
grouped that two, at least one of whom shall be a Fellow, shall
be elected and two retired each year. Councillors shall not be
eligible to reélection until after the expiration of one year.
ArTICLE VII. The election of officers shall be by ballot,
and the candidates having the greatest number of votes shall
be declared duly elected.
ArTICLE VIII. Ten members, the majority of whom shall be
Fellows, shall form a quorum at any meeting of the Academy
at which business is transacted.
ArticLte IX. The Academy shall establish By-laws, and may
amend them from time to time as therein provided.
ARTICLE X. This constitution may be amended by a vote of
not less than three fourths of the fellows and three fourths of
the active members present and voting at a regular business
meeting of the Academy, provided that such amendment shall
be publicly submitted in writing at the preceding business
meeting, and provided also that the Recording Secretary shall
send a notice of the proposed amendment at least ten days be-
fore the meeting, at which a vote shall be taken, to each fellow
and active member entitled to vote.
ORGANIZATION 15
BY-LAWS.
ADOPTED, OCTOBER 6, 1902.
CHAPTER I.
OFFICERS.
1. President. It shall be the duty of the President to pre-
side at the business and special meetings of the Academy ; he
shall exercise the customary duties of a presiding officer.
2. Vice-Presidents. In the absence of the President, the senior
Vice-President, in order of Fellowship, shall act as the presid-
ing officer.
3. Corresponding Secretary. The Corresponding Secretary
shall keep a corrected list of the Honorary and Corresponding
Members, their titles and addresses, and shall conduct all cor-
respondence with them. He shall make a report at the Annual
Meeting.
4. Recording Secretary. The Recording Secretary shall
keep the minutes of the Academy proceedings ; he shall have
charge of all documents belonging to the Academy, and of its
corporate seal, which he shall affix and attest as directed by the
Council ; he shall keep a corrected list of the Active Members
and Fellows, and shall send them announcements of the meet-
ings of the Academy ; he shall notify all Members and Fellows
of their election, and committees of their appointment; he
shall give notice to the Treasurer and to the Council of matters
requiring their action, and shall bring before the Academy
business presented by the Council. He shall make a report at
the Annual Meeting.
5. Treasurer. The Treasurer shall have charge, under the
direction of the Council, of all moneys belonging to the
Academy, and of their investment. He shall receive all fees,
dues, and contributions to the Academy, and any income that
may accrue from property or investment; he shall report to
the Council at its last meeting before the Annual Meeting the
names of members in arrears; he shall keep the property of
14 ORGANIZATION
the Academy insured, and shall pay all debts against the
Academy the discharge of which shall be ordered by the
Council. He shall report to the Council from time to time the
state of the finances, and at the Annual Meeting shall report
to the Academy the receipts and expenditures for the entire
year.
6. Librarian. The Librarian shall have charge of the library,
under the general direction of the Library Committee of the
Council, and shall conduct all correspondence respecting ex-
changes of the Academy. He shall make a report on the con-
dition of the library at the Annual Meeting.
7. Editor. The Editor shall have charge of the publications
of the Academy, under the general direction of the Publication
Committee of the Council. He shall make a report on the con-
dition of the publications at the Annual Meeting.
CHAPTER II.
COUNCIL.
1. Meetings. The Council shall meet once a month, or at
the call of the President. It shall have general charge of the
affairs of the Academy.
2. Quorum. Five members of the Council shall constitute a
quorum.
3. Officers. The President, Vice-Presidents, and Recording
Secretary of the Academy shall hold the same offices in the
Council.
4. Committees. The Standing Committees of the Council
shall be : (1) an Executive Committee consisting of the President,
Treasurer, and Recording Secretary ; (2) a Committee on Pub-
lications; (3) a Committee on the Library, and such other
committees as from time to time shall be authorized by the
Council. The action of these committees shall be subject to
revision by the Council.
CHAPTER III.
FINANCE COMMITTEE.
1. The Finance Committee of the Academy shall audit the
ORGANIZATION 15
Annual Report of the Treasurer, and shall report on financial
questions whenever called upon to do so by the Council.
CHAPTER IV.
ELECTIONS.
1. Active Members. (a) Active Members shall be nominated
in writing to the Council by at least two Active Members or
Fellows. If approved by the Council, they may be elected at
the succeeding business meeting.
(4) Any Active Member who, having removed to a distance
from the City of New York, shall nevertheless express a desire
to retain his connection with the Academy, may be placed by
vote of the Council on a list of Non-resident Members. Such
members shall relinquish the full privileges and obligations of
Active Members. (Vide Chapters V and X.)
2. Fellows, Corresponding Members, and Honorary Members.
Nominations for Fellows, Corresponding Members and Hono-
rary Members may be made in writing either to the Recording
Secretary or to the Council at its meeting prior to the Annual
Meeting. If approved by the Council, the nominees shall then
be ballotted for at the Annual Meeting.
3. Officers. Nominations for Officers, with the exception of
Vice-Presidents, may be sent in writing to the Recording Sec-
retary, with the name of the proposer, at any time not less
than thirty days before the Annual Meeting. Each section
of the Academy shall nominate a candidate for Vice-Presi-
dent, who, on election, shall be Chairman of the section; the
names of such nominees shall be sent to the Recording Secretary
properly certified by the sectional secretaries, not less than
thirty days before the Annual Meeting. The Council shall
then prepare a list which shall be the regular ticket. This list
shall be mailed to each Active Member and Fellow at least one
week before the Annual Meeting. But any Active Member or
Fellow entitled to vote shall be entitled to prepare and vote an-
other ticket.
16 ORGANIZATION
CHAPTER V.
FEES AND DUES.
1. Fees and Dues. "very Active Member shall pay an ini-
tiation fee of $5 within three months after his election, or such
election shall be void. The annual dues of Active Members
and Fellows shall be $10, payable in advance at the time of the
Annual Meeting; but new members elected after May 1 shall
pay $5 for the remainder of the fiscal year.
Non-resident Members shall be exempt from dues, so long
as they shall relinquish the privileges of Active Membership.
(Vide Chapter X.)
2. Members in Arrears. Vf any Active Member or Fellow
whose dues remain unpaid for more than one year, shall neg-
lect or refuse to pay the same within three months after notifi-
cation by the Treasurer, his name may be erased from the rolls
by vote of the Council. Upon payment of his arrears, how-
ever, such person may be restored to Active Membership or
Fellowship by vote of the Council.
3. Renewal of Membership. Any Active Member or Fellow
who shall resign because of removal to a distance from the City
of New York, or any Non-resident Member, may be restored by
vote of the Council to Active Membership or Fellowship at any
time upon application without payment of an initiation fee.
CHAPTER VI.
PATRONS AND LIFE MEMBERS.
1. Patrons. Any person contributing at one time $1,000 to
the general funds of the Academy shall be a Patron, and, on
election by the Council, shall enjoy all the privileges of Active
Members.
2. Life Members. Any Active Member or Fellow contribut-
ing at one time $100 to the general funds of the Academy shall
be a Life Member, and shall thereafter be exempt from annual
dues. Any person becoming a Life Member immediately upon
his election as an Active Member shall be exempt from an initia-
tion fee.
ORGANIZATION aly |
CuHaAPpTer VII.
SECTIONS.
1. Sections. Sections devoted to special branches of science
may be, established or discontinued by the Academy on the
recommendation of the Council. The present sections of the
Academy are the Section of Astronomy, Physics and Chemistry,
the Section of Biology, the Section of Geology and Mineralogy,
and the Section of Anthropology and Psychology.
2. Organization. Each section of the Academy shall have a
Chairman and a Secretary, who shall have charge of the meet-
ings of their Section. The regular election of these officers
shall take place at the October or November meeting of the
section, the officers then chosen to take office at the first meet-
ing in January following.
3. Affiliation. Members of scientific societies affiliated with
the Academy, and members of the Scientific Alliance, or men
of science introduced by members of the Academy, may attend
the meetings and present papers under the general regulations
of the Academy.
CHAPTER VIII.
MEETINGS.
1. Business Meetings. Business meetings of the Academy
shall be held on the first Monday of each month from October
to May inclusive.
2. Sectional Meetings. Sectional meetings shall be held on
Monday evenings from October to May inclusive, and at such
other times as the Council may determine. The sectional
meeting shall follow the business meeting when both occur on
the same evening.
3. Annual Meeting. The Annual Meeting shall be held on
the third Monday in December.
4. Special Meetings. A special meeting may be called by
the Council, provided one week’s notice be sent to each Active
Member and Fellow, stating the object of such meeting.
18 ORGANIZATION
CHAPTER IX,
ORDER OF BUSINESS.
1. Business Meetings. The following shall be the order of
procedure at business meetings :
1. Minutes of the previous business meeting.
Report of the Council.
Reports of Committees.
. Elections.
. Other business.
2. Sectional Meetings. The following shall be the order of
procedure at sectional meetings :
1. Minutes of the preceding meeting of the section.
2. Presentation and discussion of papers.
3. Other scientific business.
3. Annual Meetings. The following shall be the order of
procedure at Annual Meetings:
1. Annual reports of the Corresponding Secretary, Record-
ing Secretary, Treasurer, Librarian, and Editor.
2. Election of Honorary Members, Corresponding Mem-
bers, and Fellows.
3. Election of officers for the ensuing year.
4. Annual address of the retiring President.
Un — 1c)
SS)
CHAPTER X.
PUBLICATIONS.
1. Publications. The established publications of the Acad-
emy shall be the Annals and the Memoirs. They shall be
issued by the Editor under the supervision of the Committee on
Publications.
2. Distribution. One copy of all publications shall be sent
to each Patron, Life Member, Active Member and Fellow, pro-
vided, that upon enquiry by the Editor such Members or Fel-
lows shall signify their desire to receive them.
3. Publication Fund. Contributions may be received for the
publication fund, and the income thereof shall be applied toward
ORGANIZATION 19
defraying the expenses of the scientific publications of the
Academy.
CHAPTER XI.
. GENERAL PROVISIONS.
1. Debts. No debts shall be incurred on behalf of the Acad-
emy unless authorized by the Council.
2. Bills. All bills submitted to the Council must be certi-
fied as to correctness by the officers incurring them.
3. L[nvestments. All the permanent funds of the Academy
shall be invested in United States, or in New York State securi-
ties, or in first mortgages on real estate, provided they shall not
exceed sixty-five per cent. of the value of the property. All
income from patron’s fees, life membership fees, and initiation
fee shall be added to the permanent fund.
4. Expulsion, etc. Any Member or Fellow may be censured,
suspended or expelled, for violation of the Constitution or By-
Laws, or for any offence deemed sufficient, by a vote of three
fourths of the Members and three fourths of the Fellows pres-
ent at any business meeting, provided such action shall have
been recommended by the Council at a previous business meet-
ing, and also, that one month’s notice of such recommendation
and of the offence charged shall have given the Member ac-
cused.
5. Changes in By-Laws. No alteration shall be made in
these By-Laws unless it should have been submitted publicly in
writing at a business meeting, shall have been entered on the
Minutes with the names of the Members or Fellows proposing
the same, and shall be adopted by two thirds of the Members
and Fellows present and voting at a subsequent business meet-
ing.
20 ORGANIZATION.
LIST OF MEMBERS
OF THE
NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES:
June 1, 1903.
LIST OF FELLOWS AND ACTIVE MEMBERS.
JUNE I, 1903.
F = Fellows; L= Life Members; P = Patrons.
Adams, Edward D. (L.), 455 Madison Avenue.
Adler, J:, M:D., 22 East 62diStreek:
Allen, J. A. (F.), American Museum of Natural Histo ry.
Allis, Edward Phelps, Jr., Ph.D. (F.), Palais Carnoles Men-
tone, France.
Amend, 1B. G. (F.), 120 East othestreet,
Anderson, A. A., 80 West 4oth Street.
Andreini, José M., 29 West 75th Street.
Anthony, R. A. (L.), 591 Broadway.
Arnold, E. S. F. (F.), M.D., care of Edward M. Wright, 280
Broadway.
Astor, John Jacob, 23 West 26th Street.
Bailey, James M. (L.), 77 Madison Avenue.
Beach, Frederick C., 361 Broadway.
Beard, Daniel C., 204 Amity Street, Flushing, Long Island.
Beck, Fanning, C. T. (F. L.), 78) Mast: 56th street
Beers, M. H., 408-410 Broadway.
ORGANIZATION vm
Berry, Edward W., Haws Building, Passaic, N. J.
Bickmore, Prof. A. S., Ph.D. (F.), American Museum of Nat-
ural History.
Bien, Julius, 140 Sixth Avenue.
Bigelow, Maurice A., Ph.D. (F.), Teachers College.
Biggs, Charles, 13 Astor Place.
Blake, Joseph A., M.D. (F.), 437 West 59th Street.
Bliss, Prof. Charles B. (F. L.), Hockanum, Conn.
Boas, Dr. Franz (F.), American Museum of Natural History.
Bolton, H. Carrington, Ph.D. (F. P.), Cosmos Club, Washing-
fons D.C,
Boyd, James, 408 West 26th Street.
Bristol, Prof. Charles L. (F.), University Heights.
Bristol, John I. D., 1 Madison Avenue.
Britton, N. .L:, Ph.D. (Ff. P-), N. ¥2 Botanical Garden, Bronx
Park. :
Brown, Hon. Addison, LL.D. (F. P.), 45 West 890th Street.
Brown, Alfred S., 160 West 76th Street.
Brown, E. C., 741 St. Nicholas Avenue.
Brownell, Silas B. (F.), 322 West 56th Street.
Bryan, Walter, M.D., 215 St. John’s PL, Brooklyn.
Buchner, Prof. Edw. F. (F.), University of Alabama, Univer-
sity, Ala.
Bumpus, Prof. Herman C. (F.), American Museum of Natural
History.
Burnett, Douglass, 42 Livingston Street, Brooklyn, N. Y.
Byrnes, Miss Esther F., Ph.D. (F.), Girls High School, Brook-
yan IN. oY.
Calkins, Prof. Gary N., Ph.D. (F.), The Beresford, West 81st
Street.
Casey, Major Thomas L., U.S. A. (F. P.), P. O. Drawer 71, St.
Louis, Mo.
Caswell, John H. (F.), 11 West 48th Street.
Cattell, Prof. John McK. (F.), Columbia University.
Chamberlain, Rev. L. T., M.D., The Chelsea, 23d Street, bet.
7th and 8th Avenues.
22 ORGANIZATION
Chandler, Prof. (Chas. F.,. Ph.D. M.D. (.)) Columbias Unt
versity.
Chapin, Chester W. (P.), 34 West 57th Street.
Chapman, Frank M. (F.), American Museum of Natural His-
tory.
Cheesman, Timothy M., M.D. (F.), Garrisons, N. Y.
Collingwood, Francis (F.), Elizabeth, N. J.
Conkling, Hon. Alfred R., 27 East roth Street.
Constant, S. Victor (L.), 420 West 23d Street.
Cooper, Hon. Edward, 12 Washington Square, N. Y.
Cox Charles Fl(F.)) 54 Hastre7ihesticer:
Crampton, Prof. Henry E. (F.), Columbia University.
Cunningham, Richard H., M.D. (F.), 200 West 56th Street.
Curtis, Prof. John G., M.D. (F.), 327 West 58th Street.
Daily, W. H., 32 Old Jewry, London, E. C., England.
Davies, Wm. G., 34 Nassau Street.
Davis, Charles H., 99 Cedar Street.
Davis, William H., Columbia University.
Day, Wm. S. (F.), 551 West End Avenue.
Dean, Prof. Bashford, Ph.D. (F.), Columbia University.
Delafield, M. L., Jr. (L.), care of Jos. L. Delafield, 35 Nassau
iret
Devereux, W. B., 99 John Street.
Devoe, F. W., 101 Fulton Street.
DeWitt, W. G., 88 Nassau Street.
Dickerson, Edward N., Washington Life Building, 141 Broad-
way.
Dix, Rev. Morgan, D.D., 27 West 25th Street.
Dodge, Prof. R. E., M.A. (F.), Teachers College, West 120th
Street:
Dodge, Hon. Wm. E. (P.), 262 Madison Avenue.
Donald, James M., Hanover Nat. Bank, 11 Nassau Street.
Doremus, Prof. Chas. A., Ph.D. (F.), 59.West 51st Street.
Doremus, Prof. R. Ogden, M.D. (F.), 241 Madison Avenue.
Douglas, James (L.), 99 John Street.
Douglass, Alfred, 170 West 59th Street.
ORGANIZATION 23
Draper, Mrs. M. A. P., 271 Madison Avenue.
Drummond, Jsaac W., M.D., 436 West 22d Street.
Dudley, Bit. CF), So Pine Street:
Dunham, Edward K., M.D., 338 East 26th Street.
Dutcher, William (F.), 525 Manhattan Ave.
Du Vivier, Charles L., 22 Warren Street.
Dwight, Jonathan, Jr., M.D. (F.), 2 East 34th Street.
Dyar, Harrison G. (F.), U. S. National Museum, Washing-
tone €.
Elliott, Prof. A. H., Ph.D.( L.), 4 Irving Place.
English, George L., 201 East 16th Street.
Eno, Wm. Phelps, 111 Broadway.
Eyerman, John (F.), Easton, Pa.
Fargo, James C., 56 Park Avenue.
Farmer, Alexander S., 140 Rodney Street, Brooklyn.
Farrand, Prof. Livingston, M.D. ( F.), Columbia University.
iield, Cde Reyster (F:), 21 East 20th Street.
Finlay, George I. ( F.), Columbia University.
Foley, Ernest, 108 East 62d Street.
Ford, James B. (L.), 4 East 43d Street.
Franklin, Fred. W., 346 Broadway.
Frissell, A. S., 530 Fifth Avenue.
Gallatin, Frederick, 670 Fifth Avenue.
Gies, Prof. William J. ( F.), 437 West 59th Street.
Gould, Edwin ( P.), Dobbs Ferry, N. Y.
Gould, Frank J., Irvington, N. Y.
Gould, George J. ( P.), 195 Broadway.
Gould, Miss Helen M. ( P.), Irvington, N. Y.
Grabau, Prof. Amadeus W. (F.), Columbia University.
Green, Hon. Andrew H., 214 Broadway.
Hall, James P., Tribune Building, Editorial Rooms.
Hallock, Prof. William ( F.), Columbia University.
Havemeyer, William F., 29 West roth Street.
24 ORGANIZATION
Hay, O. P., Ph.D. ( F.), American Museum of Nat. Hist.
Heller, Max, 312 West ggth Street.
Hering, Prof. Daniel W. (F.), University Heights.
Herrman, Mrs. Esther (P.), 20 West 72d Street.
Herter, Christian A., M.D. (F.), 839 Madison Avenue.
Hewitt, Edward R., Garden City, L. I.
Hinton, John H., M.D. (F. P.), 41 West 32d Street.
Hitchcock, Miss F. R. M., Ph.D. (F.), 4038 Walnut Street,
Philadelphia, Pa.
Hitchcock, Romyn, 20 Broad Street.
Hoffman, S. V., Morristown, N. J.
Hollick, Arthur, Ph.D. (F.), N. Y. Botanical Garden, Bronx
Park.
Holst, 1: J. R., 52 Union Squate, i:
Holt, Charles, 255 West 45th Street.
Holt, Henry (L.), 29 West 23d Street.
Hoppin, Wm. W., 111 Broadway.
Hornaday, Wm. T. (F.), 183d Street and Southern Boulevard.
Hovey, Edmund Otis, Ph.D. (F.), Am. Mus. Nat.. Hist.
Howe, Prof. Henry M. (F.), Columbia University.
Howe, Marshall A. (F.), N. Y. Botanical Garden, Bronx Park.
Hoyt, Alfred M., 1 Broadway.
Hubbard, Walter C., Room 25, Cotton Exchange.
Huntington, Geo. S., M.D. (F.), 50 East 73d Street.
Hyde, B. Talbot B. (L.), 82 Washington Street.
Hyde, E. Francis, Hotel Netherlands.
Hyde, Fr. E., M.D. (L.), 20 West 53d Street.
Hyde, Henry St. J., 210. Bast Bot Street
Iles, George (L.), 5 Brunswick Street, Montreal, Can.
Irving, John D., Ph.D. (F.), U. S. Geological Survey, Washing-
tons: G
Jacobi, Abram, M.D. (F.), 110 West 34th Street.
Jacoby, Prof. Harold (F.), Columbia University.
James, D. Willis, 40 East 39th Street.
Jesup, Morris K., 197 Madison Avenue.
bo
Or
ORGANIZATION
Julien, Alexis A., Ph.D. (F. P.), Columbia University.
Kane, S. Nicholson, Knickerbocker Club.
Kemp, Prof. James F. (F. L.), Columbia University.
Kendig, Rev. A. B., 69 Centre Street, Brookline, Mass.
Kennedy, John S., 6 West 57th Street.
Keppler, Rudolph (L.), 28 West 7oth Street.
Keyser, Samuel K., 14 East 36th Street.
Kunz, George F. (F.), care of Tiffany & Co.,.15 Union Square.
Lamb, Osborn R. (L.), 356 West 22d Street.
Langdon, Woodbury G., 719 Fifth Avenue.
Langmann, Gustav, M.D., 121 West 57th Street.
Laudy, Louis H., Ph.D. (F.), Columbia University.
Lawrence, Amos E., 1 West 81st Street.
Lawton, James M. I. (L.), care of Mr. Joseph Seeley, Produce
Exchange Building.
Leao, F. Garcia P., Brazilian Consulate, 17 State Street.
Lederle, Ernest J., Ph.D., 471 West 143d Street.
Ledoux, Albert R., Ph.D. (F.), 99 John Street.
ieee, Prot. redetic. 5. (F.), 437 Westesoth Street:
Leeds, Prof. A. R. (F. P.), g00 Hudson Street, Hoboken, N. J.
Lembke, Chas. F., 21 Union Square.
Levison, W. Goold, Ph.D. (F. P.), 1435 Pacific Street, Brook-
lyn Nee:
Lichtenstein, Paul, 48 Exchange Place.
Linville, H. R., Ph.D: (F.), 60 West-13th Street.
Lloyd, Prof. Francis E. (F.), Teachers College, 120th Street,
West.
Loeb, Prof. Morris, Ph.D. (F.), 118 West 72d Street.
Loeb, Solomon, 37 East 38th Street.
Lough, Prof. J. E. (F.), School of Pedagogy, N. Y. University.
Love; E.. G.. Ph. D:(F-.),, 80 East 55th-Street.
Low, Hon. Seth (L.), Columbia University.
Luquer, Lea McL. (F.), Columbia University.
Lusk, Prof. Graham F., N. Y. Univ. and Med. College.
McClintock, Emory (I.), Mutual Life Insurance Co., 32 Nassau
sireets ©
26 ORGANIZATION
McCook, Col. J. J. (L.), 10 West 54th Street.
McKim, Rev. Haslett, 9 West 48th Street.
McMillin, Emerson, 40 Wall Street.
McNulty, Prof. John J., 17 Lexington Avenue.
MacDougall, Prof. Robert (F.), School of Pedagogy, N. Y.
University.
MacHaughton, James, 16 Central Park West.
Maitland, Alexander, 45 Broadway.
Marble, Manton, Bedford, Westchester Co., N. Y.
Marston, Edwin S., 291 Clinton Avenue, Brooklyn, N. Y.
Martin, Prof. Daniel S. (F. L.), 756 Quincy Street, Brooklyn,
NeSY,
Martin, T. Cumerford (F.), The Monterey, West 114th Street.
Mathew, W. D., Ph.D. (F.), Amer. Mus. Nat. Hist.
Mason, Wm. L., 170 Fifth Avenue.
Mayer, Alfred Goldsborough, Ph.D., 34 Plaza Street, Brooklyn.
Mead, Walter H. (P.), 67 Wall Street.
Meltzer, S:-J:, M.D. F:),66 West 126th Street.
Merrill, Fred..J. H.-(F.), N.-Yastate Muséum; Albany, Neve
Meyer, Adolph, M.D. (F.), Pathological Institute.
Meyer, Thomas C., Union Club.
Miller, Geo. N., M.D., 811 Madison Avenue.
Mitchell, Edward, 31 East 50th Street.
Mitchell, John Murray, 17 Broad Street.
Mitchell, S. Alfred, Ph.D. (F.), Columbia University.
Morgan, J. Pierpont, 219 Madison Avenue.
Mortimer, W. Golden, M.D., 504 West 146th Street.
Moses, Prof. Alfred J. (F.), Columbia University.
Munsell CC. F., Ph.D., 2110 MeratiosStrect:
Niven, William, P. O. Box 681, High Bridge, N. Y.
Nott, F. J., M.D., 544 Madison Avenue.
Ogilvie, Miss Ida H. (L.), Sherman Square Hotel.
Olcott, KE. E. (L.), 38 West 39th Street.
Osborn, Prof. Henry’ F.,. ScD. LL.D! (8), 3590) Madises
Avenue.
ORGANIZATION 2G
Parker, Prof. Herschel C. (F.), Columbia University.
Parsons, John E., 111 Broadway.
Patten, John (L.), 19 Liberty Street.
Peckham, Wheeler H., 685 Madison Avenue.
Pell, Mrs. Alfred, 206 Madison Avenue.
Pellew, Prof. Chas. E. (F.), 68 East 54th Street.
Peterson, Frederic, M.D. (F.), 4 West 50th Street.
Pettigrew, David Lyman, Box 75, Worcester, Mass.
Pfister, J. C. (F.), Columbia University.
Phoenix, Lloyd, 21 East 33d Street.
Pierson, Israel C. (B);.21 Cortlandt Street.
Pifiacd, Henry G.,, M.D: (F.), 256*West, 57th Street.
Pitkin, Lucius (F.), 47 Fulton Street.
Poor, Charles Lane, Ph.D. (F.), 4 East 48th Street.
Bost) ©.A. (F.), 16 Exchange Place:
Post, George B. (F:), 11 West 21st) Street.
Prime, Temple (P.), Huntington, L. I.
Pouce, Prot John Do(F)y 31 West 438th Street.
Prudden, Prof. T. Mitchell (F.), 437 West 59th Street.
Pupin, Prof. M. I., Ph.D. (F.), Columbia University.
Quackenbos, Prot J: D5 931. West 28th Street.
Rees, Prof. John K. (F.), Columbia University.
Reuter, L. H., M.D., Merck Building.
Ricketts, Prof. Pierre de.P, (F-), 104 John: Street.
Riederer, Ludwig, 251 West 95th Street.
Ries, Heinrich (F.), Cornell University, Ithaca, N. Y.
Riley, R. Hudson, Bensonhurst, N. Y.
Robb, Hon. J. Hampden, 23 Park Avenue.
Rogers, Henry H., 26 East 57th Street.
Rusby, Henry H., M.D. (F.), 809 De Graw Avenue, Newark,
Nei
Russak, Frank, 46 Exchange Place.
Schermerhorn, F. A. (L.), 61 University Place.
Schuyler, Philip, Nevis, Irvington P. O., N. Y.
28 ORGANIZATION
Senff, Charles H. (P.), 300 Madison Avenue.
Shiland, Andrew, Jr., 262 West 78th Street.
Shultz, Chas. S., Hoboken, N. J.
Sickles, Ivan, M.D. (F.), 17 Lexington Avenue.
Sieberg, W. H. J., Hotel Winthrop, 7th Ave. and 125th Street.
Sloan, Samuel (P.), 26 Exchange Place.
Smith, Ernest E., M.D., Ph.D., 262 Fifth Avenue.
Starr, Prof. M. Allen (F.), 5 West 54th Street.
Stetson, Francis Lynde (L.), 4 East 74th Street.
Stevens, George T., M.D., 22 East 46th Street.
Stevenson, Prof. J. J. (F. L.), 568 West End Avenue.
Stokes, James, 49 Cedar Street.
Stone, Mason A., 161 Broadway.
Stratford, Prof. Wm., Ph.D. (F.), 17 Lexington Avenue.
Strong, Prof. Chas. A., Ph.D. (F.), Lakewood, N. J., Box 208.
Stuyvesant, Rutherford (F.), 246 East Fifteenth Street.
Sumner, Francis B., Ph.D. (F.), 17 Lexington Avenue.
Taggart, Rush, 319 West 75th Street.
Tatlock, John; Jr. (Ff. 1k), Rae Box 194:
Terry, James (L.), New Haven, Conn.
Thompson, Prof. W. Gilman (F.), 44 East 34th Street.
Thorndike, Edw. L., Ph.D. (F.), Prof., Teachers College.
Townsend, Charles H., New York Aquarium.
Dows, C))s, 34 -West 52d Streets
Tripler, Chas. E., 121 West 89th Street.
Trotter, Alfred W. (F.), 71 Broadway.
Trowbridge, Chas. C. (F.), Columbia University.
Tuckerman, Alfred, 1123 Broadway.
Underwood, Prof. L. M., Ph.D. (F.), Columbia University.
Van Beuren, Fred. T., 21 West 14th Street.
Van Brunt, Cornelius (F.), 319 East 57th Street.
van Ingen, Gilbert (F.), N. Y. State Mus., Albany, N. Y.
Van Slyck, George W. (L.), 120 Broadway.
Von Nardroff, E. R. (F.), 360 Tompkins Avenue, Brooklyn.
ORGANIZATION ~ 29
Wainwright, John W., M.D., 177 West 83d Street.
Waller, Prof. Elwyn, Ph.D. (F.), 7 Franklin Place, Morristown,
Ne
Warburg, F. N., 18 East 72d Street.
-Ward, Delancey W., 247 Sanford Avenue, Flushing, N. Y.
Washington, H.'S., M.D.(F.), Locust, N, J.
Waterbury, John I., Morristown, N. J.
Whitfield, Prof. R. P. (F.), American Museum of Natural
History.
Whitman, Alvord A., 305 West 78th Street.
Wicke, William, 36 East 22d Street.
Wiener, Joseph, M.D., 1046 Fifth Avenue.
Wiggin, Frederick H., 55 West 36th Street.
Wills, Chas. T., 156 Fifth Avenue.
Wilson, Prof. Edmund B., Ph.D., LL.D. (F.), Columbia Uni-
versity.
Wolff, Alfred R., 15 West 89th Street.
Wood, William H. S., 45 East roth Street.
Woodbridge, Prof. F. J. E. (F.), Columbia University.
Woodward, Prof. R. S. (F.), Columbia University.
Woodhull, Prof. John F., Ph.D. (F.), Teachers College, West
120th Street.
Woodworth, R. S. (F.), N. Y. Univ. Med. College, Bellevue
Hospital.
Wortman, J. L. (F.), Yale Univ., New Haven, Conn.
Younglove, John, M.D., 407 Jefferson Avenue, Elizabeth, N. We
Zabriskie, George, 21 Broad Street.
30 ORGANIZATION
PATRONS.
JUNE I, 1903.
Bolton, H. Carrington, Cosmos Club, Washington, D. C.
Britton, Dr. Nathaniel Lord, Director Botanical Garden, Bronx
Park, New York City.
Casey, Major Thomas L., P. O. Drawer 71, St. Louis, Mo.
Chapin, Chester W., 34 West 57th Street, New York City.
Dodge, William E., 262 Madison Avenue, New York City.
Field, C. de Peyster, 127 Water Street, New York City.
Gould, Edwin, Dobbs Ferry, N. Y.
Gould, George J., 195 Broadway.
Gould, Miss Helen, Dobbs Ferry, N. Y.
Herrmann, Mrs. Esther, 59 West 56th Street, New York City.
Hinton, John H., M.D., 41 West 32d Street, New York City.
Leeds, Prof. Albert R., g00 Hudson Street, Hoboken, N. J.
Levison, W. Goold, Ph.D., 1435 Pacific Street, Brooklyn, N. Y.
Mead, Walter H., 67 Wall Street, New York City.
Senff, Charles H., 300 Madison Avenue, New York City.
Sloan, Samuel, 26 Exchange Place, New York City.
ORGANIZATION 31
HONORARY MEMBERS.
JUNE I, 1903.
1887. Agassiz, Alexander. Director Museum Comparative
Zoology, Harvard University, Cambridge, Mass.
1898. Auwers, Arthur. Professor of Physics and Mathe-
matics, University of Berlin, Berlin, Germany.
1889. Barrois, Charles, M.D. Professor of Geology, Uni-
versity of Lille, President Geological Society of France, Rue
Pascal 37 Lille, France.
1898. Brooks, William K. Professor of Invertebrate Zool-
ogy, Johns Hopkins University, Baltimore, Md.
foo7e Wallinger; Revie Wm: Henry. BD.) Sci) ID.Cuks
Pie Dy ER. S:, inelesidey Lee; London SiE., England.
1899. Darwin, George Howard, M.A., F.R.S., Professor of
Astronomy, Trinity College, Cambridge, England.
1876. Dawkins, W. Boyd. Professor of Geology and Pale-
ontology, Victoria University, Owens College, Manchester,
England.
1876. Geikie, Sir Archibald, F.R.S. Former Director Gen-
eral of Geological Survey of Great Britain and Ireland, 28
Jermyn Street, London S. W., England.
1889. Gibbs, Wolcott, LL.D. Professor Emeritus of the
Application of Science to the Useful Arts, Harvard University,
Newport, R. I.
1898. Gill, David, LL.D., F.R.S. His Majesty’s Astrono-
mer, Royal Observatory, Cape of Good Hope, Africa.
1889. Goodale, George Lincoln, M.D., LL.D. Professor of
Natural History and Botany, Harvard University, Cambridge,
Mass.
1604) blaeckel) Panst: MED) PhiDss Sc.D Mie» « Pro-
fessor of Zoology and Director of Zoological Institute in the
University of Jena, Jena, Weimar, Germany.
1889. Hall, Asaph. Professor of Mathematics (retired), U. S.
Navy, Norfolk, Conn.
1899. Hann, Julius, Ph.D. Professor of Meteorology, Uni-
versity of Vienna, Vienna, Austria.
32 ORGANIZATION
1864. Hartlaub, Gustav, M.D. Assistant Director, Museum
of Natural History, Bremen, Germany.
soc. Hill, Geo. W., LL.Do~ West Nyacke@N, ¥.
1896. Hubrecht, Ambrosius, A. W. Professor of Zoology
and Comparative Anatomy in the University of Utrecht,
Utrecht, Netherlands.
1870. Kelvin, The Right fica. Lom, DiGi tks:
G.C.V.O. President of the Royal Society of Edinburgh, 28
Chester Square, London, England.
1896. Klein, Felix, Ph.D. Professor of Mathematics in the
University of Gottingen, Wilhelm Weber, Strasse 3, Gottingen,
Germany.
1876. Lang, Victor E. von. Professor of Physics in the
University of Vienna, Secretary Imperial Academy of Sciences,
Vienna, Austria.
1887. Langley, Samuel Pierpont, LL.D. Secretary of Smith-
sonian Institution, Washington, D. C.
1808. Lankester, E. Ray, a¢L.D:, F.R:S. “Director BnGsh
Museum of Natural History, Cromwell Road, S. W., London,
England.
1880. Lockyer, Sir Norman, LL.D., F:R:S;. Professor of
Astronomy in the Royal College of Science, Solar Physics
Observatory, South Kensington, England.
1901. Leydig, Prof. Franz von. Professor in the School of
Medicine, Bonn, Germany (retired), Wurzburg, Germany.
1898. Moissan, Henri. Professor of Chemistry in the Uni-
versity of Paris, Rue Vauguelin 7, Paris, France.
1898. Nansen, Fridtjof, M.D. Professor of Zoology in the
Royal Fredericks University, Christiania, Norway.
1891. Newcomb, Simon. Professor of Mathematics (re-
tired), U. S. N., 1620 P Street, Washington; D. C.
1898. Penck, Albrecht. Professor of Geography in the
University of Vienna, Vienna, Austria.
1898. Pfeffer, Wm. Professor of Botany in the University
of Leipzig, Leipzig, Germany.
1900. Pickering, Edward Charles, LL.D. Paine Professor
of Practical Astronomy, Harvard University, Cambridge, Mass.
ORGANIZATION 33
1900. Poincare, Jules Henri, F.R.S. Professor of Mathe-
matical Physics, Faculty of Science, Paris, France.
1899. Rayleigh, Lord, LL.D., F.R.S. Professor of Natural
Philosophy in the Royal Institution of Great Britain, Albemarle
Street, W., London.
1898. Reusch, Hans H., M.D. _ Professor of Geology;
Head of Norwegian Geological Investigations, Christiania,
Norway.
ipo 7H hascoe soit Henry Enfield. DiG.L., LL.D: F.RiS.
Vice Chancellor University of London, 10 Braham Gardens,
London S. W., England.
1887. Rosenbusch, Karl Henry Ferdinand. Professor of
Mineralogy and Geology, University of Heidelberg, Heidelberg, .
Germany.
Esoo, Thomson; Jeseph John; ScD. Lib, F-R.S: Pro=
fessor of Experimental Physics in Cambridge University, Caven-
dish Laboratory, Cambridge, England.
1900... Tylor, Edward Burnett, LL.D...D.C.L., F:R.S. > Pro-
fessor of Anthropology, Balliol College, University of Oxford,
Oxford, England.
1878. Young, Charles Augustus, LL.D. Professor of
Astronomy in Princeton University, Princeton, N. J.
1898. Zittel, Karl Alfred Ritter von. Professor of Geology
and Paleontology in the Royal Bavarian Ludwig-Maximilian
University, Munich, Germany.
34 ORGANIZATION
CORRESPONDING MEMBERS.
JUNE I, 1903.
1883. Abbe, Cleveland. Professor of Meteorology in Colum-
bian University, Editor Monthly Weather Review, Weather
Bureau in the Department of Agriculture, Washington, D. C.
1883. Abbott, Charles Conrad, M.D. Trenton, N. J.
1883. Acosta, Antonio Gordon y, M.D. President of the
Dispensaries of Havana, San Nicolas 54, Havana, Cuba.
1898. Adams, Frank D. | Professor of Geology in McGill
University, Montreal, Canada.
1891. Aguilera, Jose G. Escuela de Mineria, Mexico, Mex.
1890. Alexander, Wm. DeWitt. Surveyor General of the
Hawaiian Islands, Honolulu, Hawaii.
1899. Andrews, C. W., M.D. Ass’t Keeper of Geology,
British Museum of Natural History, Cromwell Road, London
So Viiag eines
1876. Appleton, John Howard, M. A. Professor of Chemis-
try, Brown University, 209 Angell Street, Providence, R. I.
1899. Baker, J. G. Keeper of the Herbariums and the
Library, Royal Botanic Gardens, Kew, England.
1898. Balfour, I. B. Professor of Botany in the University
of Edinburgh, Edinburgh, Scotland.
1878. Bell, Alexander Graham. President National Geo-
graphic Society, Washington, D. C.
1889. Beaumont, J. Vineland, N. J.
1867. Berthoud, Edward L., M.A., M.E. Golden, Jeffer-
son Co., Col.
1883. Bertrand, Emile. Professor of Geology in the Ecole
des Mines, Paris, France.
1897. Bolton, Herbert, F.R.S.E. Curator and Secretary,
Bristol Museum, Bristol, England.
1899. Boltzmann, Ludwig. Professor of Physics in the
University of Leipzig, Leipzig, Germany.
1863. Bombicci-Porta, Cav. Com. Louis. Professor of
Mineralogy and Applied Geology in the University of Bologna,
Bologna, Italy.
ORGANIZATION 35
1899. Boulenger, G. A. Assistant Keeper in Zoology, Brit-
ish Museum of Natural History, London, England.
1874. Brandegee, T. S. San Diego, California.
1884. Branner, John G., Ph.D., LL.D. Professor of Geology
and Vice-President of the Leland Stanford Jr. University, Stan-
ford University, Cal.
1894. Branner, Bohnslor, Ph.D. Professor of Chemistry,
Bohemian University, Prague, Bohemia.
1874. Brewster, William. Ornithologist, 145 Brattle Street,
Cambridge, Mass.
1899. Brogger, W. C. Professor of Geology and Mineral-
ogy in the Royal Fredericks University, Christiania, Norway.
1876. Brush, George Jarvis. Professor of Mineralogy, Yale
University, New Haven, Conn.
1876. Caldwell, George Chapman. Professor of Chemistry
in Cornell University, Ithaca, N. Y.
1876. Carmichael, Henry, Ph.D. Analytical Chemist, 12
Pearl Street, Boston, Mass.
1898. Carruthers, Wm. C., M.D. Consulting Botanist
Royal Agricultural Society of England, British Museum, Lon-
don, England.
1898. Chamberlin, T. C. Head Professor of Geology in the
University of Chicago, Chicago, III.
1876. Chandler, W. H. Professor of Chemistry, Librarian
of Lehigh University, Bethlehem, Pa.
1876. Clarke, Frank Wigglesworth, Chief Chemist U. S.
Geological Survey, Washington, D. C.
1891. Clerc, L. Professor of Botany, Ekaterinburg, Russia.
1877. Comstock, Theo. B., Sc.D. (President Mining Co.).
535 Stimson Block, Los Angeles, Cal.
1868. Cooke, M.C., M.A. Former Keeper of Herbarium,
Royal Botanical Garden, Kew, 53 Castle Road, Kenlish Town
N.W., England.
1876. Cornwall, H. B. Professor of Analitical Chemistry
and Mineralogy, Princeton University, Princeton, N. J.
1880. Cory, Charles B. Professor of Natural History, Field
Columbian Museum, Chicago, IIl., 160 Boylston Street, Boston,
Mass.
36 ORGANIZATION
1877. Crawford, Joseph, Ph.G. 2822 Frankford Avenue,
Philadelphia, Pa.
1866. Credner, Hermann, Ph.D. Professor of Geology and
Paleontology in the University of Leipzig ; Director of Geolog-
ical Survey of the Kingdom of Saxony, Leipzig, Germany.
1895. Cushing, Henry P. Professor of Geology in Western
Reserve University, Adelbert College, Cleveland, O.
1890. D’Achiardi, Antonio, Ph.D. Professor of Mineralogy
in the University of Pisa, 12 Via San Martino, Pisa, Italy.
1879. Dale, T. Nelson. Geologist of the U. S. Geological
Survey ; Instructor in Geology and Botany in Williams Col-
lege, Wiiliamstown, Mass.
1870. Dall, Wm. Healey, M.A. Curator Department of
Mollusks in the U. S. Nat. Mus., Smithsonian Institution,
Washington, D. C.
1885. Dana, Edward Salisbury, Ph.D. Professor of Physics
in Yale University, 119 Grove Street, New Haven, Conn.
1898. Davis, Wm. M., Sturgis Hooper. Professor of Geol-
ogy, Harvard University, Cambridge, Mass.
1894. Deane, Ruthven. President Illinois Audubon Society,
30 Michigan Ave., Chicago, Il.
1899. Depéret, Charles, Ph.D. Professor of Physical Geog-
raphy in the University of Lyons, Lyons, France.
1890. Derby, Orville A., F.G.S. Chief of Geographical and
Geological Commission, Sao Paulo, Brazil.
1899. Dollo, Louis, Ph.D. Conservateur Musée Royal
d’ Histoire Naturelle, Brussels, Belgium.
1876. Drown, Thomas Messinger, LL.D. President of
Lehigh University, South Bethlehem, Pa.
1868. Duns, J., D.D., F.R.S.E. Professor of Natural Sci-
ence in College of Edinburgh, Edinburgh, Scotland.
1876. Elliot, Henry W. Naturalist and Artist, U. S. Geol.
Survey, Lakewood, Cuyahoga County, O.
1880. Elliott, John B. Professor of Theoretical and Practical
Medicine in Tulane University, New Orleans, La.
1869. Engelhardt, Francis E., Ph.D. Chemist to Syracuse
Board of Health, 7 Clinton Block, Syracuse, N. Y.
ORGANIZATION 37
1878. Ernst, A., Ph.D. Professor of Natural History in the
University of Caracas and Director of Museum, Caracas, Vene-
zuela.
1879. Fairchild, Herman LeRoy, B.S. Professor of Geology
in the University of Rochester, Rochester, N. Y.
1887. Fensi, Sebastiana. Florence, Italy.
1879. Fittica, Friedrich Bernhard, Ph.D. Professor of Chem.
istry in the University of Marburg, Marburg, Germany.
1885. Fletcher, Lazarus, M.A., F.R.S. Keeper of Minerals
in the British Museum, 36 Woodville Road, Ealing, London
W., England.
1899. Fraas, Eberhard, Ph.D. Trustee of Kgl. Naturalien-
Kabinet, Stuttgart, Germany.
180908. Franchet, A., PRD, “Paris, Fraiiec,
1879. Fritzgartner, Reinhold, Ph.D., M.E. State Geologist
of Honduras, Director National Mint, Tegucigalpa, Honduras.
r67Q. Gilbert, G. K. Geologist of the U. S. Geological
Survey, Washington, D. C.
1858. Gill, Theodore N., M.D. Professor of Zodlogy, Co-
lumbian University, Washington, D. C.
1876. Gilman, Daniel C., LL.D. President of the Carnegie
Institution, Washington, D. C.
1865. Goessmann, Charles A., Ph.D., LL.D. Professor of
Chemistry in the Massachusetts Agricultural College, Amherst,
Mass.
1888. Gooch, Frank Austin. Professor of Chemistry in
Yale University, New Haven, Conn.
1883. Grattarola, Guiseppe. Professor of Mineralogy,
School of Pharmacy, Florence, San Marco, Florence, Italy.
1868. Greenleaf, R. C. Honorary Professor, Military and
Public Hygiene in the University of California, care of Surgeon
General, U. S. A., Washington, D. C.
1883. Gregorio, Marquis Antonio de, Ph.D. Editor of the
Annals of Geol. and Palaeon., Palermo, Sicily, Italy.
1877. Groth, Paul Heinrich. Professor of Mineralogy in
the Royal Bayr. Ludwig-Maximilians University, Hamburg,
Germany.
38 ORGANIZATION
1890. Gudeman, Edward, M.D. Associate Professor Clas-
sical Philology, University of Pennsylvania, Philadelphia, Pa.
1898. Hale, George E. Professor of Astronomy and
Physics in the University of Chicago, Yerkes Observatory,
Williams Bay, Wis.
1882. Hesse-Wartegg, Count Ernest von. New York,
INDY
1867. Hitchcock; C. H., LL.DD Professor of Geolosy sin
Dartmouth College, Hanover, N. H.
1900. Holmes, William Henry. Curator U. S. National
Museum (Anthropology), Washington, D. C.
1890. Hoskold, H...D., C. et. N-E., F.GS. Director sGen=
eral National Department of Mines and Geology, Santa Fe
2043, Buenos-Ayres, Argentine Republic.
1877. Howard, Thomas D., Jr. Perth Amboy, N. J.
1899. Howes, G. B., LL.D., F.R.S. Professor of Compar-
ative Anatomy, Zoology, University of London, London, Eng-
land.
1876. Hyatt, James, Sc.D. Stanfordville, Duchess Co., N. Y
1896. Iddings, J. P. Professor of Patrology in the Univer-
sity of Chicago, Chicago, Ill.
1875. Iles, Malvern W. Metallurgist, Globe Smelting Co.,
Denver, Colorado.
1899. Innes, Walter, M.D. School of Medicine, Cairo,
Egypt.
1892. Jack, Robert L. Director Geological Survey of
Queensland, Brisbane, Queensland.
1899. Jaeckel, Otto, Ph.D. Professor Geology in Konig-
lichen Museum fiir Naturkunde, Invalidenstrasse 43, Berlin,
Germany.
1883. Jannettaz, Pierre Michel Edouard. Instructor of
Geology in School of Architecture, Boulevard Saint Germain
86, Paris, France.
1876. Johnson, Samuel W., M.A. Professor Emeritus of
Agricultural Chemistry in Yale University, 24 Turnbull Street,
New Haven, Conn.
1876. Jordan, David Starr, M.D., Ph.D., LL.D. President
of Leland Stanford Jr, University, Stanford University, California.
ORGANIZATION 39
1876. Koenig, George A., Ph.D. Professor of Chemistry
and Metallurgy in the Michigan College of Mines, Houghton,
Mich.
1899. Kohlrausch, Friedrich, Ph.D. (Prof.). President of the
Physikalish-Technische Reichsanstalt, Charlottenberg, March-
strasse 23, Berlin.
1887. Koltzoff-Massalsky, Princess Helene. Florence, Italy.
1890. Kroutschoff, Baron K. de. St. Petersburg, Russia.
1888. Kukio, Baron R. Privy Counsellor and President-
General of the Imperial Museum of Japan, Tokio, Japan.
1890. Kulibin, S., M.E. Mining Dept., St. Petersburg,
Russia.
1890. Lacroix, Alfred. Professor of Mineralogy in the
Museum of Natural History of Paris, Rue Cuvier 57, Paris,
France.
1876, Langley, John W., Ph.D. Professor of Electrical
Engineering in the Case School of Applied Science, Cleveland,
Ohio.
1900. L’apparent, Albert de. Professor of Mineralogy,
Geology and Physical Geography, Ecole Libre des Hautes
Etudes, Paris, France.
1876. Lattimore, S. A. Professor of Chemistry, in Univer-
sity of Rochester, 271 University Avenue, Rochester, N. Y.
1890. Laussedat, Col. Aimé. Director of the National Con-
servatory of Arts and Sciences, Rue St. Martin 292, Paris,
France.
1876. Le Jolis, Auguste Francois. Directeur de la Societe
National des Sci. Nat. et Math. of Cherbourg, Rue de la Duche
29, Cherbourg, France.
1894. Libbey, Wm. Jr. Professor of Physical Geography,
Princeton University, Princeton, N. J.
1899. Liversidge, Archibald, Ph.D. Professor of Chemis-
try, University of Sydney, Sydney, New South Wales.
1869. Mackie, Simon F., M.A. Salt Lake City, Utah.
1876. Macloskie, George. Professor of Biology in Prince-
ton University, Princeton, N. J.
1876. Mallet, John William, M.D., Ph.D., LL.D., F.R-S.
40 ORGANIZATION
Professor of Chemistry in the University of Virginia, Charlotte-
ville, Va.
1871. Mann, Charles Riborg. Associate in Physics, Uni-
versity of Chicago, Chicago, IIl.
1867. Matthew, George F., sc:.D5 LLB: FRSC. Curation
of Natural History Museum Society New Brunswick Museum,
St. John N. B., Canada.
1874. Maynard, Charles Johnson. Naturalist of Newton
Natural History Society, 477 Crafts Street, West Newton,
Mass.
1874. Mead, Theodor Luquer, C.E. Oviedo, Fla.
1888. Meek, Seth E., Curator, Department of Zoology, Field
Columbian Museum, Chicago, Ill.
1892. Mendizabal-Temborrel, J. de. Sociedad Alzate;
Mexico.
1874. Merriam, Clinton Hart, M.D. Chief of U. S. Bio-
logical Survey, Washington, D. C.
1898. Merriman, Mansfield, C.E. Professor of Civil Engi-
neering, Lehigh University, Bethlehem, Pa.
1890. Meyer, A. B., M.D. Director of the Royal Zoologi-
cal, Anthropological and Ethnological Museum, Dresden,
Germany.
1885. Michie, P. S. Professor of Mathematics at the U. S.
Military Academy, West Point, N. Y.
1900. Mitsakuri, Kakichi, Ph.D. Professor of Zoology, Im-
perial University of Tokyo.
1878. Minot, Charles Sedgwick, LL.D. Professor of His-
tology and Human Embryology in the Harvard Medical
School, Boston, Mass.
1876. Mixter, William Gilbert. Professor of Chemistry in
the Sheffield Scientific School of Yale University, New Haven,
Conn.
1890. Moldehnke, Richard G. G., E.M., Ph.D. Consulting
Metallurgist, Box 432, N. Y. City.
1895. Morgan, C. Lloyd, A.M. Professor of Anatomy,
University College, Bristol, England.
1864. Morse, Edward S., Ph.D. Director of the Peabody
Academy Science, Salem, Mass.
ORGANIZATION 41
1898. Murray, George R. M., M.C. Keeper of Botany,
British Museum, London, England.
Netto, Ladislaus. Professor of Mathematics, Hes-
sische-Ludwigs University, Giessen, Germany.
1866. Newton, Alfred, F.R.S. Professor of Zoology and
Comparative Anatomy in the University of Cambridge, Mag-
dalen College, Cambridge, England.
1882. Nichols, Henry Alfred Alford, M.D., M.R.C.S. Med-
ical Officer of Public Institutions, Domincia, Br. West Indies.
1884. Nicolis, Enrico de. Professor and Custodian in Museo
Civico, Verona, Italy.
1881. Niles; Wm. H. Emeritus Professor of Geology and
Geography in Massachusetts Institute of Technology, Boston,
Mass.
1880. Nolan, Edward J., M.D. Recording Secretary and
Librarian of the Academy Natural Sciences of Philadelphia,
Logan Square, Philadelphia, Pa.
1879. Ober, Frederick A. Ornithologist, Smithsonian Insti-
tution, Washington, D. C.
1876. Ordway, John M. Professor of Chemistry and Engi-
neering, Tulane University, New Orleans, La.
1898. Ostwald, Wilhelm, Professor of Chemistry, University
of Leipzig, Leipzig, Germany.
1866. Packard, Alpheus Spring, M.D. Professor of Zodl-
ogy and Geology, Brown University, 275 Angell Street, Provi-
dence, R. I.
1900. Parker, George Howard, Ph.D. Professor of Zodlogy
Harvard University, Cambridge, Mass.
1876. Peckham, Stephen F., M.A. Chemist, 286 Broad-
way, N. Y. City.
1876. Perkins, Maurice F. Professor of Analytical Chem-
istry Union College, Schenectady, N. Y.
1332. Phene,, John: Samuel, LL.D: 5 Carlton “Terrace,
Oakley Street, London, England.
1883. Pisani, F. Professor of Chemistry and Mineralogy in
the Naples University, Naples, Italy.
1660. .Post, Kev. George E., M.A., M.D: . Professor of
Surgery in the Syrian College, Beirut, Syria.
42 ORGANIZATION
1871. Potter, W. B. Mining Engineer, 1225 Spruce Street,
St. Louis, Mo.
1894. Poulton, Edward Bagnall. Professor of Zoology,
Oxford University, Oxford, England.
1876. Prescott, Albert B. Professor of Organic Chemistry
and Director of the Chemical Laboratory in the University of
Michigan, Ann Arbor, Mich.
1877. Prime, Frederick, Ph.D. Secretary American Philo--
sophical Society, Philadelphia, Pa.
1868. Pumpelly, Raphael. U.S. Geological Survey, New-
port, R. I.
1876. Pynchon, Thomas Ruggles, D.D., LL.D. Professor
of Moral Philosophy in Trinity College, Hartford, Conn.
1876. Randall, Burton A. Clinical Professor of Ear Diseases,
University of Pennsylvania, Philadelphia, Pa.
1888. Reade, T. Mellard, F.G.S. Park Corner, Blundell-
sands, Liverpool, England.
1876. Remsen, Ira, M.D., Ph.D., LL.D. President of Johns
Hopkins University, Baltimore, Md.
1874. Ridgway, Robert. Curator Division of Birds in the U.
S. National Museum, Smithsonian Institution, Washington, D. C.
1886. Robb, William L. Professor of Physics in Trinity
College, Hartford, Conn.
1879. Russell, Israel Cook, LL.D. Professor of Geology
in the University of Michigan, Ann Arbor, Mich.
1876. Sadtler, Samuel. Py aD: Professor of (Chemisty;
Philadelphia College of Pharmacy, Philadelphia, Pa.
1876. Schaeffer, Charles A. President of the University of
Iowa, Iowa City, Iowa.
1899. Schlosser, D. Max, Alte Akademie, Munich, Germany.
1867. Schweitzer, Paul, Ph.D., LL.D. Professor of Agri-
cultural Chemistry in the University of Missouri, Columbia, Mo.
1898. Scott, W. B. Professor of Geology, Princeton Uni-
versity, Princeton, N. J.
1876. Scudder, Samuel H., Entomologist and Palaeontologist,
Cambridge, Mass.
1894. Sedgwick, W. T. Professor of Biology, Massachu-
setts Institude of Technology, Boston, Mass.
ORGANIZATION 43
1876. Sherwood, Andrew. Assistant State Geologist in
Second Geological Survey of Pennsylvania, Mansfield, Penn.
1885. Slosson, Charles. Buffalo, N. Y.
1883. Smith, J. Ward. 144 Monmouth Street, Newark, N. J.
18¢5. Smyth, Charles H., Jr. Professor of Geology and
Mineralogy in Hamilton College, Clinton, N. Y.
1890. Spencer, Rev. J. Selden. Tarrytown, N. Y.
1896. Stearns, Robert E. C., Ph.D. Associate in Zoology
U. S. National Museum, Washington, D. C.
. Stevens, Walter LeConte. Professor of Physics, Wash-
ington and Lee University, Lexington, Va.
1876. Storer, Francis H. Professor of Agricultural Chemis-
try in Bussey Institute, Harvard University, Jamaica Plain,
Mass.
1885. Tagore, Rajah Sir Sourindro Mohun. Mus. Director
(Oxon.), Calcutta, India.
1893. Thomson, J. P. President Royal Society of Queens-
land, Brisbane, Queensland, Australia.
1876. Thurston, Robert Henry. Director Sibley College,
Cornell University, Ithaca, N. Y.
1885. Thwing, Rev. Edward P. President of the Western
Reserve University, Cleveland, O.
1899. Traquair, R. H. Keeper of Natural History Depart-
ment of Museum of Science and Art, Edinburgh, Scotland.
1877. Trowbridge, John. Rumford Professor of the Appli-
cation of Science to Useful Arts in Harvard University, Cam-
bridge, Mass.
1670. butte, DIK, UU. S.: Mint, Philadelphia, Pa.
1871. Van Hourck, Henri, M.D. Professor of Botany and
Director of Botanical Gardens, Rue de la Sante 8, Antwerp,
Belgium.
1867. Verrill, Addison Emery. Professor of Zodlogy in
Yale University, 86 Whaley Avenue, New Haven, Conn.
1890. Vogdes, Anthony Wayne. Captain 5th U. S.
Artillery, Fort Wadsworth, Staten Island, N. Y.
1900. Van Hise, Charles Richard, Ph.D. Professor of
Geology, University of Wisconsin, Madison, Wis.
44 ORGANIZATION
1898. Walcott, Charles Doolittle. Director of the U. S.
Geological Survey, Washington, D. C.
1876. Waldo, Leonard. Metallurgist and Electrical Engi- _
neer, 71 Broadway, N. Y. City.
1888. Ward, Henry Augustus, LL.D. Rochester, N. Y.
1876. Warring, Charles B., Ph.D. 288 Mill Street, Pough-
keepsie, N. Y.
1900. Watase, She, Ph.D. Professor of Histology, Imperial
University of Tokyo.
1887. Weber, Thomas. Kelleyville, Ireland.
1883. Weisbach, Albin, Ph.D. Professor of Mineralogy in
the School of Mines, Freiberg, Saxony, Germany.
1897. Weller, Stuart, Ph.D. Assistant in Paleontologic
Geology, University of Chicago, Chicago, IIl.
1874. White, I. C., Ph.D. State Geologist, Morgantown,
Wc Wa,
1898. Whitman, C. O. Head Professor of Zoology and
Director of the Marine Biological Laboratory of the University
of Chicago, Chicago, Ill.
1898. Williams, Henry Shaler. Professor of Geology in
Yale University, New Haven, Conn.
. Winchell, N. H., M.A. Professor of Geology in the
University of Minnesota, State Geologist, 120 State Street,
Minneapolis, Minn.
1866. Wood, Horatio C., M.D., LL.D Professor of Materia
Medica University of Pennsylvania, Philadelphia, Pa.
1899. Woodward, A. Smith, M.D. Assistant Keeper of
Geology, British Museum of Natural History, London, England.
1869. Woodward, Henry, LL.D., F.R.S. Keeper of Geol-
ogy in British Museum, 129 Beaufort Street, Chelsea, London
S. W., England:
1874. Wright, Albert A. Professor of Geology and Zodl-
ogy in Oberlin College, 123 Forrest Street, Oberlin, O.
1876. Wright, Arthur Williams. Professor of Experimental
Physics in Yale University, 73 York Square, New Haven, Conn.
1876. Yarrow, Harry Crecy, M.D. Professor of Dermatol-
ogy, Columbian University, Washington, D. C.
VOL. XV PART II
ANNALS
NEW YORK
ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Editor:
CHARLES LANE POOR
The New Era Printing Company
Lancaster, Pa.
“NEW: YORK: ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
OFFICERS, 1904
President—Epmunp B. Witson, Columbia University.
Recording Secretaryy—HEnrY E. Crampton, Barnard College.
Corresponding Secretary—RICHARD E. Dopee, Teachers College.
Treasurer—CHARLES F. Cox, Grand Central Depot.
Librarian—Ravtru W. TowsEr, American Museum.
Editor—CHARLES LANE Poor, 4 East 48th Street.
SECTION OF ASTRONOMY, PHYSICS, AND CHEMISTRY
Chairman—Cuar es LANE Poor, 4 East 48th Street. —
C. C. TRowsrinGe, Columbia University. _
Secretary:
SECTION OF BIOLOGY
Chairman—\L. M. UNpdERwoopD, Columbia University.
Secretary —M. A. BiceLow, Teachers College.
SECTION OF GEOLOGY AND MINERALOGY
Chairman—JAMES F. Kemp, Columbia University.
Secretary—EpMunpD O. Hovey, American Museum of Natural
History.
SECTION OF ANTHROPOLOGY AND PSYCHOLOGY
Chairman—F. J. E. WoopsripcE, Columbia University.
Secretary—JAmES E. Loucu, School of Pedagogy, New York
University.
SESSION OF 1904
The Academy will meet on Monday evenings at 8.15%0’clock, °
from October to May, in the American Museum of Natural
History, 77th Street and Central Park, West.
[Annats N. Y. Acap. Sci., VoL. XV, No. 2, pp. 153-215, May 16, 1904. ]
RECORD OF MEETINGS
OF THE
NEW YORK
ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
JANUARY TO DECEMBER, 1903
HENRY E. CRAMPTON
Recording Secretary
PRess OF
: THE NEW ERA PRINTING COMPANY,
a” = LANCASTER, PA
[ANNALS N. Y. ACAD. Sci., XV, No. 2, pp. 153-215, May 16, 1904. ]
RECORD OF MEETINGS
OF THE
NEW YORK “ACADEMY (OF “SCIENCES.
January to December, 1903.
Henry E. Crampton, Recording Secretary.
BUSINESS MEETING.
JANUARY 5, 1903.
The Academy met at 8:15 P. M., President Cattell presiding.
In the absence of the Recording Secretary the reading of the
minutes of the preceding business meeting was omitted.
The following candidates for active membership, approved
by the Council, were duly elected :
Frederick J. E. Woodbridge, Columbia University.
Edward Phelps Allis, Jr., Mentone, France.
The Academy then adjourned.
J. McKEEN CatTTeELt,
Acting-Secretary, pro tem.
155
156 RECORDS.
SECTION OF ASTRONOMY, PHYSIGS Ane
CHEMISTRY:
JANUARY 5, 1903.
Section met at 8:15 P. M., Professor Charles Lane Poor pre-
siding.
The minutes of the last meeting of the Section were read
and approved.
The following program was then offered :
Harold Jacoby, Comparison OF ASTRO-PHOTOGRAPHIC
Measures MADE WITH THE RESEAU AND WITHOUT IT.
C. C. Trowbridge, Some Facrs REGARDING PERSISTENT
METEOR TRAILS — THE SIGNIFICANCE OF SIZE, COLOR AND
DRIFT.
SUMMARY OF PAPERS.
Professor Jacoby’s paper was as follows:
The réseau method of measuring stellar photographs, as con-
sidered in the present paper, is similar to that in use in the
observatories participating in the photographic survey of the
heavens now in progress. The most important advantage of
this method of measurement is that it avoids almost altogether
the effects of possible contractions or expansions of the sen-
sitive film during development; and to this advantage has
been joined another of a practical character which was perhaps
not foreseen by the originators of the véseaw method. It is
found most confusing to measure plates having nothing on
their surfaces but star-images; in fact, in the case of close
clusters, it is well-nigh impossible on such plates to make sure
that the pairs of codrdinates assigned to any star really belong
to the same object. All this possibility of confusion disappears,
however, with véseau plates, as it is easy to keep all measures
in order by considering each little square by itself.
As usual, there are compensating disadvantages connected
with using the réseau. It is necessary, for instance, to make
certain assumptions, such as the following :
1. That the division errors of the original réseau can be deter-
mined as accurately as those ofa scale.
RECORDS. 157
2. That the photographic copy of the véseau, as it appears on
the star-plate, really reproduces exactly the division errors of
the original.
3. That the bisection of photographed 7¢seau lines on a star-
plate can be made with a microscope as accurately as the lines
of a scale can be bisected.
It is of course possible to discuss each of these assumptions
separately ; but in the present note I shall consider one simple
experiment only. This consisted in measuring a couple of
Pleiades photographs twice, once by the 7éseaw method, and
once with a metallic scale. A simple comparison ought then
to show how far the two methods of measurement differ in
their results. Seventy-five stars were observed in each case,
and the same stars were used. The first plate was made at Paris,
1901, January 14, and the ‘probable discordance” between
the two methods of measurement was + 0’’.11. Nocorrections
were applied for possible division errors of the Paris réseau, as
none have been published, though the MM. Henry have satis-
fied themselves that the Paris 7éseau errors are inappreciable.
The second plate was made at Helsingfors, 1900, Dec. 12,
and gave a probable discordance of + 0/’.22. In this case the
réseau Measures were corrected with Donner’s division errors ;
but these are not large enough to affect the result appreciably.
In both cases, measures made with the metallic scale were
corrected for the division errors determined at Columbia Uni-
versity. The larger discordance in the case of the Helsingfors
plate is probably due to the less well defined character of the
photographed réseau lines. In many cases it is impossible to
bisect these lines under the microscope anywhere except at
the corners of the squares, where two lines cross and form a
point.
But when we consider that the above discordances involve
the errors of both measurements, they do not appear unduly
large. Divided by “2, they give for the probable error of
a measurement by one method only +0’’.08 for Paris, and
+ 0/’.16 for Helsingfors ; and there is no evidence of a systematic
arrangement of signs in the differences between the two methods.
ANNALS N. Y. Acap. Sci., XV, April, 1904—12.
158 RECORDS.
We may conclude, therefore, that plates measured by the 7éseau
method and without it give identical results within a very narrow
margin ; nor does irregular distortion of the film appear to have
affected appreciably the measures made without the réseau.
Mr. Trowbridge’s paper was a continuation of the results
read before the Academy at the meeting on March 3, 1902.
S. A. MITCHELL,
Secretary.
SECTION OB IGEOGY.
JANUARY 12, 1903.
Section met at 8:15 P. M., Professor Bashford Dean presid-
ing. The minutes of the last meeting of Section were read and
approved.
The following program was then offered :
Gary N. Calkins, Proroprasmic OLD AGE.
A. G. Mayer, Tue Dry Tortucas As A BIOLOGICAL STATION
FOR RESEARCH.
SUMMARY OF PAPERS.
The paper by Dr. Calkins was based upon his studies of
Paramecium, individuals of which were isolated in February,
1901, and their descendants kept under observation for 23
months when the series ended by the death of ali individuals of
the 742d generation. It was pointed out that in the course of
the 742 generations there were four well-marked periods of
depression or ‘old age’’; and the accompanying cytological
changes, reproductive conditions, and the effects of stimuli
were described and discussed.
The paper by Dr. Mayer showed the advantages of the Dry
Tortugas for biological research. With the aid of lantern illus-
trations, Dr. Mayer described the favorable conditions with
reference to geographical position in relation to ocean currents,
the topography, and the nature of the fauna and flora. The
complete paper has been prepared for publication in Sczezce.
Dr. Piffard exhibited a set of X-ray photographs of gastro-
pod shells, designed to obviate the sectioning of rare specimens.
M. A. BIGELow,
Secretary.
RECORDS. 159
SECTION OF -GEOLOGYe AND MINERALOGY.
JANUARY 19, I903.
The section met at 8:15, Vice-President Kemp presiding.
The minutes of the last meeting were read and approved.
Mr. George B. Hollister gave a description of ‘‘ THE Hypro-
GRAPHIC WORK OF THE UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY,”
illustrated by lantern-slides and apparatus. After a short dis-
cussion of the paper, the thanks of the section were offered Mr.
Hollister and the section adjourned.
ALEXIS A. JULIEN,
Secretary, pro tent.
SECON OF ANTHROPOLOGY AND (PSYCHOLOGY.
JANUARY 26, 1903.
The section met in conjunction with the American Ethno-
logical Association, Professor Thorndike presiding.
The following program was offered :
Maurice Fishberg, THE ANCIENT SEMITES AND THE MODERN
JEws.
H. H. St. Clair, 2d, INVEsTiGATIONS AMONG THE COMANCHE
AND UTE INDIANS.
SUMMARY OF PAPERS.
Dr. Fishberg’s paper was as follows:
The somatic characteristics of the ancient and the mod-
ern Semites were discussed in detail, the purest representa-
tives of the latter being the Arabian Bedouins. Their anthro-
pological type is distinctly African. The bas-reliefs of the an-
cient Semites, as represented on the Assyrian and Egyptain
monuments, are of the same type. The modern Jews are, on
the other hand, a distinctly Asiatic type physically ; they are
brachycephalic — cephalic index 82 with less than five per
cent. of heads having an index of 75 or less. Their head form
shows very little variability, but one important feature is that in
countries where the non-Jewish population is round-headed the
Jews are also round-headed. In Caucasia their cephalic in-
dex is 87; in eastern Europe, where the cephalic index of the
160 RECORDS.
non-Jews ranges between 80 and 84, that of the Jews is about
the same. In Africa, among the long-headed Gentile popula-
tion, the Jews are also dolichocephalic. The same is observed
to be the case with stature. The Jews are taller in countries
where the general population is tall. The type of the Jew is
dark, but 12 per cent. of pure-blood types, having fair hair and
blue eyes, are to be found. The nose of the modern Jew is
not as frequently hooked as is generally supposed. Statistics
show that only 12 per cent. are of this variety. The only
characteristic which often betrays a Jew is the ‘ Ghetto eye.”
But such Jews who have lived outside of the pale of the Ghetto
for a few generations do not present this phenomenon. Physi-
cally there are two types of Jews— one derived from Asia,
commonly. called Ashkenasim, and constituting more than go
per cent. of the modern Jewery. It has no relation at all with
the second type, of African origin, commonly referred to as
Sephardim. These, constituting less than 10 per cent. of the
Jews, alone are more or less related to the ancient Semites,
although they have not everywhere preserved themselves as
pure as in Africa. Besides these there are to be discerned other
subtypes, in which Teutonic, Slavonic and Mongolian blood
appears most prominent. From the standpoint of physical an-
thropology, the view that all the modern Jews are descendants
of Abraham, Isaac and Jacob, cannot be seriously considered.
The only thing which binds the modern Jews together is their
religion. In blood there is no more relation between the Jews
than there is between the people who profess the Protestant,
Methodist or Unitarian religion.
Mr. St. Clair’s paper was as follows: The investigations.
were made during the summer of 1902 upon the Comanches
on the Kiowa-Comanche Reservation, Oklahoma, and the Utes.
of the Uintah Reservation, Utah. Both tribes belong to the
great Shoshonean family. These tribes have a very loose social
organization and no elaborate religious ceremonial. There are
no calendar-records nor any traces of heraldry among the
Comanches. The designs painted on rawhide bags or woven
in beads have no meaning as with the Shoshones, but are
RECORDS. 161
merely ornamental, and there is lack of the symbolic conver-
sationalism found among such people as the Arapahoes and
Sioux. In their stories the coyote figures as the most frequent
character representing the fool and schemer. There are strik-
ing similarities between the Shoshone and Nahuatl languages
of Mexico, each using the same grammatical processes in its
pronoun, noun, preposition and verb, and the order of words
and structure of the sentence being practically the same in both.
James E. Lovucu,
Secretary.
BUSINESS MEETING.
FEBRUARY 2, 1903.
The Academy met at 8:15 P. M., Professor William Hallock
presiding. The reading of the minutes of the previous business
meeting was dispensed with.
No business was presented by the Council.
Adjourned.
Henry E. CRAMPTON,
Recording Secretary.
SECTION OF ASTRONOMY, PHYSICS AND
CHEMISTRY.
FEBRUARY 2, 1903.
Section met at 8:15 P. M., Professor Wm. Hallock presiding.
The minutes of the last meeting of Section were read and ap-
proved.
The following program was then offered:
Herschel C. Parker, ExpERIMENTS CONCERNING VERY BRIEF
ELECTRICAL CONTACTS. .
Marston T. Bogert, Som—E Propucts DERIVED FROM COAL
(illustrated by samples).
SUMMARY OF PAPERS.
Mr. Parker’s paper was as follows: A series of electrical
contacts giving a fairly accurate range of adjustment from 0.1
second to 0.00001 second would furnish a valuable means of
162 RECORDS.
investigation. A gravity contact key devised by Dr. Charles
Forbes gives promise of fulfilling the above conditions. Many
determinations were made of the times of contact given by the
various devices employed on this ‘key, and also investigations
carried out on the times of contact of several forms of pendulum.
The method employed was as follows: A condenser of
known capacity (/ farads) was charged during the time of con-
tact (7), and the deflection on discharging noted. The con-
denser is again charged through a resistance (#) and the de-
flection (Q) observed.
Then ;
O= EF X(t" — 1) RE)
and,
= — RF x log e(1 — O/ EF).
The “gravity key” consists essentially of a rectangular
weight falling on metal guides, the key being furnished with a
scale divided in fractions of a second, according to the law of
falling bodies, and the weight actuating the various forms of
switches employed. If two switches are used, one to make the
contact and the other to break the contact, by placing them at
different distances apart on the scale, times of contact varying
from 0.4 second to 0.001 second may be obtained. For shorter
times a single switch that makes and breaks the contact is made
use of, and the time made faster or slower by placing in different
positions on the scale so that the falling weight strikes it with
varying velocities.
In one form the weight moves the short arm of a lever, the
long arm passing over a contact strip. Another form is one in
which the fulcrum of the lever changes, first giving contact and
then breaking the circuit immediately afterwards. In still an-
other type the falling weight strikes a lever arm and releases a
spring, which makes the contact, and a further motion of the
lever breaks the contact, thus giving a differential effect between
the velocity of the weight and the rapidity of the spring. With
this key it is possible to obtain a contact of only 0.000017
second and with careful adjustment it seems possible to reach
0.00001 second.
RECORDS. 163
Experiments made with pendulums consisting of a steel ball
suspended by a wire, and striking against a steel anvil, gave
very positive and satisfactory contacts. Using a pendulum
with the suspension wire about four meters long and the steel
ball two inches in diameter, an arc, of .5° gave 0.00039 second,
while a pendulum with a short suspension wire using one-half-
inch steel ball, through an arc of go° gave 0.000079 second.
It is interesting to note that in working with condensers the
best mica condenser gives no appreciable variation in capacity
for the very briefest times of charge, while a paraffine condenser
may show a reduction in capacity of some sixty per cent. from
a time charge of 0.4 second to that of 0.001 second.
Professor Bogert’s talk was a very interesting discussion of
‘‘Some Products Derived from Coal,’”’ paying special reference
to the products from coal tar. From bituminous coal by dis-
tillation are derived (1) coal gas, (2) ammonia water, (3) tar
and (4) coke.
The uses of coal gas and coke are so well known as to need
no mentioning. In the United States the total production of
ammonium compounds for the year 1900 amounted to 27,000
tons, valued at about $2,000,000.
The chief source of coal tar is the coal gas manufacture, but
large amounts are also obtained from the by-product coke
ovens, the water gas industry, etc. During the year 1900, 20
per cent. of the gas produced in the United States was coal
gas, requiring the distillation of 1,350,000 tons of coal, and
producing 13.5 billion cubic feet of gas, z. e., 10,000 cubic feet
per ton of coal. The yield of tar is approximately 5 per cent.
of the weight of the coal used; the product of tar was there-
fore, 67,000 tons. If we add to this the 52,500 tons of tar
from the by-product coke ovens, we have a total of about
120,000 tons of tar produced in 1900 from coal. This is less
than one fifth of the amount produced in England from similar
sources. The total production of coal tar in Europe for the
year 1898 was 1,120,000 tons.
Coal tar is first roughly divided into the following fractions
1. First runnings, or light oil (lighter than water).
164 RECORDS.
Middle oil, or carbolic oil.
Heavy oil, dead oil, or creosote oil.
. Anthracene oil or green grease.
. Pitch (remains in the stills).
fies five products were taken up in detail, and feel: one
hundred drugs, perfumes, etc. were exhibited, the method of
derivation of the substances being explained.
S. A. MITCHELL,
Secretary.
wm wid
SECTIONZOR BIOLOGY:
FEBRUARY 9, 1903.
Section met at 8:15 P. M at the American Museum, Vice-
President Dean presiding. The minutes of the last meeting
were read and approved.
The following program was offered :
W. A. Cannon, CyroLocicaL SruprEs OF VARIATION IN
Hypribs.
Bashford Dean, Past AND PRESENT STUDY OF ZOOLOGY
IN JAPAN.
H. F. Osborn, On THE Primary Divisions oF THE REpP-
TILIA INTO Two SUBCLASSES.
SUMMARY OF PAPERS.
Dr. Cannon’s paper, was based upon his studies of hybrids
of cotton plants, and discussed the relation between the matura-
tion mitoses in hybrids and the variation of the hybrid race. Two
forms of mitosis occur in fertile hybrids. One of these is the
normal type, which occurs in pure races and may be supposed
to give rise to reproductive cells of pure descent. This is the
form in hybrids between closely related parents (monohybrids),
and probably forms the basis for the regular reversion in them.
The other type of mitosisis irregular. It is suggested that this
kind of maturation mitosis may organize cells of mixed descent,
and if found in hybrids from parents rather distantly related,
would constitute the basis for such mixture of the characters of
the pure parents as occurs in these hybrids. However, after
RECORDS. 165
the characters have become mixed in all possible proportions,
and the limit of variation thus reached, normal mitoses probably
occur. Thus it appears that the mingling of the characters, as
well. as the regular reversion in hybrids, may have a morpho-
logical basis.
Professor Dean, first reviewed the history of the study of
zoology, and then considered the present status of zoological in-
vestigation and teaching in that country. With the aid of lantern
illustration, descriptions were given of the laboratories, the fauna
available for study, and the prominent Japanese workers.
Professor Osborn’s paper was presented by Dr. Hay. This
has been published in full in Sczence for February 13, 1903.
M. A. BIGELow,
Secretary.
SECTION OF GEOLOGY AND MINERALOGY.
FEBRUARY 16, 1903.
The section met at 8:15 P. M., Professor J. F. Kemp presid-
ing. The minutes of the last meeting were read and approved.
The following program was then offered :
William Hallock, An Ascent oF Mr. Wuitney, CALI-
FORNIA, WITH NOTES ON THE GEOLOGY.
J. F. Kemp, THe Leucire Hitrs oF Wyomina.
SUMMARY OF PAPERS.
Professor Hallock’s paper was as follows: Mt. Whitney with
an altitude of 14,625 feet claims the distinction of being the
highest peak in the United States. It is a mountain of high
relief in a rugged country. The easiest way to the summit is
by a five-day journey skirting the canyons from the southwest.
Sedimentary rocks do not occur in the part of the Sierras near
Mt. Whitney. The country rockis a deeply weathered granite,
split by countless joint planes. Mt. Whitney exhibits the
effects of glacial sculpturing, and adjacent to its top, holds
many small lakes in the cirques, which have resulted from ice
undercutting. - Professor Hallock also described a lava flow
166 RECORDS.
with cinder cones on Volcano Creek, Cal. Lantern slides were
used to bring out these features and to illustrate the topography.
Professor Kemp said: Before giving an account of his work in
this region with Professor Knight, of Wyoming University, he
described the mineralogical and petrographical features of the
leucite rocks as they occur in America, and referred to their
discovery in Wyoming by the members of the Fortieth Parallel
Survey. These rocks were originally determined by Dr. Zirkel.
The speaker then called attention to Dr. Cross’s more extended
work in the district. His own contribution had to do with the
general geology of the Leucite Hills. As many as seventeen
separate mesas and buttes isolated by erosion have been
mapped, representing in most cases single extrusive and intrusive
flows of these rare rocks. They are found in sandstones near
the top of the Cretaceous, and their distribution and field rela-
tions tend to confirm the view that they are volcanic outpourings
at different times from a laccolithic reservoir of great extent,
which is nowhere exposed at the surface. Lantern slides were
used in illustrating the geology, and specimens of the rocks in
question were exhibited.
GeorcE I. FINray,
Secretary, pro tem.
SECTION OF ANTHROPOLOGY AND PsY¥CHOLOGY:
FEBRUARY 23, 1903.
The regular meeting of the Section was held February 23,
in conjunction with the New York branch of the American Psy-
chological Association, Professor Thorndike presiding. After-
noon and evening sessions were held, the members dining
together at the close of the afternoon session. The following
papers were presented :
E. W. Scripture, PHoneTic SuRVEYs.
Clark Wissler, CorRELATIONS OF MEASUREMENTS OF GROWTH.
(Read by title.)
J. H. Bair, CorrELATIONS IN SCHOOL CHILDREN.
J. E. Lough, Apparent Morion 1N STEREOSCOPIC VISION.
RECORDS. 167
Robert MacDougall, AN EXPERIMENT IN FACIAL VISION.
E. H. Sneath, Nores on THE WASHINGTON MEETING.
J. McKeen Cattell, Grapes For MENTAL TRAITS.
W. H. Davis, A PRELIMINARY REPORT ON TESTS OF ONE
HuNDRED MEN oF SCIENCE. (Read by title.)
SUMMARY OF PAPERS.
Professor Scripture’s paper was as follows: After brief
mention of the phonetic surveys being carried on by Grierson
in India and Guilleron in France, a description was given of
the chief talking-machine methods that may be used for this
purpose. It was pointed out that the advances in the con-
struction of phonographs, graphophones and gramophones dur-
ing the last couple of years have been so great as to revolu-
tionize these methods. It was also explained that making a
speech record was like taking a photograph; everybody can
take a picture, but a good picture requires skill. By use of the
graphophone the records made on wax cylinders can be used
for making metal molds; from these indestructible molds
copies in hard wax can be made. The gramophone method
likewise furnishes metal molds from which hard discs are pro-
duced ; but the talking machine requires an expert. This
gramophone method was lately used on three expeditions sent
out by the Vienna Academy of Sciences. The new methods
furnish records that are perfect in recording every detail of the
voice. There is not the slightest loss even of the most difficult
consonants. Criticisms stating the contrary are derived from
acquaintance with methods that are now out of date. From
the gramophone records the curve of speech can be traced off
with great accuracy ; whereby every detail of the voice can be
measured. A similar method can be applied to phonograph
records. It was urged that the fast disappearing dialects and
languages should be recorded and preserved in one of these
ways. It was pointed out that such records could be made
and delivered at smaller cost per word than in the case of
Guilleron’s “Atlas.” It was stated that the various talking
machine companies have shown self-sacrificing interest in such
168 RECORDS.
work, and that the Victor Talking Machine Company would
be willing to loan its record-talking car when it is finished.
Exhibits of various material and speech curves were made.
Dr. Bair stated that the measurements were taken on Wor-
cester school children. A high coefficient of correlation was
shown between stature and height-sitting, stature and weight,
and height-sitting and weight. Between stature, height-sitting,
weight, with length of head and width of head the amount of
correlation was much less and much more irregular than be-
tween the measurements first named. This irregularity was
partly due to the small number of cases examined.
Professor Lough said that stereoscopic pictures may be united
without the aid of a stereoscope, 7. ¢., by direct fixation, when-
ever the distances between similar objects in the two pictures is
not greater than the interocular distance. When pictures are so
united — giving a direct perception of the third dimension —
any movement of the picture from side to side gives the im-
pression that objects in the background are moving through a
greater distance than are the objects in the foreground. This
“slipping” of the background is perceived with still greater
vividness when the picture remains stationary and the head is
rotated or moved from side to side. In bringing a stereoscopic
picture nearer the eyes the background seems to approach more
rapidly than the foreground, and in moving the picture away
from the eyes the background seems to move away more
rapidly. The apparent motion in stereoscopic pictures seen
under the above conditions is probably due to the fact that the
angle of parallax remains constant, while the line of direction
varies, with every movement of the head or of the picture.
The paper of Professor MacDougall supplements and in three
respects aims to correct the reports of previous experiments on
facial vision. In the perception of objects in proximity to the face
independently of the sense of sight, the nature of the sensory im-
pression upon which perception depends is not commonly dis-
criminated. In the present investigation the percentage of correct
perceptions was found to lie between 50 and 75, that is, within
the subliminal region. This result is contrary to previous work
RECORDS. 169
in which the percentage lay clearly above the threshold of 75. If
a true perceptual process be involved, the percentage of correct
responses should be a function of the absolute differences be-
tween the objects discriminated. This was found to be the case
in the present set of experiments, but not in preceding investi-
gations. In work published heretofore the perception was
reported to be mediated solely by sensations of sound, but in
the present investigation the shutting off of auditory stimu-
lation made practically no reduction in the percentage of correct
responses.
Professor E. H. Sneath said that the Washington meeting, if
compared with a possible meeting of psychologists twenty-five
years ago, shows the lines along which progress has been made.
Such a comparison demonstrates clearly (1) the special training
required of the psychologists of to-day ; (2) the position of
psychology among the sciences ; (3) the growth of produc-
tive scholarship ; (4) the differentiation of the work into ex-
perimental, genetic, comparative, abnormal, educational, etc. ;
(5) the development of new methods of approach.
The paper of Professor Cattell treated the accuracy with
which grades can be assigned for college studies, and the
methods to be employed in assigning grades. Those who do
well in one study or have one trait in excess are likely to do
well in other studies and to have other traits in excess, and they
are more likely to succeed in after life. It was shown, however,
that the grades assigned to students have not very great valid-
ity. It was recommended that grades be assigned in a scale
of ten and that a probable error be attached to the grade. The
grades should represent groups of equal size rather than equal
differences in merit. The paper also discussed the grade as-
signed to large groups for mental, moral and physical traits,
and gave some of the results that the writer had obtained.
; James E. Loucu,
Secretary.
170 RECORDS.
BUSINESS MEETING.
MARCH 2, 1903.
- The Academy met at 8.15 P. M., Vice-President Poor pre-
siding. The minutes of the last business meeting were read and
approved.
The Secretary reported from the Council as follows: that
the Executive Committee of the Council, constituted a Com-
mittee on the Budget for 1903 presented the report, a copy of
which is filed herewith, which was accepted by the Council ;
that a special committee of the Council had considered the ad-
visability of depositing the library of the Academy in the Amer-
ican Museum of Natural History and had presented a report, a
copy of which is filed herewith, favoring such transfer; the
Council had adopted this report.
The following candidate for active membership, approved by
the Council, was duly elected: Ralph W. Tower, American
Museum of Natural History.
The following candidates for election as Fellows of the Acad-
emy, on recommendation of the Council, were unanimously
elected :
Frederick J. E. Woodbridge, Columbia University.
Edward Phelps Allis, Jr., Mentone, France.
Adjourned.
REPORT. OF THE COMMITTEE ON THE BUDGE
FEBRUARY 9, 1903.
The Executive Committee, constituted by vote of the Coun-
cil on January 5th a Committee on the Budget, presents the fol-
lowing estimates for the year 1903:
Estimated incOnie 55s eee ae eee ee hae ee $3,000
Cash onwhand,» Wecemiber m5. lOO2 seme en ee 3,750
$6.756
ESTIMATED EXPENSES.
RECORCINE? SECKELATY: 5). Pe ertct nes ee eee $300
Meret a oe io. 2) 2-0 Seger 200
RECORDS. iva
TIES SLED. 5 SAN Ao aes EON Aan akg et ae 50
Wiese ete nitine AW TaNGe. W104) Sit ete cl nels. abe aces 50
MIBeeNANEOUS) EXPENSES) f.... Gs Sara eee tie ei as eis 3 150
Ne tetOns til PEESS. 24.5 1. eyes arse oa le ae alee 600
REP ueaMons fOmCuUTTent years-(s2ee ie ses oe eae Sala 1,000
2,350
LEEPER REVO Cos 10150 OS OOM ee Canker $4,406
For the Committee,
Henry E. Crampton,
Recording Secretary.
REPOKT ‘OF THE SPECIAL, COMMITLEE ON EX-
CHANGES AND TEE PRANSPER OF
THE -eIpbRARY
A second meeting of the Special Committee consisting of the
Library and Publication Committees was held at the American
Museum on January 12, 1903. Present: Professors Cattell,
Britton, Boas, Bumpus, Farrand and Crampton. Originally
constituted to consider the Academy’s exchanges, this Com-
mittee, together with Professor Britton, was empowered to con-
sider the question of transferring the Library to the American
“Museum.
As a result of its deliberations, the Committee recommends
that the Library of the Academy be deposited in the American
Museum of Natural History, the Library Committee retaining
general control, and the matter of exchanges remaining with
the Academy. The Museum will assume the custodianship of
the Library, and the expense of cataloging and suitable book-
plating ; the Academy’s books will be placed in the library of
the Museum unless they should be duplicates of those already
on the shelves, in which case they will be stored ; the Museum
will bind such books as it may desire, the cost of binding to be
a lien upon the books so bound ; the Museum will execute the
transfer. The Museum can assume no liability for damages by
fire. The Library will be open for consultation from g A. M.,
iP RECORDS.
to 5 P. M. The above agreement may be terminated. six
months after due notice by either party. .
With regard to the matter of exchanges, the Committee
recommends that after the transfer of the Library, the Library
Committee should collect information regarding the number of
societies and of libraries which receive the Academy’s publica-
tions ; and that it should make systematic efforts to induce
libraries to subscribe for such publications, offering back num-
bers as far as possible, with a view to reducing the number of
societies receiving the Academy’s publications by way of ex-
change. The Committee also recommends that all requests for
the institution of exchanges be referred to the Library Commit-
tee with power.
Henry E. Crampton,
Secretary.
SECTION OF ASTRONOMY, PHYSICS AND
CHEMISTRY.
MARCH 2, 1903.
The section met at 8:30 P. M. Dr. Charles Lane Poor pre-
siding. The minutes of the last meeting were read and ap-
proved. The following program was then offered :
William Hallock, MreasurEMENT OF THE ALTITUDE OF MT.
WHITNEY, CALIFORNIA, BY BoILING Point DETERMINATIONS.
S. A. Mitchell, THe Discovery or New GASES IN THE SUN.
SUMMARY OF PAPERS.
Professor Hallock’s paper was as follows:
At the time of the ascent of Mount Whitney last summer by
the party under Mr. Harrington Putnam, apparatus was taken
to the top, and a determination of the boiling point was made
at ten o’clock on August 23. The observed boiling point was
186°.47. Applying the instrumental corrections and reducing
this by the Smithsonian tables, the corresponding barometric
pressure was 17.70 inches. The Weather Bureau kindly fur-
nished the barometric pressure, temperature and vapor tension
RECORDS. 1738
for Independence, California, for that morning. They were:
barometric pressure 25.93 inches, temperature 78°.0, vapor ten-
sion 0.110 feet. Substituting these values in the formula given
by Bigelow on page 490 of the second volume of the annual
report of the ‘“‘ Chief of the Weather Bureau ”’ for 1898-1899,
a difference in altitude between Independence and Mount Whit-
ney of 10,633 feet results. Inasmuch as this determination
was made five feet below the actual summit of the mountain,
and Independence is 3,910 feet above sea-level, it would give a
final value for the elevation of Mount Whitney of 14,548 feet.
It may be stated in this connection that the value which was ob-
tained by Secretary Langley as a result of a very complete series
of determinations was 14,522 feet. The probable error in either
case is undoubtedly not fess than ten or fifteen feet. One ob-
ject of this determination was to show the availability of boiling-
point apparatus which is light and convenient for such deter-
minations as being very much more reliable than the aneroid
barometer, and much easier for transportation than the mer-
curial barometer.
In the course of Dr. Mitchell’s paper it was shown that the
interdependence of the sciences is nowhere better illustrated
than in spectroscopic work, when astronomy, the most an-
cient of all the sciences, goes hand in hand with physics to
find a new chemical element. In recent years, through spec-
troscopic researches several metals have been added to the
list of elements. In April, 1895, by investigations on a speci-
men of clevite, Ramsay announced the discovery of terrestrial
helium which gives a line in its spectrum agreeing with the D,
line familiar for more than twenty-five years in stellar, promi-
nence and chromospheric spectra. About the same time,
Rayleigh and Ramsay announced the discovery of another new
element which was called argon. In the early summer of
1898, Ramsay found two more gaseous elements, neon and
krypton, and subsequently a heavier gas to which the name
xenon was applied. These five new elements, helium, neon,
argon, krypton and xenon are found in atmospheric air, and
can be obtained from air by fractional distillation by making
ANNALS N, Y. AcapD., Sci., XV, April, 1904—13.
174 RECORDS.
use of the extremely low temperatures of liquid air and liquid
hydrogen. Atomic weights have been assigned as follows:
helium, 4; neon, 20; argon, 40; krypton, 82; and xenon,
128, and the gases seem to form a series in the periodic table
of elements between the fluorine and sodium groups.
Investigations carried out on photographs of the ‘ flash”’
spectrum at the Sumatra eclipse of 1901 enabled Dr. Mitchell
to find that the remarkable variations in the intensities of the
lines of the ordinary solar spectrum and of the “ flash”’ spec-
trum (for one does not /ook to be the reversal of the other) are
due to the different Zezghts to which the vapors of the various
metals ascend above the sun’s surface. As a consequence,
although helium lines are not found in the ordinary solar spec-
trum, the helium lines in the spectrum of the chromosphere
are very bright indeed.
In view of the similarity of the new gases, neon, argon, etc.,
to helium, and as the helium lines are such prominent ones in
eclipse spectra, it was expected that the new atmospheric gases
—at least the lighter ones, neon and argon — might appear in
the sun’s atmosphere. A detailed comparison of the lines of
the flash spectrum measured by Dr. Mitchell with those of the
new gases lately published has led to the discovery that neon
and argon are both probably present in the chromosphere,
while it is doubtful whether krypton and xenon are there or not.
S.A. MitcHErr.
Secretary of Section.
SECTIONS OF (BIOE OGY.
MARCH 9, 1903.
The Section met at 8.15 P. M., Professor Bashford Dean
presiding. The following papers were presented :
W. S. Sutton, CHromosomic REDUCTION IN ITS RELATION
TO MENDEL’s Law.
Graham Lusk, INFLUENCE oF NUTRITION ON THE GROWTH
oF YounG MAMMALS.
C. L. Bristol, ON THE CoLors AND COLOR-PATTERNS OF CER-
TAIN BERMUDA FISHES.
RECORDS. 175
SUMMARY OF PAPERS.
Mr. W. 8. Sutton pointed out that the processes of synapsis _
and reduction in the germ-cells of the grasshopper Lrachystola
are such as to indicate strongly that they are the causes of the
character-reduction which forms the basis of the Mendelian
principle of heredity. Probably the reducing division in
Lrachystola does not effect a separation of chromosomes into
maternal and paternal groups, but the chromosome-series of the
mature germ-cells is made up of a chance combination of
chromosomes from the two parents. This is inaccord with the
results of Mendel and others who have shown that hybrid off-
spring exhibit a chance combination of characters from the two
parental lines.
Professor Graham Lusk based his paper upon experiments
conducted in his laboratory by Dr. Margaret B. Wilson (Amer.
Jour. Phy., VMII., 197, 1902), whose results support his own
earlier work. It was shown that new-born pigs develop nor-
mally when fed with skimmed cow’s milk, or with the same
milk to which three per cent. of dextrose or lactose has been
added. The growth is proportional to the calorific value of the
food — always supposing sufficient proteid to be present. This
agrees with the results of other workers who have studied the
growth of children and other young mammals. The growth
of the pigs was on the average about 215 grams growth for
1,000 calories in the food. Eighteen to nineteen per cent. of
the energy of the food was retained in the body as new tissue.
Professor ©. L. Bristol’s paper dealt with correlations be-
tween habits and appearance with reference to warning and
protective coloration of these fishes. An abstract will soon ap-
pear in Sczence in the proceedings of the American Morpho-
logical Society. M. A. BIGELow,
Secretary.
SECTION. OF (GEOLOGY AND MINERALOGY.
MARcH 16, 1903.
The Section met at 8.30 P. M., and, in the absence of Pro-
fessor Kemp, Dr. Julien was made temporary chairman.
176 RECORDS.
The following program was presented :
A. W. Grabau, THE GeoLocy oF BEcrarr Mountain, New
YORK.
C. W. Dickson, THE MINERALOGY AND GEOLOGY OF THE
SUDBURY-ONTARIO- COPPER- NICKEL DEPosI's.
SUMMARY OF PAPERS.
Dr. Grabau said that Becraft Mountain, in Columbia Co.,
N. Y., is an outlier of the Helderberg Mountains. Its base
is formed by the upturned and eroded rocks of the Hud-
son Group, chiefly, the Normans Kill shales. Uncomformably
upon this rests the upper part of the Manlius limestone, fol-
lowed in turn by the members of the New York Devonian up
to and including the Onondaga limestone. The structure of
the eastern and southen portion of the mountain, which is of
the Appalachian type was discussed, and the excessive folding
and faulting upon it were illustrated by maps and sections.
The paper was discussed by Dr. Stevenson and Dr. Julien.
In Mr. Dickson’s paper it was shown that by magnetic con-
centration of the ore nearly all the nickel can be eliminated from
the pyrrhotite, proving that the element is present in a separate
mineral and that it does not replace part of the iron of the pyr-
rhotite isomorphously. The economic concentration of the
nickel by magnetic methods is, however, practically impossible.
The composition of the nickel mineral corresponds closely to
that of pentlandite, but there is always an excess of (FeNi)
over that required by the formula (FeNi)S in the proportion
Tatas FL)
After studying the relations of the ore and rock minerals in
the field and by the aid of the microscope, the conclusion was
reached that, in their present form, the deposits are replacements
along crushed zones through which the mineral-bearing waters
circulated, and that they cannot be original magmatic segrega-
tions, as generally held.
GEORGE I. FINtay,
Sectretary, pro tem.
RECORDS. liver)
SECTION OF ANTHROPOLOGY AND PSYCHOLOGY.
MARCH 23, 1903.
The regular meeting of the Section was held at 8.30 P. M.,
Professor Thorndike presiding. The following program was
offered :
Clark Wissler, OssERVATIONS ON ABNORMALITIES OF THE
Harb PALATE.
A. Hrdlicka, PuysicaL ANTHROPOLOGY OF THE HybDE EXPE-
DITION IN 1902.
SUMMARY OF PAPERS.
Dr. Clark Wissler’s paper reported progress in the measure-
ments of the casts of the hard palates of idiots. The first thing
to be considered in this work was the determination of the
significant points and dimensions in the palate. The results
presented indicated important structural relations between the
width at the canine teeth and the length of the palate measured
from the first molars and the maximum height of the arch.
The comparative study of the palates of normal and of idiotic
persons will be based upon these measurements.
During 1902 Dr. Hrdlicka made two expeditions, one of
seven and the other of three months’ duration, to the south-
western United States and Mexico. These expeditions were
the conclusive ones of a series of five, begun in 1898, made for
the purpose of ascertaining the physical characteristics of all
those present as well as extinct tribes which occupy or occupied
the region marked by the boundaries of the ancient Pueblos,
Cliff-Dwellers and Nahaun (Toltec, Chichimec, Aztec) peoples.
The region thus bounded extends uninterruptedly from Utah
and Colorado to the Mexican States of Morelos and Guerrero,
and in it live at present a little over forty tribes or distinct
groups of Indians. About nine tenths of all these peoples were
visited on the five expeditions and examined ; all the measure-
ments and data secured are being studied, but to arrive at de-
tailed results will require several years. :
What can now be safely stated is: (1) All the ancient as
well as the modern peoples in the region mentioned belong to
178 RECORDS.
three physical types, and these types are identical with those
widely represented in all directions outside of this region; and
(2) avery large majority of the present peoples examined are
physically identical with the prehistoric inhabitants of these same
districts (so far as could be ascertained from the osteological
material recovered) ; the prehistoric remains (osteological) show
no type that is not represented somewhere in the region covered
to-day and there is no type among the living tribes not repre-
sented among the ancient ones.
The visit of so large a number of tribes, as well as the search
for skeletal remnants of the extinct peoples, afforded a very good
opportunity for general ethnological and archeological observa-
tions, the substance of which can be stated as follows : The Mexi-
can Indians visited, with the exception of the Huichols and
Tarahumares, are in their mode of life and habits far more like
the whites about them than is the case with our Indians of the
southwest ; nevertheless, the Mexican tribes preserve much that
would be of value to the ethnologist. Dr. Hrdlicka’s explora-
tion in northern Jalisco and in Zacatecas resulted in the discovery
of the ruins of eleven good-sized pueblos or towns, the exca-
vations at one of which showed that its inhabitants had reached
a comparatively high grade of culture. The pueblo and cliff
ruins of our southwest may be compared to a head which con-
nects by a long narrow neck running through Cora Grande in
Arizona, Coras Grande in Mexico, Zape in Mexico and La
Quemada in Zacatecas, with a large body of ruins which begin
in southern Zacatecas and Jalisco and extend through all the
southern part of Mexico to Guatemala and Central America,
La Quemada was found to be above all a fort, in all probability
the most representative stone-built native fort in North America.
In Zacatecas Dr. Hrdlicka discovered a colony of Tlascaltecs,
transplanted hither by the Spaniards in the seventeenth and
eighteenth centuries ; and further south he found two villages
still occupied by the remnants of the ancient Chichimecs of
Teul. ‘South of Juchipilla, in Zacatecas, is located a perfect
cliff-dwelling, probable the most southern one in existence.
This particular ruin, known under the name of ‘‘ Las Ventanas ”’
RECORDS. 179
(the windows), has been visited by at least one American be-
fore, namely, by Miss Britton.
James E. Loucu,
Secretary.
BUSINESS MEETING.
APRIL 6, 1903.
The Academy met at 8.15 P. M., Vice-President Poor pre-
siding. The minutes of the last business meeting were read
and approved.
No report from the Council was presented.
There being no business to come before the meeting the
Academy adjourned.
Henry E. Crampton,
Recording Secretary.
SECTION OF ASTRONOMY, PHYSICS:AND
CHEMISTRY.
APRIL 6, 1903.
Section met at 8:20 P. M., Vice-President Poor presiding.
The minutes of the last meeting were read and approved.
Mr. P. H. Dudley, C.E., Ph.D., of the New York Central
and Hudson River Railroad, read a paper full of interest to
those familiar with American railroad methods, on ‘“ STREM-
MATOGRAPH TESTS: PRINCIPLES AND FACTS RELATING TO THE
DISTRIBUTION OF THE STRAINS IN THE BASE OF RAILS UNDER
MOVING TRAINS.” This paper is published in full in Sczence, N.
S., Vol. XVII, No. 436, May 8, 1903.
S. A. MITCHELL,
Secretary.
SECEION-OF BIOLOGY.
APRILS 13, O03:
The Section met at 8:30 P. M., Professor Bashford Dean
presiding. After reading the minutes, the following program
was presented :
180 RECORDS.
A. G. Mayer, Tue Instincts oF LEPIDOPTERA.
H. E. Crampton, VarIATION AND REPRODUCTIVE SELECTION
IN SATURNID MOTHS.
SUMMARY OF PAPERS.
Dr. Mayer’s paper was a mere preliminary account of cer-
tain observations made by the writer. It is planned that the
research will be continued and finally published conjointly with
Miss Caroline G. Soule. Certain lepidopterous larve, such as
Danais plexippus, are negatively geotactic and positively photo-
tactic toward the ultra-violet rays. The combination of these
reactions in nature maintains the larva at or near the top of its
food plant, where incidentally it finds the youngest and best
leaves, and tends to prevent its crawling down and away from
the plant, thus incurring risk of starvation. Other larve, such
as Pyrrharctia isabella, are indifferent either to the attraction of
gravitation or to ordinary variation in conditions of light. Others
react differently at different stages of development. Larve which
will devour only certain definite species of leaves may be induced
to eat sparingly of any other sort, provided the instinct to eat be
first set into operation by the presence of the proper food plant.
Under such conditions about the same number of bites are taken
upon each presentation of the uneatable food to the larva. This
phenomenon may be called “momentum of the reaction”’ and
inclines one to conclude that the eating reaction is probably an
unconscious reflex. Another series of experiments appeared to
show that larve are unable to learn to follow a definite path to
their food, and that the associative memory of lepidopterous
larve does not endure for as long a time as ninety seconds.
Certain larve when about to pupate display a well-marked
geotropism.
The mating instinct is called into play by the perception of
the characteristic odor of the female, and is merely a phe-
nomenon of chemotaxis uncomplicated by esthetic appreciation
or sexual selection on the part of the female.
Professor Crampton described briefly the principal results of a
statistical study of the correlation between structural character-
RECORDS. 181
istics and reproductive ability or disability in Sama cecropia. It
was shown that the pupz of those individuals, male and female,
which mated were different from those which failed to mate,
although all were placed under the same conditions as far as
possible. True reproductive selection was evident, and related
to typical conditions as well as to variabilities. A brief discus-
sion was given of the real basis for the selective process and of
the relation between reproductive selection manifested after
emergence to that selection which occurred during pupal exis-
tence.
M. A. BIGELow,
Secretary.
SECTION OF GEOLOGY AND MINERALOGY.
APRIL (20) 1603.
Section met at 8.15 P. M., Professor James F. Kemp pre-
siding. The minutes of the last meeting of section were read
and approved. ,
The following program was then offered :
A. A. Julien, THE HornBLeNDE Scuist oF SpuyTEN DuyviL
CREEK, MANHATTAN ISLAND.
D. W. Johnson, THE GEOLOGY oF THE CERILLos HILtrs
New Mexico.
SUMMARY OF PAPERS.
Dr. A. A. Julien, in the first paper of the evening, presented
the results of his work on the hornblendic schist which occurs
at the extreme northern end of Manhattan Island, near Spuyten
Duyvil Creek. He was able in the first place to prove the un-
doubted igneous origin of this rock by the unaltered crystals
which it still preserves and which point to an original gabbro.
The speaker then presented his views in favor of the igneous
origin of all the hornblende schists of Manhattan Island.
Mr. D. W. Johnson presented a paper on the “ Geology
of the Cerrillos Hills, New Mexico.” The Cerrillos Hills
form the most northerly group of a series of four laccolithic
mountain masses in northern central New Mexico. The rela-
182 RECORDS.
tion of these hills to the associated Cretaceous beds, and the
age of the intrusions were discussed. A brief petrographical de-
scription of the several igneous rocks was given, and the sub-
division and correlation of the sedimentaries on palzontological
grounds considered. The origin of the anthracite coal of the
Madrid area, and the origin of the famous turquoise deposits
of the hills were then discussed. The speaker closed with a
resumé of the geological history of the region. An interesting
discussion followed.
GeorGE I. FIntay,
Secretary, pro tem.
SECTION OF ANTHROPOLOGY AND PSYCHOLOGH-
APRIL 27, 1903.
The regular meeting of the Section was held in conjunction
with the New York branch of the American Psychological
Association, Professor Thorndike presiding.
The following papers were presented :
E. L. Thorndike, Menta Traits IN THE Two SEXEs.
W.H. Davis, A PRELIMINARY REPORT OF TESTS OF SCIEN-
TIFIC MEN.
8S. C. Parker, CorrELATION OF SCHOOL ABILITIES.
Robert MacDougall, THE SPECIALIZATION OF THE HAND IN
RELATION TO MENTAL DEVELOPMENT.
SUMMARY OF PAPERS.
Professor E. L. Thorndike reported the results of extended
measurements of mental traits in the two sexes. In general the
females were less variable. In the case of children g to 12 the
ratio of female to male variability was .g2 ; in the case of children
13 and 14 it was 1.02; in the case of children 15 it was .97 ;
in high school pupils .95; in college students .85. In the
abilities measured the greatest difference found was the female
superiority in the tests of impressibility, such as the rate and
accuracy of perception, verbal memory and spelling. In these
only about one third of the boys reach the median mark for girls.
RECORDS, 183
Mr. William Harper Davis’s paper dealt with some twenty
physical and mental measurements made upon one hundred pro-
fessional men of science, under the auspices of the Committee on
Anthropology ofthe American Association for the Advancement
of Science. No significant correlations were found between any
of the tests and the several departments of scientific activity,
although the cases were too few to warrant an expectation
of decided results. (The superiority of psychologists in ‘log-
ical memory”’ was attributed to the accident that the pas-
sage used in the tests was psychological in content.) Vivid
mental imagery was less common among the older than
among the younger men. Two cases of color-blindness were
detected.
Comparison with Columbia College students, upon whom
the same measurements have been made, revealed no significant
difference between the two groups, except such as would
naturally arise from their disparity in age.
Critical comments were made on some of the tests and on
the method of administering them. It is expected that these
measurements will be continued under the direction of Pro-
fessor J. McK. Cattell, who is engaged upon a comparative
study of scientific men.
Mr. 8. C. Parker presented a paper upon “Correlation of
School Abilities.” Several investigations in Teachers College
have had for their subject ‘‘ The Correlation of School Marks.”’
The method and results of these researches are set forth in Vol.
XI, No. 2, of the ‘Columbia University Contributions to
Philosophy, Psychology and Education.”’ This paper reports
the results of some new calculations based on the marks of 245
boys in a New York City high school.
It must be borne in mind that we do not know exactly what
school marks represent ; they may represent real ability in the
school subjects or merely the ability to get marks.
In performing the statistical work, it is important to trans-
mute each teacher’s marks separately. This point is mentioned
because the neglect of it by one investigator lays his results
open to question.
184 RECORDS.
There is not any very great variation in the correlations be-
tween marks in academic subjects, such as the languages,
sciences and mathematics. The Pearson coefficients run be-
tween 40 per cent. and 60 per cent. The correlations of
drawing with academic subjects are low —lying as a rule
between 0 and 25 per cent. From a psychological standpoint,
the academic correlations are high. But it must be borne
in mind that many constant errors enter which would make
the correlations much higher than the essential relationships
would be. From an educational standpoint the correlations
are low. They show the futility of the belief in general bright-
ness for all things, and are one of the best arguments for the
elective system. James E. Loueu,
Secretary.
BUSINESS MEETING.
May 4, 1903.
The Academy met at 8.15 P. M., Vice-President Poor presid-
ing. In the absence of the Recording Secretary, the reading of
the minutes of the last meeting was dispensed with.
No business was reported from the Council. As no new
business was presented, the Academy adjourned.
CHARLES LANE Poor,
Secretary, pro tem.
SECTION OF ASTRONOMY, RY sits AND
CHEMISTY.
May 4, 1903.
The Section met at 8.30 P. M., Vice-President Poor presid-
ing. The minutes of the preceding meeting were read and
approved.
The following papers were presented and read :
Ernest R. von Nardroff, A New INTERFEROMETER METHOD
FOR MEASURING THE REFRACTIVE INDEX OF A TRANSPARENT
PLATE.
G. B. Warring, Some PECULIARITIES OF THE GYROSCOPE.
RECORDS. 185 —
SUMMARY OF PAPERS.
Mr. von Nardroff stated that this method was planned to
avoid the use of compensation, which leads to grave errors un-
less in the compensating material the ratio of the velocities for
any two wave-lengths is the same as in the substance being
measured. It is frequently impracticable to fulfil this condition,
as for example by using as a compensator a second plate of the
same material. Air compensation is of course out of the question.
In the present method, in which no use is made of white
light fringes, the transparent plate, a microscope cover-glass,
for instance, is mounted on a special stage perpendicular to the
path of one of the beams in a Michelson interferometer. With
sodium light, bands are seen that are generally distorted through
lack of perfect parallelism between the surfaces of the plate.
The stage is now rotated forward about a vertical axis through
an angle of 45° up toa fixed stop, thus increasing the path
through the plate. Slowly turning the stage backward, the
bands passing a fixed point in the field are carefully counted
until the plate returns to the perpendicular position, when the
motion of the bands reverses. A new count is now made
while the stage is turned past the perpendicular, backward 45
degrees to a second fixed stop. Generally these counts differ
by a few tenths of a band, owing to imperfect mounting of the
stage as a whole on the interferometer, but they may be aver-
aged without sensible error. Since the light passes through
the plate twice, one half the number of bands counted should
be taken to represent the increase of optical path, JV, in wave-
lengths. The thickness, ¢, of the plate at the part of it observed
in the interferometer may be measured by means of a microm-
eter caliper or by a spherometer. The following exact formula,
much simplified through the use of precisely 45 degrees of
rotation, gives the value of the refractive index, “:
aa NA
bt (1-y s-7)
L= °
; ; NVA
186 RECORDS.
For sodium light where the wave-length, /, is 0.0005893 mm.,
0.00058932/V\?
OES Se (0.2929 — 2 oosnes |
bo oy a
sis .0005893/V
2( 0.2929 — 22O2sBam
This method has been extended to the measurement of
doubly refracting plates, such as mica. The plate crystalline
must contain in its plane at least one of the axes of the so-called
ellipsoid of elasticity, and must be mounted with this axis
vertical. The bands may be observed through a Nicol prism
having its shorter diagonal vertical.
Dr. G. B. Warring detailed the results of some interesting ex-
periments with the gyroscope. The paper led to an interesting
discussion.
Sa. Mintcun Em
Secretary.
SE CTIONSOR BiOLOGN:
May II, 1903.
A regular monthly meeting was held at the American Mu-
seum of Natural History on May 11, Professor Bashford Dean
presiding.
The following papers were presented and read:
H. F. Osborn, ON REcENT MODELS AND RESTORATIONS OF A
NUMBER OF ExtiINct ANIMALS, WITH A DISCUSSION OF THEIR
PROBABLE HaBits AND MopEs OF LIFE.
E. L. Thorndike, Narurat SELECTION AND FERTILITY IN
Man.
C. T. Brues, Tut INTERNAL Factors OF REGENERATION AND
REVERSAL OF ASYMMETRY IN THE CRUSTACEAN ALPHEUS.
SUMMARY OF PAPERS.
Professor Osborn’s paper was based upon models and restora-
tions from the Department of Vertebrate Paleontology of the
American Museum of Natural History, prepared by Charles
RECORDS. 187
Knight under the direction of the speaker with the assistance
of other members of the department. Numerous models and
drawings were exhibited and described. Of special interest
were the following: Elephas tmperiales (Imperial mammoth) ;
Trilophodon productus (Miocene mastodon); and /cthyasaurus
and young ; several Pleistocene rhinoceroses; and Dzplodocus
(a bird-catching dinosaur).
Professor Thorndike reported a study of the size of families
of college graduates during the nineteenth century and of the
descendants of a New England family during the eigthteenth and
nineteenth centuries. The average number of children in the
latter case rose gradually to an acme in the generation born about
1720 and then fell steadily, the figures for eight generations being
Peary 7:7, 10:0, 722,055 404, 3.5. Mhiseriseis inconsistent
with the common hypothesis that social custom is the cause of
change in the productivity of races. So also is the form of the
surface of frequency of family size in the later decades of the
nineteenth century (see Popular Science Monthly, May, 1903, p.
68). A real decrease in natural fertility would account per-
fectly for the statistical appearances found; and, if we judge
only by them, is the most likely hypothesis.
Mr. Brues presented a preliminary account of “ The internal
factors of Regeneration and Reversal of Asymmetry in the crus-
tacean Alpheus.” Przibram and Wilson have recently shown
that when the larger of the asymmetrical chelz of these ani-
mals is amputated, the smaller one on the opposite side
develops into a claw of the large type while a small one regen-
erates on the stump of the large one. If the nerve of the
small claw be severed at the time of removing the large one, re-
versal does not take place, or only incompletely. Histological
examination of animals in which such changes are taking place
indicates that the regeneration and remodeling are influenced
by the nervous system, due possibly to increased nutrition in
the ganglion which supplies the small chela. As the nervous
system shows no morphological asymmetry corresponding to
that of the claws, it propably acts only in a passive way in de-
termining the type of the claw, although it evidently gives the
188 RECORDS.
stimuli for the more minute changes which take place in the
remodeling of a small chela to form one of the large type.
M..A. BIGELow,
Secretary.
SECTION OF GEOLOGY AND MINERALOGY.
May 18, 1903.
Section met at 8:15 P. M., Professor James F. Kemp presiding.
The minutes of the last meeting of section were read and
approved.
The following program was then offered :
George I. Finlay, THE GroLocy oF THE NEPHELITE SYE-
NITE AREA AT SAN Jose, TAMAULIPAS, MEXICO.
Fred H. Moffet, Tyr Copper MINES OF COBRE, SANTIAGO
DE CUBA.
SUMMARY OF PAPERS.
In his paper Dr. Finlay said in part: The town of San José
in the State of Tamaulipas, Mexico, lies in a hollow surrounded
on all sides by mountains, and is about seventy miles from the
coast of the Gulf of Mexico. The range of peaks immediately
to the south of it, and extending for fifteen miles in that direc-
tion, is of nephelite-syenite. The range is known as the San
Carlos Mountains. San José itself is on the site of an eroded
laccolith of andesite (locally known as ‘‘ porphyry ’’), intruded
into limestone. Some limestone masses stand on end within
the area of the laccolith, and are thought to have floated or
worked their way down to their present position during the in-
trusion of the igneous rock. There are two or three hundred
of these isolated limestone masses, and it is in connection with
these that the copper ores are found. Contact metamorphism
has not been developed to any great extent in the limestone
surrounding the laccolith, but has been greatly induced in the
included masses; marble, grossularite, vesuvianite and other
minerals having been produced. Aside from the occurrence of
the nephelite-syenite in the area south of the laccolith, the region
is interesting on account of the dyke rocks which are found cut-
RECORDS. ~ 189
ting the andesite of the laccolith. Among these are found anal-
cite-tinguaites and camptonites, as well as vogesite and diabase.
Two main streams now drain the hollow formed by the down-
cutting of the dome where the weaker andesite has been laid
bare as far as the limestone cover has been cut back.
Dr. Finlay’s paper was discussed by Professor Kemp, who
called attention to the interesting association of types presented
by the intruded rocks; and by Dr. H. S. Washington, who
dwelt on the importance attaching to the additional localities
here and elsewhere recently reported for the peculiar dyke rocks
mentioned.
In his paper Mr. Moffet said in brief: The copper mines of
El Cobre are located about nine miles west of the bay of Santi-
ago, where a series of eruptive flows, andesites and rhyolites, are
interbedded with fragmental rocks, agglomerates, breccias and
tufts. The strike of the beds is east and west, and they dip at
a low angle to the north. The series is cut by trap dykes and
by two major systems of faults, the older of which runs east
and west and carries with it the large ore bodies. The second
major system has a direction nearly north and south. Cross
faults cut and displace the ore bodies of the older system, and
carry copper, though in less amount. The copper workings of
the old English mining companies produced enormous quantities
of very rich oxidized ore which gave place in the lower levels to
sulphides. Much difficulty is encountered in handling the mine
water on account of the porous nature of the country rock.
At the present time the iron ore of the region is of much greater
commercial importance than the copper.
In the discussion which followed, Professor Kemp spoke of
the great importance to the United States which the iron ore
deposits possessed on account of their great extent and con-
venient location. The ore is extremely low in phosphorus, but
contains some sulphur. The copper may again be of great
importance, strong efforts are being made at present for its
exploitation.
E. O. Hovey,
Secretary.
ANNALS N. Y. ACAD. Sci., XV, May, 1904—14.
190 RECORDS.
BUSINESS MEETING.
OCTOBER 5,:1903.
The Academy met at 8:15 P. M., President Cattell presiding.
The minutes of the last business meeting were read and ap-
proved.
The Secretary reported from the Council as follows:
That a communication had been received from the Secretary
of the Scientific Alliance stating that an appropriation in aid of
scientific research not to exceed $450 had been made from the
income of the Herrman Fund, and that a grant of $50 in aid of
research in zoology or botany had been made from the John
Strong Newberry Fund. The Secretary stated that applications
for grants should be sent to the Secretary of the society of
which the applicant is a member, to be approved by the Council
of that society before being forwarded to the Scientific Alliance.
The following candidates for active membership, approved by
the Council, were duly elected: Dr. John Cutler Torrey, Dr.
William Morton Wheeler, Dr. Joseph Hyde Pratt.
On the recommendation of the Council, Dr. William Morton
Wheeler was duly elected a Fellow of the Academy.
The Academy then adjourned.
Henry E. CRAMPTON,
Recording Secretary.
SECTION: OF ASTRONOMY, EHYSICS AND
CHilvilsih
OCTOBER 5, 1903.
The Section met at 8:30 P. M., Dr. Charles Lane Poor pre-
siding. After the reading of the minutes the following papers
were presented :
Harold Jacoby and S. Alfred Mitchell, A Comsinep Pris-
MATIC TRANSIT AND ZENITH TELESCOPE.
George F. Kunz and Charles Baskerville, Nores on Rapium.
RECORDS. ip
SUMMARY OF PAPERS,
Professor Harold Jacoby and Dr. 8. Alfred Mitchell exhib-
ited a combined prismatic transit and zenith telescope. This
instrument, just received by the Department of Astronomy of
Columbia University, was made by Bamberg, of Berlin. It in-
cludes all the latest observational devices, including an eye-piece
of the Repsold pattern for the automatic registration of transit
observations.
Dr. George F. Kunz and Dr. Charles Baskerville gave an
exhibition of radium of 300,000 activity, with some notes on the
action of the Rontgen ray, ultra-violet light and radium on
mineralogical substances. This paper has been published in
Science, N. S., Vol. XVIII, 1903, pp. 769-783.
S: Ay MircHEry,
Secretary of Section.
SECLION. OF “BIOLOGY:
OCTOBER 12, 1903.
The first meeting of the academic year was held at the Ameri-
can Museum of Natural History on October 12, Professor
Wilson acting as temporary chairman. As in former years, this
first meeting after the long vacation was devoted to reports on
scientific work carried on by members of the Section during the
summer. The following notes indicate the lines of the work of
the members who reported.
Professor Bristol in association with Professor Mark, of
Harvard, directed the summer work of the Bermuda Biological
Station Dr. Hay was very successful in collecting in Wyo-
ming materials for his studies of fossil turtles. Professor Os-
born directed explorations in Wyoming, Nebraska and South
Dakota in the interest of the American Museum of Natural
History, securing much valuable material which supplements
collections previously made. Professor Grabau collected in
Michigan materials for continuation of his studies on Devonian
faunas. Dr. Summer directed the Biological Laboratory of the
192 RECORDS.
United States Fish Commission at Woods Hole, Mass. Pro-
fessor Calkins studied the relation of Protozoa to cancer and
smallpox. Professor Crampton continued the accumulation of
data relating to selection in Lepidoptera. Mr. Bigelow studied
the early embryology of some crustaceans. Mr. Yatsu experi-
mented on regulation and organization of nemertean eggs.
Professor Wilson at Naples studied problems of localization and
mosaic development of molluscan eggs.
M. A. BiGELow,
Secretary.
SECTION: OF GEOLOGY AND MINERALOGY:
OCTOBER 19, 1903.
Section met at 8:15 P. M., Professor James F. Kemp pre-
siding. There were no minutes to be read. Notice of the
election of officers of the Section at the November meeting was
read.
The following program was then offered :
G. F. Kunz, BisMuTH (NATIVE) AND BISMITE FROM SAN BER-
NARDINO Co., CaL. (Read by title.)
G. F. Kunz, Carirornite (VESUVIANITE); A NEW ORNAMEN-
TAL STONE. (Read by title.)
E. 0. Hovey, OpsERVATIONS ON THE 1902-1903 ERUPTIONS
Mr. PELE, MARTINIQUE.
SUMMARY OF PAPERS.
The main paper of the evening consisted of a lecture by Mr.
Hovey on the principal events in the volcanic history of the
island of Martinque during the last year and a half. He de-
scribed the phenomena of the eruptions, the mud-torrents and
mud-flows, the attendant and subsequent aqueous erosion on
the slopes of the mountain, the rise and vicissitudes of the new
cone of. eruption and its wonderful spine or obelisk. The lec-
ture was illustrated with about g5 lantern slides from negatives
taken by the author on the two expeditions which he has made
RECORDS. 193
to Martinique for the American Museum of Natural History
since the eruptions began. The details of these observations are
given in the publications of the Museum and in the American
Journal of Science, the Scientific American Supplement, the
National Geographic Magazine and elsewhere, and will not be
repeated here.
The papers by Dr. Kunz have been published in full in the
American Journal of Science, Vol. XVI, December, 1903, pp.
397, 398.
Three hundred fifty-two members and their friends were
present.
EpmunD Otis Hovey,
Secretary.
SECTION OF ANTHROPOLOGY AND PSYCHOLOGY.
OCTOBER 20, 1903.
The regular meeting of the section was held October 20, in
New Haven, Conn., in conjunction with the New York Branch
of the American Psychological Association and the Philo-
sophical Club of Yale University.
The following papers were presented :
S. I. Franz, LocaLizATION OF Brain FUNCTION.
Robert Yerkes, THe AppLicATION OF THE CONCEPT OF
VARIABILITY IN REACTION-TIME WoRrK.
W. P. Montague, THE ‘“ Specious PRESENT’’ AND THE REAL
PRESENT.
E. H. Cameron and W. M. Steele, Tur Errects or Prac-
TICE ON THE POGGENDORFF ILLUSION.
Charles H. Judd, THe ZOLLNER FIGURE.
J. McKeen Cattell, Sraristics of AMERICAN PSYCHOLOGISTS.
Raymond Dodge, THE PARTICIPATION OF THE EvE MoveE-
MENTS IN THE VISUAL PERCEPTION OF MOTION.
Geo. T. Stevens, ON THE HoropTeR.
R. 8. Woodworth, INTELLIGENCE AND MOVEMENT.
Lightner Witmer, THe MiInimaL VALUE OF THE PsycCHO-
PHYSICAL REACTION-TIME. Read by title.
194 RECORDS.
H. R. Marshall, Primary AND SECONDARY PRESENTATIONS.
Read by title.
SUMMARY OF PAPERS.
Dr. Franz, of Dartmouth Medical College, presented an
account of an attempt to determine by physiological experi-
ments whether or not the so-called motor areas are also sensory
in function. Cats were used in the investigation, and the results
indicate that in these animals the motor cortex has also certain
sensory functions. It was not determined with what sensory
processes the areas are concerned, but results of clinical obser-
vations made it appear probable that the center for muscle sense
is there located.
Dr. Yerkes, of Harvard University, stated that inasmuch as
the degree of constancy of reaction-times differs for different
species, individuals, conditions of the individual, modes and
intensities of stimulation, it is clear that variability is an impor-
tant quantity in the analysis of reactions, which should make
possible the quantitative estimation of the influence of the vari-
ous factors which play a part in determining the time of reaction.
The mean or average variability is generally determined in
recent studies of reaction time, but of far more importance for
comparative work is what may be known as the relative vari-
ability. This quantity is an index of the variability, which
gives not the absolute variableness of the reaction time, but the
ratio of the variability to the time of reaction. For reaction
times, which are symmetrically distributed about a mode, the
relative variability may be gotten from the formula
mean variability x 100
mean
In case of asymmetrical distribution Pearson’s formula for
obtaining the coefficient of variability should be used.
Examination of reaction time statistics in which the variability
is given indicates that the relative variability, as well as the
time of reaction and the mean variability, decreases with increase
in the strength of the stimulus. For electric stimulation this
appears to be true from the threshold intensity to that which
RECORDS. 195
causes a reflex reaction, but in case of other modes of stimula-
tion it is possible that beyond a certain point increase in inten-
sity of the stimulus causes slower and more variable reactions.
Since the time of reaction varies with the intensity of the
stimulus it is useless to compare reaction times for different
modes of stimulation, or those of different species or individuals,
unless the relative variability is known. It is not improbable
that careful investigation of the relation of relative variablity to
reaction time will furnish a satisfactory basis for the accurate
comparison of different results. To say that one person reacts
more quickly than another to a given stimulus without taking
into account the variability of the reaction time is meaningless.
Dr. Montague said that a psychosis, like all systems, possesses
in its totality a form or structure which is distinguishable, as the
perceiving subject, from its individual contents, as perceived ob-
jects. Changes in the individual contents produce concomitant,
though generally lesser, changes in the totality. The segment
of duration or change perceived in any one moment is not itself
a real change, but simply the ratio of the change-rate of the in-~
dividual contents to the change-rate of the totality, at that moment ;
and this ratio, though finite and variable, does not itself require
a finite time for its realization. Each unextended moment of
“real” time is thus adequate for the appreciation of an extended
period of perceptual or ‘‘ specious ”’ time.
The paper of Messrs. Cameron and Steele reported the re-
sults of a series of experiments dealing with the effect of prac-
tice on the Poggendorff illusion. (1) Quantitative determina-
tions were made with a number of illusions ; (2) practice with
one illusion was carried on for an extended period ; (3) deter-
minations were again made with all of the illusions which were
used before the practice series.
The apparatus used was demonstrated. The results show
that the illusion tends to disappear after a period of seven
weeks’ practice. The effects of such practice were found to
hold good for figure other than that which the practice was made.
The paper of Dr. Judd reported a series of quantitative de-
terminations of the amount of illusion in the Zollner figure
196 RECORDS.
when the figure was rotated through 360 degrees and was
divided so that the illusion for each of the long lines was deter-
mined without reference to the next long line. It was found
that the illusion is not the result of equal deflections in opposite
directions of the neighboring lines. In some cases one of two
neighboring lines is not deflected at all, or even in a direction
opposite to that usually assumed. The important deflection is
in every second long line. Rotation through various angles
shows that there are four positions in which deflection is great,
four in which it is small.
Professor Cattell described the methods he has employed to
select 1,000 American men of science for scientific study.
Among about 4,000 scientific men, there are about 200 psy-
chologists. The methods by which they were arranged in the
order of merit were explained, and the possibility of measuring
degrees of scientific merit by the positions and probable errors
was discussed. Some statistics were then given in regard to
the academic origin, course and distribution of the psychologists.
’ They were educated at 76 different colleges, this large dispersal
indicating that in general psychologists are not greatly influ-
enced by the institutions at which they study. The members
who pursued graduate studies at different institutions were:
Berlin, Leipzig 35, Columbia 31, Clark 31, Harvard 30, Cor-
nell 25, Yale 16, Johns Hopkins 13. Of the 200 psycholo-
gists, all but eight are engaged in teaching or administrative
educational work, being distributed among 77 institutions.
Statistics were also given in regard to publications, from which
it appears that the United States contributes about one seventh
of the more important publications, leading in experimental psy-
chology. The paper will be published in the American Journal
of Psychology.
Professor Dodge showed that photographic registration of
eye movements has exposed the poverty and inaccuracy of all
introspective data with respect to their number, velocity and
amplitude, while it shows that, even if our consciousness were
full and exact in all three aspects, it would be either useless or
misleading as a datum in the visual perception of motion.
RECORDS. dhe
Every pursuit movement of the eyes is a definite muscular
reaction to retinal stimulation. As such it is evidently condi-
tioned both in direction and in velocity by some definite charac-
teristics of the stimulus which occasions it. Since its accuracy
can never transcend the accuracy of the data on which it occurs,
it follows that the kinesthetic factor from a reactive pursuit
movement could never correct nor materially augment the data
furnished by the stimulus.
Moreover, the reaction of the eye involves a long reaction
interval, about 160-170. This suggests both the relative im-
portance of the actual motor response and a considerable elab-
oration of the sensory data in what seems like a simple reaction.
But any reaction interval at all renders it impossible for the
actual eye movement to parallel the movement of the object of
interest either in velocity or in amplitude.
Experimental verification of the above takes two forms:
Whenever all other sensory data for the perception of motion
are suppressed, except the hypothetical kinesthetic factor, there
is no immediate perception of motion. And whenever the
former are distorted by eye movements, the appearance of
motion is respectively decreased or increased, entirely without
correction by kinesthetic data.
A horopter, said Mr. Stevens, will be formed when the two
eyes are so adjusted as to enable the image of the point fixed
to be located exactly at the maculas of the two retinas. It
follows that horopters succeed each other in endless variety and
with amazing rapidity. With every glance a new horopter is
developed. Two tenets constitute the essential foundation for
the doctrine of the horopter, the theory of actually horizontal
and actually vertical meridians of the retinas and a doctrine of
corresponding points.
Corresponding points of the two retinas are those which an-
swer to proportional degrees of rotation of the eyes about the
center of rotation, and which, from given individual points in the
plane of fixation, each receive incident rays which must pass
through the nodal points. They represent, therefore, the rela-
tion between the muscular and the retinal senses.
198 RECORDS.
Dr. Woodworth, in his paper, argued that the mental cue of
a voluntary movement was not ordinarily a kinesthetic image
of the movement. Even in learning a new movement, experi-
ment shows that no such image need be present. Since volun-
tary movement is developed from instinctive, the original mental
cue must have been that provided by instinct, and the instinc-
tive cue is never an image of the movement about to be made.
The actual sensation of a movement can evidently not be the
stimulus to that same movement, and the reproduced sensation
can hardly have a motor power not possessed by the sensation
itself.
James E. Loucu,
Secretary.
BUSINESS MEETING.
NOVEMBER 2, 1903.
The Academy met at 8:15 P. M., Vice-President Poor pre-
siding. The minutes of the last business meeting were read and
approved.
There being no further business to come before the meeting,
the Academy adjourned. H. E. CRAMPTON,
Recording Secretary.
SECTION-*OF ASTRONOMY, PHYSICS’ AND
CHEMISTRY.
NOVEMBER 2, 1903.
The section met at 8.30 P. M., Dr. Charles Lane. Poor pre-
siding.
After reading the minutes the following papers were presented.
Bergen Davis, THE ELECTRICAL CONDUCTIVITY AND ABSORP-
TION OF ENERGY IN THE ELECTRODELESS DISCHARGE.
Charles Lane Poor, THE MEASUREMENT OF RACING YACHTS.
SUMMARY OF PAPERS.
Dr. Davis discussed the discharge produced in an annular
vessel by the high frequency discharge from a Leyden jar sys-
RECORDS. 199
tem. The vessel in which the discharge was produced con-
tained electrodes which were connected through a galvanometer
to a source of E.M.F. of 220 volts. When the discharge passed
in the vessel, the gas became a good conductor. The conduc-
tivity as indicated by the galvanometer was found to depend on
the pressure of the gas somewhat. That is, when the pressure
becomes so low that the white discharge appeared, the conduc-
tivity increased to near a maximum. It remained nearly con-
stant until ata low pressure the discharge disappeared, when
the conductivity became zero.
The absorption of energy was measured by placing a hot-
wire galvanometer in the circuit leading from the jars to the
coil surrounding the vessel. The oscillating current passing
through this galvanometer and coil can be expressed by
C= lee cos pk
The greater part of the energy is dissipated in heating the
gas and the vessel. The energy will be proportional to the
square of the current, while the galvanometer reads current
direct. Hence
an
Reading « i et cos plat.
0
2 2
Readings « enaOd ;
49(p + 97’)
I
Readings « --
S q
That is: a certain reading is obtained without the vessel in
the coil. When the discharge passes in the vessel, the read-
ings drop back to a smaller value. This drop-back is pro-
portional to the dissipation g in the circuit. The energy
absorbed reaches a maximum near the pressure at which the
discharge first appears. It steadily decreases and becomes zero
again at the pressure at which the discharge disappears.
The measurements discussed by Dr. Poor are made for the
purpose of classifying the yachts and furnish a basis for handi-
capping them in racing. From such measurements, made of
200 RECORDS.
the hull, spars and sails, an expression is found for the ‘‘ theo-
retical speed,”’ or speed the yacht should make under normal
conditions. While every little detail of hull and rigging con-
tributes its part in producing a fast yacht, yet it is manifestly
impossible to take account of all such details in finding the
‘theoretical speed’’ ; only the main factors can be considered.
These factors, which enter the rules in common use, are length
of hull, sail area and displacement.
It was shown that the rules introduce these factors in such
a way as to involve the assumption that speed is proportional
to: (a) The square root of length; (6) the fourth root of sail
area; and that the New York Yacht Club rule involves these
two assumptions and the additional one that speed is propor-
tional to (c) the inverse sixth root of displacement.
Dr. Poor discussed these assumptions in detail and showed
that, while there is some apparent basis for the assumption in
regard to length, their appears to be no scientific basis for those
in regard to sail area and displacement. In fact, the available
data seem to point to the conclusion that the assumption in
regard to sail area is wrong, that speed is more nearly propor-
tional to square root of sail area. In support of this view the
results of many races between two yachts in 1902 and 1903
were used. Dr. Poor called attention to the scientific aspect of
the problem, and suggested several lines of experiment, by
means of which the relationship between speed and the factors
of measurement could be determined.
S. A. MITCHELL,
Secretary.
SECTION OF BIOLOGY.
NOVEMBER Q, 1903.
The November Meeting of the section was held on the 9th
of the month at the American Museum of Natural History,
Professor Brashford Dean presiding. A business meeting of
the Section preceded the scientific program. Professor E. B.
Wilson was nominated to the Council as vice-president and
chairman of the Section of Biology for the coming year. M.
A. Bigelow was re-elected secretary of the section.
RECORDS. 201
Professor Gary N. Calkins then gave an illustrated lecture
on “THe Lire-History OF CyYTORYCTES VARIOL#, THE
CAUSE OF SMALLPOX.”’
M. A. BIGELow,
Secretary.
SECTION OF GEOLOGY AND MINERALOGY.
NOVEMBER 16, 1903.
Section met at 8.15 P.M., Professor James F. Kemp pre-
siding. The minutes of the last meeting of the Section were
read and approved.
The following officers were elected for the year 1904:
Chairman, Professor James F. Kemp.
Secretary, Edmund Otis Hovey.
Notice was given regarding applications for grants from the
Hermann Fund.
The following programme was then offered :
A. W. Grabau, ‘“‘ Discussion OF AND SUGGESTIONS REGARD-
ING A NEw CLASSIFICATION OF Rocks.”
Wallace Goold Levison, ‘‘NorE oN FLUORESCENT GEms.”’
George F. Kunz, “ MineraArocicaL NOTEs.”’
SUMMARY OF PAPERS.
Dr. Grabau said in part, that all classification ought, as far as
possible, to be genetic or according to progressive development.
Such a classification is practicable in the biologic ‘sciences, but
not in those, which, like minerology, deal with inorganic sub-
stances. In developing his theme the speaker suggested the
following provisional subdivisions : endogenetic rocks, or those
formed by chemical means, and exogenetic or clastic rocks,
which are chiefly of mechanical origin. The first group is fur-
ther subdivided into : pyrogenic, or igneous rocks; hydrogenic
or aqueous rocks ; biogenic or organic rocks, The hydrogenic
and biogenic rocks were each again subdivided into rocks of
calcareous, silicious, ferruginous, carbonaceous and _ miscel-
laneous composition ; and a further subdivision was made into
unaltered and altered or metaphoric types.
202 RECORDS.
The exogenic or clastic rocks were divided into autoclastic,
hydroclastic, pyroclastic, bioclastic and anemoclastic.
A further subdivision according to texture was, into ruda-
ceous or conglomeratic, arenaceous or sandy, and lutaceous or
mud rock.
The next division was according to composition, into two
main groups — silicious and calcareous; and finally into un-
consolidated and consolidated and metamorphic rock.
In the discussion of the paper Professor Stevenson spoke of
the value of such a classification through its giving teachers
ideas for presentation to their classes regarding the interrela-
tions of rock. Professor Kemp spoke of the system being
well adapted to geologic study on account of its giving the
surroundings in which any specified rock has developed,
although it is not practicable to assign a place to every small
rock group which is really of mineralogical rather than of
geological value.
Mr. Levison said: Fluorescence or the property of increas-
ing the wave-length of certain luminous rays enhances the
beauty of a few colored gems under conditions which lessen the
effectiveness of others that do not possess this property. Gar-
net, for instance, which is non-fluorescent, loses its rich crimson
color and becomes dull gray in pure blue light. On the con-
trary, most kinds of ruby and ruby spinel, and pink topaz
respond to light-rays above the red on account of their fluores-
cence, and in blue-violet light still display their characteristic
tints. The red color of the ruby is somewhat developed by the
light of the air-gap spark and an uncovered Crookes tube. It
is intensely excited by the cathode rays. Willemite displays a
beautiful greenish-yellow color not only in ordinary light rich
in the yellow-green rays but also in light consisting chiefly or
wholly of the more refrangible colors in which its characteristic
color would be effaced but for the possession of fluorescence in
high degree. This mineral is excited furthermore by some of
the ultra-violet rays and by the Roentgen and Becquerel rays.
Other materials which owe desirable tints to fluorescence are
pearl, opal, hyalite, chalcedony and kunzite (the new lilac spo-
RECORDS. 208
dumene). Hiddenite, the green spodumene, seems to be non-
fluorescent. Impaired by fluorescence are triphane, a yellow-
ish-green spodumene, which exhibits pink fluorescence in blue
light ; emerald, which shows crimson fluorescence in the upper
part of the spectrum, and diamond, with greenish-blue to blue
fluorescence excited by several kinds of energy but more or less
masked in ordinary light.
In fluorescent substances excitation produces a certain opa-
lescence or milkiness which is sometimes of sufficient strength
to be of importance. It cannot be taken as an indication of
impurities in the materials. In the white diamond such a phe-
nomenon is a detrimental quality.
Fluorescence affords a simple and positive method of distin-
guishing some of the fluorescent gems from imitations. All
glass imitations are fluorescent with the color characteristic of
glass from which the fluorescent color of the genuine stone differs
distinctly. In doublets the cement appears as an opaque film
and the components differ in behavior. Artificial pearls of high
grade have not been examined, but probably they will behave
like the genuine. Artificial or ‘‘regenerated’’ ruby has been
examined in a single specimen. It acts like the natural stone
in blue light, while with the air-gap spark between iron or
aluminum electrodes it has a brighter color than any of the
several natural rubies which were examined. The wave-length
which excites fluorescence of each substance must eventually be
stated.
The following gems were stated to be non-fluorescent: gar-
net, amethyst, Spanish topaz, yellow Brazilian topaz, sapphire,
ordinary beryl, possibly Siamese ruby.
In the discussion of Mr. Levison’s paper Professor Kemp
expressed the hope that there would be a practical outcome
from such investigations which would enable those not experts
to detect false or artificial gems ; while Mr. Kunz said that there
were simpler ways than the use of fluorescence for the deter-
mination of gems, and Professor D. 8. Martin emphasized the
desirability of getting definite information as to the wave-lengths
to which gems respond.
204 RECORDS.
In the course of his paper Dr. Kunz exhibited white compact
garnet from Fresno County, California, associated with the newly
described compact vesuvianite, or ‘‘ californite.’”’ In connection
with these two compact minerals attention was called to the
third compact mineral “ pectolite,” which was described some
years ago by W. P. Blake. Pyroelectric zinc blende associated
with wollastonite from Mariposa County, California, also was
exhibited.
Epmunp Otis Hovey,
Secretary.
SECTION. OF ANTHROPOLOGY AND -PSYCHOLGGY
NOVEMBER 23, 1903.
The section met on November 23, in conjunction with the
American Ethnological Society.
The following paper was presented and read :
Clark Wissler, RECENT RESEARCHES ON THE DECORATIVE
ART OF THE PLAtns INDIANS.
Dr. Wissler said it was demonstrated by specimens and ex-
planations that among the Indians of the plains may be found a
type of graphic art that is purely decorative in contrast toa type
that is absolutely symbolic. In addition, a transition type occurs
in which both the symbolic and the asthetic motives function.
The whole of this art is the work of women. In the purely
decorative art complex geometric designs are built up from
simple geometrical elements. These elementary designs have
technical names and are worked into compositions accord-
ing to recognized principles and standards. In the sym-
bolic art the designs are conventional representations of objects
with sacred or mystic associations and are realistic in motive.
While a number of conventional designs are used which are
known once to have possessed symbolic value and to have
originated in realistic motives, the majority of design elements
do not appear to have originated in this way. Their occasional
use in a symbolic sense is an afterthought and a makeshift.
RECORDS. 205
From which it appears that the graphic art of these Indians, as
we find it to-day, is an objective development in contrast to the
subjective symbolism of other tribes.
James E. Loucu,
Secretary.
BUSINESS MEETING.
DECEMBER 7, 1903.
The Academy met at 8:15, Vice-President Dean presiding.
The minutes of the last business meeting were read and
approved.
The Secretary reported from the Council as follows : that the
following Active Members had been nominated as candidates
for election as Fellows — Isaac Adler, M.D., Edward K. Dun-
ham, M.D., William Harper Davis, Miss Ida N. Ogilvie, Ph.D.,
and Charles H. Townsend.
That the following nominations for officers for the coming
year had been made:
President, Edmund B. Wilson.
Vice-Presidents: James F. Kemp, L. M. Underwood, C.
Boor. r..)- 2s Woodbridge.
Corresponding Secretary, R. E. Dodge.
Recording Secretary, H. E. Crampton.
Treasurer, €. Fy Cox,
Librarian, R. W. Tower.
Nditer-C: 1: Pook:
Councilors (to serve three years): Livingston Farrand, E. O.
Hovey.
Finance Committee > ' J.’ H. Hinton, C. A. ‘Post; H. F:
Osborn.
That the Annual Meeting would consist of a formal meeting
for the election of Fellows and Officers, for the reading of the
annual reports of the officers for the past year, etc., and that
this would be followed by a dinner to be served in the Museum
building. Full notices would be sent to members in the usual
manner.
ANNALS N. Y. ACAD. Sci., XV, May, 1904—15.
206 RECORDS.
The following candidates for active membership, approved
by the Council, were duly elected:
Oswald Speir, 310 West 94th Street.
Emil Heuel, M.D., 1 West 94th Street.
On recommendation of the Council, the following Active
Member was elected a Fellow:
Ralph W. Tower.
MISCELLANEOUS BUSINESS.
The notice of the Academy was called to the death of Dr.
H. Carrington Bolton, a former President of the Academy, by
Professor D. S. Martin, with a statement that it would be
eminently fitting for the Academy to take formal action in
recognition of the long services of Dr. Bolton to the Academy.
It was voted that the Chairman appoint a Committee of three
to prepare a suitable minute relating to Dr. Bolton’s death.
The Chairman appointed D. S. Martin, N. L. Britton, and E.
B. Wilson.
The Academy then adjourned.
H. E. CRaAmpton,
Recording Secretary.
SECTION OF BIOLOGY.
DECEMBER 7, 1903.
The December meeting was held on the seventh of the month,
Professor Bashford Dean presiding. Professor Wilson declined
the nomination for the vice-presidency and chairmanship of the
Section which was made at the November meeting ; and Pro-
fessor L. M. Underwood was by unamious vote nominated as
the candidate from the Section to be presented at the annual
meeting for election of officers of the Academy.
The following scientific program was presented :
E. B. Wilson, AN ExprerRIMENTAL STUDY OF THE GERM-
REGIONS IN THE MoLtiuscan Ecce.
A. G. Mayer, Tue Corat REEFS oF THE BAHAMAS
(illustrated).
RECORDS. . 207
SUMMARY OF PAPERS.
Dr. Mayer said that the shallow Bahama banks are veritable
submarine deserts covered with finely divided silt and fragments
of the calcareous remains of marine animals and plants. The
corals grow in clusters chiefly on the outer edges of the banks
and may be compared to oases in the desert.
The water of the banks is generally charged with a flocculent
mass of silt which is fatal to most of the pelagic animals. Ac-
cordingly the Bahamas have only about half as many species
of pelagic animals as the Tortugas, Florida.
The exceptional richness of the Tortugas’ fauna is also due
to the drift from the Gulf Stream caused by prevailing north-
east and southeast winds, while the fauna of the Bahamas is
depleted from the same cause. In other words the Bahamas
lie on the wrong side of the Gulf Stream for the study of pelagic
life. About one-half of the pelagic forms of the Bahamas are
equally abundant at the Tortugas ; but about one-quarter of the
remainder are more abundant at the Bahamas, and a few of
these seem to be confined exclusively to this region.
The Bahamas are richer in species of corals and actinians than
the Tortugas, this being due to the fact that the coral-reefs of
the Tortugas were largely killed by a drift of dark-colored
water which passed over them in October, 1878, and have only
partially recovered. No more favorable situation for the study
of pelagic life has been discovered in the tropical Atlantic than
that of the Tortugas, Florida.
Prof. Wilson’s paper is to be published in a forthcoming
number of the Journal of Experimental Zoology.
M. A. BIGELow,
Secretary.
SECTION OF GEOLOGY AND MINERALOGY.
DECEMBER 14, 1903.
Section met at 8:15 P. M., Professor J. F. Kemp presiding.
The minutes of the last meeting were read and approved.
The following program was then offered :
208 RECORDS.
Herschel C. Parker, ExpLoRATIONS AND First ASCENTS IN
THE CANADIAN ROCKIES.
George F. Kunz, Gem MINERALS OF SOUTHERN CALIFORNIA.
(Read by title.)
George F. Kunz, Clackamas Mereoric Iron. (Read by title.)
SUMMARY OF PAPERS.
Professor Parker’s paper occupied the evening, and consisted
of an illustrated lecture describing the section of the Rocky
Mountains in British Columbia and Alberta known as the
“‘Canadian Alps.”
In a brief introduction an explanation was given of the phys-
ical characteristics which determine the Alpine nature of moun-
tain ranges and it was pointed out that the Rocky Mountains
of Canada may justly be termed the “ Switzerland of America.”’
A series of more than 100 lantern slides was shown, many
of them illustrating first ascents made by the lecturer. These
summits were Mt. Dawson, the highest peak of the Selkirks,
Mt. Goodsir, one of the highest and most difficult peaks in
British Columbia, Mt. Lefroy, Mt. Hungable (“the Chieftain’),
Mt. Deltaform and Mt. Biddle, these latter peaks being situated
in Alberta near Lake Louise. The summits of some of these
mountains were previously thought to be practically inaccessible
and the climbs were attended with the greatest difficulties. Mt.
Lefroy was climbed by the lecturer in 1897, Mt. Dawson in
1899 and the remaining four summits during the past season.
The lecturer also briefly described an interesting trip of about
100 miles north of the railroad to Wilcox Pass where the Sas-
katchewan and Athabasca Rivers take their rise.
The papers by Dr. Kunz have been published in Sczence, N.
S., Vol. XIX, January, 1904, pp. 107-108.
Epmunp Otis Hovey,
Secretary.
ANNUAL MEETING.
DECEMBER 21, 1903.
The Academy met for the Annual Meeting at 6.45 P. M.,
President Cattell in the Chair.
RECORDS. 209
The accompanying reports of officers for the past year were
called for and presented, in the following order : Corresponding
Secretary, Recording Secretary, Treasurer, Librarian, and Editor.
No Honorary or Corresponding Members were elected.
The following Active Members were elected Fellows of the
Academy, on the nomination of the Council :
Isaac Adler, M.D.,
William Harper Davis,
Edward K. Dunham, M.D.,
Ida H. Ogilvie, Ph.D.
Charles H. Townsend.
The election of officers for the year 1904 was then held,
tellers being appointed, ballots distributed and the votes
counted. The following officers were elected:
President, Edmund B. Wilson.
Vice-Presidents, James F. Kemp, Lucien M. Underwood,
Charles Lane Poor, F. J. E. Woodbridge.
Corresponding Secretary, R. E. Dodge.
Recording Secretary, Henry E. Crampton.
Treasurer, Charles F. Cox.
Librarian, Ralph W. Tower.
Editor, Charles Lane Poor.
Councilors (three years), Livingston Farrand, E. O. Hovey.
Finance Committee, John H. Hinton, C. A. Post, Henry F.
Osborn.
The meeting then adjourned to the Hotel Endicott; it was
continued in the form of a dinner, at which fifty members of the
Academy and their friends were present.
The accompanying report of the special Committee appointed
at the meeting of the Academy of December was presented by
the Chairman of the Committee, Professor D. S. Martin.
Brief addresses were made by the retiring President, Profes-
sor Cattell, by the President-elect, Professor Wilson, and by
the past-Presidents of the Academy, Professor Woodward, Pro-
fessor Osborn, and Professor Stevenson.
The meeting then adjourned.
Henry E. CrampTon,
Recording Secretary.
210 RECORDS.
REPORT OF THE CORRESPONDING SECRETARY
The Corresponding Secretary would report that there are at
present on the rolls of the Academy 39 Honorary Members
and 191 Corresponding Members. During the year the list of
Honorary and Corresponding Members has been corrected by
comparing it with the latest editions of ‘ Minerva,” ‘‘Who’s
Who” and other authoritative publications. The list as cor-
rected was printed by the Academy during the summer.
Letters have since been written to all Honorary and Corre-
sponding Members asking for additional information or neces-
sary corrections. The names of those who do not reply for
two consecutive years will be dropped from the lists.
Respectfully submitted,
RIcHARD E. DopceE,
Corresponding Secretary.
REPORT OF THE RECORDING SECRETARY
Since the last Annual Meeting, twenty-nine regular meetings
of the several sections have been held at which seven lectures
and fifty-one stated papers have been presented. The titles
were distributed as follows :
Section of Astronomy, Physics and Chemistry.
Astronomy, 4 papers.
Chemistry, I paper.
Physics, 7 papers. I lecture.
12 papers, I lecture.
Section of Biology.
Botany, I paper.
Paleontology, 1 “
Zoology, II papers. 2 lectures.
13 papers, 2 lectures.
Section of Geology and Mineralogy.
Geology, 7 papers.
Hydrography, 1 lecture.
Mineralogy, Seg
Physiography, 1 paper, 2 lectures.
10 papers, 3 lectures.
RECORDS. 211
Section of Anthropology and Psychology.
Anthropology, 8 papers, 1 lecture.
Esychology,.\18 “
26 papers, I lecture.
Totaly 951 papers, 7 lectures:
Through the courtesy of the authorities of the American
Museum in permitting the use of the Great Hall of the Museum,
it has been possible to develop the work of several sections by
having public lectures delivered on topics of general scientific
interest. Particular mention may be made of the lectures pre-
sented by Professor Calkins on the Organism of Small-pox, by
Dr. Hovey on his observations of Mont Pele and by Professor
Parker on his Explorations in the Canadian Rockies. Mention
may also be made of Dr. Hollister’s account of the Hydro-
graphic work of the U. S. Geological Survey, of Professor
Dean’s report on zoological work in Japan, and of Dr. Kunz’s
demonstration of radium and its effects on various minerals.
Another extension of the work of the Academy demands
special attention, namely that in the Section of Anthropology
and Psychology. This section has met in conjunction with the
New York Branch of the American Psychological Association,
at times outside the City of New York, and at these meetings a
more extended series of varied papers has been presented than
would be possible at ordinary sectional meetings.
The membership of the Academy has somewhat decreased
during the past year. At present there are two hundred and
eighty-seven Active Members, of whom one hundred and
twenty-eight are Fellows, while the election of five Fellows is
pending. Eight Members have resigned, and eight new Mem-
bers have been elected, while thirteen members have died since
the last Annual Meeting. The Academy notes with sorrow the
death of several men, devoted to scientific research and to the
furtherance of true scientific progress, whose names stood for
true ideals of service in behalf of mankind. The Academy and
the community at large suffers from the loss of H. Carrington
Bolton, one of its past Presidents, of Andrew H. Green, Will-
212 RECORDS.
iam E. Dodge, Cornelius Van Brunt, Albert R. Leeds, and
Abram S. Hewitt. Henry E. CRAMPTON,
Recording Secretary.
REPORT OF THE TREASURER
New York, December 21, 1903.
To tHE NEw YorkK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES:
Gentlemen — As required by the by-laws, I herewith submit
a statement of my receipts and disbursements since my last
annual report, anda balance sheet from my ledger, as of this date.
Respectfully yours,
Gk.
Cox,
Treasurer.
Examined and found correct,
Joun H. Hrnron,
For the Financial Commtttee.
RECEIPTS.
Balance as per last annual report.........
Pinualvd wes 1Or® TOOO, eer: $30.00
LOO Lc eer 60.00
T'OO2) crate eee 200.00
1OOst en ee 1,930.00
:* TQOAy aan tanins 30.00
riitiatiGny fees, iis". o-ore ee eee oes Rah ate
Interest at 414 per cent. on Bond and Mort-
Sale Ole 2:O00, sae aie ieee ee ance
Interest On deposits in Banks o...2 fees 2. =.
DISBURSEMENTS.
ost.ar .Publications: “2. acinar $703.66
Mess ales co. na te tie ee ne 59.98 643.68
Expenses of Recording Secretary, ........ 261.09
a Corresponding Secretary,..... 5.00
{3 Eibratian,, ...0 olor t eee eee 270.70
: MteaSurer, ....4un seis eee 22 3
retietalMieenses) si. \s.2 mun ae een nee 80.00
$3,756.09
2,250.00
45.00
540.00
OL.23
$6,652.32
1,287.70
balance omaha... 0. aie eee
$5,364.62
RECORDS. 213
BALANCE SHEET.
Dr. Cr.
enmrnenb er UNC)... 2... =. 2 oe oars SiO s 7.1.43
Rewnecatom Some... se lush ee 1,823.99
Audubon Sy Cea aN REED Lcaact. 5 1,897.25
fmeome: Permanent Fund,:. . 2.22.7: 676.31
Income, Pablheation’ Fund,..... .. 2:2. 1l3e77
income, udubon Fund)? <. 22.2. .2: 115.99
Generatiineomes: 60. a le as 2,006.18
Investment on Bond and Mortgage,.. $12,000.00
MachwOmenandsa sec 0) ses eA ois Oc $ 5,364.62
$17,364.62 $17,364.62
New York, December 21, 1903.
RELOKT OF THE LIBRARIAN,
In accordance with the agreement between the New York
Academy of Sciences and the American Museum of Natural
History, the library of the Academy was on March 3, 1903,
transferred to the custody of the Museum. Since that time the
attention of the Librarian has been confined to the care of in-
coming exchanges and the correspondence of the office. Mr.
William M. Erb has continued as the assistant in charge of the
details of the work. The Librarian of the Museum has been
engaged in arranging the Academy library and it is now in
better condition for reference then ever before, and is available
at any time to members of the Academy.
In laying down his office, the Librarian would call the espe-
cial attention of the Academy to the advisability of revising the
exchange list, in consultation with the authorities of the Ameri-
can Museum, in order to avoid the useless duplication of minor
exchanges brought about by the union of the two libraries.
Respectfully submitted,
LIVINGSTON FARRAND,
Librarian.
214 RECORDS.
REPORT OF THE EDIT@E:
During the year 1903 the Academy printed and issued the
following publications :
Part III, Vol. XIV, of the Annals, containing a paper by
John Cutler Torrey, entitled, “The Early Embryology of
Thalassema mellita (Conn.).”’ This was issued in October, and
consisted of 81 pages, 2 plates and Io text-figures.
Part I, Vol. XV., of the Annals, containing the records of
the meetings of the New York Academy of Sciences, January,
1902, to December 1902, by Henry E. Crampton, Recording
Secretary. This was issued in September and consisted of 152
pages. |
Both of these publications were mailed to every member of
the Academy.
Vol. XIV, No. 4, and Vol. XV, No. 2, are in press and will
soon be issued.
CHARLES LANE Poor,
Editor.
HENRY CARRINGTON BOLTON.
The undersigned, appointed at the meeting of December 6,
1903, a Committee to prepare a minute and resolutions con-
cerning the death of H. Carrington Bolton, long an active
member of the Academy, having held various offices therein,
including the office of President in 1893 herewith present the
following report :
WHEREAS, it has pleased the great Disposer of all events to
remove from this world our late friend and associate, Dr. Henry
Carrington Bolton, on the 19th day of November last,
therefore,
Resolved, that in the name of the New York Academy of
Sciences, as well as in the fulness of our own personal feeling,
we take a mournful pleasure in expressing our profound sorrow
at his unexpected demise in the full activity of his powers, and
our keen sense of the loss thus caused to American science.
RECORDS. 215
Resolved, that we recall with warmest interest his breadth of
culture, his cordiality of intercourse, his devotion to science, his
untiring activity, and his dignity and uprightness of personal
character.
Resolved, that we bear our grateful witness to his long and
faithful services in and to the New York Academy of Sciences,
as Councilor and as Secretary through many years, and as
President in 1893 ; since which time he has resided principally
at Washington, and has thus become less well-known to the
younger body of members.
Resolved, that these resolutions be entered upon the records of
the Academy and that a copy thereof be sent to his widow by
the Secretary.
DaniEL S, Martin, Chairman,
N. Li. Britrron,
E. B. WItson.
BO)
yaaa Ve cathy
(ub: Oe Ta thy
uses
ie ee ee
/ og hue aia
Lindel if Gi “A
Nh Ot
¢ ) ti \ ; 7 i ;
ay iy ive
Nt
: Peat ‘ - ww %&
Ta ch
mies
*
PUBLICATIONS
OF THE
NEW YORK «ACADEMY “OF SCIENCES
[Lyceum or Naturat History 1818~1876]
The publications of the Academy consist of two series, viz :—
(1) The Annals (octavo series), established in 1823, contain
the scientific contributions and reports of researches, together
with the records of meetings, annual exhibitions, etc.
Publication of the Transactions of the Academy was discon-
tinued with the issue of Volume XVI, 1898, and merged in the
Annals. A volume of the Annals will in general coincide with °
the calendar year and will be distributed in parts. The price
of current issues is one dollar per part or three dollars per
volume., Authors’ reprints are issued as soon as the separate
papers are printed, the dates appearing above the title of each
paper.
(2) The Memoirs (quarto series), established in 1895, are is-
sued at irregular intervals. It is intended that each volume shall
be devoted to monographs relating to some particular depart-
ment of science. Volume I is devoted to Astronomical Mem-
oirs, Volume II, to Zoological Memoirs, etc. The price is one
dollar per part, as issued.
All publications will hereafter be sent free to fellows and
members who desire to receive them, but other fellows and
members will only receive the Records, issued as a separate
from the Annals. The Annals will be sent, as before, to
honorary and corresponding members desiring them.
Subscriptions and inquiries concerning current and back
numbers of any of the publications of the Academy should be
addressed to THe LrsrariAn
New York Academy of Sciences
Columbia University
New York City.
PRICES OF PUBLICATIONS
Annals of the Lyceum (Vols. I-XI), . . . per Vol., $5.00
Proceedings ‘ “oe ARV Olssa LE) bated neko ik OR ag
Trans. of the Academy (Vols. I-XVI), . . “ “ 5.00
Annals “ . eh, 2) RS PS RCE AE ORR Sat SLE 6 Ke 8)
Annals“ 5 (Vol x Pensegzy a... 3.00
Memoirs ‘‘ ‘ oe ft Pt1 Vol, 11, Pts. I, II, UD),
per Party shes 2: 1.00
CONTENTS OF VOL. XV, PART II
Brea & i>
Crampton, Henry E., Recording Secretary. Record of
aa Meetings of the New York Academy of Sciences
si _ January, 1903, to December, 1903... -
2
;
'- i
7 *
ag
5 ‘
as ae 4 Boer : w
= -
Pn .
a _ yy
. ‘ > .
- . <N 7
Be
. me . r
' Z cee,
“e =e. oes
r
:
¥ ‘
us
I =
F
VoL. XV ; PART III
ANNALS
NEW YORK
ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Editor:
CHARLES LANE POOR
The New Era Printing Company
l Lancaster, Pa.
NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
OFFICERS, 1904
President—EpDMuND B. Witson, Columbia University.
Recording Secretary —HENRY E. Crampton, Barnard College.
Corresponding Secretary—RICHARD E. DopeE, Teachers College.
Treasurer—CHARLES F. Cox, Grand Central Depot.
Librarian—Rarru W. Tower, American Museum.
E:ditor—CHARLES Lane Poor, 4 East 48th Street.
SECTION OF ASTRONOMY, PHYSICS, AND CHEMISTRY
Chairman—CHARLES LANE Poor, 4 East 48th Street.
Secretary—C, C. TROWBRIDGE, Columbia University. — -
SECTION OF BIOLOGY
Chairman—\L. M. UNDERWwoop, Columbia University.
. Secretary—M. A. BiGELow, Teachers College.
SECTION OF GEOLOGY AND MINERALOGY
Chaiviman—JAmEs F. Kemp, Columbia University.
Secretary-—EpMuND O. Hovey, American Museum of Natural
History.
SECTION OF ANTHROPOLOGY AND PSYCHOLOGY
Chairman—F. J. E. WooDERIDGE, Columbia University.
PLS eee E. Loucu, School of Pedagogy, New York
University.
SESSION OF 1904
The Academy will meet on Monday evenings at 8.15 o'clock,
from October to May, in the American Museum of Natural
Ilistory, 77th Street and Central Park, West.
[Annats N. Y. Acap. Sct., Vol. XV, No. 3, pp. 217-297, Nov. 30, 1904. |
PERIODIC COMET OF 1889~1896-1903
(BROOKS)
WITH THE PERIODIC COMET OF 1770
(LEXELL).
CHARLES LANE Poor.
meswok Chess “AS TO. THE: IDENTITY, OF THE
CoNTENTS.
PAGE.
TLS TERT OE TEOINIS gan ecocbone dou Bee gndEE InCoCOCODE OHOdedco: ssoncs los. aoncn Jon, Ccedd ae oc DnOaee: 219
PAIR Ibs cdédeddh att cheddeneecouaaoncd occa stiecde cauctana anon Geoner fos OUanods Gauaaecsscecuecucoa: 226
Ape Preliminary, Corectioumtorthe sl) ements. -seseccccscectame tenvenscstcriae site ers 227
Computation of Perturbations. <..0. 0.0... cases: cecaroeersaronecseeecestecenvee 228
DitieultyeofaCormectimap lM lementSsoas.mee cece seesidele ctr -iletele ele leee tere 232
JPardinrdoniirons: lay WiGWE,.oscoaccen goonbsech aopngeoneebed=0bbeuas Sado, nbobusossoBaoaC 233
PEP PEON UMALE PP ACIIEMIS oc ch cans(ccelsa:s<ene. ececcclens sede rencdensemeet sarees unease 234
beeO psenvationsTotatheu Ome Geadsest eevee ccieccsees as anden-alacencn creer eaceerens 234
IBIES HEAD p GALAN CE sect aclalons sels siolesleale(siow s.elrnieelele/an'er(ei\>isnleletmialoeielse -ial-=(-)>e iin = 234
‘Steward! JA\jpy SSA AINES ccongane pconasod ssoceogne5 pecneoca yendoneseoecCHGCesqacaeece 237
‘Tinirxel Joya SH RRS: osc qoncn ganaooooaqgendaaosedeeos seoscooce AOE toner ree SenS 238
C. Comparison of Observation with Thconr, Paws an aek esis Sane Ose ase ee so 239
ID) NEES TS soc oseceocGack cuoccooa0 Jooda ded. sapenenecicndod-sduccraeSodaaaecs C60o9s0cG 239
\We@ielnti Gi (Ohos er avaI OS es. copsooccoonanconsaosenres cagacuenscbeces6 secboer scenes 239
GompatisOlintalSeascecseas-cacaas ctacesen es ivaccswacesn=Gash seacssciveiaeermarto one 242
Hormmationior Normal) Places:.c-..0----4-es.s 49s. --- OF woes pe sioudee nese ceWe nites 243
Erin atl OMSeseeacessereactsae scence siasiiecistclaeboctacecisiesisiicioisemcaste=. esisisielesie 245
D. Definitive Correction to the Blements. ee IANS ASE EE RoE ance ee aon roc 247
eA TNENnS OR CC OBAIUIOM «16: vacicessonnanacar nseetecenm anne yas enneeaeseicenses 248
Nominal NG pnENiToh S12 cence becoscdoosEnc obsebe Qarada sane scescra eddosno Gono, aEeo0e 251
[Rannrivareys? TBGW0)#3- neccooneagseendess on oaoodeoce. Heasscs pase e goo nepeodansceasect cor 252
Dehmitive Hlementse 2. .22-.ss-2cnss2s0s See ae Mace se seeeeisies sane Meise ne sme eEaee 254
Nneetenminates SOlutionresd: este etgatee cents s wes ceenacs costmeecee cucpince se 255
RAR Te poses sone nese staancts vos nsase en eeceseecnecseesete Paine an eet eeees 258
Generale Statemen tresacersesaaeuetiaceece ancnecite e cccitelietcinieies \esias)siess valeetinanieerindas es 258
[eleyqiidofaintayas Listets) (key MetslOK 4. ctsduciops oscbogbaeae bon SeNbon Mado seanen surisoepduse codecs 258
ranslormuation: to, iupiter as COMLSK ee acne cc ccoevaccsssoess <aecce seeder bs\tececee-ae 264
Methodtotmleaielaicetermscese ee testesacerectecisciicneecsaectns eeesean teanetaes 264
Ete NSIOMOl vet Ocempmeremasse neneeereren cis tases: <2 oiciecicein osineiutcistsiciesineiastas 265
Rormul2s) fon lranstormattoneapeneese sr escedses once sen peceicteseceaeme sen 268
PAGE
ELyperbolic Mlement. 02.00.00 ssaeeseq/saamenteriicebie yertrinhiapi= ie-ea-/serteecilet 269
@heckons Numericall PWiork. cotoss2- ssasrcoeeuonceimcescinee set sei seetteceeentee 270
Solanbberturbationss....20.sec-csceeonceceen cece ecstaecetiececemeten ent seer ar beaseteee 270
Hormulas itor Computatons.ca-nesen sce ac raetee sean teeter ee ene see eee 271
MALES aoe aac ca se cise siewlalsiaisisanis cleiee sete seis selonicecieeiseae tae tee ere mares 273
Perturbations due to mioure ofp |ipiterecenyececeiecse eaten een eae aie ere eras 273
Hormulas;tor Computati onsen. sseseseestenen eter eee ae eee ee eee saree ieee 274
Tables tices sak) cacvilc side ba cees tedecede ngasteeemers oemeneetitla eee netace ae eeemess 276
Passage of Comet through Jupiter’s Satellite System.............0.s0205 seeeee 277
Amproachsto satellites t.5.cnssea-se= essence erect eye serene ieee ee eee 279
DisruptionloleCometnpen ress ceo ce nese see ae seee eeee ee eee terete Rear 279
itranstormation to suntas1 Centermes-ce..casessneeaseseeescmseseseeeaaereeaceneeeces 280
Rerturbations Previous tom ooOnson-ese see oesp eter seen esse er ereeere ee eesaemrt 282
Definitive Orbit of ‘Cometiin, W883es.. 452-5 e- eedeeeseeoeee see eee ee esata secnees 283
iden tty swith Cometeny7jON (lexell) Nitencee seers est neta nan eee eee wed Silene 287
MisturbancessmereviOus to LOO Oeeesasscee ce eeeee cece ene mee Eero cee peeeeaes 288
Tisserand’s Criterion...... ec a ocenostioe See Sscerecies dries ceencineteen eee 289
ConclisionSerere sa edaaeeeca eae er ercr nets Been eco aoede sravoolacess decor 293
COMET OF 1889-1896-1903 219
INTRODUCTION.
1. This comet was discovered by William R. Brooks, at
Geneva, New York, July 6, 1889, and was observed until Janu-
ary, 1891. It was a faint telescopic object, never visible to the
naked eye, and showing no striking physical characteristics ; but
of interest on account of the orbit it described and of the many
problems in astro-mechanics which have arisen in the attempt
to trace its past history. After a very few observations had
been made, it was recognized as a periodic comet, travelling
in an orbit of about seven years, and a very interesting mem-
ber of Jupiter’s so-called family. Chandler’ was the first to
investigate its history and show that its orbit had been
changed radically by a close approach to Jupiter in 1886;
that before that time the comet was moving in an entirely
different orbit from that in which it has since moved. The
interest in the problem was still further increased by the
statement of Chandler that the comet of 1889 was probably
identical with the lost comet of 1770 (Lexell). Chandler’s
results, however, depended upon observations extending over a
period of three months only, and the perturbations during the
years 1886 to 1889 were neglected. In this paper Chandler
gave the period of the comet previous to 1886 as 26.9 years,
and upon the substantial correctness of these figures depended
his conclusions as to the identity with Lexell’s comet.
2. Lexell’s comet was first seen by Messier on the night of
June 14-15, 1770. Heat first thought it to bea part of the
nebula in the constellation Sagittarius but after a few nights he
recognized its cometary character. At this time it was faint and
invisible without the aid of a telescope, and appeared as a nebu-
losity about 5’ 23’’ in diameter. On June 21, however, it
became visible to the unaided eye, and three days later was as
bright as a second magnitude star. It was now seen to have an ill
1“ The Action of Jupiter in 1886 upon Comet d, 1889, and the Identity of the
latter with Lexell’s Comet of 1770,’’ Astr. Jour., 205, p. 100.
220 POOR
defined head, or nucleus, of about 80’’ diameter and a tail which
reached its greatest length on July 1, when it extended 2° 23’.
On July 4 the comet disappeared in the rays of the sun, not
to reappear until August 4, after which it could be seen by
the unaided eye until the 26th of August and in the telescope
until October 3, when its distance from the earth and sun be-
came so great as to render it invisible with the instruments of
that day.
Parabolic elements were calculated by Pingre, Lambert and
others. These, however, did not satisfy all the observations and
it remained for Lexell to prove that the comet was travelling in
an elliptic orbit of 5.6 years’ period. Lexell further showed, in
answer to various objections to the theory of elliptic motion,
that in May, 1767, the comet had passed very close to Jupiter
and that then its orbit had probably been greatly changed—
changed sufficiently to render it visible in 1770. He further
predicted a second approach of the comet to Jupiter in August,
1779, and stated that the occurrence might prevent the return
of the comet in 1781 or 1782. The comet was sought vainly
in those years, and has never been observed since.
In 1844 LeVerrier’ presented to the Académie des Sciences
his researches upon the motion of this comet and upon the char-
acter of the disturbances by Jupiter in 1779. ‘This paper isa
complete treatise upon the subject, discussing every phase of the
matter in a most thorough manner. Unfortunately, however,
LeVerrier found that the old observations were so crude that a
definitive determination of the orbit was impossible. A compar-
ison of the observed and computed places showed errors in the
original observations amounting in many instances to ten or even
fifteen minutes of arc. Unable to determine the exact elements
of the orbit, LeVerrier expressed the elements which best repre-
sented the motion of the comet in terms of an unknown and inde-
terminate quantity, w. This quantity is carried through all the
calculations and the paper concludes with tables showing a num-
ber of possible orbits of the comet after its great disturbance by
Jupiter in 1779.
1«« Théorie de la Cométe Periodique de 1770,’’ Annals de I Observatoire de
Paris, Tom. 111, p. 203.
COMET OF 1889-1896-1903 221
3. Lexell’s comet underwent its notable disturbance in
August, 1779, and, moreover, this disturbance took place in
that part of Jupiter's orbit in which the Brooks comet suffered
its change of elements in 1886. Between these two appulses
there intervened a period of 107 years, which must be accur-
ately accounted for in order to establish the identity of these
two bodies. That is, during this interval the comet must have
made two, three or four complete revolutions about the sun,
and its period, therefore, must have been one half, a third or
some aliquot part of 107 years. Chandler, in the above men-
tioned paper,' found that the period of the Brooks comet pre-
vious to 1886 was 26.9 years, very approximately one quarter
of the 107 years to be accounted for. The possibility of the
comet having made three revolutions during this period can be
eliminated, according to Chandler, as this would have brought
the comet and Jupiter together in 1815 and 1850, at which
times the perturbations would have been enormous. The in-
terval can hardly be accounted for upon any other supposition
than that of four revolutions of the comet being equal to nine
of Jupiter’s.
A comparison of the elements of Lexell’s comet, subsequent
to its disturbance in 1779, as given by LeVerrier, with those of
the Brooks comet previous to 1886, as given by Chandler, show
a striking likeness. The longitude of the node is nearly the
same for both, 175° for Lexell against 177° for Brooks; the
inclinations differ by less than 4° and the eccentricities are not
far apart. Again, the heliocentric longitudes, within which the
attraction of the sun was overborne by the influence of Jupiter
are nearly the same for both comets. Taking all these points
of resemblance into consideration and assuming the substantial
correctness of the period (26.9 years) he deduced, Chandler
concluded that there is ‘‘an overwhelmingly strong presump-
tion in favor of the identity of these two comets.”’
4. The question of identity was investigated in an entirely
different manner by Schulhof,? who made use of a criterion
1 Astr. Jour., No. 205.
2 Bulletin Astronomigue, November, 1889.
222 POOR
formulated by Tisserand. By an investigation of the path of a
comet through a planet’s ‘sphere of activity,’’ Tisserand
derived a function, x, of the comet’s elements and of those of
the disturbing planet, which remains practically unaltered, how-
ever great the change in the individual elements. The action of
Jupiter, forexample, even repeated at several very close appulses,
can cause but a very slight change in the numerical value of
this function. Schulhof found that the z’s for Lexell’s and for
Brooks’ comets differed, and that the comets, therefore, could
not be identical.
This criterion, however, only holds if the comet has been
disturbed by a single planet, and in a later paper’ Schulhot
discussed the possibility of the identity of the two comets,
assuming that there had been disturbances by both Jupiter and
Saturn. By assuming the identity of the two comets, he was
able to deduce, by means of the criterion, the most probable
orbit of the body between 1779 and 1886. He thus found
that, if these bodies are one and the same, its period must have
been about 32 years from 1779 to 1849, at which time it passed
close to Saturn, suffered large disturbances and had its period
increased to about 42 years. Thus the comet made three revo-
lutions in the 107 years to be accounted for, but three revo-
lutions of unequal duration.
5. In the latter part of 1889 I took up this problem and
attempted to solve the question of identity between these two
remarkable bodies. I based my work on an orbit obtained by
the method of the variation of geocentric distances from ten
normal places between July 1889 and December 1890. The
results of this investigation ” differed greatly from those obtained
by Chandler and left the matter in a very unsettled state. Mean-
while, Bauschinger undertook the determination of the defin-
itive elements of the comet’s orbit, and upon the publication of
his results,’ I began a reinvestigation of the entire subject and
determined to do the work in as thorough a manner as _ possi-
1 Bulletin Astronomique, December, 1889.
2 Astr. Jour., No. 244.
3 «* Untersuchungen iiber den periodischen Kometen 1889 V (Brooks),’
1 Theil.
COMET OF 1889-1896-1903 223
ble. Unfortunately, however, Bauschinger found a direct solu-
tion of his normal equations impossible, the last element deter-
mined being quite uncertain. Hence the final elements as
given in his paper were still subject to an uncertainty, very
slight indeed, but enough to affect to some extent the character
of the appulse with Jupiter. In order to take account of this
uncertainty and to show our actual knowledge of the move-
ments of this interesting body, I solved his equations anew and
expressed the elements in terms of an indeterminate quantity,
and this indeterminate quantity, v, I carried through my entire
work. The results of this investigation, published in 1893,'
left the question of identity still unsettled, although the results
pointed very strongly to the non-identity of the two bodies.
In the hope that the first few observations of the second
appearance of the body in 1896 would completely settle the
question, I carried the elements forward, and found an ephemeris
for the time of its return.* The comet was rediscovered by
Javelle at Nice on June 20, 1896, very close to the predicted
place, and from the observations a close approximation to the
value of the indeterminate, », was made,* With this a better
determination of the character of the appulse to Jupiter in 1886
was made, and the result seemed to conclusively prove the
non-identity of the two bodies.
6. Bauschinger carried on his investigations and determined
in a most painstaking and satisfactory manner the elements
which best represent the observations of the comet during the
two appearances of 1889-90 and 1896-97.’ The final elements
obtained by him differed but slightly from those I had obtained,
as above mentioned, and, therefore, the conclusions which I had
reached were not altered by his later investigations. The ele-
ments which he obtained, however, did not represent the obser-
1«« Researches upon Comet 1889 V,”’ Astr. Jour., Nos. 302, 303.
2«¢ Preliminary Note on the Reappearance of Comet 1889 V,”’ Astr. Jour., No.
320, Pp» 63.
3«* Note on the Periodic Comet of Brooks and Javelle,’’ Astr. Jour., No. 380,
p- 175-
4 «* Untersuchungen iiber den periodischen Kometen 1889 V, 1896 VI (Brooks),’’
2 Theil.
224 POOR
vations with the accuracy that could be desired. As pointed
out by Bauschinger, the differences between the observed and
computed places of the comet varied periodically. In the first
appearance, 1889-90, the point of the comet which was meas-
ured, appeared a little south, and in the second appearance,
1896-97, a little north of the places computed from the mean
path, and the total differences amounted to about 3.0. Bau-
schinger explained these discrepancies as due to one of two
causes. First, that different portions of the comet were mea-
sured during the two appearances, owing to local changes in
the brightness of the object. Second, actual changes in the
position of the nucleus of the comet, due to perturbations by the
smaller, and in the latter appearance, invisible, companions.
The elements, as deduced by Bauschinger, were carried for-
ward by Neugebauer, and an ephemeris computed for the third
appearance in 1903. The comet was rediscovered on August
18, 1903, by Aitkin, at the Lick Observatory and was found
to be very close to the predicted place ; the difference between
observation and theory being about 24*°in Right Ascension and
1’ 30’ in Declination.
7. It seemed desirable to correct my work, heretofore men- |
tioned, by means of the latest data, and to collect and publish
in final form the results of my various investigations upon the
appulse to Jupiter in 1886 and the consequent changes in the
orbit of this body. In this I was greatly aided by a grant of
money by the Trustees of Columbia University, which was
used in employing assistant computers. The first step was the
selection of the elements on which to base my investigation
and here at the outset I was confronted by a difficulty. A
comparison of Bauschinger’s elements with the positions of the
body at the time of discovery in 1903 showed that these ele-
ments were not all that could be desired, and a redetermination
of the elements was decided upon as a preliminary. In this
redetermination all the data from the first two appearances were
used and the elements deduced therefrom were checked with
one or two normal places from the 1903 appearance. Thus
the elements may be regarded as definitive for the appearances
COMET OF 188g9-1896-1903 225
of 1889 and 1896, but not for the appearance of 1903. It was
not deemed advisable nor necessary to wait until the present
appearance shall be over so as to include all the observations
of this appearance, as this would probably delay the work for
a year or more.
The present paper, therefore, naturally divides itself into two
parts :
1. The determination of the elements which best represent
the motion of the comet at the time of its discovery in 1889.
2. Using the elements, thus determined, as a basis, the dis-
cussion of the action of Jupiter upon the comet in 1886, and a
determination of the most probable orbit previous to that date.
In this part is included the discussion of the possibility of the
identity of this comet with that of Lexell.
PARTE
DEFINITIVE DETERMINATION OF THE ELEMENTS FROM THE
APPEARANCES OF 1889-90 AND 1896-97.
A. — Preliminary Correction to Elements.
8. The elements, deduced by Bauschinger' from the first
appearance of the comet in 1889-90, were slightly indetermi-
nate. I solved his equations anew and expressed the elements
in terms of an indeterminate quanity, v, the limits of variation
of which were placed at + 40.” These elements were carried
forward to the time of perihelion passage in 1896, the indeter-
minate, v, being retained and carried through the computations.
During the interval 1889-97, the perturbations of Jupiter, Saturn
and the Earth were taken into account; those due to Mars
were considered for a short period only. With the resulting
elements,® an ephemeris of the comet was computed for the
possible times of visibility in the years 1895 and 1896.
The comet was rediscovered by Javelle at Nice on June 20,
1896, and a comparison of his observation with the above
mentioned ephemeris gave the following differences, in the sense
observed minus computed,
Aa =— o® 248 .61
Ad = — 2/36”.00
This observation was sufficient to determine a close approxima-
' «« Untersuchungen iiber den periodischen Kometen 1889 V ( Brooks),’’ 1 Theil ;
‘*Definitive Bahnbestimmung des Haupt-Kometen aus der Erscheinung 1889 bis
189QI.”’
2 «* Researches upon Comet 1889 V,’”’ Astr. Jour., No. 302, p. 123.
3<¢ Preliminary note on the Re-appearance of Comet 1889 V,’’ Astr. Jour., No.
320, p. 63.
996
-_——
COMET OF 1889-1896-1903 227
tion to the value. of », and thence the values of the elements
themselves. The elements as thus determined were,'
ELEMENTs I.
Epoch, 1896 October 23.5, Greenwich Mean Time.
w= 499%.9877
z= t? 48/ 537.69
Gia Ge Szke
J — Ose 4) OS) > 15960:0
© = 343 47 45 -93
= 27 59 56 .39
My = 358 22 49 .23
With these elements an ephemeris of the comet was computed
and published in Astronomical Journal, Nos. 383, 386, 389.
A later and fuller comparison of the ephemeris with the
observed places of the comet showed that Elements I did not
represent the motion as well as had been expected. Five normal
places of the two appearances were formed and from them cor-
rections found to the mean daily motion, 4, and to the mean
anomaly of epoch, Z. The corrections thus found were,
Au = — 0%.004
AL = + 57.00
Applying these corrections to ELements I, I have :
ELEMENTS II.
Epoch, 1896 October 23.5 Greenwich Mean Time.
#= — 499”.9837
ee Om TT aa” .O2
™= 1 48 53 .69
MSS ais I 7 .76 >1896.0
i—- GY ae 3 4NcOS
$= 27 59 56 -39
M,=358 22 54 .93
1 «Note on the Periodic Comet of Brooks and Javelle,’’ dstr. /Jour., No. 380,
p- 175.
228 POOR
Computation of Perturbations.
g. In order to connect the elements of the three appearances
with the greatest precision, I had the perturbations for the inter-
vals 1889-1896 and 1896-1903 recomputed. The method of
the Variation of Constants was adopted and ELements II were
used as the basis of computation. The perturbations of Earth,
Mars, Jupiter and Saturn were taken into account ; the intervals
of computation varying for the different planets and elements.
A uniform interval of 40 days was adopted for all the elements
excepting # and L. As these elements are of the most im-
portance and the perturbations large, an interval of 20 days was
used in the computations for the Earth and Jupiter.
The computations were made in the following manner. The
perturbations of the elements, as originally computed and as
given in my papers in the Astronomical Journal, were first inte-
grated for each date of computation and the resulting perturba-
tions applied to Elements IJ, thus were formed the osculating
elements for each date of computation. With. these varying
elements the perturbations were computed, using the formulas
as given by Oppolzer. The masses of the planets, as adopted,
follow :
I
Earth, EEO (Newcomb. )
I
2680337
Mars,
I
jupiter, —————— Newcomb.
Jupiter, 047.35 ( )
(Bessel. )
The epoch of osculation adopted was,
1896, October 23.5 Greenwich Mean Time.
The perturbation of the Mean Longitude was found in the
form,
AL= (AL), a (AZ),
COMET OF 1889-1896-1903 229
where (JZ), is the perturbation of the Mean Longitude of the
epoch and
> TU
(Az\y= (ef = dee.
The integrated perturbations, as thus computed, are given in
the following tabies :
TABLE I.
PERTURBATIONS.
1896 October 23.5 to 1889 September 30.5.
Earth. Mars. | Jupiter.
Saturn.
— 275.942 248.460 | — 526.153
+ 155.053 =f D257 fe LOG.7 57
25.320 + 10.270 + 35.620
55 257-370 + 57-977 | + 314.623
—10,860 2 |4+- 695.137 +199.357 + 882.345
—54.291 Wes —1538.055 + 54.160 —1546.090
+ 0.00163) -+0.00345 |+ }1.61605| + 0.07849|-+ 1.69962
1896 October 23.5 to 1903 September 18.5.
Earth. Mars. Jupiter. Saturn.
Ar — 2.599 | —0.716 —517.656 —57.014 —577.985
AQ — .644 — .098 — 195 | —17.416 — 18.343
Ai — .764 — 006 + 8.402 | +0520 |+ 8.152
Ao ee IS i = 2059 a Slee | 2727 | 67-324
A ere 9) 292 |--93ato2 |. 113.873 +955-479
AL : | +4.452 |+788.525 | +44.164 + 887.355
+-0.00022 |— 0.24295 = TO:O0435m | 1O.23 074
10. It is of interest to compare the values of the perturba-
tions thus found with those given, for the same interval, by
Bauschinger. These latter values were computed by Neuge-
bauer, and Bauschinger’s Elements V' were made the basis
of the computation. In this work the Osculating Epoch was
taken as of 1889 October 8.0, Berlin M. T., and the computa-
tions were made at a uniform interval of forty days. This
brings a date of computation on October 11.0, 1896, for which
' «« Untersuchungen uber den periodischen Kometen 1889 V, 1896 VI ( Brooks),’’
2 Theil. ‘*‘ Die Erscheinung 1896-97 und ihre Verbindung mit der vom Jahr
1889-90.”’
230 POOR
date Bauschinger’s tables give the integrated values of the per-
turbations. I could thus take directly from his tables without
interpolation the values of the perturbations for the interval
between 1889 October 8.0 and 1896 October 11.0.
The values of the perturbations as determined by my new com-
putation for this interval can be taken from my tables by inter-
polation. Interpolating thus and comparing my results with
those of Bauschinger, as taken directly from his tables, I find,
INTERVAL 1889 OcTOBER 8.0 TO 1896 OCTOBER IT.0.
Bauschinger. B minus P
Apt 12575 — 35.46 — 0.32
AQ —— 166.60 — 166.52 | -—— 0.08
Az =-+ 525-73 Se Seu + 0.52
Ao = — 312.08 — 312.86 + 0.78
AM— — 4222.22 — 4223.97 + 1.75
Au =— 1.70871 — 1.70879 +- 0.00008
The differences are all extremely small, with the exception of
4JM. This is accounted for, however, by the difference in
methods: Bauschinger computed the perturbations in J di-
rectly, while I computed those of Z, and the number given
above for my perturbation in J7 was found indirectly from the
values given in my tables for Z and z.
Not only do the total results agree closely, but the agree-
ment for the separate planets is also marked, as is shown by the
following comparison of the perturbations of the mean motion.
Bauschinger. Poor. B minus P.
Earth — 0.00232 — 0.00192 — 0,00040
Mars — 0,00346 — 0.00355 + 0,00009
Jupiter — 1.62464 — 1.62501 + 0.00037
Saturn — 0.07829 — 0.07831 + 0.00002
Totals. — 1.70871 — 1.70879 + 0.00008
11. The perturbations thus found were applied and Elements
II were carried forward to 1903 and backward to 1889; the
following elements representing the appearance of 1903:
COMET OF 1889-1896-1903 231
ELEMENTS II.
Epoch, 1903 September 18.5 Greenwich Mean Time.
== 499”.74397
L = 350° 47’ 41”.36
T= I 45 7 .39
== 18) 6) 27-76 + 1G0210
Za 96 ERAS ai:
G28) ig (eel
My = 349 2 33 97
With these elements an ephemeris was computed for August,
September and October, 1903.
The comet was rediscovered by Aitken on August 18, 1903,
at which time it was a little north following the ephemeris.
With four observations, as published by Aitken, a normal place
was formed for August 22.5 and the ephemeris gave the fol-
lowing differences in the sense observed zzzus computed.
Aa= —+ o® 185.80
Ad = + 1/ 20%.90
which was not as satisfactory as had been hoped. Aitken! re-
ported the comet as faint and small and a most difficult object
to observe ; the above differences ina and 0 are not large, there-
fore, being little greater than the apparent diameter of the comet
itself.
The perturbations, as computed in 9, were applied to Ele-
ments II and the osculating elements representing the appear-
ance of 1889 found. With these a partial ephemeris was com-
puted and a normal place formed for 1889 September 18.5 and
with Elements II a normal place was formed for 1896 Septem-
ber, 9.5. Comparing these normal places with that for 1903,
as given above, I find that Elements II represent the three ap-
pearances in the following manner ; the differences being given
in the sense, observed mzxus computed :
cosd Aa Ad
1889 Sept. 18.5 + 7%.39 + 5.03
1896 Sept. 9.5 — 0.96 sh 506
1903 Aug. 22.5 + 251 .20 + 80 .go
1 Lick Observitory Bulletin, No. 49.
232 POOR
An attempt was made to correct Elements II so as to satisfy
the three appearances, but without full success; the resulting
residuals being too large. To satisfy the equations represent-
ing the appearance in 1903, would have to be increased: such
an increase, however, would throw large discordances in the
normal places representing the first appearance in 1889. In
other words, the mean motion of the comet during the interval
1896-1903 seemed to be greater than the mean motion during
the interval 1896-1889. The two appearances of 1889 and
1896 could be brought into accord ; so could the appearances of
1896 and 1903, but no value of the mean motion would at
once satisfy all three appearances. It was not possible to
satisfy the three appearances by any simple variation of Ele-
ments IT.
This seemed to indicate an error in the computed perturba-
tions or in some neglected perturbation. The perturbations of
the four planets, Earth, Mars, Jupiter and Saturn had been
carefully checked and the results agree extremely well with
those obtained entirely independently by Neugebauer and re-
ferred to in 10. From the result of the comparison there given
it would seem as though these perturbations were accurately
computed.
The perturbations of Uranus were far too small to be of any
account. It remained then to test the effect of Venus upon the
comet. A computation of these perturbations for a few dates
showed that they were quite as large and fully as important as
those of either the Earth or Mars. Another fact which led me
to attribute these discordances to the action of Venus, is that
Venus was in widely different parts of her orbit at the times the
comet passed perihelion in 1889 and 1896, and consequently
the acceleration or retardation of the comet would be radically
different in 1896-97 from what it was in 1889-90. While the
comet was passing over the arc of its orbit near perihelion in
1889-90, the action of Venus was such as to retard it and to
decrease its mean motion; while the comet was passing over a
corresponding arc of its orbit in 1896-97, the action of Venus
was such as to accelerate it and to increase its mean motion.
COMET OF 188g9-1896-1903 233
This is exactly the effect necessary to reconcile the discordances
noted in the three appearances. Consequently, I undertook to
determine by computation the effect of the perturbations of
Venus upon the comet.
Owing to the rapid motion of Venus about the sun the per-
turbations change sign frequently and the interval of computa-
tion should be very short. The perturbations were computed
for the entire interval 1889 to 1903 with a 20-day interval from
January 1889 to April 1890, from April 1896 to May 1897
and from May 1903 to December 1903; these three periods
being the times of closest approach of the comet to the planet.
During the remaining times the comet was at such a distance
from Venus that the direct action of that planet upon the comet
became very small and during these periods the interval of com-
putation was made 40 days.
The computations were carried out in a manner entirely sim-
ilar to those of g: the adopted mass of Venus being
I
390,000
The values of the integrated perturbations for the intervals be-
tween the various appearances are given in the following table ;
the date of osculation being, 1896 October 23.5:
PERTURBATIONS BY VENUS.
1896-1889. 1896-1903.
Au + 0.01095 a= 0,00950 .
Ar — 0.675 — 1.885
AQ == 110:427 == GLB
Ag — 1,607 — 5.832
Az + 0.159 + 0.344
AL — 5.869 + 10.703
AYER — 28.623 -++ 79.160
With these additional perturbations Elements II were carried
back to 1889 and forward to 1903 and a normal place formed
representing each of the three appearances. From these nor-
234 POOR
mals a correction to the mean motion, », was found ; this cor-
rection being
Au = -— 0/’.014,
The resulting elements represent the three appearances in a very
satisfactory manner. Applying this correction to Elements I],
I have for my approximate elements :
ELEMENTS III.
Epoch, 1896 October 23.5 Greenwich Mean Time.
w= 499’’.9697
NOT Oe
71k, 48153) -69
es Te 7 GAS ittsXotoy(os
$= 27 59 56 .39
Z—— nO 35 BANOS
i250 22 a5 Anne
and these elements were made the basis of all subsequent work
and definitive corrections to them found from all the available
observations of the first two appearances and the first few obser-
vations of the third appearance in 1903.
Applying to Elements III the perturbations, including those
of Venus, I have for the osculating elements which represent
the first and the third appearances :
ELEMENTS III.
Epoch, 1889 Sept. 30.5 Epoch, 1903 Sept. 18.5
w= 501/7.68027 = 499/’.73947
L= 1° 36 26/.26 T= 350° 48’ 357.95
f= a5 5 27 m= I 45 5 -50
V7 150) 5 BOOn. SO O@ Vs OM 2 7697) 903-0
d—=28) “5 o)-At je hy ©) iyi sole
51a do p= © BoAy fale
Ni 10) i 20/899 Hit 13 Cums 304
B. Observations of the Comet.
first Appearance 1889 to 1891.
12. The comet was discovered on July 6, 1889, by William
R. Brooks, at Smith Observatory, Geneva, New York, and was
COMET OF 188 9-1896-1903 23
observed by many observers until March 20, 1890. It was
again found by Barnard, using the 36-inch telescope of the
Lick Observatory, on November 22, 1890, and was observed
by him during the next two months, the last observation, being
obtained on January 12, 1901. The observations thus extend
over a period of 556 days, and during this time the comet passed
over 155 degrees of its orbit about the sun.
At the time of its discovery the comet was faint, appearing
about as bright as an 11th magnitude star, with a small nucleus
and a short wide tail about 10’ in length. At no time did it
become a conspicuous object ; at its brightest in September it
was an easy object for telescopes of from 8 to 10 inches diameter,
being about roth magnitude, with a head some 4’ in diameter,
and a short faint tail. By January 18go it has become a very
difficult object to observe and could be seen with the largest in-
struments only. At this time its brightness was less than one
half that at discovery ; it appeared as a fourteenth magnitude
star, with a head of from one to two minutes in diameter, and a
tail of about the same length. Upon the rediscovery by Barnard
in November, it appeared as a weak, hazy nebulosity six or
eight minutes in diameter. It was described by Barnard as the
most difficult object he had ever measured. In August the
comet was found to be accompanied by several companions ;
smaller, fainter bodies, which travelled in orbits nearly parallel
to that of the main comet. It seemed as though the comet in
some way had been shattered and broken up into fragments.
The observations of these bodies were discussed and their orbits
determined by Chandler.'
13. In all, some 446 complete observations were made by
40 different observers on 158 different days. The instruments
with which these observations were made varied in size from
5 %-inch refractor used by Schwab at Kremsmiinster to the 36-
inch Lick telescope used by Barnard. Most of the telescopes
were fitted with filar micrometers, only five observers using ring
micrometers and but two using square-bar micrometers. These
1“ Definitive Orbits of the Companions of Comet 1889 V,’’ ds¢z. /our., Nos.
236, 237.
236 POOR
observations were all published with full details in standard
journals, easily accessible, hence only the reference need be
given here. The following table, then, contains the necessary
information regarding the original observations, the frst column
containing the name of the observatory, the second a brief
description of the instrument, and the third the reference to the
publication, giving volume, number and page.
TaBLeE II.
Observatory. Instrument. Reference.
Algiers. o™.50 Refr. Fil. Micr. Cc = Vol. 109, p. 433, Bull. VI,
480.
Baltimore. g.5-in. Equat. Fil. Micr. ADs Xe ero:
Berlin. g-in. Refr. Fil. Micr. | Aq IN] 1245347,
Bordeaux. 14-in. Equat. Fil. Micr. (PACENEEI2655g92"
Cambridge, Mass. | 15-in. Equat. Fil. Micr. (AL eS Go 52k, Gor ee piven ie.
| 2a OAs
Copenhagen. | 10.5-in. Refr. Fil. Micr. | A. N. 126, 25, 136, 306.
Dresden. 12-in. Refr. Fil. Micr. A. Na 12257180.) 201) 1235 eto7
124, 29, 283.
Greenwich. | 6.7-in. Refr. Fil. Micr. Monthly Not. 49, 446.
Hamburg. | ro-in. Refr. Fil. Micr. A. N. 122, 189, 2173 127, 53.
Hanover. | g-in. Equat. Ring Micr. JaNs |e IDS Weyl
Haverford. 1o-in. Equat. Fil. Micr. AS 2 LXS 140:
Kremsmiinster. 5-5-in. Refr. Ring Micr. A INS 24527:
Liege. | 1o-in. Refr. Fil. Micr. | A. N. 126, 37.
Lyons. o™.35 Equat. coudé. | C. R. T. 109, 498.
Milan. 8-in. Refr. Ring Micr. ARNG i 26300217.
Marseilles. o™,26 Equat. Fil. Micr. Bull. VI, 393, 519.
Mt. Hamilton. 12-in. Refr. Fil. Micr. ae foul DNL Y. WE.) Lp
Mt. Hamilton. | 36-in. Refr. Fil. Mier. FNS Mla OS Ua UESTOR A 7S. alo INT.
| 126,13 7 e230
Munich. | 10.5-in. Refr. Fil. Micr. ALIN 122) 130); 12357407;
Nicolaefi. | g-in. Refr. Fil. Micr. A IN 1235)303-
Nice. | o™.38 Equat. Fil. Micr. Bull. Wi, 427, 522; VII, 106:
Goleta Nile Geico, eH ie
Padua. | o™,19 Equat. Wire Micr. A. IN. 123, 3615 124, 111.
Palermo. | o™,.25 Equat. Fil. Micr. ACSIN. 124, 30:
Paris. o™.38 Equat. Fil. Micr. 3ull. VII, 304.
Princeton. | 23-in. Refr. Square-bar Micr. Bele Oh7, 1355 .5O;ekOrre
Pulkowa. 15-in. Refr. Fil. Micr. ALUN: 1245305 51205157.
Strassburg. | 18-in. Refr. Fil. Micr. AV INE 1245 2027
Strassburg. 6-in. Refr. Ring Micr. [PAG ONE 124, 37i.-
Toulouse. 15-in. Refr. Fil. Micr. | Bulle Vill; 220:
Vienna. 27-in. Refr. Fil. Micr. (PAR INE 25, 261.251:
Vienna. 12-in. Refr. Fil. Micr. AVN D255 2010.
Vienna. 6-in. Refr. Ring Micr. |PACINEST25 20K.
Washington. g.6-in. Refr. Fil. Micr. | A. J. IX, 72, 93, 112, 132.
Washington. 26-in. Refr. Fil. Micr. | SA. XseT 35 6nOs.
Windsor. 8-in. Refr. Square-bar Micr. A. N. 123, 409.
COMET OF 1889-1896-1903 237
Second Appearance 1896 to 1897.
14. The comet was discovered at its return by Javelle at
Nice on June 20, 1896, and was observed until February 25,
1897. The observations thus extended over a period of 250
days, during which time the comet passed over 100 degrees of
its orbit about the sun. During this second appearance the
comet was very faint and a most difficult object to observe. It
could be observed only with the larger telescopes, and is de-
scribed as being a round nebulous mass slightly less than one
minute in diameter. At first it had a central nucleus, which
appeared small and about the twelfth magnitude. This nucleus
afterwards disappeared and the comet appeared only a small
spot of haze or nebulosity. The companions were sought for,
but were not seen.
In all somewhat over 100 separate and complete observa-
tions were made by 15 observers on 103 different days. It is
impossible to state the exact number of observations, as one ob-
server, Howe, at Denver, frequently made three or four separate
observations during one evening, using different comparison
stars for each observation; on several occasions he used -as
many as eight. If each and every one of such measurements
be called a separate observation, then Howe alone made more
than 100 observations,‘and the total number of observations
should be increased to over 200. In most cases it was found
convenient to take the mean of all such measurements made in
_one night and to call such mean a single observation. _
15. The following table gives the necessary information in
regard to original observations ; the name of the observatory,
the character of the instrument used and the reference to the
journal where complete details can be found.
238 POOR
TaB_e III.
Observatory. | Instrument. Reference.
Bordeaux. 14 in. Equat. Fil. Micr. Compt. Rend. 124, 61.
Charlottesville. | 26 in. Refr. Fil. Micr. (2a\S jd DOW riaifo:
Cordoba. | 12 in. Equat. Fil. Micr. WASEN EIA 2 255s
Denver. 20 in. Refr. Fil. Micr. FNS NG SWINE a7
Mt. Hamilton. | 12 in. and 36 in. Refr. Fil. Micr. | A. J. XVI, 185 ; XVII, 30, 182.
Munich. 10¥% in. Refr. Fil. Micr. A. N. 144, 145.
Nice. o™.76 Refr. Fil. Micr. Bull XonVe 130) Ace Nair tems
Northfield. 16 in. Refr. Fil. Micr. | AXo I 2A, Tio g SWAIN, vie
Oxford. to in. Refr. Ring Micr. | Monthly Not. 57, 83.
Rio. gin. Refr. Fil. Micr. | AGING WiAe oan Goleta ORs
Strassburg. 18 in. Refr. Fil. Micr. FENG ANG TEAS PAU.
Washington. 26 in. Refr. Fil. Micr. TX | ONAL IS 1097/5):
Vienna. | 27 in. Refr. Fil. Micr. A. N. 143, 49.
The Third Appearance 1903.
16. The comet was rediscovered on August 18, 1903, by
Aitken at Mt. Hamilton, and was observed by him until January
14, 1904, a period of 149 days, during which the comet tra-
versed 60 degrees of its orbit. The comet was faint and small,
irregular in outline, and with but feeble condensation. Its
greatest diameter did not exceed three minutes of arc and at
the time of its discovery its brightness about equalled that of a
14th magnitude star. Later it faded greatly and became a diffi-
cult object to measure. During the whole of this period it was
invisible except with the aid of the largest telescopes.
The following table gives the references to all observations,
published up to the end of April, 1904.
TABLE IV.
Observatory. | Instrument. | References.
Lick Bull. No. 49.
Astr. Jour. No. 558.
Mt. Hamilton. 36 in Refr. Fil. Micr.
Washington. 26 in Refr. Fil. Micr. |
COMET OF 1889-1896-1903 239
C. Comparison of Observed Places of the Com2t with the
Ephemeris.
17. An ephemeris for the times of visibility during the three
appearances, 1889 to 1903, was computed with Elements III.
This ephemeris was obtained in the following manner. A daily
ephemeris for the years 1889 to 1897 had previously been com-
puted with Elements II. In the direct computations of this a
four-day interval had been used, the values for the intermediate
dates were found by interpolation using second order differences.
This ephemeris gave the true right ascensions and declinations
of the comet for Greenwich mean midnight, referred to the
apparent equator and equinox of date. The corrections for
aberration were not applied. With Elements III were now
computed a number of places of the comet, at intervals of from
8 to 24 days, and the differences between these places and the
ephemeris places, as computed with Elements II, found. These
differences formed a smooth curve, from which were found by
interpolation the daily corrections which it was necessary to
apply to the ephemeris place, computed with Elements IJ, in
order to find the corresponding place for Elements III.
In computing this ephemeris for the different appearances,
the perturbations from the respective osculating epochs to the
various dates of computation were not applied. So that, during
the years 1889, 1890 and 1891, the ephemeris positions of the
comet still had to be corrected by the amount of the perturba-
tions from 1889, Sept. 30.5, to date; in the years 1896 and
1897, from 1896, Oct. 23.5, to date, and in 1903 from 1903,
Sept. 18.5, to date.
18. The observed right ascensions and declinations of the
comet were corrected by applying the corrections for parallax.
The observations were freed from aberration by subtracting the
aberration time from the times as given by the observers. These
times were then reduced to Greenwich mean time and expressed
in decimals of a day.
19. Weight of Observations. —The observations made by
the various observers are of varying values ; the series of obser-
vations obtained by one observer agreeing remarkably well
240 POOR
among themselves, while a similar series obtained by another
observer will show large discrepancies among the individual
observations. It was, therefore, necessary to assign weights to
the observers, and an approximate idea of their weights was
obtained as follows. Each observation, both in @ and 0, was
compared with the ephemeris and the differences in the sense,
observed mznws computed, found. Then upon the supposition
that the weights were all equal, corrections to the ephemeris were
found for numerous dates. These corrections were applied to
the observed differences for each observation, and thus were
obtained for the series of observations of each individual ob-
server a series of residuals which closely represented the actual
errors of observation. From this series of residuals the weight
was obtained by the formula
m?(m—1)
[ee]
where z is the number of observations and v, v, the residuals.
In applying the formula, the value of #, the mean error of unit
weight was assumed as
Fora, m2====0°.15 ord, m= /75
The weights as thus determined were adhered to closely in
assigning the weights to the various observations, the nearest
tenth being taken in most cases.
As the comet differed radically in appearance and in ease of
observation in the various appearances, the observations of each
appearance were treated separately, and the weights assigned
asin the table. The initials in parentheses after the name of an
observatory represent the various observers.
COMET OF 1889-1896-1903 241
TABLE V.
TABLE OF WEIGHTS.
First Second Third
Appearance Appearance Appearance
Po Pa PO Pa Po
Algiers (R). : 0.4
Algiers (S). 3 1.0
Baltimore. é 0.0
Berlin. é 0.5
Bordeaux (R). 2 Ou
Bordeaux (C). : O.1
Bordeaux (P). : 0.0
Cambridge. : 0.3
Charlottsville.
Copenhagen. : 0.6
Cordoba.
Denver.
Dresden. y 0.4
Greenwich. f 0.2
Hamburg. . 1.0
Hanover. i 0.2
Haverford. : 0.0
Kremsmiinster. E O.1
Liege. : 0.4
Lyons. : 0.9
Milan. : 0.5
Marseilles. t 0.2
Mt. Hamilton (36). : 1.0
Mt. Hamilton (12).
Munich. ; 0.6
Nicolaeff. : 0.6
Nice (Ch). : 1.0
Nice (E). ; Taye
Nice (J).
Northfield.
Oxford.
Padua.
Palmero.
Paris.
Princeton (Y
Princeton (M
Pulkowa.
Rio.
Strassburg (K).
Strassburg (S).
Toulouse.
Vienna (P).
Vienna (Sp).
Vienna (12 P).
Vienna (6 H).
Washington (F).
Washington (H).
Windsor.
Ne
NE
242 POOR
20. Comparison Stars.—The positions of the comparison stars
were carefully redetermined by S. Alfred Mitchell while at the
Yerkes Observatory. This work was carried out in a most
thorough and painstaking manner, entailing a great amount of
labor, as some 508 stars were determined. The positions were
taken from the various catalogues in the Naval Observatory, the
Johns Hopkins University, and the Yerkes Observatory, in all
some 65 catalogues being used. For each star the annual pre-
cession and the secular variation were computed, using the con-
stants of Struve and Peters, and each catalogue position was
brought up to 1900.0.
The systematic corrections to each catalogue, as determined
by Newcomb,’ were applied and the weighted mean of the results
taken. Wherever the catalogue places indicated proper motion,
the tabular results were solved by the method of least squares
and a definite determination of the proper motion made. The
proper motions of some 70 stars were thus obtained.
Besides the various catalogues many numbers of the A.N.
and the A.J. were consulted for meridian observations of the
fainter stars. Full use was also made of the published researches
of Bauschinger which appeared while this portion of my work
was nearing completion. These researches contained the posi-
tions of many stars which had been reobserved by Bauschinger
himself, and such positions were of the greatest value. In fact,
Bauschinger’s investigations are so complete and satisfactory as
to make mine all but superfluous. My work was so far advanced,
however, that it seemed advisable to complete it, and to avail
myself of the data which appeared so opportunely.
21. Bauschinger’s star places were reduced to the system of
the Astronomische Gesellschaft ; mine, as I have already stated,
to that of Newcomb. There will, therefore, be a systematic
difference in our determination of the star places, and this syste-
matic difference will be represented by the corrections to be ap-
plied to reduce Newcomb to A.G.C., and are as follows :
' Papers of the American Ephemeris, Vol. VIII, Part IT.
COMET: OF 188g9-1896-1903
In Right Ascension
A.G.C. minus Newcomb = — 05.030
In Declination
A.G.C. minus Newcomb
Declination. Correction.
+ 25° — 0”.08
20 = iI
ES; sa feos!
10 — 07
“irked = pels
oO — 14
aaa ae VES)
10 — .27
15 — .26
20 — 86
— 25 — 82
With the positions of the comparison stars thus determined,
the individual observations of the comet were re-reduced. The
Greenwich mean times of observation were freed from aberration
time, and the true geocentric place of the comet as referred
to the equator and equinox of date found. These observed
positions were directly compared with the ephemeris positions,
as determined in 17, and the differences in the sense, observed
minus computed, taken.
22. Formation of Normal Places.—The observations were
divided into convenient groups, the line of separation between
two consecutive groups being usually indicated by a break in the
series of observations. For each group the mean by weight of
the differences in the sense, observed 727s computed, was found
and these weighted differences, together with their weights, are
given in the following table. In the tabie the first column gives
the mean date of the group ; the second column the dates of
the first and last observations included in the group; the third
column, the difference in right ascension with its corresponding
weight; and the fourth column, the difference in declination,
together with its weight.
244 POOR
TaBLe VI.
OBSERVATION 7722225 EPHEMERIS.
1889 ay 28.5 ee : —or.31 | 24 —3.95 | 20
Aug. 30.5 eae - | — 0.37 64 —- 2.85 45
Sept. 18.5 ane e — 0.35 25 — 2.18 20
Sept. 30.5 ae a oar | 24 — 2,02 16
Oct.
COMET OF 1889-1896-1903 245
Applying these differences to the ephemeris places of the
comet, we have the following observed normal places, together
with their adopted weights.
TaBLeE VII.
OBSERVED NORMAL PLACES.
True R. A. | Wt. True Decl.
h m Ss a | Tak
o 218.82 24
545-70 |) 64
23, 55 28.78 25
47 53-26 | 24
Ale S:450n 20
42 15.01 39 ig)
O 5 47.25 4o + 2 28 40.7
I 28 42.09 +12 46 0.5
2 45 45.30 5 +19 50 55.3
854 11.94 | +25 25 I1.2
16 2.0
53 16.1
29 24.5
4 32.9
4 35.0
NBO USTO
OO OI ANLW NH
22 38 5.99 ) —18 12 28.6
37 32.04 —18 35 6.6
32 7.98 —18 56 2.9
20. 9.92 | —I19 7 46.3
TS O31 | eH ARs
3) gigs | —I7 921.7
24 25.90 —I2 4I 39.7
222s | — 6 39 41.2
45 39.48 — 0 43 20.4
O 33 26.52 | -+ 5 24 45.6
56 29.66 | -+ 811 22.6
E37 54-24 | | +12 48 32.1
3-5
2.5
4.5
1.5
9-5
3:5
2.5
2.5
8.5
5
5
5
5
5
iS) Nw
PRS
| on ial Lal
HHH AO HSI MOO O
2X 40-80 | 4 —27 349.0
TOL5Ol577, | | S21 1} eat
yw
No wy
ae
23. FPerturbations.—The perturbations as computed in 9 were
reintegrated for the period of visibility of each appearance, mak-
ing the respective osculating epochs, 1889 Sept. 30.5, 1896 Oct.
23.5, and 1903 Sept. 18.5 for which dates the elements used in
computing the ephemeris are osculating. From the new tables
thus formed were found by interpolation the perturbations of the
elements for the dates of normal places. These perturbations of
the elements were then transformed into the corresponding per-
turbations of right ascension and declination by means of the
coefficients of the equations of condition, as determined in 24.
In using these coefficients it was necessary to recompute those
246 POOR
involving (¢-7,), making 7, respectively 1889 Sept. 30.5 for all
dates in the first appearance, and 1903 Sept. 18.5 for all dates
in the third appearance. Thus were obtained :
TABLE VII
PERTURBATIONS IN R. A, AND DECL.
cos 0 Aa”
Ad”
1889 July : —o0.42
Aug. : == Syl
Sept. : SS ol
Sepie Bossi .O
Oct. : .O
Noy. F .03
Dec. iG | shit
Jan. ; SEIT
Mar.
Dec.
July
Aug.
Aug.
Sept.
Sept.
Oct.
Nov.
Dec.
Dec.
Jan.
Feb.
Feb.
NN
BRO ONY NWOHBR ND
An AnNnnnnnnnnnn
Aug.
Oct.
Subtracting these perturbations from the differences for corre-
sponding dates, as given in Table VI, I have for the final differ-
ences between observation and theory, the following :
COMET OF 1889-1896-1903 247
TABLE IX.
OBSERVATION 7722722148 COMPUTATION.
NN
no
NH H
© OOV
.
le)
I
NN
FES DN nwo
oO
a&
8
8
if
I
9
6
3
I
I
I
to
nannnnninanine
NO
N
n
NEN
D. Definitive Correction to the Elements.
24. The differential coefficients for the variation of the ele-
ments were computed ; the elements being referred to the mean
equator and equinox of 1896.0, and 1896 Oct. 23.5 being
the epoch for which the elements are osculating. Each normal
place is represented by two equations ; one in right ascension and
one in declination, the known terms in each being the difference
between observation and computation, as given in Table IX.
There are, therefore, forty-eight equations in all, of which the
first twenty represent the first appearance, 1889-91, the next
twenty-four the second appearance, 1896-97, and the last four
the third appearance in 1903. Inthe group of equations which
represent each appearance the right ascension and the declination
equations are grouped together in subgroups, the right ascen-
sion group being given first in each case. In these equations
the coefficients are logarithms.
248 POOR
TABLE Xe
EQUATIONS OF CONDITION.
Au | nN
Ar AQ | Az Ao [rez
0.11177 | 8.76343 | 9.74359
0.22523 | 8.97589 | 9.68368 | 9.68619, | 0.71767
0.25387 | 8.97635 9.56620 | 9.57990n | 0.75097 | 4.16466n | 0.70070 |
0.24588 | 8.97955 | 9.44201 | 9.48615n| 0.74425 | 4.15742n | 0.74115
0.20669 8.96379 | 9.17260 | 9.18696, | 0.70697 | 4.1203In | 0.62014
0.13523 8.91751 8.47567 | 8.89763 | 0.64324 | 4.0509In | 0.41996
0.01528 | 8.81690 | 9.11528, | 9.71784 | 0.52088 | 3.92508n | 0.11394
9.88750 | 8.57749 | 9.38810, | 0.06145 0.34138 3.653398n | 0.47129,
9.85763 8.32015 9.36474n | 0.16435 | 0.23502 | 3.63038n | 0.75588,
0.07904 | 8.42160 | 9.59561 | 0.31418 9.98507 | 3-302IIn | 9.97497n
9.89631 | 9.05423n| 9.99383n | 9.8467In| 0.37972 | 3.89555 | 0.57054
9.98865 | 9.20058n | 9.93394n | 9-73070n | 0.48015 3.89732n | 0.46389
0.00398 9.25406n | 9.81908, | 9.57310n | 0.49679 | 3-91497n | 0.32634
9.99572 | 9.26552n! 9.6967In| 9.3847In| 0.49407 | 3.90787» | 9.30535
9.96118 | 9.2460In | 9.43008, | 8.671I7n | 0.45176 | 3.87393n | 0.22011
9.89823 9.19948n | 8.73239n | 9.20602 | 0.39707 | 3.80960, | 9.94939
9.79449 | 9.09132n| 9.36642 | 9.65524 | 0.28679 | 3.69134n | 9-49136, |
9.62859 | 8.88986, | 9.67173 | 9.83104 | 0.06845 | 3.37618, | 9.89763,
9.48869 | 8.74508, | 9.74772 | 9.79309 | 9.85193 | 3.25410, | 9.41497,
9.6054In 8.40993 | 0.10120 | 9.85248, | 9.54058n| 2.86589 | 0.24304
|
= — | -- - $< —-
9.87442n | 0.60893 | 4.11957 | 0.63347
| 4.13670n | 0.70842
|
0.14180 | 8.45209 | 9.81407 | 0.32150, | 0.58789 | 2.4039In | 0.62839
0.20690 | 8.60938 | 9.82788 | 0.35418, | 0.66074 | 2.43779n | 0.70842 |
0.23515 8.63796 9.81666 | 0.37045n | 0.69200 | 2.45896n | 9-73799 |
0.24781 8.73806 | 9.76062 | 0.37323n| 0.70929 | 2.47170n | 0.69810
0.23991 | 8.75243 | 9.72168 | 0.36162, | 0.70412 2.46432, | 0.68395
0.17484 8.76492 9.55960 | 0.27032, | 0.65107 2.3805Iy | 0.62118
0.05722 | 8.75359 | 9.25972 | 0.03400, | 0.55273 | 2.13472, | 0-127I0 |
9.95360 | 8.72495 | 8.57628 | 9.54337n| 0.46144 | 1.53807, | 0.00432n
9.88992 | 8.67929 | 8.7861In| 9.23716 | 0.39506 | 1.60152 | 0.35025n |
9.85035 | 8.60959 | 9.12545n | 9-77332 | 0.33836 | 2.00663 | 0.48996n
9.83912 8.56995 9.19698, | 9.87944 | 0.31468 2.101IQ | 0.394452 |
9.82812 8.48054 | 9.26613n | 0.00249 | 0.27603 | 2.21680 | 0.59329n |
9.86879 | 8.88250, | O.ITTOg, | 0.18254n | 0.29241 | 2.22680, | 9.93450
9.92232 | 8.01769, | 0.12947n | 0.14407n | 0.35628 | 2.26384, | 9.03743
9.93441 | 9.08170; | 0.12344n | 0.14734n | 0.37432 | 2.26949n | 9-14613
9.91825 9.14775n | 0.08362n | O.11492n | 0.36859 | 2.23926, | 0.23300n
9.89991 | 9.16474n | 0.05179n| 0.08488n | 0.35583 | 2.20966, | 0.35984n |
9.82976 | 9.17465n | 9.89996n 9.94350n | 0.30485 | 2.05918, 0.3856In |
9.75631 9.12875n | 9.57820n | 9.65234n | 0.25199 1.72449n | 9-47857n |
9.70385 9.05464, | 8.85378, | 8.84128n | 0.20721 | 0.20112 | 90.57054n |
9.66292 8.98419, | 9.04155 9.31738 | 0.15995 1.61634 | 0.60959n |
9.61879 | 8.91499, | 9.37809 | 9.61836 | 0.09754 | 1.85244 | 9.49554n
9.59586 8.8843In | 9.45719 | 9.68387 | 0.06252 | 1.90835 | 0.49969n |
9.54969 8.83264n | 9.55448 | 9.74470 | 9.99052 | 1.96171 | 0.43616, |
HH HW OO HSI COMO O
0.23522 | 8.33883 | 9.70674 | 0.52927n| 0.63876 | 4.03294 | 0.38382
0.04336: | 8.51701 | 9.42375 | 0.29130n| 0.49782 | 3.89584 | 0.52892
9.75213 8.97933n | 0.17406, | 0.10092n | 0.12909 3.51824 | 0.32222p |
9.60942 9.0441In | 9.86704n | 9.83773n | 0.06640 | 3.46532 | 0.69460p |
SR fh
COMET OF 1889-1896-1903 249
These equations were multiplied by the square root of their
respective weights and for convenience the following auxiliary
unknowns were substituted.
jo = |[T@]) “Nae
y=
: AQ
z [0.80] Az
2 ==(1- 10 Ag
a= [1:60] ‘ADZ;
v—=[5.00] Ap
1 ==. 80)]) 7
in which the quantities in brackets are logarithms. This
substitution resulted in the following, in which all the coeff-
cients are logarithms.
250 POOR
TABLE XI.
EQUATIONS OF EQUAL WEIGHT.
9.85284 | 9.67532 9.46517 | 9.17887 9.84994 | 9.86363n | 9.59967
9.83599 | 9.66966 | 9.33212 | 9.07626n| 9.83436 | 9.84753n | 9.63126
9.75721 | 9.61431 | 9.02312 | 8.73748n| 9.75749 | 9.77083n | 9.47066
9.83076 | 9.71304 | 8.47120 | 8.59316 | 9.83877 | 9.84644n | 9.41549
9.71631 9.61793 | 9.1163In| 9.41887 | 9.72191 9.7261in 9.11497
9.53318 | 9.32317 | 9.33378n | 9.70713 |. 9.48706 | 9.39906n | 9.41697
9.10711 | 8.66963 | 8.91422n) 9.41383 | 8.98450 | 8.97986n | 9.30536n
9.32852 | 8.77108 | 9.14509 | 9.56366 | 8.73455 | 8.65159n | 9.52445n
9.44683 | 9.70475n | 9-84435n 9-39723n) 9.43024 | 9.54607n 9.42106
9.71526 | 0.02719n| 9.96055n | 9-4573In |) 9.70676 | 9.72393n | 9.49050
9.55450 9.90458n | 9.66960n | 9.12362n 9.54731 | 9.56549n | 9.17686
9.49778 | 9.86758n | 9.49877n | 8.88677n | 9.49613 | 6.50993n | 9.10741
9.46324 | 9.84807 | 9.23214n | 8.17323n | 9.45382 | 9.47599n | 9.02217
9.49720 9.89845n | 8.63136, | 8.80499 | 9.49604 | 9.50857n 8.84836
9.48438 | 9.8812In| 9.35631 | 9.34513 | 9.47668 | 9.48123n | 8.48125
9.26715 9.62842n | 9.61029 9.46960 | 9.20701 9.11474n | 8.83619n
9.04257 | 8.60141 8.60358n | 7-96445n
9.10196n | 8.29006, | 8.21537 | 8.79252
8.73817 9.09456n | 9.29720
8.85489, | 8.75941 | 9.65068
9.49334 | 8.90363 | 9.46561 | 9.67304n) 9.43943 | 7.85545n | 9.27993
9.55844 | 9.06092 | 9.47942 | 9.70572n) 9.51228 | 7.88933n | 9.35996
9.55770 | 9.06051 | 9.43921 | 9.69300n 9.51455 | 7-8815In | 9.36054
9.64781 9.23806 | 9.46062 | 9.77323n | 9.60929 | 7.97170, ! 9.39810
9.63991 9.25243 9.42168 | 9.76162n | 9.60412 | 7.96432n | 9.38395
9.64790 | 9.33798 | 9.33266 | 9.74338n | 9.62413 | 7.95357n | 93-9424
9.49681 | 9.29318 | 8.99931 | 9.47359n 9.49232 | 7.6743In | 8.86669
9.49298 9.36433 | 8.41566 | 9.08275n| 9.50082 | 7.17745n | 8.84370n
9.32951 9.21588 8.52570n | 8.67675 9.33465 7.1411II | 9.08984n
8.90087 8.76011 | 8.47597n | 8.82384 | 8.88888 7.15715 | 8.84048n
8.56995 8.39698n | 8.77944 | 8.71468 | 7.10119 | 8.59445n
x J Z it u | v n’
9.70188 | 9.45354 | 9.63370 9.46453n | 9.69904 | 9.80968, | 9.52358
0.02832 9.87898 9.78677 | 9.48928n | 0.02076 | 0.03979n | 9.81151
8.72812 | 8.48054 | 8.46613n| 8.90249 | 8.67603 | 7.21680 | 8.79329n
9.26879 9.38250n | 9.81109n | 9.58254n | 9.19241 | 7.72680, | 8.63450
9.29944 | 9.4948In |. 9.80659n | 9.52119n | 9.23340 | 7.74096n | 8.71455
9.28595 | 9.53324n| 9.77498n | 9.49888n | 9.22586 | 7.72103n | 7.79767
9.26979 | 9.59929u| 9.73516n | 9.46646, | 9.22013 | 7.69080n | 8.88454n
9.22246 9.58729n | 9.67434n | 9.40743n | 9.17838 7-6322In | 8.98239n
9.25046 | 9.69535n | 9.62066n | 9.36420, | 9.22555 7.57988n | 9.1063In
9.13343 9.60587n | 9.25532n | 9-02946n | 9.12911 | 7.2016In | 9.15569n
9.20591 9.65670, | 8.65784n | 8.34334n | 9.20927 | 5.80318 | 9.37260n
9.11989 | 9.54116, | 8.79852 8.77435 g.11692 7.17331 | 9.36656n
8.51879 | 8.914992 | 8.57809 | 8.51836 | 8.49754 | 6.85244 | 8.69554n
8.49586 8.88431, | 8.65719 | 8.58387 | 8.46252 | 6.90835 | 8.69969n
8.44969 | 8.83264,| 8.75448 | 8.64471 | 8.39052 | 6.96171 | 8.63616n
9.43625 | 8.63986 | 9.20777 | 9.73030n) 9.33979 | 9.33397 | 8.88485
9.24439 | 8.81804 8.92478 | 9.49233n| 9.19885 | 9.19687 | 9.02995
8.95316 | 9.28036, 9.67509n | 9.30195n | 8.83012 | 8.81927 | 8.82325n
8.81045 9.34514n | 9.36807n | 9.03876, | 8.76743 8.76635 | 9.19563n
COMET OF 1889-1896-1903 251
Treating these equations by the method of least squares,
making use of the usual checks upon the computation, the fol-
lowing normal equations are found, in which the coefficients
are numbers :
NORMAL EQUATIONS.
x y z z ut v
6.082452--0. 456189-+-0.336503—2.334170-+ 5.872832 —4.540830-+-2.43094I—o
7-926364-+ 4.160742-+-0.171 294+ 0.495343 —0.540870-+ I.044635=0o
5.619482-++-0.307813+-0.360771— 0.3 18383-+-0.765504—o
3.939279 — 2.230876 0.456194—1.682773—=0
5.708964—4.501 701+ 2.437035—o
4.874328—2.224427=0
The solution of these equations gave,
= + 0.581967
—= — 0,060045
5 =e 0.182641
v = + 0.761030
~—= + 0.591200
Whence were obtained :
Ar = + 2%.917 a 17,549
AQ = — 3 .789 ==10) 452
Az = —TI .042 +0 .220
Ad = +2 .963 a= O07 .216
AM, = —o .289 +0 .987
Ap = +0 .000480 +0 .oo4I
The remaining errors are :
1)
1
bo
POOR
TaBLeE XII.
OBSERVATION 722nus COMPUTATION.
Date. cos J Aa | Wt. Ad | We.
1889 July 28.5 -| +2.44 | 24 | —o.92 20
Aug. 30.5 | +038 | 64 | —o.99 45
Sept. 18.5 =-0.26 | 25 —-0.46 20
Sept. 30.5 | —0.58 | 24 | =0162" eee
Octiae 615 —o.I0o | 20 | —o.72 | 16
NOVA A Siena Only 39 | —0.51 25
IDS, a | |S 7/5) | 4o —o0.15 28
1890 Jan. 30.5 —o.02 | 31 —o.78 | 30
Mar. 13.5 +1.66 5 —1.04 5
Deen aes SeUas{o) | 5 +2.49 | 5
1896 July 13.5 opi es = O.51 || ako
Aug. 2.5 —o.80 8 —0.45 9
Aug. 14.5 —I1.12 7 +0.44 8
Sept. 15 —0.72 || Io +2.12 8
Sept. 9.5 —0.72 10 2.58 7
Oct es5 —I.01 14 qpagye ||
INO 25 +0.04 | I2 +2.32 | 9
Ween 2s5 = GAS al) OL |, sea Beale
Dec. 28.5 Os, || 12) |), 2.26 13
1897 Jan. 23.5 -——0.I4 | 2 +0.95 | I
Feb. 4.5 —T127 | I | =ol8ae 5 1a
Feb. 24.5 —o.63 | I | +0.40 I
1903 Aug. 22.5 | —o.72 | 4 | +1.08 4
Oct 22 5eilen—— 327, 4 | +3.55 4
25. The corrected elements represent the observations con-
siderably better than Bauschinger’s. The residuals, however,
still show the systematic character which was mentioned in 7.
The differences in right ascension are all small and the signs
are irregular, but the differences in declination are larger and
the signs of the terms show a systematic arrangement. With
the exception of the last normal all the differences in declina-
tion of the first appearance are negative, while in the second ap-
pearance, with the exception of the second, they are all posi- -
tive. The large difference in declination, + 2/’.49, obtained for
December 21, 1890, is completely accounted for by the fact that
the normal place rests on but five discordant observations, one of
which differs by more than 10” from the mean of the other four.
Taking the mean by weights of the differences, both in «
and 0, for each appearance I have,
COMET OF 1889-1896-1903 253
Cos 6 Aa Wt. Ao Wt.
Ist appearance, +- 08,016 277 0/758 220
2nd appearance, — 0.033 104 +1 .66 95
3rd appearance, —-0O .133 8 +2 .32 8
These differences in declination would indicate that the point
of the comet, which was used in measuring its position, was a
little to the south in the first appearance and a little to the north
in the second appearance of the mean position as indicated by a
least square solution of all the observations. Apparently the
observed nucleus was a little more than 2’ farther north than, by
theory, it should have been in the second appearance. A large
portion of this discrepancy, however, can be accounted for by a
simple investigation of the observations upon which this determi-
nation rests and of the method of weighting such observations.
If the observations be compared with the corrected ephemeris
and the differences between the observed and computed places
for each separate observation formed, it will be found that the
observations of each observer are affected by a systematic
error. The observers at Denver and Cordoba invariably placed
the comet a little north of the place assigned by the observers
at Mt. Hamilton and Washington. The mean of 34 observa-
tions made with the 36-inch at Mt. Hamilton differs from the
ephemeris place by — 0.9, while the mean of 12 observations
made at Cordoba differs from the ephemeris by + 4’’.3, and the
mean of 47 observations at Denver differs by + 2’’.4. Further,
in the case of the Mt. Hamilton observations the individual dif-
ferences are somewhat equally divided as to sign, 15 being posi-
tive and Ig negative ; of the Cordoba observations, on the
other hand, 11 are positive aud only I is negative. Thus at
Cordoba the comet was always estimated as about 5’’ north and
at Denver about 3’’ north of the position assigned to it by the
observers at Mt. Hamilton.
Although the observations at Denver and Cordoba were
given much less weight than those of Mt. Hamilton, yet it is
evident that a normal place depending entirely on Denver ob-
servations would place the comet some 3’ north of a normal
place depending upon Mt. Hamilton observations solely ; and a
254 POOR
normal made up of observations from Denver and Mt. Hamilton
will place the comet at some point between these limits accord-
ing as to whether the Mt. Hamilton or Denver observations
predominate. The six normals which show large residuals in
the above solution depend toa large extent (20 to 30 per cent.)
upon Denver and Cordoba observations; the five normals
which show small residuals of different signs, do not contain a
single observation from either of these two observatories. Thus
it is safe to conclude that the large residuals are due to syste-
matic errors made by the different observers.
It would not be difficult to determine the personal equation
of each observer and to correct the individual observations for
such errors, and to reduce all the observations to a standard
system, but such a proceeding would have the effect of reducing
the residuals without changing the elements.
The large residuals of the third appearance are accounted
for by the fact that the comet was extremely difficult to observe
and the fact that the observations upon which the normal places
rest are discordant among themselves; the different observa-
tions varying several seconds.
26. Applying the above determined corrections to Elements
III, I have as my definitive elements the following :
ELEMENTs IV.
Epoch 1896 Oct. 23.5. Greenwich Mean Time.
u== 4997.97018
Lo== (O?” aI S255
— he AS) Isfay. (Sut
= sits} I 3.97 ~ 1896.0
g9= 27 59 59 -35
i=) 6 Sei) dou!
My =358 22 53 .94
Epoch 1889 Sept. 30.5 Epoch 1903 Sept. 18.5.
# = 501”.68075 = 4997.73995
ITO) 26 a OGG ZL = 350° 48’ 39%.78.)
Te een AS TE, AG. Sane
7259) lez BL OOOO Q) == "18 6 24 .18 > 1903.0
O25 5) eli ¢: == 028 To Oneon
2 (year 6 .16 1 6 BAA 62
M, OF Pel Lo) 246 M,= 349 3) 35-30
COMET OF 1889-1896-1903 255
27. In order to determine the set of elements which best
represents the motion of the comet at the time of discovery in
1889, I compared the above elements with those of Bauschinger
as determined from the first appearance. The differences, in the
sense observed mzzuus computed, for the two sets of elements are
given in the following table, for the dates of the ten normal
places used in my computations.
OBSERVED wzmus COMPUTED.
Giving the above differences the weights used in my computa-
tion, I find for the sum of the squares of the weighted residuals
pad
Poor, Bea(er
Bauschinger, 348 .9
These show that, so far as the first appearance only is con-
cerned, there is very little choice between the two sets of ele-
ments, When we consider the three appearances, however, the
elements, as above given, represent the comet’s motion far better
than those of Bauschinger. Ihave, therefore, adopted Elements
IV, and have made them the basis of my further investigations.
But in order to take account of the very slight differences be-
tween these elements and to show at a glance our knowledge
of the movements of this body, I solved the equations repre-
senting the first appearance anew and expressed the elements
in terms of an indeterminate quantity.
256 POOR
From the elimination equations derived in the solution, I
have,
t= [0.39772 ] + [9.36493"] 7
@ = [8.71081, |] + [8.00681,]
w —=[8.6100In ] + [7.98091 ] y
z= [0.4036In ] + [9.42686 ] y
x = [8.90696, | + [9.98806 ] 7
From these, by substituting the values of 4, y, z, in terms of
AA Ai eke, datind:
Au = constant + 0%.011399A4 1/,
Sl —— lee OO) OUI Ze
IN CE —— © LH OHA AWIUA
XO) a == (6) .017366A J/,
MSS — 3 .059290A 1/,
Now put,
AM, = constant + 1”.0 v
where » is any number, positive, negative or fractional. Sub-
stituting the above value of JJ/, in the expressions for the cor-
rections to the elements, I have for that portion of the correc-
tions which depend upon », the following :
Au =-+ o”%.0114v
Ag ==—TI .3961v
At =—oO .II4o0v
AQ = —o .o174v
AG ==—-3 .0593”
Applying these corrections to Elements IV, as given in 26,
they take the indeterminate and definitive form :
ELEMENTS V,
Epoch 1889 Sept. 30.5. Greenwich Mean Time.
— 501”.68075 + 0” .o114v
L = 19:36! 27766 — 2 70767
T= I 35 8 .19—3 .0767v
Q=17 59 I .21—o .o174v p 1890.0
9=28 5 12 .37—I1 .3961»
t= 6 4 6 16--O .II40v
M,—= © ft 19).46-- 1 ov
COMET OF 1889-1896-1903 257
If » should equal + 4 the above elements would become al-
most identical with those determined by Bauschinger from the
first appearance only and given by him in ‘ Untersuchungen
uber den periodischen Kometen 1889 V”’ (Brooks), 1 Theil.
A value of » equal to + 0.1 will reduce Elements V to values
nearly the same as those given by Bauschinger as the definitive
elements from the first two appearances.
In order to determine the limits within which yv may vary I
had recourse to the equations of condition which represent the
three appearances and which are given in 24. In these I sub-
stituted various values of the corrections to the elements corre-
sponding to different assumed values of », and tabulated the
resulting residuals. For »v equal to + 0.1 the residuals, both
in right ascension and declination, become far larger in the later
appearances than the accuracy of modern observations warrants.
Further, beyond these limits the residuals become systematic,
Hence I conclude that the extreme possible limits of v are
+ 0.1; the probable limits are very much smaller than this.
258 POOR
PARA Te
Tue ACTION OF JUPITER UPON THE Comet Durine 1886.
28. ELemMeEntTs V, as givenin Part I, and which represent the
motion of the comet when first discovered, were made the basis
of all investigations. These elements were first carried back by
means of the perturbations during the interval 1889 and 1886,
to October 26.5, r886, on which date the comet emerged from
Jupiter’s “sphere of activity.’’ During the preceding months,
whilst the comet was traversing the ‘sphere of activity,’ Jupiter
was considered as central and the sun as disturbing body, and
during this time the comet was found to be travelling about
Jupiter in a hyperbolic orbit. On March 24, 1886, the comet
was so far from Jupiter that it became necessary to transfer the
center of motion back again to the sun. For some time before
this date, however, the perturbations of Jupiter were very large
and were carefully computed.
In this manner were derived the elements, which best repre-
sent the motion of the comet in 1883 previous to its close ap-
proach to Jupiter in 1886.
29. Perturbations between 1889 and 1886. — With ELEMENTS
V, which are osculating for 1889, September 30.5, were com-
puted the perturbations from that date to 1886, October 26.5.
The perturbations by Jupiter during this period had previously
been computed, but with elements which differed slightly from
those adopted in this work. These old perturbations were inte-
srated for the date of each new computation and the results ap-
plied to the adopted elements. With the elements thus derived for
any given date the perturbations were recomputed, and when the
action of Jupiter became very large, these perturbations were
again integrated, applied, and the computations made anew.
The final results were carefully checked by differencing and by
independent computations.
r
COMET OF 1889-1896-1903 259
During this interval the perturbations by the following
planets were considered: Venus, the Earth, Mars, Jupiter and
Saturn. The masses adopted for each are those as given in
Part I, which differ slightly from those used in former investiga-
tions,’ where the masses as given by Oppolzer were used. The
perturbations due to Venus, the Earth, Mars and Saturn, were
computed from 1889, September 30.5, to 1887, March 25.5.
Between March 1887, and October 1886, the perturbations of
Jupiter alone were taken into account. _
From September 1889 to March 1887, a uniform interval of
twenty days was used in the computations. At this latter date
the perturbations of Jupiter became so large that it was neces-
sary to reduce the interval to ten days. This interval was con-
tinued to December 25.5, 1886, when it again became necessary
to reduce the interval, and from this date to October 26.5,
1886, a four day period was accordingly used.
The results, thus obtained, apply of course only to the mean
values of the elements ; that is, to that set of elements obtained
by putting » =o. The limits between which » may vary are
so small, however, that the perturbations computed with a set of
elements corresponding to an extreme value of » would not differ
appreciably from those foundas above. To be rigorously accu-
rate the perturbations should be recomputed for different values
of v, at least for the interval between March 1887 and October
1886. This would entail considerable labor for the mere sake
of a degree of accuracy of no practical value. Hence I have
applied the perturbations, as found above, directly to ELEMENTS
V, without regard to any changes that might be introduced by
the different values that » may attain.
The computations were carried out as explained in Part I.
and the results are contained in the following tables, which give
the integrated values of the perturbations of the different ele-
ments for every forty days, until March 1887, before which
date the table contains the integrated results for every date of
computation.
1 <«¢ Researches upon Comet V, 1889,”’ Astro. Jour., No. 302.
260 POOR
TaBLe XIII.
PERTURBATIONS.
Ar
Date. Venus. SEAS Mars. Jupiter. | Saturn.
1887, Mch. 25.5| 0.565 — 7.003 —0.065 | +1340.626| 27.043
May 4.5| —1.433 | — 8.429 +0.006 | + 922.556) + 25.823
June 13.5| —4.749 | — 8.553 +0.032 |-+ 572.168; +24.552
July 23.5} —5.558 — 7.245 +o,o1o | + 281.583| +23.232 F
Sept. 1.5| —2.762 — 5.046 —o.049 |+ 44.161) +21.869
Oct. 11.5} -+0.702 — 2.762 —o.140 |— 144.906| -+20.467
Nov. 20.5| -+0.852 — 1.496 —0.253 | — 288.792|} +19.032
Dec. 30.5| —2.870 — 2.143 —0.376 |— 390.465) -+17.568
1888, Feb. 8.5) —6.538 — 4.376 —0.504 |— 454.756 +16.081
Mch. 19.5 | —6.091 — 7.303 —o.630 |— 485.814) +14.581
Apr. 28.5) —<1.951 — 9.745 -—0.744 — 488.606 | +13.075
June 7.5} +1.587 —J0.652 —o0.836 | — 467.088} +11.566
July 17.5| -+0.607 — 9.732 —0.900 |— 427.074| -+10.073
Aug. 26.5 --—4.026 — 7.298 —0.922 | — 375.448| + 8.619
Oct. 5.5| —7-445 — 4.239 | —o0.837 |— 316.102| +- 7.216
Nov. 14.5 | —6.279 — 1.766 —o.687 | — 254.707; + 5.886
Dec. 24.5; —1.869 — 0.886 —0.532 |— 195.802) + 4.651
1889, Feb. 2.5) -+1.339 — 2.282 | —0.359 — 142.800, + 3.538
Mch. 14.5| +0.253 = 117 —o.203 |— 98.109} + 2.573
Apr. 23.5| —3.546 — 1.715 —o.086 |— 62.357) + 1.776
June 2.5} —5.740 — 3.380 —o.01I0 |— 36.262) + 1.152
July 12.5| —4.296 | — 3.229 -+-o0.028 |— 18.721; + 0.684
Aug: 21.5) 112561) e206 91027 |) 7.57511e 1 Oaes
Sept. 30.5 0.000 | 0,000 0,000 0.000 | 0.000
PERTURBATIONS.
AQ
Date. Jenus, | Earth. Mars. | Jupiter. Saturn.
1887, Mch.
May
June
July
Sept.
Oct.
Nov.
Dec. 3
38, Feb.
Mch.
Apr.
June
July
Aug.
Oct.
Novy.
Dec.
Feb.
Mch.
Apr.
June
July
Aug.
Sept.
“ “ “ “
+0.092 —o.082 | +4503.224| +4.552
+0.108 —o.085 | +4172.686| -+4.495
+ 0.238 —0.090 | +3796.361| +4.412
+0.471 | —0.099 | +3399.927| +4.306
= O.7 29 —o.IIO | -+2999.022| +4.174
+0.835 —o.122 | +2604.979| +4.020
+0.693 —o.134 | +2225.526| +3.842
+o0.288 | —o.143 | +1868.657| +3.641
—0.214 | —0.149 | +1540.309| +3.419
—-0.552 | —O.I5I 11242. 804} +3.182
—0.538 — OA 1 980.235 | +2.929
—o.164 —0.137. | + 754.130] -+2.661
+-0.430 —o0.123 |+ 564.352} +2.382
--0.999 —o,Io4 |-+ 409.241} +2.096
+-1.273 —0,069 286.142 | -+1.807
++ 1.092 —0,004 191.736! +1.518
+0.513 +0.056 |+ 121.928) +1.237
—0.173 +0.074 |+ 72.955| -+0.968
—0o.608 +0.064 | - 40.392| -++0.719
—o.645 | +0.048 19.783 | +0.495
—0.398 +0.032 8.138 | 0.305
—O.IIT + 0.017 2.461 | +0.159
+0.004 | -+0.006 0.360 | -+0.058
0,000 | 0,000 0.000 0.000
NO
ea ae
nin in inn cn in
On
[e)
on
‘0
non
iS)
Ne
8.5
7-5
7-9
6.5
5-5
4.5
4.5
2.5
4.5 |
3-5
2.5
2:5) |
1.5 |
0.5
COMET OF 1889-1896-1903 261
PERTURBATIONS.
Date. Venus. Jupiter. Saturn.
1887, Mch.
May
June
July
Sept.
Oct.
Nov.
Dec.
1888, Feb.
Mch,
Apr.
June
July
Aug.
Oct.
Novy.
Dec.
1889,' Feb.
Mch.
Apr.
June
July
Aug.
Sept.
—0.313 |-+1590.890 -—+0.618
—0.476 +1231.222) +0.556
—0.475 | | + 955-443, +0.496
—0.325 | + 740.375 | +0.438
—0,.200 |-+ 570.055| 0.382
—0.254 434.374 | 0.329
—-0.239 | 325.992| +0.278
— 0.152 |= 1 240.142| -+0.231
—0.099 172.957| 0.186
+0.021 | | -+ 120.895) -+0.145
+0.068 ; i 81.594; -+0.106
+-0.006 52.647 -+0.072
—0,081 + 32.054| -0.042
—0.098 - 17.986; -}+0.016°
—0.050 | 8.872 —o0.006
—0,.004 iis S392 0.025
~-0,002 | | 0.452. —0,035
-—0.021 1.003, —-0.042
—o,.028 1.278 | —0.043
—0.033 | | : 1.063 | —0.040
—0.054 | 0.669, —0.034
—0.075 - 0.302 | —0.024
—0.056 | 0.068 —o,.o12
0.000 | | 0.000 0.000
iS)
=
=
wn
NO
DOOM HOG AA
nnnnnnananannintianananannnnininin
NO ee
4
NOH Now nN
NNeHLnNHKHUN DANY WO
NO Re
I
is>)
°
PERTURBATIONS.
Ag
Date. | Wenus. Earth. Mars. Jupiter.
| 1887, Mch. 25. +0.438 —-4,.261 +0.293 | +4375.975
May 4. —1.689 —3.938 +0.270 | +3434.259
June 13. ——2.570 —2.897 +-0.224 | +2718.908
July : —1.333 —1.610 +0.166 | +2165.647
Sept. 1. +0.538 —o.601 +0.108 | +1730.339
Oct. 5 | —-1.035 —0.270 +0.054 | +1384.950
Nov. 20. —0.260 —0.741 +0.01I | +1109.352
Dec. 30. —1.764 —1.735 —0.019 889.282
1888, Feb. 8. —1.761 —2.786 —0.035 1 713.917
Mch. Io. —0.414 —3.316 —0.031 E 573-271
Apr. 28.5} -+0.658 —3.079 —0,.007 | -+ 460.900
june 7, = OR itey/ —2.335 +0.033 | + 370.751
July 17.5| —o.870 —I1.477 0.087 - 297.989
Aug. 26.5; —1.319 —o.g06 | +0.149 | + 238.568
Oct. 2 —o.410 —o.890 -+-0.238 1 189.393
Nov. I4. +0.748 —-I.44I +0.31I {- 748.064
| WEG 2A: +0.716 —2.264 +0.326 | -+- 112.745
11889, Feb. 2. —0.552 —2.759 -+0.314 82.782
Mch. 14. —I1.513 — 3.423 +0.277 | 5 eis ity)
Apr. 23. —0.747 —3.388 +0,224 + 36.345
June 2.5; -+1.276 —2.126 +0.166 |+ 19.856
uly 12) +2.749 —0.972 -++-o0.108 §.278
Aug. 21. +-2.228 —0.240 =-0:050: => 1.748
Sept. 30. 0,000 0.000 0.000 0.000 ,
262 POOR
PERTURBATIONS.
Au
Date. Venus. Earth. Mars. Jupiter. Saturn.
‘i “ “ “ “
1887, Mch. 25.5 | -+0.0064 -++0,0009 | —0O.0007 +2.9885 | +0.0386
May 4.5 -+0.0012 —0,0006 —0,0006 +1.2925 | +0.0365
June 13.5 —0.0043 +-0,0004 —0.0006 +-0.0637 | +0.0343
July 23.5 | —0.0045 +-0.0033 —0.0007 —o.8263 -+0.0320
Sept. 1.5) -+0.0010 -++0,.0075 —o.0008 | —1.4608 | +0.0296
Oct. 11.5 -+0.0069 | +0.0113 | —o.ooIo | —1.8954 | +0,0272
Nov. 20.5 | -+0.0070 +0.0133 —0.0012 —2.1683 | +0.0247
Dec. 30.2) -+-0.0c06 +0.0124 —0.0014 —2.3079 | +0.0222
1888, Feb. 8.5 —0o.0061 +o0,0088 —0.0016 —2.3396 -+0.0196
Mch. 19.5 | —0.0064 | +0.0037 —0.0019 —2.2811 | +0.0170
Apr. 28.5! -++-0.0004 | —0.0012 —0,.002I —2.1551 | +0,0144
June 7.5) +0.0078 —0,0041 —0.0024 —1.9773 | +0.0118
July 17.5) +0.0082 | —o,0040 | —0,0026 | —1.7610 | + 0.0092
Aug. 26.5 -+0.0001 --0,0006 —0.0028 —1I.5237 | +-0.0066
Oct. 5.5 | —0.0089 +-0.0053 —o.0028 | —1.2758 | + 0.0042
Nov. 14.5 | —0.0104 0.0116 —0,0028 --1.0306 | +0,0019
Dec. 24.5 | —0.0024 +-0,.0162 —0.0026 —0.7979 | —0.0002
1889, Feb. 2.5| -+:0.0082 0.0158 —0.0022 —o.5892 | —0.0020
Mch.14.5| -+o0.0109 | +0.0192 | —o.0018 | —o.4068 | —-0.0034
Apr. 23.5 | -+0.0020 +0.0183 —0,0014 —0.2542 | —0.0042
Ine 255) 5 —-C Oni: +-0.0109 —0O,0010 = OLA ie OLOONTE
July 12.5, —o.0186 +-0,0044 —0,.0006 —0.0566 | —0.0037
Aug. 21.5'| —0.0138 --0,0010 —0.0003 —0.0120 | —0.0022
Sept. 30.5 0. 000 0.0000 0,0000 0.0000 0.0000
PERTURBATIONS.
(AZ),
Sa TE LE
Date. Venus. Earth. Mars. Jupiter. Saturn.
1887, Mch. 25.5 6.880 —5.223 —o.548 | +5869.985 | —0.053
May 4.5) —7.802 —3,.118 —o.667 | +4921.385 —+0.673
June 13-5\|. 5.575 i254. ==0:773 )=|-A928-439 |) “4 eaas
July 23:5)» —=2:540 —0.318 —o.854 | +3453-533| —+1.926
Sept. 1.5, —1.680 —0.559 —0.907 | +2871.316) +2.448
Oct. 11.5} —3.663 —1.852 —0.934 | +2365.755, +2.898
Nov. 20.5| —6.387 —3.699 | —0.938 | -+1925.235| +-3.274
Dec. 30.5 | —7.027 —5.324 —o.918 | +1542.754) +3.573
1888, Feb. 8.5 —4.955 —6.257 -—0.877. | +1214.364) +3.794
Mch. 19.5; —2.296 —6.031 | —o.812 | + 933.816; +3.937
Apr. 28.5] —1.516 —4.662 —o.726 |+ 698.566) + 3.999
June 7.5| —3.145 | —2.884 —o.619 |-+ 506.070! +3.978
July 17.5| —5.461 — 1.263 —o.497 | + 351.938) +3.880
Aug. 26.5| —6.153 —0.240 —o.376 | + 233.093} +3.708
Oct. 5.5| —4.602 —0.035 —o.202 |+ 143.122} +3.464
Nov. 14.5, —2.306 —0:635 —o,048 |+ 78.691} +3.158
Dec. 24.5| —1.2I0 —-1.774 +o,016 |+ 34.907] +2.794
1889, Feb. 2.5 -—2.026 —3.064 +0058 |+ 7.912) +2.382
Mch. 14.5) —3.831 —3.626 +0.077 |— 6.502] -+1.937
Apr. 23.5 | —4.940 —3.605 +0.077 |— 12.430| -+1.477
June 2.5). —4.355 —3.374 +0,066 |— 12.608} -+1.030
July 12.5) —2.430 —2.454 +0.050 |— 9.452) -+0.619
Aug. 21.5; —0o.576 —o.8g1 +0.026 |— 4.801| -+0.269
Sept. 30.5 0,000 0.000 0.000 0.000 | 0.000
263
COMET OF 1889-1896-1903
PERTURBATIONS.
(AL),
Date. Venus. Earth. Mars. Jupiter. Saturn.
1887, Mch. 25.5 -+1.2346 —6.1741 +1.4287 et 902.8671 —11,6023
May 4.5 +1.3981 —6.1760 | +1.4034 | + 986.6405 | —I0.1000
June 13.5| +1.3233 | —6.1880 | +1.3789 -L 1012. 4483 | — 8.6848
July 23.5; +1.1232 —6.1198 +1.3525 | + 996.2306 — 7.3595
Sept. 1.5) +1.0414 | —5.9051 +1.3218 |-+ 949.7444 | — 6.1271
Oct. 11.5| -+-1.2104 | —5.5257 +17.2851 | + 882.0238 | — 4.9902
Nov. 20.5 | -+1.5147 —5.0242 +13.2410 | + 800.2597 | — 3.9513
Dec. 30.5. +1.6829 —4.4992 +-1.1888 | + 710.3389 | — 3.0125
1888, Feb. 8.5 +1.5609 —4.0701 +1.1277 |-+ 617.0640 | — 2.1757
Mch. 19.5 | +1.2840 —3.8162 +1.0573 | + 524.3540] — 1.4425
Apr. 28.5 -+1.1481 -=-3.7720 +0.9771 | + 435.4884 | — 0.8138
June 7.5| +1.3242 —3.8883 +0.8873 | + 352.6614 |— 0.2900
July 17.5 +1.6767 —4.0616 +o0.7882 | + 277.7935 | + 0.1289
Aug. 26.5 | +1.8632 —4.1623 +0.6806 |-+ 212.0503} + 0.4451
Och 95:5] + 1.6726) |) 420724 +0.5674 | -+ 156.0506) + 0.6614
Nov. 14.5 | +13.2516 | —-3.7329 +0.4536 | + 109.9511 | + 0.7826
Dec. 24.5 +0.9698 —3.1678 +0.3457 | + 73.4285|-+ 0.8154
1889, Feb. 2.5 | +-1.0963 — 2.5016 +0.2492 |+ 45.7991 | + 0.7701
Mch. 14.5| +1.5200 | —1.8547 +o0.1681 |+ 25.9489|-+ 0.6611
Apr. 23.5 + 1.8111 —T,0091 +0.1037 |+ 12.8498|-+ 0.5074
June 2.5) +1.6167 —0.4124 +o.0560 |+ 5.1461 | + 0.3331
July 12.5) +0.9842 —o.1126 +0.0239 |+ 1.3946) + 0.1682
Aug. 21.5| +0.2926 | —0o.0164 +0,0057 |+ 0.1387) + 0.0464
Sept. 30.5 00,0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000
JUPITER.
Ar AQ
Az
Date.
4 1217.886
+1122.561
+1029. 458
=r: ee 065
== 850. 846
+ 764.643
+ 680.572
598.385
—779.358
—673-377
—578.354
—493.2 Io
—416.797
— 348.652
—288.063
— 234.458
42012. 373
-_1$18.810
+ 1637.588
+1467.368
| +1306.563
+1154.859
+ Io1l. 364
+ 875.547
+4862.222
+-4378.267
+3923.140
+-3493-544
+-3088.515
+2705.042
+2341.825
ai 2561. 397
7 22S oa
1 2003.795
1743-549
164. 3414
|
—IIo. ee
DN RAH
HO OO OW HSI WD
~-1494.445
1255. 665
1026.352
805.555
593-929
388.524
191.083
0,000
746.746
624.270
597-527
396.351
290.483
189.381
92.661
0,000
—187.257
—145.894
—T1I0.132
79.458
53-324
31.581
13.902
0.000 |
517.984
439.092
T ~- 1997-145
as 361.675
a
+ 1669. 302
+1357.396
--1060.352
+ 776.953
+ 506.408
+ 247.684
0,000
---3660.060
+3085.056
-+-2566.675
+ 2096.568
+1668.352
+1276.832
+ 917.807
+ 587.256
+. 282.079
0.000
286.189 | —
212.413
+ 140,212
+ 69.458
0.000
5
9.
13
17
OE
25
5
‘5
a)
5
5
5
Ee)
ee)
5
5
Se)
2
ie)
re)
re)
re)
5
5
5
>
5
5
5
5
re)
5
to
feo
+1263.083
+ 1094.905
+ 935-156
+ 782.732
+ 637.070 |
- 497-975
+305.283
+ 324.741
-+-325.656
310.882
282.757 |
+243.282 | 4
365.076 | +193.953 | 4
+ 238.065 | +136.046 | 4
+ 116.497| + 71.028 | 4
0.000 | 0.000 |
— 267.9356
—204.2753
—I5I1.1040
—107.3791
— 72.2018
44.7870
+3119.291
-+ 2669.067
—1- 2253-033
+-1866.634
+ Lee 232
+1168. 553
851.122
551.402
267.960
0.000
1377-997
+-1162.542
+ 968.208
791.755
630.784 |
483.369
347.893
222.826
107.120
0.000
4.8288
3-9312
3.1173
2.3773
1.7024
1.0852
0.5197
0.0000
NO Ke Nw
RANG Gi G2
Ne
264 POOR
From the above tables I find directiy the total changes in
the elements during the interval 1889, Sept. 30.5, to 1886,
Oct. 26.5, as follows :
Au = -+ 20”.41570
At = 1A ea.
NO ele eS
Ag=+ 3 4335 .31
Nias Ei, Be Th ashe
AL,=+3 33 54 -38
ING ===) 1 27) oe,
In applying JZ, and 4Z,,, as above given, it must be noted
that proper values of 4 must be used for the intervals between
1889, March and 1887, March; 1887, March and 1886,
December ; and 1886, December and 1886, October.
Applying these perturbations to Elements V, and at the
same time reducing them to the mean equator and equinox of
1886.0, I have for osculating elements, which represent the
motion of the comet, at the moment it left Jupiter’s ‘‘ sphere
of activity’:
Epoch, 1886, Oct. 26.5, Greenwich M. T.
pe = 522”.09645 + O”%.0114”
L, = 215°51/26”.92 — 14 .2747v
T= 2 3549 .24— 3 .0767”
Q—= 19 259 .79— O .0174” 41886.0
$= 31 48 47 .68— I .3961v
V== 727,15) 70— Ol LAD,
My = 213 15 37 .68 —11 .1980v
30. Transformation to Jupiter as Center of Motion. — The
general method used, which was first proposed by D’Alembert,
consists in supposing the planet to have a “ sphere of activity,”’
within which the relative motion of the comet is affected only
by the planet’s attraction and beyond which the absolute motion
of the comet about the sun is performed as if the sun alone
acted upon it. The radius of the sphere depends upon the
mass of the planet and its distance from the sun. This was the
simple method afterwards used by LaPlace and again by Le-
Verrier. But while beautiful and simple, it neglects entirely
the effect of the sun as disturbing body whilst the comet is
COMET OF 1889-1896-1903 265
traversing its relative orbit about the planet. It will become
more effective, if we merely use the idea of the “sphere”’ as
defining approximately the point, at which we may conveniently
transpose the sun and the planet, as disturbing and central
bodies ; and after the transformation has been made, we may
treat the sun and the comet as bodies revolving about the
planet as central body; the sun acting as a disturbing body
upon the comet. The perturbations of the comet by the sun
may be computed in a manner entirely similar to the usual
methods. The exact point in the comet’s orbit, at which the
transformation is made, is of no great importance, provided the
perturbations be carefully computed both before and after ; and
this fact furnishes us with the desired, and an absolute, control.
As the comet approaches Jupiter in its orbit about the sun,
compute carefully the planetary perturbations, thus deriving
the osculating elliptic elements of the comet for two dates, ¢
and Zz’, one of which, ¢, is that upon which the comet enters the
so called ‘‘ sphere,” the other, ¢’, being ten days or two weeks
later, or after the comet is well within the sphere. From the
osculating elements of date ¢ compute the heliocentric coordi-
nates and their derivatives for that date, thence find the coor-
dinates and velocities relative to Jupiter, and thence by the
transformation-formulas the osculating hyperbola about Jupiter ;
with these hyperbolic elements compute the solar perturbations
for the interval #’— ¢, apply them and thus derive the oscu-
lating hyperbola for the date #’. With these elements we may
readily compute the coordinates, x’, y’, 2’, of the comet referred
to Jupiter for the date 7’.
Then with the osculating elliptic elements of the comet about
the sun, as already derived for the date, 7’, we compute first
the heliocentric coordinates of the comet and thence derive
the coordinates, 2’’, y’’, 2’’, of the comet referred to Jupiter for
the date 7. If all formulas and computations are correct, we
shall have absolutely,
Ce — al eae 3/= 2!
and a perfect control is secured.
266 POOR
The most convenient point to make the transformation to
Jupiter as center of motion is undoubtedly that given by
LaPlace’s idea of the ‘‘sphere of activity.’”’ The radius of this
sphere, as given by LaPlace’ is
ar
p=
where g is the radius of the sphere,
r is the radius vector of the comet,
m’' is the mass of the planet.
Using Newcomb’s value of the mass of Jupiter, I find
log © — 8.73176
and the date which most nearly satisfies this condition is Octo-
ber 26.5, 1886, at which time I find
log f= 8.72954
31. From the osculating elements of the comet for October
26.5, as given in § 29, were derived by the usual formulas of
elliptic motion the heliocentric rectangular coordinates and their
derivatives with respect to the time. The ecliptic of 1886.0 was -
taken as fundamental plane; the positive direction of the axis
of + being directed toward the Vernal Equinox. Thus were
found,
lope — O87 27 DGigz
log y=0.1394713 2
log z—8.6977660
ax
log a= 7.3948617
log 2 — 7.6680856 2
log = 6.8335871
a Pac 27 |
The corresponding coordinates and velocities for Jupiter were
found as follows. The heliocentric position of Jupiter in 1886,
' Mécanique Céleste, Livre IV.
COMET OF 1889-1896-1903 267
October 26.5, was taken from the British Nautical Almanac, the
latitude and longitude being reduced to the mean equinox of
1886.0. To find the derivatives of the quantities I took from the
Almanac a series of complete positions of the planet at four-day
intervals, reducing each to the same mean equinox. The lon-
gitudes, for example, were tabulated and the differences found
to the fifth order, and from these differences, by means of the
formulas for interpolation, was found the value the first differ-
ence should have at the required date. Dividing this by four,
was found very accurately the daily rate of change of the lon-
gitude, which is the derivative required. The necessary data for
Jupiter ar thus:
N— NG Oe Oot lG
sss = it Ty Hoss
log r= 0.7368529
AX 07 4/30 749
AB=— 0%.88125
Alog x =— 0.0000025525
From these the rectangular coordinates and their derivatives
were easily computed, and subtracting these results from the
corresponding quantities for the comet, as given above, I find
for the coordinates and their derivatives of the comet relative to
Jupiter,
log « = 8.5690896
log y = 9.4382768
log z = 8.8665992 x
ax
log == 6.4384763
log = = 7.3387872
log = = 6.8180026 x
32. The elements of the orbit of the comet about Jupiter may
be found from the above coordinates and velocities by means of
the integrals derived from the equations of motion of one body
around another. These integrals are given by LaPlace’ in the
following form:
1 Mécanique Céleste, Livre II.
S68 POOR
* xdy — yale
Tae at
Gas —— ca
oa at
__ yas — 2dy
at
; (G4 ; C//
he dy® -- d2? ydydz | 2dzdx
OT ae | ro ae | at? ate
ke. dx®+ d2 xdxdy _ 2dzdy
el oe ee EE =
seme a | 2 dt | ae? at
where C, C’, C”, f, f’, and a are the arbitrary constants of inte-
gration. The ordinary elements of an orbit are arbitrary con-
stants, and are, consequently functions of the above constants,
being given by the following formulas :
Y/
tan Q = cr
tan z= ane
C
7
tani Te
Sf
w= C7407? + C,
Ae
fee ag aR OF 2
where / is the longitude of the projection of the perihelion on
the fundamental plane.
In the special problem under consideration, #’, in the above
formulas, becomes the acceleration at unit distance due to the
force exerted by the mass of Jupiter. Using Newcomb’s de-
termination of the mass of Jupiter, I have
losysA2i—— BTA SLOT 72.
From the above formulas were derived the values for the three
constants of area, C, C’, C’’, and for the semi-axis major of the
comet’s orbit about Jupiter, namely,
log C =4.7477148
log C’ = 4.6228470 2
log C” == 5.2999551 2
log a = 8.9332651 72.
and consequently the relative orbit was hyperbolic.
COMET OF 1889-1895-1903 269
From these were derived the complete hyperbolic elements,
which represent the osculating hyperbola in which the comet
was moving about Jupiter on 1886, October 26.5.
These elements are as follows:
Epoch, 1886, October 26.5.
ie == 208021728. 020-1 27 200)
Q—=258 7 20. 50— 12. 294”
r= 74 39 23. 47— 97. 957”
2514 7. 75 + 258. g96v
a= — 0.0857561 + 0.0000098 v
c= 1.0093523 + 0.0001826v
N= + 0.9046965 + 0.00090941
z
@
and the time of peri-jovian passage, neglecting the effect of
solar perturbations, is
1886, July 20.0813 — 0.0819 v
The values of the coefficients of »y in the hyperbola about
Jupiter were found in the following manner. In the elliptic ele-
ments for October 26.5, » was given a value of +, 10 and from
the resulting elements were derived the corresponding hyper-
bolic elements in a manner entirely similar to that explained
above. The differences between the elements thus found and
the corresponding elements for y = 0 were divided by 10 and
the results of this division are the coefficients of » as given
above.
The entire computation of these elements was checked by
means of the control explained in $30. In my work, the date
chosen to make the transformation to Jupiter as the center of
motion was, as has already been given, 1886 October, 26.5 ;
the interval, 7’ — 7, was taken as sixteen days, thus making the
check-date October 10.5. A longer check-interval cannot well
be used, for the perturbations of the elliptic elements become
more and more difficult of computation as we advance nearer
and nearer to Jupiter. I first applied to the hyperbolic elements
for October 26.5 that correspond to » equal to zero, the solar
perturbations for sixteen days; thus deriving the osculating
hyperbolic elements for October 10.5. From these I then found
270 POOR
the rectangular coordinates, 2’, y’, 2’, of the comet referred to
Jupiter. Then to the elliptic elements of October 26.5 I ap-
plied the perturbations due to Jupiter for the same interval, and
thus found the osculating elliptic elements of the comet about _
the sun for October 10.5. From these I then computed the
heliocentric codrdinates of the comet and thence the rectangu-
pallid
lar coordinates, 2’, y’’, 2'’, of the comet referred to Jupiter
Comparing the two sets of results thus found, I have as follows :
x” —x/ = + 0.000026
y Y — yf == — 0.000042
z// —2/ — + 0, 000061
These differences are all considerably less than a tenth of one
per cent. of the corresponding quantities, that in z being rela-
tively by far the largest. Such errors may well arise from the
unavoidable use of mathematical tables, and are small enough
to establish the substantial accuracy of both methods and
computations.
33. Solar Perturbations, October to March, 1886. — During
the time that the comet was traversing the relative orbit about
Jupiter, the sun acted as a disturbing body and this action had
to be taken accountof. In order to do this I computed the
solar perturbations for the entire interval between October and
March, using an eight-day period. The method used in this
work was that of the variation of constants, the necessary
formulas being derived from the equations of hyperbolic mo-
tion as given by Watson. The quantities of which the per-
turbations were found are as follows: the four elements, 7, 2,
z, and ¢ and the two auxiliaries, y and JV (Watson’s notation).
In this form I found the perturbations very easy of computa-
tion, and the method, on the whole, decidedly preferable to that
of the variation of coordinates, which I had used in a former
discussion of the same problem. The great trouble with this
latter method is that the indirect terms of the differential coef-
ficients, owing to the very small value of 7, become large and
difficult to approximate. This necessitates the integration of
COMET OF 1889-1896-1903 271
the perturbations, their application, and the derivation of new
osculating elements at several epochs during the interval under
discussion.
The differential variations of the quantities with respect to the
time, with the exception of JV, were put in the ordinary standard
form:
o (w#:R)R+(w:S)S+ (mn: W)W
while that of V was put into the form :
aN dv de
j 2 (Ne Ne
ni at ( ee ye “ot lc aya dt :
in which formulas, RX, S and IV are the component disturbing
forces and the quantities (z: A), etc., are the differential coeffi-
cients of the elements. From the numerical values of the above
variations, as computed for equidistant intervals of time, the
total change in the elements from one period to another, may
be found by simple mechanical quadrature.
The component disturbing forces, R, S and W were com-
puted by the usual formulas, as given in Oppolzer, but were
expressed in radians and in units of the sixth decimal place.
The formulas for the differential coefficients of the elements
are as follows, where w is the number of days interval between
computations and the quantities in brackets are logarithms :
(¢: W) =r cos u [9.31442]
ry sin 2
(2: W) =~ [9.31442]
sin 2
(7: R) = —2°"* [9.31442]
sin ¥
(w:S) = (p+7) —* [9.31442]
(7:W) =r sin z tan 42 [9.31442]
(v: R) = 3vawe sin v
(v: S) = 3vaw is
=
(OSA) =)
bo
~J
bo
POOR
+
cos /,
(e: S) =pcosu+
(V:v) = eee
3va sin v
(NV: e) =—A sin p cos v.
In these formulas, a, the semi-axis major is always taken as
positive and ¢, v, WV, and F are auxiliary quantities in the
hyperbola, analogous to the quantities, g, 4, 17, and Z, in the
ellipse, and are given by the equations,
I
cosy =-,
LR
—— Soa)
az
N=v(t— 7%)
eA tan # = V- log tan (45° + 1/7)
where 4 is the modulus of common logarithms.
The perturbation of JV is given in the form
AN=(AN),+ (AN),
where (4/V), is derived directly by mechanical quadrature from
the above formula, and
= ; Vv /
(AA wees dt?,
this being derived by double integration from the variation of v
as computed above.
The integrated perturbations, as thus computed, are given in
the following table ; in which the changes in ¢, v, and JV are ex-
pressed in units of the sixth decimal place. -
Date.
COMET OF 1889-1896-1903
Ad
Tapre. XIV.
SOLAR PERTURBATIONS.
Az
(AW),
273
( AN ) “
Mch. 24.5 |
ANE Aesy |
May
June
July
| — 7270.2
|, ——“@5AG;2
| —10606.0
| —I1707.5
| —13085.4
| —13838.2
| —13897.7
| —13904.0
—13903.8
—13924.5
| —13791.7
| —13561.8
—13176.2
| —12600.1
| —10732.7
| — 7661.4
| — 5566.9
toon 7 |
| —13471.7 |
SL 3VO7-7 «|
—13913.3 |.
| —I3910.9 |
—13914.4 |
—13899.4 |
—T1797-3, |
— 9369.2 |
— 3033.2 |
0.0 |
| —40174.5 |
—42272.9
—43882.4 |
—45080.6
—45945.2
—46553-3
—46959.0 |
—47204.0
—47338.1
—47398.5
—47414.2
—A7411.9 |
—47405.3 |
—A7404.8 |
—47414.0
—47408.3 |
—47245.4
—46764.4
| —45878.2 |
—44496.7
—4A2516.7 |
—39823.7
|
|
—362096.2 |
—31790.6
—26123.0 |
—19100.6 |
—10486.2 |
0.0
late Pa goes
+63561.3
+56217.9
| +49682.5 |
| +43931.7
+-38935.2
+34658.8
| +31064.5
| + 28110.7
| +25751.9 |
| +23938.4 |
+22616.6 |
| -—-21729.0 |
| +21211.2 |
+20992.3
| +20951.4
-++20874.0 |
+-20603.4
| -+20088.8
+19285.7
| +18162.1 |
| +16693.4
| +14859.6
+12647.8
_TC053.0
+- 7073.2 |
ior 37 geo"
|
| —31639.2
—34702.0
—37102.8
—38867.2
—40021.9
—40595-7
—40619.4
| —40125.4
—39147.7
—~37722.5
—35888.0
—33684.8
—31156.6
—28351.6
—25325.0
—22160.4
—19039.9
—16047.4
—13228.4
—J0618.1
8245.6
6135.8
4309.8
2786.4
1581.4
708.1
178.2
0.0
34. Perturbations Due to the Figure of Jupiter. — Jupiter
differs so greatly from a sphere that the, usual assumption that
it acts upon outside particles as though the entire mass was
concentrated at the center will not hold true for bodies ap-
proaching Jupiter as closely as did the comet. It becomes
desirable, therefore, to compute the disturbances to the motion
of the comet, caused by the figure of the planet. The ex-
tremely close approach of the comet to the planet’s surface
plainly indicated large perturbations due to this cause and the
asymmetric position of the comet’s orbit, relative to the planet’s
equator, allowed of little balancing of effects on its approach
and recession. These perturbations may be readily computed
in the following manner.
274 POOR
LaPlace' expresses that part of the perturbative function
which depends upon the figure of Jupiter in the following
form:
MB
R=1(p—16)(1—3 sin? 6) oe
where the factor (¢ — 3¢) depends upon the shape and speed
of rotation of the planet; 4 is the equatorial radius of Jupiter,
and vand ¢ are respectively the radius vector and jovian decli-
nation of the disturbed body. From investigations upon the
motions of the satellites the value of the first factor was found
by LaPlace? to be
log (p— 39) = 8.34047
From the above expression for the perturbative function can
be found by differentiation the disturbing forces in the directions
of x and 0; and thence by resolving the latter into its com-
ponents, the disturbing forces Rk, S, and W. The formulas for
this latter step are rather complicated, unless we first refer the
elements of the comet’s orbit to Jupiter’s equator as fundamental
plane, or else neglect the inclination of the latter to the ecliptic.
This latter may be done, in the present special case, without
introducing any appreciable error, for this inclination is but 3°,
while the orbit of the comet was inclined some 64° to the
ecliptic. The formulas as thus deduced are, Z being an aux-
iliary angle :
cot Z —cos w tanz
sin 0 —sin w sinz
¢
R/ = —- (1— 3 sin?d) =
So’ = — (sin 2d cos ZL) 2
pe
W,’/ =— (sin 20 sin ZL) g.
ss
where
1 Mécanique Céleste, Livre VIII, Sec. 1.
2 Mécanique Céleste, Livre VIII, Sec. 27.
COMET OF 188g9-1896-1903 275
and thence
ope Bei OF pps
Vp
oe
Se SY
SW Ty
pe OB yer
re Vp
The disturbing forces are therefore proportional to the inverse
fourth power of the radius vector; and, hence, for a close ap-
proach, the resulting perturbations may become very large. In
the case under consideration, these disturbing forces were found
to be, at the time of closest approach, as great as one per cent
of the central controlling force of Jupiter.
To obtain the perturbations of the elements the disturbing
forces, as computed above, are combined with the differential
coefficients of the elements as given in $33.
With these formulas I computed the perturbations during the
36 hours of closest approach, July 19.5 to July 21.0, using an
interval of one hour except for the eight hours of closest ap-
proach, when the interval was reduced to 15 minutes. The
following table gives the values of the integrated perturbations,
thus derived, at the dates of computation, the changes in e, v
and WV being expressed in units of the sixth decimal place.
276 POOR
TABLE XV.
PERTURBATIONS DUE TO FIGURE OF JUPITER.
31.93 | —195.58 +184.40
24.37 | —199.24 ~214.42
1.37 | —208.56| + 228.27
Az Ae | wv (Amv), (AY ),,
m “i “ “ } “ “
July 19,12 0 | + 1.92) + 77.03| + 5.94] + 247.6 | ++ 15.48) | — 70.22) —a720e
130| + 2.12] + 76.21| 4+ 5.58) -- 246.8 | 4- 15.43 | —— 6947 | —“156:66
TAO | = 2.34 == 975.25)) Se Slee ae 245.8 ; + 15.38 | — 68.64) —141.47
15 0.) + 2.64|°-+ 74.10) -—° 4:74) 4- 244.5 | = 15-301) — (67,60)|5—— ares
160] -+ 3.00] + 72.74) -+ 4.24 | + 242.7 | + 15.19 | — 66.35 | —110.98
170} + 3.43) -+ 7105 | -- 3-67'| +. 240.4 | +) 15.05" | — 164076) —a95.85
180 | + 3.98| + 68.93) 4 3.00) =— 237.2 | --/14-86 |) —162:776)), — So.85
ig 0 | +* 4.66| ++ 66.24| + 2.24) 4- 2327 | 4. 14°57 || 60:21))-— Goa
200/-+ 5.51] + 62.73| + 1.35] 4+ 226.1 | + 14.16 | — 55.81 | — 51.81
210/+ 6.54/] + 57.80|/ + 0.30] + 215.8 | + 13.52 | — 52.17| — 37.96
220/|+ 8.14] + 52.70| — 0.60] + I99.6 | + 12.48 | — 45.80| — 24.92
230|/+ 9.53| + 44.18] — 1.44) + 270.6 | -- 10.67 | — 36:35 |\/——"13-26
jmly.20;930.'0.)) > 9.19 | 527,90 | 1.96 | + 116.0 | + 7.23 | — 18.27| — 4.17
16 (6) 0.00 | 0,00 | 0.00 | 0.00 | 0,00 | 0,00 0,00
July 20, 1 o | +894.27| +916.04| —- 21.64| —1181.8 | — 17.55 | — 47.10| +358.10
15 | +888.85 | +906.98| — 20.42 | —1218.1 | — 18.00 | — 40.42| +340.33
30 | +881.58| +896.82| — 18.78| -—1260.0 | — 18.50 | — 33.40| +322.13
45 | +871.02| +885.24| — 16.48} —1306.2 | — 19.04 | — 26.20] +303.37
20 | +857.82| +872.00| — 13.29] —1357-5 | -— 19.63 | — 19.03 | +-284.04
15 | +837.79| +856.84| — 8.91 | —I4II.3 | — 20.23 we 12.15. +264.06
30 | +810.20| +839.58| — 3.00) —1463.5 | — 20.80 | — 6.43] +243.54
45} --9771-47 | --820.01 | --- 14.07 | —1504-7 | — 20.20 257 eee see
30 | +717.44| +797.84| + 15.85| —1516.4 | — 21.19 | — 0.18) +201.28
15 | +643.81| +773.21| + 30.58| —1462.0 | — 20.31 | — 2.90| +180.44
30 | +547.02| +746.94| + 50.00} —1284.5 | — 17.84 | — I19.26| -+ 161.20
45 | +430.96| +-721.09| + 74.50] — 904.3 | — 12.85 | — 47.59| +145.56
40 | +313.98| +697.17| +103.70| + 148.6 | — 3.93 | — 89.63| +136.82
15 | +247.42 | - 9.23 || 138.82 |) 138.04
2 | + 23.72 | —179.72| +-155-57
st.
30 | +776.28| +561.54| + 11.85 | —1898.5 | --- 23.65 | —231.79 +216.61
45 | +159.57| +467.73 | — 39-77| —3121.2 | — 38.54 | —259.91 | +-184.23
60} + 52.76} +369.82} — 70.85 | —3304.8 | — AI.II | —267.46, +143.42
15 | — 51.65| +281.76| -—- 82.49} —2835.6 | — 35.53 | —247.27| +-104.72
30 | —146.86| +210.74! — 80.84! —2170.5 | — 27.46 | -—209.69: + 73.24
45 | —173.63 +156.15 | send e-0e| —1567.6 | — 19.97 —167.70 | + 49.62
70 | —166.14| +114.58]} —- 62.07] —Iog0.0 | — 13.98 | —129.01| + 32.80
15 | —1I43.20|} ++ 83.54 | — 51.04| — 740.5 |— 9.60 | — 96.12) -— 27.01
30 ||, ==-120.54)|" =| (60:46 | 40.68) 496.1 | — 6.49 | — 69:94 | + 13.16
45 | — 88.71 | -+ 43.17 — 31.40| — 327.2 | — 4.32 | — 49.61| + 7.81
8 0 |, — 64.78 | -- 20.87 | — 23:21) — 205.3))|—— 2.78 | —- 33:60) 4 aumngo
15 | — 44.07| + 19.50} — 16.08} — 125.6 | — 1.69 | — 21.59] 4- 2.10
30 | — 27.05| + 11.42| — 9.90| — 66.2 | — oor | — 12.35| + 0.81
AS | — 12:33 '4-) 5.05|| = 459)| — 27-7.) PO S9 ba Oa os
9 0 0.00 | 0:00 |) => “@.00)|"— "110 Fl O01 ia 0,00} +- 0,00
COMET OF 188 9-1896-1903 277
TABLE X V.—Continued.
PERTURBATIONS DUE TO FIGURE OF JUPITER.
Date.
ae ch) am
July20, go
100!
Ilo
TAO
130
140
150
160
170
18 0 |
190
200
210
22 0 |
23 0 |
July 21, 00 |
35. Passage Through Jupiter's Satellite System.— Taking
from the above tables the solar perturbations for July 22.5 and
applying them to the hyperbolic elements given in Section 32,
I find for the elements, which represent the motion of the comet
at the time of its closest approach to Jupiter :
Epoch 1886, July 22.5.
T= 2OZ 237 AAG
Ve 2545 ks 10.0
== On By ji, 2
@é= 1.0124886
v = 0.0095882
WV = 0.0210245
This gives the date of closest approach as
July 20° 5° 6.4™
at which time the comet was only 2.22 radii of Jupiter distant
from the center of that body. In other words, the center of the
comet was only about one and one quarter radii of Jupiter, or
55,000 miles, distant from the surface of that planet. The
comet, therefore, passed well within the orbit of the fifth
satellite.
278 POOR
The planes of the orbits of the satellites of Jupiter are all
nearly coincident with that of Jupiter’s equator, and therefore
are inclined but a few degrees to the plane to which is referred
the comet’s orbit. The elements of the orbit of the comet
about Jupiter show that the plane of the comet’s orbit cuts that
in which the satellites move at a large angle, and further, the
difference of longitudes of the perijove and the ascending node
was only about 284%°. Thus, at the ascending node the comet
crossed the line of nodes at a large angle; while near the de-
scending node the path of the comet was for a time nearly par-
allel to the line of nodes. Hence, as the comet neared Jupiter,
there could be no close approach to any of the satellites, ex-
cepting very near the node. But, on the other hand, as the
comet receded from the planet, it hovered over the satellites
and close approaches might occur at considerable distances
from the descending node.
This is shown in Plate I, which is approximately to scale,
and in which the orbits of the five satellites are projected upon
the plane of reference, and are, therefore, seen nearly in their
true size. The orbit of the comet was in a plane inclined 60°
to this and intersecting it in the line of QO. The comet rose
up suddenly from below the plane of the satellites’ orbits, cross-
ing it nearly at right angles, at ; then passed rapidly upward
and almost directly over Jupiter and then slowly descended and
finally passed below this plane again at G. From the time the
comet passed the ascending node, at Q, until it left the satellite
system at the descending node, was only 30 hours, of which
time only one half (14) hour was necessary to carry the comet
from the ascending node to perijove.
During the time in which the comet was in the vicinity of
Jupiter and its satellites, it was moving so rapidly that nothing
except a very close approach could have any appreciable in-
fluence. Indeed, to have caused any noticeable alteration in
the relative orbit about Jupiter, the comet must have passed
within the “sphere of attraction” of the disturbing satellite.
Now the distances of the satellites and the radii of their various
‘‘spheres,” taken in reference to Jupiter, are given in the table
COMET OF 188 g-1896-1903 219
below, where the unit of distance is the equatorial semi-diameter
of Jupiter.
Distance. Sphere.
Satellite I 5-93 0.065
Satellite II 9.44 0.118
Satellite III 15.06 0.320
Satellite IV 26.49 0.420
These values being obtained from the masses and distances as
given by Newcomb.
The following table shows at a glance the character of the
approach to each of the four satellites: the first column con-
tains the number of the satellite, the second the smallest pos-
sible distance between the orbit of the satellite and that of the
comet in terms of the radius of Jupiter, and the third column
the radius of the sphere of attraction of the satellite.
Satellite. Least Distance.
I 3:57
II 4.16
Ill 4.01
IV | 2.62
Thus there was no approach near enough to cause the
slightest change in the relative orbit of the nucleus about
Jupiter. In no case did the nucleus pass nearer to the satellite
than six times the radius of the ‘‘sphere of attraction”’ of that
satellite ; and at this distance the perturbations of the satellite
would be inappreciable.
36. Again, as to the disruption of the comet; the above
shows pretty clearly that it could not have been caused by the
action of any one of the four outer satellites. For the radius
of the comet, although a very uncertain quantity could hardly
have been larger than the radius of Jupiter, and in no possible
case did any of the cometary matter pass within the ‘‘ sphere”
of a satellite.
In all that goes before, the fifth satellite has been left out of
consideration. The mean distance of this body is about 2.6
radii of Jupiter, while the distance of the ascending node of the
comet’s orbit was only 2.36 radii. Thus if the satellite was in
280 POOR
that part of its orbit at the time the comet passed its node, a
collision of the two bodies was almost inevitable ; the satellite
passing through the comet. But there is still uncertainty as to
the exact moment at which the satellite was in this portion of
its orbit. Hence it is impossible to say definitely whether three
was or was not acollision. It is therefore possible that the ob-
served disruption of the comet was caused by the action of this
satellite. But all things considered, it is more probable, I
think, that it was caused by the action of Jupiter itself.
37. Transformation to the Sun as Center.— From the tables
of the solar perturbations and from those of the pertubations
due to the elliptic figure of Jupiter I find that the total per-
turbations for the interval between October 26.5 and March
24.5 are as follows:
PERTURBATIONS.
Solar. Figure.
Am = (0°31742”%.6, — era” 97.3
INQ == 2 Tie 6 Ao ie I 3)
Ai —II 9 34.5 —0O 045 .8
Ae + 0.0016832 —0,0010825
Av —0.0004252 — 0.001 3468
AN -+.0.0400961 + 0.0010143
Applying these to Hyberbolic Elements I, as given in 32, I
have for the hyperbolic elements which represent the motion of
the comet about Jupiter on March 24.5, 1886, the following :
Epoch, 1886, March 24.5
T= 284° 7/20%.1 -+- 221%.29007 ©
OQ = 256 23 4 .6 — I2 .204”
i— 162-20) 2) .2) — 507 8-957
eé= 1.0099530 + 0.0001826¥v
v= 0.0074203 -+ 0.00000168
N = —0.8821586 -+ 0.00056784v
The perturbations, as above, were computed with the ele-
ments corresponding to » =o, and rigorously, therefore, the
results only apply to the mean hyperbola and not to hyper-
bolas corresponding to various values of ». The perturbations,
especially those due to the figure of Jupiter, for these hyperbolas,
would undoubtedly differ considerably from those derived for
COMET OF 1889-1896-1903 281
the mean hyperbola, but on account of the great labor involved
in making separate determinations for the different values of »,
I used the mean values and applied them directly to the various
hyperbolas with the results as above given.
From these elements were computed the rectangular coordi-
nates and velocities of the comet in reference to Jupiter as center
as below:
log + = 8.4208419 x
log y = 9.4298307
log z= 9.2511007 z
ax
log a= 6.1427545
log wy = 7.2597800 x
at
az
log —, = 7.0525958
The coordinates and velocities of Jupiter about the sun were
found in the manner already explained in 31 and were:
N——TOlI20 4/7 82
iSO O
log 7 = 0.7364961
AA = + 0°4/32”.206
AB=+00 o .868
A log r= + 0.00000581
From these were easily computed the rectangular coordinates
and velocities of Jupiter in reference to the sun. Combining
these with the coordinates and velocities of the comet, as given
above, were found the heliocentric rectangular codrdinates and
velocities of the comet, as follows:
log « —0.7383624 2
log y =9.1526213
log z —8.7391814 2
fee
log, = 6.3693435
G
dy
log, = 7-9547556 x
log es = 7.06195 36
at
From these were derived, by means of the formulas in 32, the
expressions for the three constants of area, C, C’, C”’, that for
282 POOR
the semi-axis major of the comet’s orbit about the sun and
the auxiliary quantities 7, 7’ as follows :
log C —8.6928251
log C’ =7.7994321 2
log C” = 6.5189619 x
log @ =1.0649320
log f —6,1922104 2
log f/’ = 5.2922140 2
and consequently the resulting orbit is an ellipse of 39.57 years
period.
From the above quantities were derived the complete elliptic
elements which represent the osculating ellipse in which the
comet was travelling about the sun on March 24.5 1886.
These elements are:
Epoch, March 24.5 1886
u= 80%.66204+ 0%.111837 0
@ = 187°12/337.7 + 194”.392 v
2 =183 © 3 .4-+ 108 .157v
t= 7 AAS 7, 1, GO BAY
= VARI2 3013 | O0m.235 0
@= 32 I 26 .6—1I00 .309”
M =—2 1659 .5— 57.614”
The date of perihelion passage was found to be,
1886 June 24.1723 + 09.51688 v.
The coefficients of » in the above were found by independent
caculations. In the hyberbolic elements of March 24.5 » was
made equal to + 10 and the resulting elliptic elements found
in a manner entirely similar to that above explained. These
elements were then compared with the constant parts of the
above elements, which correspond to vy = 0 and the differences
divided by 10. The results are the coefficients in question.
In making these transformations from hyperbola to ellipse
the check already described was again successfully applied.
38. Perturbations Previous to 1886.—The elements just
given represent the osculating orbit which the comet was de-
scribing at the moment it entered Jupiter’s sphere of activity.
For some months before this time the planet and comet were
COMET OF 1889-1896-1903 283
so close together that the orbit of the latter was continually
subject to change and it was, therefore, necessary to compute
the perturbations of the comet by the planet for this interval.
For this purpose the ordinary method of the variation of con-
stants was used and in order to take account of the terms of
the second and higher orders the variable elements for each
date were used in the computations. The intervals of computa-
tion were as follows: from 1886 March 24.5 to 1885 December
14.5 ten days and from the latter date to 1883 February 8.5,
forty days. During this time Jupiter alone was considered and
all the computations were made with those elements which cor-
respond to » equal to zero. Of course the perturbations thus
obtained apply to the mean set of elements only; but I have
applied them directly to the various sets of elements, as repre-
sented by different values of », without regard to the changes
that might be introduced by separate computations.
The integrated values of these perturbations for each date of
computation are given in the table on the following page.
Applying these perturbations the resulting osculating and
definitive elements of the comet on February 8.5 1883 are as
follows :
ELEMENTS VI.
Epoch, 1883, February 8.5.
=: 121.4483 + Oo”.11184v
by 146° 6% 2874-1 9”%.2807
—— 188 40 TI .7+ 194 .392»”
Ceo Omns 74 ONO OSmats 727) el ooO.O
= 24 56 II .I—I00 .309V”
i 6 18 2 .9+ 96 .434”
My= — 42 33 33 -3+185 .112»
and the definitive period of the comet is found to be:
29Y.22 — o¥.028 v
Julian years, and the date of perihelion passage is,
1886 July 24.06.
Date.
1883 Feb.
Apr.
June
July
Oct.
Dec.
1884 Feb.
Apr.
June
July
Dec.
1885 Jan.
Apr.
May
July
Aug
Dec.
Dec.
Dec.
Jan.
Jan.
Jan.
Feb.
1886
Mch.
Aug.
Nov.
Mch.
Aug.
Sept.
Nov.
Mch.
Ss:
Sept.
Nov.
6.1
2.0
+0 58
=~ O130 13.2
-+-0 27 30.0
+o 24 55.8
+o 22 8.2
019 17.4
=O 16 36.4
+0 13 42.5
+-0 I0 49.0
+0 7 49.1
TO 3 45.0
ONO O10
| AQ
POOR
TABLE XVI.
PURTURBATIONS BY JUPITER 1883 TO 1886.
ae
+3 21
+3 19 37-7
+3 17 49.6
3 15 39.0
Tee 13 2.9
+3 9 58.5
ard 6 23.0
ard 250355
+2 57 27.5
+252 2.9
it+2 46 6.0
|+2 39 27.8
+232 6.1
+224 2.8
+2 15 18.6
+2 § 54.1
|-+-I 55 50.1 |
i+145 8.9
=I 33 52.0 |
+I 22 I.1
+T 9 35.0
+0 56 35.6
+043 4.2
1029 3.4
+0 14 38.3
0 0 0.0
|--0 35 17.8
+o 31 57.2
+o 28 7.6
+o 24 19.6
+0 20 33.8
+o 16 48.7
+013 8.9
|+0 9 36.9
+o 613.5
Oo O 0.0
—O 31 33.2 |—3 46 52.1
—O 31 31.6 |—3 45 37.4
—0 31 20.1
—O 31 25.4
013 20:5
=—© 31 13.5
—O31 4.4
\—O 30 52.6
[2 a2 Sikes
|—o 30 18.3
—0 29 54.3
—0O 29 24.5
|--o 28 48.4
|—0 27 12.5 |—3
I—3 44 16.7
—3 42 45.3
—341 28
Nees) oo ara!
—3 36 56.6
—3 34 28.0
I—3 31 38.9
—3 28 28.3
—3 24 49.9
—3 20 38.7
|— 3, 15 50.2
—0128) 4.7 |—3 10 18:0
3 55.4
|—0O 26 10.3 |—2 56 33.1
—0 24 56.4 2 AG On
—0O 23 29.2 |—2 38 4.2
|-=O 2145.5) |—2 26/255
I—0 19 41.9 |—-2 12 38.9
—0O 17 13.6 |—1I 5611.8
oe OMIA IA RT| —— Tes ON 5a
I—-O IO 33.3 |—I II 39.4
—oO 5 56.8 |\—o 40 36.9
Oo 0,0.
OOO)
|
i—o 28 _I.o I—3 16 15.5
—o 26 28.5 |—3 4 II.0
|—0 24 27.7 |—2 50 38.8
—O 22 17.8 |—2 35 58.8 |
—0 Ig 56.3 |—2 19 55.6
O17 20:0 {ae 212.3
—Oo I4 20.6 |—I 42 42.3
—O II 24.8 |
—J 21 15.2
—o 8 0.7 |—0 57 20.0
+o 259.1 |—O 4 12.3 |—O 30 17.9
Oo 0.0
Oo; oO G0
Au | (AL),
(AZ),
Set ci Ba
+17.1880 |—I 49 29.5
\++17.1345 |—I 38 19.2
-+17.0697 |—I 35 55-9
+ 16.9905 |—I 33 19.2
+16.8937 |—I 30 28.1
+16.7757 |—I 27 22.2
+16.6315 —I 24 0.8
+-16.4575 |—I 20 24.0
|-+16.2538 |—I 16 33.8 |
-+16.0088 |—I I2 31.1
+15.7160 |--1 815.8
+15.3680 |—o 3 49.6
+-14.9560 |--0 59 13.4
114.4712 |—0 54 27-9
“+ 13.9008 |—0 49 33-7
+13.2310 |—o 44 32. oO
12.4448 |—o 39 13.4
+11.5182 |—o 34 7.3
+ 9.1090 |—O 23 13.0
=> 925242) |——O) 17.3420
|-+ 5.5800 |—Oo II 47.4
+ 3.1448 |—o 5 54.0
0.0000 | oO 0,0
-+14.4830 |—o I5 51.0
13.5560 |—o I4 6.0
-- 12.5240 |—o 12 23.8
+11.4120 |—o I0 45.4
0)
18)
+-10.2000
+ 8.8740
+ 7.4250 |—o
+ 5.8640 |—o
+ 4.1370|—o 2 11.6
=+- 2.1730 |—O ~L 12.2
0.0000} O O 0.0
9 9.7
7 227,
5 39.0
3 53-9
+0 57 14.8 |+3 22 19.4 |—0 31 ae —8 oF 0.0 17.3033 | <1 45 54.6 |
6.6 |—0 31 34.2 |—3 47 59.0 |-17.2707 |—1 44 16.0
—3 58 48.24
—3 47 16.83
—3 35 46.84
| —3 24 18.50
|++10.4205 |—o 28 43.9 |
—3 12 52.10
—3 I 28.00
—250 6.81
—2 39, AQ sun
—2 27 35.68
—2 16 27.46
—2 5 26.19
—I 54 31.83
—I 43 46.44
133 Via
—I 22 49.89
—I 12 43.18
—I 2 54.37
—o 50 6.62
| —O 44 23.64
—9O 35 49.70
—O 27 49.93
—O 20 30.53
—o 13 59.15
—o 8 25.48
—o 4 2.06
-——O I 5.73
Oo O 0.00
13 55.00
II 34.90
9 24.42
7 24.69
5 36.51
4 1.06
2 39.43
I 32.93
—O O 42.70
—o 9 10.99
Oo O 0.00
= 10)
COMET OF 1889-1896-1903 285
39. We have seen that there were large disturbances in the
motion of the comet due to the figure of Jupiter. In section
34 were calculated the perturbations of the hyperbolic ele-
ments due to this cause and the results there obtained were
used in all calculations. Elements VI, therefore, depend upon
the numerical accuracy with which these perturbations were
computed. As these were difficult to calculate, owing te
the very close approach of the nucleus to the surface of the
planet, it is of interest to show, in a direct manner, the effect
of these disturbances upon the motion of the comet. In order
to do this I made an independent calculation of the path of the
nucleus about Jupiter, omitting the perturbations due to figure,
but retaining those due to the sun.
The hyperbolic elements which represent the path of the
comet about Jupiter on October 26.5 1886, and which were
given in section 32 were made the basis of the new compu-
tation.
To these elements were applied the solar perturbations for
the interval between October 26.5 and March 24.5 and thus
were found the hyperbolic elements which represent the motion
of the comet about Jupiter on March 24.5. These elements
differ but little from those given in the previous section, except
in »y and WV, where the perturbations due to figure were quite
large. From these elements were deduced the elliptic elements,
which represent the motion of the comet about the Sun on
March 24.5, in a manner entirely similar to that explained in
37, and which were found to be:
Epoch, March 24.5 1886.
a 837.8702
i — 1S 70d 4.88 |
Q== 183 7 16 287
i= 7 3048 .47 + 1886.0
Ol eA CES De OL
= 33 25 6 .99
VM 2S 24 .48
In these elements the coefficients of the indeterminate » would
be nearly the same as those given for the corresponding ele-
286 POOR
ments in section 37. As these elements differed considerably
from those given in 37, the perturbations by Jupiter for some
months previous to 1886 were recomputed with the new ele-
ments as a basis and the above elements were carried back to
1883 and were found to be:
ELEMENTS VII.
Epoch, February 8.5 1883
== 1127.7 340
AT AO ek A:
T=188 36 49 16
OSS END, BIS) 0) 5
P= 20) A0Ne203
J — eos Seas
1886.0
and the corresponding period of the comet is
31.47
Julian years.
This period, 31.47 years, is about two and a quarter years
longer than the definitive period obtained from Elements VI.
Thus the disturbances due to the figure of Jupiter had a decided
effect upon the motion of the nucleus of the comet; an effect
large enough to sensibly modify the final conclusions in regard
to the identity of this comet with that of Lexell. These dis-
turbances and their effects are considerably larger than those
obtained in a former investigation.' This is due to the fact that
the comet approached Jupiter much more closely than was indi-
cated by the elements used in the former work.
Even if we consider that the perturbations due to the figure
of Jupiter, as computed in section 34, as approximately correct
only, we can, nevertheless, safely conclude that the period of
this comet previous to 1883 was not less than 29.2 and not
greater than 31.5 years.
1«¢ Researches upon Comet 1889 v,’’ Astr. Jour., 309, p. 177.
COMET OF 1889-1896-1903. 287
As TO IDENTITY WITH CoMET 1770 (LEXELL).
40. Lexell’s comet underwent its notable disturbance in the
year 1779 and, moreover, this disturbance took place in that
part of Jupiter’s orbit in which Comet 1889 (Brooks) suffered
its great change of elements in the year 1886. Between these
two appulses there intervened a period of 107 years, which
period must be accurately accounted for in order to establish
the identity of these two remarkable bodies. But, assuming
the substantial correctness of the present investigation, we can-
not directly account for these years. For the period of Comet
1889 (Brooks) in 1883, or previous to its disturbance, has been
shown to be 29.22 + 0.03 years, which is not an aliquot part
of 107. Hence, unless in the intervening years the comet suf-
fered other and marked disturbances in its orbit, the entire
question as to the identity between the bodies disappears.
An investigation shows us that such disturbances may have
taken place during this interval, but leaves us uncertain as to
the resulting changes in the orbit. Elements VI represent the
motion of the comet previous to 1883 and, assuming for the
moment that the comet suffered no perturbations before that
date, we can find the approximate dates at which the comet
may have approached sufficiently near to Saturn or to Jupiter
to have had its motion appreciably disturbed.
41. Approaches to Saturn. The orbits of the two bodies,
Saturn and the comet, intersect in longitudes 79° and 298° ;
the comet and Saturn being in these respective longitudes at
the times given in the following table:
‘TABLE XV IT:
Longitude 79. Longitude 298.
cs Comet. Saturn. ty Diff. Mie Comet. | Saturn. Bi)
288 POOR.
Thus in longitude 298° there could be no possible approach ;
Saturn being in a widely different part of its orbit when the
comet reached this point. On the other hand when the comet
reached longitude 79°, Saturn was only about 30° from the
same point. This, however, made the distance between the
two bodies so great that the resulting perturbations were inap-
preciable. It will be noted, however, that if the average period
of the comet previous to 1881 had been 28.5 years then the
comet and Saturn would have both reached the common point
of their orbits at nearly the same time in 1796; and if the
period had been 27.9 years there would have been a close ap-
pulse of the two bodies in 1825. Such approaches are not
indicated by the definitive elements, the smallest value for the
period being 29.2 years. Unless, therefore, during the interval
between 1825 and 1881 there were other perturbations suffi-
cient to appreciably change the orbit of the comet, there could
have been no close approach to Saturn. This fact, that there
could have been no large disturbance by Saturn, is of special
importance, as we shall see hereafter.
42. Approaches to Jupiter. The definitive set of elements
shows that the period of the comet previous to 1883 was 29.2
years, while that\of Jupiter is 11.86 years. These two periods
are incommensurable, but are somewhat in the ratio of 5 to 2:
five periods of Jupiter being equal to 59.3 years, whilst two
periods of the comet are equal to 58.4 years. Thus the mean
set of elements would indicate that the comet passed perihelion
in longitude 188° in February 1828 whilst Jupiter passed the
same point about ten months previously. The comet, being at
perihelion, was moving more rapidly than Jupiter and gained
upon that planet. In the years, 1829 and 1830, therefore, the
planet and comet were sufficiently close together for the latter
to cause appreciable perturbations. Had the periodic time of
the comet been slightly larger than that indicated by the defini-
tive elements, this appulse of the comet and Jupiter in 1828
would have been extremely close.
In order to form some idea as to the character of this appulse
the perturbations for the interval between 1883 and 1830 were
COMET OF 1889-1896-1903. 289
approximately computed. The changes for the elements » and
£ were alone considered and intervals of 200 and 400 days
were used in the computations. The total perturbations during
this interval were found to be small, the integrated values for
Febo rs 1831 being;
Au = — 0” .4763
AL =— 4I! 307%
And the resulting elements of the comet for this epoch are,
iP 31207.9720
Ve = FOS BY aoe |
SS lel) i oO
Q = 186 13 20 } 1831.0
== fy oy Th
f= AN Ge)
The closest approach of the comet to Jupiter occurred in the
latter part of 1828, but at no time did the comet approach
Jupiter closer than six times the radius of the latter’s sphere of
activity. Hence the resulting perturbations were too small to
cause any decided change in the orbit of the comet.
Thus the definite elements do not indicate any close approach
of the comet to either Jupiter or Saturn during the interval be-
tween 1779 and 1886.
43. There is another method by which the question of iden-
tity may be investigated, and that is, by means of the criterion
formulated by Tisserand. By an investigation of the path of a
comet through the planet’s sphere of activity Tisserand de-
rived a function, 7, of the comet’s elements, which remains prac-
tically unaltered however great the change in the separate ele-
ments. This function is given by the formula,’
n= : ie aaa cos 2 Vp
Where a, f, and @ are respectively the semi-axis major, the
parameter and the inclination of the comet’s orbit, and A and R,
the semi-axis major and the radius vector of the disturbing
* Mécanique Celeste, Vol. IV, p. 203.
290 POOR.
planet at the point of closest approach. Now the action of
Jupiter, even when repeated at several very close appulses, can
cause but a slight variation in the value of this function, when
taken in respect to that planet: but, on the other hand, the ac-
tion of another planet, Saturn for example, may at one approach
change considerably the value of this quantity taken with re-
spect to Jupiter, although it must leave unchanged the value of
the function taken with respect to Saturn itself.
Hence, in order to establish the identity of Comet Brooks
with that of Lexell both of which were disturbed by Jupiter, we
must either show that the z’s for the two bodies are practically
the same or that there was an intermediate disturbance by an-
other planet.
The values of this function for the two comets under discus-
sion and taken with respect to Jupiter are given below. In
order to show the possible variations of z due to one approach,
I computed its values with those elements of Comet Brooks
which correspond to the following three points of its path: (1)
February 1883, the action of Jupiter insensible; (2) March
24, 1886, entrance into the sphere of activity ; (3) September
30, 1889, the action of Jupiter again insensible. For Lexell’s
comet I used the elements as given by Le Verrier
Comet Brooks (1), 20.5308
uC oC (2). 2 = 0.5253
ce “ (3), 70.5294
Comet Lexell, nm = 0.4852
The three values derived for the Brooks comet are in strik-
ing accord. We thus see that even this remarkably close ap-
proach produced only a total change of — 0.0014 in the value
of this function and, as the change necessary to bring it into
agreement with that for Lexell is — 0.0456, we at once con-
clude that no intermediate approach or series of approaches to
Jupiter can satisfy the requirements of this criterion. This
tends to prove, as was long ago pointed out by Schulhof,' that
the two comets, Lexell and Brooks, are not identical, unless it
1 Bulletin Astronomique, December, 1889,
COMET OF 1889-1896-1903. 291
can be shown that there was a strong intermediate disturbance
by Saturn.
44. In 42 it was shown that if the periodic time of Comet
Brooks in 1883 had been slightly larger than that indicated by
the definitive elements, then the comet and Jupiter would have
had an extremely close appulse in 1827. In fact had the
period of the comet previous to 1883 been 29.6 years, then two
periods of the comet would have been exactly equal to five of
Jupiter and the two bodies would have been together in 1827.
This period, 29.6 years, differs only four tenths of a year from
the period indicated by the definitive elements and it is not at
all impossible that the definitive period may be in error by that
amount. In 39 it was shown that the perturbations due to
the figure of Jupiter made nearly two and one quarter years
difference in the period; that the period, derived by omitting
these perturbations, was 31.5 years. Hence if the numerical
values of the perturbations due to the figure of Jupiter, as found
in 34, are some 18 percent. too large, then the periodic time
of the comet previous to 1883 would have been just 29.6 years.
As these perturbations vary inversely as to the fourth power of
the distance of the comet from Jupiter, a change of some 5 per
cent. or 4,000 miles, in the peri-jovian distance of the comet
would fully account for the necessary change in these pertur-
bations. In other words, if the comet passed Jupiter, at the
time of closest approach, some 4,000 miles, or one tenth radius
of the planet, further from the planet than is indicated by the
definitive elements, then two periods of the comet previous to
1883 were equal to five of Jupiter and the two bodies were in
close approach in 1827.
45. By making various suppositions as to the period between
1827 and 1883 we can give to the appulse to Jupiter in 1827
any character that we desire. It is worthy of note, however,
that for the definitive period of 29.2 years and for any period
between that and 29.6 years, the perturbations of » in 1827
were of a character such as to increase the periodic time of the
comet ; that is, previous to 1827 the periodic time of the comet
would have been smaller than it was after that date. If this
292 POOR.
periodic time of the comet, previous to 1827, was approximately
24 years then the comet and Saturn would have been in the
same parts of their respective orbits in longitude 300° for many
months in 1786-87, and large disturbances in the comet’s motion
would have resulted. Slightly different values of the period
would have caused the comet to have approached Saturn in
longitude 0° in 1790, or in longitude 70° in 1795. We thus
see that with elements differing but little from the definitive
values a close approach to Saturn is indicated.
46. While an approach to Saturn at some time between 1786
and 1794 is not improbable, yet the uncertainty of the problem
is such that we cannot form any idea as to the effect of such
approach. In accordance with Tisserand’s criterion such an
approach, with resultant large disturbances, is necessary to
establish the identity of comets Brooks and Lexell. From
what we have seen it is, therefore, not impossible that the dis-
turbances by Saturn were of such a character as to satisfy this
criterion and it is not impossible, therefore, that the two comets
are identical. The numerical results of the present investigation
are not conclusive, therefore, as to the non-identity of these
two comets. These results indicate the probability of large
perturbations by Jupiter in 1827; the possibility of a close ap-
proach to Saturn in 1786-94 and a consequent faint possibility
of the comet having been in 1779 in the neighborhood of Jupi-
ter at the time when Lexell’s comet underwent its notable dis-
turbance. Even if the numerical results showed that the comet
was in the vicinity of Jupiter in 1779, when Lexell’s comet
disappeared, this would not of itself prove the identity of the
two bodies, although it would render such identity highly prob-
able. In this connection it would be well to recall the re-
searches of Schulhof on the path of Comet Swift (1895 II) and
the possibility of its identity with that of Lexell.
47. In this paper Schulhof’ showed that the elements of
Comet Swift, as deduced from observations, were slightly inde-
terminate. He showed that the comet had suffered disturb-
1 Recherches sur l’orbite de la Cométe Swift (1895, II), avant 1884. Bulletin -
Astronomique, March, 1897.
COMET OF 1889-1896-1903. 293
ances by Jupiter in 1886 and in 1837; that the z’s for this
comet and for Lexell were nearly the same and that, therefore,
Tisserand’s criterion was approximately satisfied. The effect of
the disturbance in 1886 was determined with considerable accu-
racy, but the effect of the disturbance in 1837 could not be
directly calculated, and before that date the uncertainty of the
path of the comet became considerable. Schulhof further
showed, upon suppositions which are in accord with the known
elements of the body, that it was possible for Comet Swift to
have been within the sphere of Jupiter's activity at the same
time that Lexell’s comet was known to have been within that
sphere in 1779. Yet Schulhof only concludes that the identity
of the two comets is possible.
The evidence in support of the supposed identity of Comet
Swift (1895, II) with that of Lexell (1770) is stronger than
that which can be brought forward in support of the suspected
identity of Comet Brooks (1889, V) with Comet Lexell.
CONCLUSIONS.
(a) The results of this investigation go very far towards
proving the non-identity of Comets Brooks and Lexell, al-
though they are not conclusive and admit the possibility of
such an identity.
(6) The computations upon which Chandler based his con-
clusion of identity of these two bodies are shown to be in-
sufficient on account of the omission of certain important
perturbations.
(c) Any conclusions as to the path of the comet previous to
1886 must depend to a large extent upon the perturbations suf-
fered by the comet while in the immediate vicinity of Jupiter and
due to the elliptical figure of that planet. In any further dis-
cussion of the path of this comet these figure perturbations
must be most carefully investigated.
“>
: "i ie « mea
} 7 ? a Obs aig fe
oun
3
,. ©
i ae a ‘
i ee + -* a!» (ote ee ‘
ih - vu
Pe th, Arad Hue «gy Aa one id a 4 a 7h ¥ ke
ioe te 5 iE! Bid 4 FES i
Sires itty tm ite +
9ney, 4 ’ seat e a 4 es a
* ie h Palas is i
:
PLATE |.
SS
PLATE &
Passage of Comet Brooks through Jupiter’s Satellite system. The
plane of the drawing passes through the center of Jupiter and is
parallel to the ecliptic. The orbits of the Satellites are inclined ap-
proximately 2° to this plane: the orbit of the comet is inclined 61°
to this plane and intersects the plane of reference in the line 2 6.
See pp. 277-280.
( 296 )
ANNAES: N. Yo ACAD? SGle VOLA XV: LEAT ES
270°
'
180°
“7
E
=|
A.
(297 )
PLATF. II.
New and Old Orbits of Comet Brooks. ‘The present orbit of the
comet is the small ellipse on which the position of the comet is shown
at the time of its discovery in 1889. The old orbit of the comet is
the large ellipse on which the position of the comet in 1881 is shown.
The appulse to Jupiter occurred in 1886 in longitude 188°, near the
point of tangency of the two ellipses.
( 298 )
AINNALS=N: YY. ACAD SCR. VOL, XV.
< (889 Jy
ZARTH
180°
PEACE Ur
PUBLICATIONS
OF THE
NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
[Lyceum oF NaturaL History 1818-1876]
The publications of the Academy consist of two series, viz :—_
(1) The Annals (octavo series), established in 1823, contain
the scientific contributions and reports of researches, together
with the records of meetings, annual exhibitions, etc.
Publication of the Transactions of the Academy was discon-
tinued with the issue of Volume XVI, 1898, and merged in the
Annals. A volume of the Annals will in general coincide with
the calendar year and will be distributed in parts. The price
of current issues is one dollar per part or three dollars per
volume. Authors’ reprints are issued as soon as the separate
papers are printed, the dates appearing above the title of each
aper. /
(2) The Memoirs (quarto series), established in 1895, are is-
sued at irregular intervals. It is intended that each volume shall
be devoted to monographs relating to some particular depart-
ment of science. Volume I is devoted to Astronomical Mem-
oirs, Volume II, to Zoological Memoirs, etc. The price is one
dollar per part, as issued.
All publications will hereafter be sent free to fellows and
members who desire to receive them, but other fellows. and
members will only receive the Records, issued as a separate
from the Annals. The Annals will be sent, as before, to
honorary and corresponding members desiring them.
Subscriptions and inquiries concerning current and back
numbers of any of the publications of the Academy should be
addressed to THE LIBRARIAN
. New York Academy of Sciences
American Museum of Natural History.
New York City.
PRICES OF PUBLICATIONS
Annals of the Lyceum (Vols. XI), . . . per Vol., $5.00
Proceedings ‘ degre FAS AT0) Kc Fod S8 B B eA als PARR SNLarS BNA I6 of
Trans. of the Academy (Vols. I-XVI),°. . “ « 5.00
Annals“ (Vols. I-X), clk a cana tr she EID
Annals “ “ (Vol. XI e¢ sq), 3.00
Memoirs ‘‘ "3 Ss Pt RV.ol: I, Pts. I, IL, Mid,
REP Pat nts 5 ee 1.00
: ay < Poor, Charles Lane, Researches as to the Identity of ‘
1
the Periodic Comet of 1889~1896—1903 (Brooks)
> : : ;
.: wy
7 ao °
> af ’ s
! #2
A
‘ *
:
: ee
\
\ "i
f : :
;
GENERAL INDEX
TO VOLUME XV.
Names of authors in heavy face type.
Titles of papers in SMALL CAPS.
Alar thin els 2 Fircts du ce oaice! ot 98
Whberration: constant: = ssac ce. o. 23
Absorption of energy........... 199
Academia Secretorum Nature... 94
Academie des Sciences......... 220
Academics Hraneaise.... =... + 99
Academies of Institute of France,
99-100
Academy of Sciences of Paris... 99
Academy, The, of Cicero....... 94
ACADEMY, THE, OF SCIENCES,
President’s Address, J. McKeen
Catielle sy A oAt ieee eo le. 94-108
PNG arth Odin ispgers erate spouse 2.6020 ee 45
Accademia del Cimento......... 100
Weeademiaadel: (incell.... © joc-.- 94
ANG IIIT, he etic o GAO en ote 207
Active Members N. Y. Ac. Sci.,
IBISUROLA Sar even peters aot eee 128-137
AG AMS se Teh: 65, Oeste ta alok 100
Adler, Isaac; Fellow....... 205, 209
African Type of Jews....... 159, 160
ATEN eRe his. ch Seo ao 224, 231, 238
JeAlll ovevatiess > AVE Sage Oi non ees eee ne 208
Alcohol Effect of, on Muscular
AUG tlomyargmeck tc eu evs Ate es pe Git
DNKGTNINS Re Gsens oro lees eaters eae 96
Mlettiuamim USlands: <.s:0)-chec ote 2s 39 |
Alfred the Great; ref.......... 97
Algoniian) areillite............. 68 |
JIE ES FRCL Ee Ge See ae 58
Allis, £. P., Jr.; Act. Mem..... 155
IDGILGR > ad te 5 Ooh Ree 170
MUO pian eme saris Aare siete cess ove 60
INI DHEUS Brey eet Meee ass ores Lies 71
ALPHEUS, THE INTERNAL FaAc-
TORS OF REGENERATION AND
REVERSAL OF ASYMMETRY IN
THE Crustacean, C. T. Brues,
186, 187-188
Ameghino, F.; ref
American Academy of Arts and
SCICHICES) sacs Pe Sid siete Aakers 100
American Association for the
Advancement of Science...... 183
American Chemical Society..... 102
14, 15)
| American Geological Society.... 102
American Mathematical Society. 102
| American Morphological Society. 175
American Philosophical Society.. 100
American Physical Society 102
| American Physiological Society.. 102
American Psychological Associa-
(OIG Bem ein Oi cctg Ser CIOE LEI 102, 193
(Amethtystiestetees acre cael ake 203
AIM ON aS Watela ae icici cnicte ates 163
JAGMIMONMIECH sae eis Seo Rieke elec 8, 81
WAnialcite timottaites \cseicvrs tsscie0s 2 189
| ANCESTRY, THE, OF THE IcH-
| THyosAuURIA, J. H. McGregor... 55
| Ancient centres of learning...... 95
ATIC YLOCELAS Ae srs a olaccre ao te tes toasty 8
Arr ESTEE RS. vekehancrs mtsrsite ites 188, 189
| Anemoclastic TOCKy ein ear yee 202
| ANGKor Wat, A Trip THROUGH
| Frenca Inpo-CHINA TO THE,
W. S. Kahnweiler ......... Ris
PAM STESIte ty crn Genes ar eats dee 60
ANIMALS, On Recent MOopeEts
AND RESTORATIONS OF A NuM-
| BER OF EXTINCT, WITH A DiIs-
| CUSSION OF THEIR PROBABLE
Hapits AND Mopes oF LIFE,
(Gace bec Osborne ee ndece. 186-187
| ANIMALS, PLANTS AND, LOCALIZED
STAGES IN THE DEVELOPMENT
OR p tp be JACKSON Ga sasee aoe 80-81
pATTOde mr .as ic ar anche aero ne 78, 79
ANOMALOUS DISPERSION AND ITS
BEARING ON ASTROPHYSICAL
| Prostems, R. W. Wood...... 65
IAD T=CALCTS wy nisi ete mie Renae terse 14
An thraceney Oil jarcssyhetetecie r-e 164
| . . .
| Anthracite coal in New Mexico.. 182
ANTHROPOLOGY, PHYSICAL, OF
THE HyprE EXPEDITION OF 1902,
ANS Hrdlickaer cc riasen ons 177-179
Anthropology, Section of,
Meeting, Jan. 27, 1902....10—-12
Mebny28) i902). - tes cts 40-41
March) 24sit9o20).). «+1 51-52
Joyal eso) HClO aia g wee 61-63
300 INDEX.
$
Octare7-e1002 eee 77-78 ALOUS DISPERSION AND Its
Nov. 24.) 100254022 G2 —83 BEARING on, R. W. Wood..... 65
Jatt 205 00 OS aeseen 159—161) | Athabascashiveneemr ner iie eeee 208
Hebr 23) 000she LO6—169) |-Aunichaleite sarectie ieee eee 60, 61
March 23, 1903....- 177-179 | AUSABLE, Tur, CuHasm, Gilbert
April (275) TO08 ce aa 182-184 Van) “Angee spn seein 47, 50-51
OYE 20, BOO CS Scone LOZ S198) PAU Oclastic G0 chaser eletr t-te tenets 202
INfois Bela) WOGG uo oo 204—205 »AZteC. Sinn soe cee eee 177
‘Appalachian sty penetra 176) bacon kaneis -—re Lae eee 99
Mrabianweb ed oui smart aeerier: T5Ol|aAcOn we ROSeh siete ee ee 98
iNrapaltoes westrsieka.c ei necherncraierns 161 | BAHAMAS, THE CorAL REEFS OF
Archimedes wareterer art ner rae 95 THE ALG. Mayetnarcntiet: 206, 207
INT CHOSAURI CIM ee rans aera 55| Bair, J. H., CorreLations IN
IAT eENAceOUS LOCK cmos sees 202 ScHooL CHILDREN....166, 168
HES Cexoh nly SAPNA ey Oe I Os hn Ore EC iyfsty 7p QUANTITATIVE RELATIONS BE-
Avistarchuss: 1etayer ee cet eee 95 | TWEEN Motor anpd SEN-
Armadillos savish as A tegetetecaye aoa on cree RL sory ASSOCIATIONS....... 40
Arroyo Formation, R. E. Dodge, THE © GENERAL PRACTICE
PAT ENENINS Sw arekemen eee eee 43 CURVE, idea eee 82-83
4751501) BAM DeTos) Stet. mee eee ecer IQI
Art, Decorative, RECENT RE- | Bandelierssrefc wins ee nit
SEARCHES ON THE, OF THE Banks; Jos:3) réf:)4. antec 102
Prains Inprans, Clark Wiss- Barite Saito ecum Meee 60, 61
TOTS ited Se as wie hale jeene ete 2O4 205) (babN alge gene tase naar ene ae 234
ARTIFICIAL PARTHENOGENESIS IN Barometric observations ........ 70
PARANoncruM, GN. Calkins665167)\\Bastopuina sei eee enero 72
Ashby, George E., Some In- Baskerville, Charles, and George
CLUSIONS IN MICA AND THEIR F. Kunz, Notes on Rapium,
RELATION TO THE PERCUSSION 1g0, IQ!
BiGURE, . “ind 35 soe oer 68)| Batrachus gece eee ee eer 68
Ashkenasim: ~-00sihacmesase pees 160"| AUT: Terese cats te eee eee 55
INsiaticityperOniewseeeeeite 159, 160 | Bauschinger; ref..222, 223, 224, 226,
ASSOCIATIONS, QUANTITATIVE RE- 220), 230242 ob eee S See
LATIONS BETWEEN Motor AND — Baynes, Re Eis ret. soon. cers 31
SENSOR) Ho Balik: arene 40 | BeckE MetHop, ON THE DETER-
Assyrian monuments .......... 159 MINATION OF THE RELATIVE
IASELOMOMN sy oc nese oreo Bay avi REFRACTIVE INDICES oF MIN-
Astronomy, Section of, ERALS IN Rock SECTIONS BY
Meeting, Jan. 6, 1902...... 4-5 THE, Lea McI. Luqueer..... 59-60
IBGloy By WOWAo6.5006 ao ac Le—TAs|Becquerely ways. weir elente 202
Manch, 3s1gq02--e ee 42-44 | Becrarr Mountain, New York,
April <7. aro02 secu ee 52-54 Tue GeroLtocy or, A. W. Gra-
WHER 153 SOO 0 4050 O50 65-66 DA Wa ri mate en oe See nee 176
OXI, IKONS das ndy.e od 69=7.0) | Bedess (ref ct5 s-.12% S gecn8 wie * OO
INOWi003 eehOO2 ae nee 738-70) WE ECGOMIUMMG a =. <080 Seis 0. ove. 2a Ayeharche site 159
IDES St TK aahe doo S4A=85 | Beers Srei sansa es oo. se oo coeur Bey
Vanes LOOs Lae acer o—incyeul| lesxalkoyelomineh | so aactouaaaeavccsacc 55
Beb: 2, 1903. .4- 4-7 tbi—L64) | PSeNAVAGeS* satel. eae eee 1058
March 2; 1903... si72—074) |) benline sANcad enya seers 100
IND El KGHAEO OR oe eee 179 | Bermuda Biological Station..... IQ!
Maya: aio Oa s serie £O4—186 | Bernaliloneccne..-aie tia ere eee i
Oct wy elooseeee 190-191 | Bernoulli, Daniel; ref.......... 100
INOwem 2s aroOs merece 198—200 | Bernoulli, Nicholas; ref........ 100
ASTROPHOTOGRAPHIC MEASURES, Beryl sn Shue eee ene 203
CoMPARISON OF, MADE WITH Bessel: ceieeomte yet ere eae 228
THE RESEAU AND WITHOUT IT, Biabase: 1,0 hocws cera eaeereee eon eeiete 69
Harold Mjacopbyrescre ees 156-158 | Bigelow, M. A.; Fellow....... De Ly,
ASTROPHYSICAL PROBLEMS, ANOM- Ree cc Aes Le Aero eeetere 7s
INDEX.
Report of Summer Work.72, 192
THE CYTOLOGICAL PHE-
NOMENA OF MATURATION
AND First CLEAVAGE IN
THE CiRRIPED EGG 44, 46
BINGHAM Canon, UTAH, Com-
aie) is\8 «6
MENTS ON THE GEOLOGY OF,
Mp PIN CNUD si aicrocisicss soe. oe 73, 76-77
EOCLASbIC HE LOCK. .wis sara rerotetets cnt cte 202
IOP EMI CTLOG nian. cial aern hs oe 201
BiotocicaAL STATION FOR’ ReE-
SEARCH, THE Dry TortuGas
ASUAS ALG: (Mayer. < a/ ssie s+: 158
Biology, Section of,
Meeting. Jans a3) O02... .6 5-6
IRS MOY TOK S5.adm oo an 14-15
Marchi adios LOO2s neta 44-47
Mar chi2Abe LOO tinea 55-58
Ways 02) etooze ese O0-08
Oct.) 13. 1902... ee el 73
INO AO MOG oo on on 79-81
IDGO; Ey HOO o.Bac saos 85-87
JET EPICA oo dom Soot 158
Feb. 9, 1903........164—165
Marchyigssno.03rias ae 174-175
Aprilierssaioosmaeci rs 179-181 |
May) str TOOsi acre: 186-188
OC Tie a amioaa ac IQI—192
INjOwa On OO Serta ser 200-201
IDC THOSE Aes br 206-207
Birds of Vancouver region..... 72
Birds, Power of young, to dis-
tinguish different colors...... 72
BisMutH (NATIVE) AND BISMUTH
FROM SAN BERNARDINO CoO.,
Came Glo. PIN Z 2.2 eset a: 192, 193
SECT Otley ararentecteracornin shewalerac.$ 60
BatuminousvCOale 4. 4 ses o 5 ca ss 163
BAKES AW wb seket tev esihaae as < 204
SASCOMOLIM a ee strat ak ie Sic arane<) oovs 45
BIAStOMIeKe: uta. oe ae ne sean ts aula 45
Boas, Franz; Councillor..... 17, 88
Tur RELATION BETWEEN THE
VARIABILITY OF CELLS AND
THAT OF ORGANISMS...... 6
BOCES Speier ae ieice hems 6% be 96
Bogert, Marston T., Some Prop- |
ucts DERIVED FROM COAL,
161, 163-164 |
Bogoras, W., Erunotocicar Os-
SERVATIONS IN NORTHEASTERN
STIBERIDAN:. cho vie eaea eee ieee cae 62, 63
Bortinc Potnt DETERMINATIONS,
MEASUREMENT OF THE ALTI-
TUDE OF Mr. WHITNEY, CALI-
ForNIA, BY, William Hallock,
172-173
Boiling point observations...... 70
301
‘Bolton, Henry Carrington, Death
| OER aueyoncis ceed ven caeird oreien ohora te ous 206
| Resolutions concerning death
| GuPibs saeco nor or 214-215
Bolton; Thad: Wis refer 2.602 oe. 41
\Wonin,Wslandsin.pradecmeten seer SO
Bourwellt rehire wcrs sce ysl 76
Boys, Tue Growrtu or, Clark
HaRWWASS Olin an yea eo Aer ea ATC 51-52
Bical bales mre ciecee arctoiie aoe ia ae II
BrachyStolas, Kissy eteys cess vera 175
, BRAIN Function, LOCALIZATION
ORM Sale ELAN Zee eee: 193, 194
Bristol, C. L., ON THE Cotors
AND COLOR-PATTERNS OF CER-
TAIN BERMUDA FISHES....174, 175
Report of summer work..... IgI
British) Academy areca cieetiee scien 100
British Association for the Ad-
vancement of Science........ IOI
British Goltmalstayye cies cre cietere II, 208
Britton, N. L.; Councillor...... 88
JRrinsie, WHS IERESG bo be baneos 17
Biron aghobin cos egooaseuaad 44, 45
| Brooks, Wm. R.; ref..219, 221, 222,
2205) 2275 220234 2575) 260s) 200)
201 202, 293
Brown, Barnum) cek.. 4... - 5 9
| Brues, C. T., THe INTERNAL Fac-
TORS OF REGENERATION AND
REVERSAL OF ASYMMETRY IN
THE CRUSTACEAN ALPHEUS,
186, 187-188
Buchner, E. F.; Fellow....... 83, 88
Budget, Report of Committee on,
64=65, 170-171
VALS Cl cigars AAR esy Fast aoa ager ee 72
Bumpus, H. C.; Councillor....17, 88
1 2¢=) I Koy eepPerEcan Chet Oro crtiecee oo ic eeniy/
By-laws of N. Y. Ac. Sci....121-127
Byrnes, Esther F.; Fellow....83, 88
NiGallamimeg sss oink oiraiorst Seance 61
Galcancouss tock aeer eisai 201
Calcite es... 56 cto ates 16, 60, 61
Galedonite, occ snus os eo een 60, 61
| CALIFORNITE (VESUVIANITE); A
New ORNAMENTAL STONE, G.
Fs RAZ gation ehecse he eres 192, 193
Calkins, Gary N., ArriFIcraL
PARTHENOGENESIS IN ParRA-
CE GIONS Fay /afelersietomnact << 66, 67
DEGENERATION IN PARAMG-
CIUM AND S0o-CALLED RE-
JUVENESCENCE WITHOUT
CONPUGATION aes cis cisteteie ace 6-7
-PROTOPLASMIC Oxtp AGE.... 158
Report of summer work..72, 192
Tue Lire History or Cy-
302 INDEX.
TORYCITES VARIOL#, THE Charles the Great; ref.......96, 97
CAUSE OF SMALLPOX...... 1 | Charter of N. Y. Ac. Sci,
Cameron, E. H., and W. M. 13, I9, 116-118
Steele, THE Errects oF Prac- Charter, Original, of the Lyceum
TICE ON THE POGGENDORFF of Natural ristoryoe. +. e IlI-113
PRTATSIONG 20324 «oe ccaeeece 193, 195 | Chemistry, Section of,
Cam pLonites Been coc een eee 189 Meetings Jans (6s 1902. a-eee 4-5
CANADIAN ROCKIES, EXPLORA- Feb 3) 1go2 seen renoe 13-14
TIONS AND First ASCENTS, IN March® 35) 919025--7.- 42-44
Mie SEG: seater... pnt ee 208 Aprilievigo2se ee oer 52-54
tleanalSeerorelViarsea: mae ose eee 54 May: 5.10020 4- oie 65-66
(CANCER Scere ec terle «sve she teehee 192 Oct. -6,719025.- eee 69-70
Cancerous: growth)... 22 -5.. 62 . seen 2 Noy: 35700020 40- se oee 78-79
Cannon, W. A., CyToLoGicaL Dey 1, eL002 ene 84-85
STUDIES OF VARIATION IN Hy- Jano {c) 100304 cree 156-158
BRUDS Acie a tolee sted see area ed te 164-165 Hebh 2)" 10038 55.n 5-6 161-164
Carbolicr0ile suet, - cisions eee 164 March, 19037-0o26 172-174
Gaxbonaceous) Tock....5- aoe 201 Aprin6, 090s" seater 179
Carlyle. -Dhos); tel o5 5. see eee 33 May 4s Too3her eee 184-186
Castanedor. siete ack ace ee II Oct-15 1903 eee IgO0—IQI
Castiniaw a settee cade. cee 55, 50 | NOW 2:-1008) 5. eee 198-200
Caswell, J. H.; Fin. Comm....17, 88 | Chester, A. W.; Fellow...... 83, 88
Cattell, J. McKeen, Graprs For | Chichimec ChE ae 177, 178
MENTAL TRAITS...... 167, 169 | CHILDREN, CORRELATIONS IN
INTENSITY OF LIGHT AND THE ScHoor, Jz? Bares - 5: 166, 168
Error OF PERCEPTION...61, 63 | CHILDREN, MEMoRY OF SCHOOL,
resident sa. 205-8 eee 78S) Jab Loughe eee 61, 62-63
ROP S che ne houses doe Ree 82) 983) |(Chimieray css nec 2 tes eee 45
STATISTICS FOR AMERICAN | Bmbryologysotess- ec 73
PSYCHOLOGISTS .+ Eee 193, 196 | CHROMOSOMIC REDUCTION IN ITS
Tue ACADEMY OF SCIENCES, RELATION TO MEeENDEL’s Law,
President’s Address... ..94—108 | W..(S, Suttons: -o-osse- 174, 175
CELL-LINEAGE AND THE STUDY OF (Chronometer... o-oo eee 38
Homotocies, E. B. Wilson. .66, 67 | Chuckchi people................ 63
CELLS, THE RELATION BETWEEN Cibola” 9... ose eee See eee II
THE VARIABILITY OF, AND THAT Cicero's’ “ref. 4... ac. eee Cee 94
or ‘ORGANISMS, Pranz ‘BoaSe.o1 6) Cicuye 5.0. c «cece see II
CENTENARY, THE, OF JOHN PLay- | CrrRIPED Ecc, Ture CyTOLOGICAL
FAIR'S DEFENSE OF JAMES Hut- | PHENOMENA OF MatTuRATION
TON’S THEORY OF THE ForMA- | AND First CLEAVAGE IN THE,
TION OF RIVER VALLEYS: MeE- MEGA’ Bis elow: ice = iss eee ae 44, 46
MORIALS BY Professors Steven- _CrackamMas Meteoric Irons, G.
son, Kemp and Dodge...47, 48-49 1 ap) i Yl ee ren ree Oe ha 208
Cephalic Andex . 20.24 ee 150—100;| Gladoselachids. ... >. «- .siserecmees 45
Cerebratulus) >... ene eee FT 05 W lAtS) wait) Says, Ae wd ws esl sere cos eae I2
CERILLoS Hitts, New Mexico, | CLASSIFICATION OF Rocks, Dts-
Tue GEoLoGy oF THE, D. W. CUSSION OF AND SUGGESTIONS
JOhNSON 43/52 ass cee eee 181-182|} ReGarpING A New, A. W.
Gérassites cp Sep oeeaien eee 60 Gtapal? was. cc eee 201-202
Gestracion japonicus).....5..<.. 255 46 |\Clashiomock .. 22.2 sieee eae 201
Cxuaco CaNon, New Mexico, An |: Glayathoids\.42.2.-<nin aoe eee 87
INTERESTING LANDSLIDE IN THE, CLEAVAGE, ON THE RELATION BE-
Richard E. Dodge.......47, 49-50 TWEEN LOCALIZATION AND, AS
Chalcanthitew, .<t cete ne eee 60 ELUCIDATED BY EXPERIMENTS
Ghalcedonyaesael = phar seco: 202 upon Meroceny, E. B. Wilson,
Chalcopynite ws. he eee 47, 60, 61 85-86
Chandler; ref..219, 221, 222, 235, 203 | Clevite 3. cat Fen eee oe ee 173
Chapman, Frank; ref.......... 58 Gli-Dwellers¥t 3.62 aoe ee 177
Constitution of N. Y. Ac. Sci.,
52, 59, 69, I19—120
Copermicnserretis fe ii. 98
Copiapiien: aa eaeeer ie oolo ene: 60
(Gopperiid. Sas eke n 47
Copper District, NoTES ON THE
Rio Tinto, James Douglas.8, 9-10
Copper-lead basic sulphates...... 61
Copper MINES, THE, OF Cosre,
SANTIAGO DE Cusa, F. H.
WG) Ras ere cr ee
Coral Reefs, Paleozoic, of Wis-
consin
189
Crustaceous
INDEX. 303
Goal eAmibsacite) a5 esas oer 182 | CoraL Reers, THE, OF THE Ba-
BitMIITIOUS: vee. leone oe eee 163 HAMAS, A. G. Mayer......206, 207
(Comte ae a ARS Send oc HOSMt Corals mer ics eer sea x che ators eee als 81
Coat, SoME Propucts DERIVED Condobameue oer eee eee een 254
From, M. T. Bogert...161, 163-164 Corniferous limestone.......... 81
(Coil Gait ee arublea me bate cc coe 4 £634) Coronados ref.o- ace eer ae cio II
eopalemetass tear = oe ee 5 | CoRRELATION OF SCHOOL ABILI-
Coven” Seen ne he camer Pe Tr) )aorms; S.C, Parker. 122182, 1e3—184:
(CURIOS Ey Bai nee a Mar PrN a 43 | CORRELATIONS IN ScHooL CHIL-
(Cia ks 3a Ein) raid See ce mee TOSi DEENE Hey Balbo nik ee TOON LOS
Colbert srets: aise oor be 99 | CORRELATIONS OF MEASUREMENTS
ACO ehees i sek sien ee Hutvete aie ee oie aa ieke 60 oF Growru, Clark Wissler... 166
College of the City of New York. 153] Correlation, The, of School
iGollesium -Curiostm.......5-- 100 Marks!) 5 aoe serra eeeport caterer 183
CoLor PATTERNS IN LEPIDOPTERA, Corresponding Members N. -Y.
AT AG Se IMAV ER arora eae 55-56 ACS CIe pIbISt OL ee eats 142-152
CoLors AND CoLor PaTTERNS, ON Corresponding Secretary N. Y.
THE, OF CERTAIN BERMUDA Ac. Sci., Annual Report of.... 210
Bismps, ©. L: Bristol... TAS COSImOdesmosmit ee ae eee ine 56
Colors, Power of young birds to Cosmogenyiae senate eee 48
distinguish different.......... 72) Cotton plants, Hybrids of....... 164
Cotor Vision, Two ExPERIMENTS ((Cottes sb llotssrete eee eee 57
tN, Robert MacDougall..... 61, 62| Council of N. Y. Ac. Sci........ 122
CoMANCHE AND Ure _ InpIANs, Covellite sxe. ee eee 60, 61
INVESTIGATIONS AMONG THE, Cox,7C7Esaditeas-yaaesee 17, 88, 209
Heh Sta Clalit 2d).,.159, 160-161, |) COX, JOhNserer. 0... vee 32
Comet of 1770 (Lexell)...... 287-293 |Crampton, H. E., Natura SELEc-
COMET OF 1889~-1896-1903 TION IN SAMIA CECROPIA,
(Brooks), RESEARCHES AS 6; (7-8
TO THE IDENTITY OF THE Recs Secys ah seni 17, 88, 209
PERIODIC, WITH THE PERI- Report of summer work..72, 192
opic CoMET OF _ 1770 VARIATION AND REPRODUCTIVE
(LexetL), Charles Lane SELECTION IN SATURNID
LEU GHEY ye ahs Gigrcie Pema 217-208 MODHS' crores oes ahe 180-181
For general outline see table Creosote ok ease ee eee 164
Of GOnteNntS® 44 9 sas. « 2E7—2US | CretaC€Gusiiersce oes es sisters 72, 166, 182
Comete Switterams ssa 6 « 292, 293 Sandstome™ 205 oe seals selene 69
COMMENTS ON THE GEOLOGY OF Grinoidlt ep eerter-\ncrtocme ois woke 80
BinGHAM CaNon, Utau, J. F. Crookes tube! 2. ae ete eee 202
LICE ee a eee ee Wa GASH Gf | MOORS, WEBS cts. Boweaaae soodoc 166
Conductivity of energy ......... 199 | CRUSTACEAN ALPHEUS, THE In-
Conglomerate: TOck-0)..004... 0. 202 TERNAL Factors OF REGENERA-
Connecticut Academy of Arts and TION AND REVERSAL OF ASyYM-
SI STG OSE see ee ror| METRY In THE, C, T. Brues,
186, 187-188
Me AES yc te SSE 192
Crystalline eset eee ae eee 75
Cunningham, R. H.; Fellow. ..83, 88
| Cirpirite 35 ee hs ee eee 60, 61
CurvE, THE GENERAL PRACTICE,
lst sthitwats Geek ou geass 82-83
Cushman srefson ce eee cane 80
CYTOLOGICAL STUDIES OF VARIA-
TION IN Hysrips, W. A. Can-
MONG oie. ee Lent fate ckout tale ce 164-165
CyToLocicaLt, Tur, PHENOMENA
OF MATURATION AND FIRST
CLEAVAGE IN THE CIRRIPED
304 INDEX.
General Index to Volume XV_ Gal 4 | Dewar, James; Hon. Mem....12, 17
Ecc, M. A. Bigelow........ 44, ce Dextrosé b.20 Re eee 175
CyToORYCTES VARIOLZ, THE LIFE- | Diabase Actin Grete snes Or peas ec 69, 189
History OF, THE CAUSE OF | Diamond 32 ae Bide eisleesye aun ae 203
Smatipox, G. N. Calkins..... 201 | Dickson, C. W., THe MIneErRat-
D’Alembert; TOES sketches 264 | OGY AND GEOLOGY OF THE Sup-
Dana ereto ee teehee ier 74, 76, BuRY-ONTARIO- CoPpPER- NICKEL
Danais' :plexappus ce ite eee 180 DEPOSITSE. sae re eee eee ee 176
DrArchiatdi:) Greteeerrr ere err 60)/*Dinosaut seoea eee eee . 187
Davis, Bergen, THe ELectricaL Dionite <2. 220). Sera er eae eee 69
CoNDUCTIVITY AND ABSORPTION Diplodocustaseser areca eee eee 187
OF ENERGY IN THE ELECTRODE- Discovery, THE, oF New GASES
LESS, OTS CHARGE: retell oi cevel= 198-199 IN THE Sun, S. A. Mitchell,
Davis, J. W., DEATH OF.......- 89 172, 173-174
Davis, W. H.; Fellow....... 205, 209 | DISCUSSION OF AND SUGGESTIONS
A PRELIMINARY REPORT OF | RecarpiInc A New CLassIFIca-
Tests oF ScienTIFIC MEN, | vTION oF Rocks, A. W. Grabau,
182, 183 | 201, 202
A PRELIMINARY REPORT ON Dodge, Raymond, The Participa-
Tests or ONE HuNpRED tion of the Eye Movements in
MEN OF SCIENCE........- 167 the Visual Perception of Mo-
Day, W. S., An Experiment RE- tiOn Ce ae pee eee 193, 196-197
LATING TO THE APPLICATION OF Dodge, Richard E., 2d Vice-Pres. 17
LacranGe’s Equations oF Mo- An INTERESTING LANDSLIDE
TION ON ELECTRICAL CURRENTS, IN THE CuHaco CaNon,
65, 66 New Mrxicoss.s.5-- 47, 49-50
Dean, Bashford; Cor. Secy..... 7 AReosG EGO 47, 50
JOURNEYINGS OF A NATURAL- GorsSecy: Men ee 88, 209
1st THROUGH JAPAN AND Memorial by, THE CENTEN-
THE) HTL EPPINES) | ieee 39 | ARY OF JOHN PLayFatr’s
PasT AND PRESENT STUDY OF | DEFENSE oF JAMES HutT-
ZOOLOGY IN JAPAN....164, 165 Ton’s THEORY OF THE For-
Refs ies ees, ote eee eeioek 22 | MATION Oe Rineeneware
Report of summer work.... 72) SEAS
Tue EarLty DEVELOPMENT OF EMRE ee pee
Dolomite: jen. eee 60, 61, 75
SHARKS suo * COMPARA- Donner; refs sc. se eee ee 157
Pe! mea ie mee | Doublets’ 7. 2... ee 203
D Gi eae epee et Douglas, James, Notes ON THE
BORAT Wat Oe Rro Tinto Copper District.8, 9-10
DIANS, eee ON Dry Tortucas, THE, as A Bro-
Rl aceon Wisse ae men LOGICAL STATION FOR RESEARCH,
ib nso-cae A Ree Ay G. Mayet. © oh. chit ees 158
Bares a att ea Cons ucarrox Dudley, P. H., SrREMMATOGRAPH
Gary N. Calkins.. Sees Tests: PRINCIPLES AND Facts
Dellenbaugh, F. S Ty ee i RELATING TO THE DISTRIBUTION
eae 9a ee STRAINS IN THE BASE
TION OF Basmonte TowNs AND ridin esc ey a el ie
“Nations” oF NEw Mexico oan UNDER Movine a
Deuce, refs 22 4s| Dumbam, E. K.; Fellow....205, 209
Dyn i oe eee nis 237, 253, 254 Dutcher, Wm.; Fellow........ 83, 88
Descattes; (ref :. -5.5-.5 Lege cee 99 | Dwight, Jonathan; ref...... --+ 58
DESCRIPTION OF A NEw TEREDO- Dyar, H. G.; Curator..... sede 17
LIKE SHELL FROM THE LARAMIE Bellow) ire -ctege yt iior 83, 88
Group, R. P. Whitfield’...-... 8:9) Eagle \clan) -oceee-- eee I2
Devonian 81, 176| Earth..226, 228, 229, 230, 232, 259,
Haunasy dane’ Ge ere rene IQI 260, 261, 262, 263
Fossils)! P04 eck creche een 72| EartHworK, A Recentity DIs-
INDEX.
COVERED, IN OGEMAW COUNTY,
Micuican, H. I. Smith..10, 11-12
East River FATS 70
EcLipse, OBSERVATIONS ON THE
FrasH SPECTRUM AT THE SU-
matTRA, S. A. Mitchell....42, 43-44
tgH era ELE San ts, cre cr casushete erate, fewer ares 14
Editor N. Y. Ac. Sci., Annual
Report Of). fe. sc. 21-22, 93, 214
EFFECTS, THE, OF PRACTICE ON
THE PoGGENDORFF ILLUSION, E.
H. Cameron and W. M. Steele,
193, 195
EFrrect, THE, oF VARIOUS KINDS
oF Hone-STONES ON THE CUT-
t1nG Epcre or Toors, A. A.
Jilin os sore ceome page” 15-16
Eggs of Cerebratulus.........-. 85
IspstotstathiShte ce cic ce s10)6 one == 72
Egyptian monuments........... 159
Bilasmobrarnchit) <2 v2.6 ie ses sss 45
Election of officers of N. Y. Ac.
Seip in Sore xo eRe 17 OS, 209
Elections of eN. Yo Ac: Sei-t> .- 123
ELECTRICAL CoNnTACTS, EXPERI-
MENTS CONCERNING VERY BrIEF,
H. C. Parker 161-163
ELECTRICAL, THE, CONDUCTIVITY
AND ABSORPTION OF ENERGY
IN THE ELeECTRODELESS Dts-
CHARGE, Bergen Davis... .198—199
ELeEctric CuRRENTS, AN EXPERI-
MENT RELATING TO THE APPLI-
CATION OF LAGRANGE’S EQua-
TIONS oF Motion To, W. S.
LLEke yee aie aie eet coe 65-66
ELECTROLYSIS OF RADIOACTIVE
SuBSTANCES, EXPERIMENTS ON
mary GB, Pestrams 20.055. - 78-79
ELECTROMOTIVE Force, THE
VARIATION OF Contact RESIST-
ANCE WITH CHANGE OF ELEC-
TROMOTIVE Force, H. C.
RaUkenorat er ose -/s co aeis oe Aiea
Blépbantsatuskesetc.c secs Shen: 70
Elephasy ampertales 32)... coe. 187
Emarginate primaries...... Fon s7a io
Emerald | comes weeetc met tatsiaccexd tc one 203
Pndogenetic wOCKs-.) slo eis «se cas - 201
ENERGY, THE ELECTRICAL Con-
DUCTIVITY AND ABSORPTION OF,
IN THE ELeEcTRODELESS Dts-
CHARGE, Bergen Davis..... 198-199
scrhanced dineSen..sis)sc) ster 43, 44
LECT St fa ePIC 0 Gc HO CLD IaeROIcie 86, 87
pid ote), %:.-3:\5 acghanieiocenss set 47
Hratostheness, celia: .. sia -4 = 95
MED We Boe TOL oon porno rn 215, 92,9213)
| ErcocrapH, THE, COMPARATIVE
RESULTS WITH SPRINGS AND
Weicuts, Clark Wissler....40, 41
IDG Shee) aco co enooms PRO Coe OU Ore 63
Bispeyor <2 serene seareal einai: II
| ETHNOLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS IN
NoRTHEASTERN SIBERIA, W.
BOZOraSs tee ee ac eres 62, 63
Bu clidite nek y yates area traders 95
KEICHInGdSn te 1 deren vie eos eres 81
EXHIBITION OF SPECIMENS, G.
Vi ee) SS 21 oy Aone ee pet Se eRe ce a 47.
HERO CELTS were rare rons oe aacettel ets) af onaiener 68
WBXOSEMELIG) LOCK ess) reley-he) eto yel al ee 201
| Expedition to Southwestern
| United States and Mexico.177-178
| EXPERIMENTAL, AN, STUDY OF
| THE GERM-REGIONS IN THE
Mottuscan Ece, E. B. Wilson,
| 206, 207
EXPERIMENTAL, FURTHER, STUDIES
upon FrisH DeEvELOPMENT, F.
BS Sumnetie aco. oo scien ee 66, 68
Ex PERIMENTAL MetHops OF
Srupy1nc Raproactivity, G.
Be Pegram sana sen tts 13-14
EXPERIMENT, AN, IN FACIAL
Viston, Robert MacDougall,
167, 168-169
| EXPERIMENT, AN, RELATING TO
THE APPLICATION OF La-
GRANGE’S Eouations oF Mo-
TION TO ELECTRICAL CURRENTS,
1) anced DE 72 oe old p Binion Senge 65-66
EXPERIMENTS CONCERNING VERY
BriEF ELectricAL CoNnrTACTS,
He CParkert ne. 2s. ate =< 161-163
EXPERIMENTS, Two, IN COLOR
Viston, Robert MacDougall.61, 62
| EXPLORATIONS AND First As-
CENTS IN THE CANADIAN
| Rockxes; Hy C.7Parker.-)- 27 208
| Eyerman, John; Fellow....... 83, 88
FactaL. Vision, AN EXPERIMENT
in, Robert MacDougall,
167, 168-169
Karmen, AUS: Act) Ment. =. .).- 69
Farrand, Livingston; Councillor. 209
Librarian 17, 88
Report of summer work.... 78
Fauna of South Harpswell, Me.. 71
Fees and dues of N. Y. Ac. Sci. 124
| Fellows, N. Y. Ac. Sci., List of,
128-137
| Ferruginous rock
FertiLtity, NATURAL SELECTION
AND, IN Man, E. L. Thorndike,
186,
306
INDEX.
Finance Committee N. Y. Ac. | coveRY oF New, S. A. Mitchell,
SCie een ese acts ree ede ete 122-123 172, 173-174
Hiniay,G: Is; Pellowee secs $3, 88.|\Gassendissoreraoee eee eee 99
GEOLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS Gasteropods, Marine.......-.-. 86
ALONG THE NORTHERN Gastropod -shells ss ca5" 292).re- 158
BounpDArRY OF Montana. .68—69 | Gastrulation .................. 45
Res: Memijv.:4:. 6 yooh eeite ne 42\|GEM MINERALS OF SOUTHERN
Tue GEOLOGY OF THE NEPHE- CALIFORNIA, G: Bo Konze ee > ae 208
LITE SYENITE AREA AT SAN | \GeRevar ”. taicctsnereneeeenc aeons 219, 234
José, TAMAULIPAS, Mexico, | Gentile? Cate. sem.) tome ener aetee 160
TS88=18o)|' Geodesy a2. fe ast) eserae iere 34
Fischberg, M., Report of summer
work 7778
Tue Ancient SEMITES AND
GEOLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS ALONG
THE NorTHERN BOUNDARY OF
Montana, Geo. I. Finlay... .68—-69
THE MopERN JEWS....159-160 | Geological Society of London.... 48
Fish DEVELOPMENT, FURTHER "Geology. caches arsine 34,. 355,45
EXPERIMENTAL STUDIES UPON, Geotocy, AN AScENT OF MrT.
EBs. Sumner t:nnsccenee 66, 68, WHITNEY, CALIFORNIA, WITH
Eustestaiossils)., 05, cc enicoen ee 72 Notes on THE, William Hal-
FisHEeS, ON THE COLORS AND LOCK ee Ace eee eo. 165-166
CoLor-PATTERNS OF CERTAIN GEOLOGY oF BINGHAM CANON,
BrermMupa, C. L. Bristol...174, 175 Utau, CoMMENTS ON THE, J.
FisHes, THE Snout, oF KANSAS, BS Kemper reece ee 735 70-77
OM. Ways hiis550<.csceeeene 15 GEOLOGY OF THE RIVER CHANNELS
WMammavions rek.)..19:- ee s3| ABouT Manuatran ISLAND,
Rlorda Mountains). +c ase II Wm. H. Hobbs Seen aN alse cl> 73, 74-76
FLUORESCENT GEMS, NoTE on, Geology, Section of,
iW: GLevison.. {2 >.- 201, 202-203 Meeting, Jan. 20, 1902...... 8-10
Forbes: Chas.? ref. ......2-5 0. 162 Feb. 17, 1902......-. 15-16
Oxi OSA) F Riek gereiehe Side ese AO 39 Be Oe a gee:
Fortieth Parallel Survey........ 166 ves reba scien eee oa
Rossi Mhshes a7 5. sewn eee 72 eu ee ae Tee es Sta aur
yee eer er 8 G4 72 | Nov. 17) -19026. ee 81
urian .......25...4..--- We Jan. t9, Kouscete saaee 159
Erankiin, 3.50 @ef ocr sear 100 Feb. 16, 1903....... 165-166
Franz, S. I.; Locarization oF March 16, 1903..... 175-176
BRAIN BUNCTION .......0 06. 193, 194 Aprily2on to03e eeer 181-182
Braunhotem sine! Wy. 7 mere eee 44 May nS; QOS — <> 188-189
Fraunhofer Spectrum..........- 43 Oct. 19571903) 45 2a-= 192-193
Bullentons) «ret. cicero 82 Nov. 16, 1903....-.- 201-204
Function, THE, oF INTERLOCKED Deen 14) woog=. 2. 207-208
EMARGINATE PRIMARIES IN GEoLocy, THE MINERALOGY AND,
Soarinc Fricut, C. C. Trow- OF THE Suppury-ONTARIO-
DEO ee soe ee eee 55, 56-58 | Copper-NICKEL Deposits, , C.
Mundulisy ja. avait eee 68| _ W- Dickson. ......---- 5-4. ae
Fusip#, THE PHYLOGENY OF THE, Geotocy, THE, OF BEcRAFT
BOON MSTA DAI |. ee ate Be) 86-87) eee Rex
Ere ae OR 2 86 Gtabaue oo... 3<.5 Ace eee 176
ar A ag cha Se 86 gn GEoLoGy, THE, OF THE CERILLOS
Ay dee geo tates ys NEA Ss Suge’ Hitts, New Mexico, D. W.
Busus; dongicaudal: vos sche see 86 Johuson® 2s 2. 181-182
Galen; ref.................-5- 95 | GroLocy, THE, OF THE NEPHELITE
(GALEN Apsron seas ators vat los ies 10, 60, 61 | SYENITE AREA AT SAN Jose,
Galena, UGaAtiS hs) acetate erie ae 61 | TAMAULIPAS, Mexico, Geo. ne
ECU TN fo Boo Un oat Se ee 94, 08 | Finlay... Wo... eee ee 188-189
Garnet................202, 203, 204| German Congress of Scientific
GASES IN THE Sun, THE Dis- | Men <.5. atsod.n oe eee IOI
INDEX.
GERM-REGIONS, AN EXPERI-
MENTAL STUDY OF THE, IN THE
Mottuscan Ecc, E. B. Wilson,
206, 207
GUGHHD , Ou iOS ee eae aero cence ter 160
Giambattista della Porta; ref.. 094
Giess Wi J-;: Fellows. ....... 83, 88
AE RIVIE Ty - es rhyars: oe Sieiel say eth II
SIO ECOR Teas e ngeeio ataner 96
GlepLOdOnis, Guwiascwierecicieieree 14, 15
(GiiSGa hae care He cn caer 75
GNEISS AND SERPENTINE, EXxHI-
BITION OF SPECIMENS OF, FROM
THE SOUTHERN ENp oF MAn-
HATTAN IsLanp, W. G. Levison,
73, 74
(ONLOMEMIA'S yo cyaveieyere.cehehaiels aha sets ers 71
GOSIRISIES Bid e Salar pe Bern eee ease = 60
Grabau, A. W., Discussion oF
AND SUGGESTIONS REGARD-
OF ROCKS. tn. ca 2) ctw. 20T—202
eM Owaterati. =< reid eevee uc eee 83, 88
LIMESTONE REGIONS OF
INET CIENIGAING Seidiors socks clas fe 81
ING ep BBLS © ORO OOTS cs PRICE 80
Report of summer work. .72, I91
THE GeEoLoGy oF BECRAFT
Mountain, New York....176
THE PHYLOGENY OF THE
HUISID AH ee ee ace 85, 86-87
Grapes For Mentat Taaits, J.
MekerCattelle ssc oe 167, 169
(GRAMOPHONE. oh erect eens. svausaaireneres 167
Grang@mivera 22)... te 6h 22s Soars II
(GraApHOPHONEN os 05.<-5 tesa cs eis = 167
Grataca pee net as x25 hou, 5 sre ecnet sc 74
(Granitacal eine oe an Oe acta 14 |
Gravitation Constant >. <<: «<<. 23
(reed OCkIten 554.9 win ccusticte Siseel is 60
GTECNOUCN Meh e cy 5), ort eel Pei 48
Gregory the Great; ref........ 96
GiIeTSOM ee his crass nterat ao teraeie er 167
(Grossilariteneyyys ioe ese. > wis aiete s 188
(GHERa EE as ota Ore EO Se eee 47
GROWTH, CoRRELATIONS OF MEAS-
UREMENTS oF, Clark Wissler.. 166
GROWTH OF YOUNG MAMMALS,
INFLUENCE OF NUTRITION ON
THE, Graham Lusk...... 174, 175
GrowtH, Tue, or Boys, Clark
IWASSlery Gott Se eres eerie 51-52
Guilletont rein cane sae ce 167
Gy STUU ee ea hase oy Pecks haber A ree 60
GYROSCOPE, SOME PECULIARITIES
or THE, G. B. Warring....184, 186
Haiwpa InpIANs, MyTHOLOGY AND
307
ORIGIN OF THE, J. R. Swanton,
DO, Et
|Hallock, Wm., An AsceNnT oF
Mr. WHITNEY, CALIFORNIA,
witH NoTES ON THE GEOL-
Gee SS Cet tay Ste aot Ps 165-166
A THERMOGRAPH FOR SOIL
REMPERARURE A... etecmicees oe Aas
MEASUREMENT OF THE ALTI-
TUDE OF MT. WHITNEY,
| CALIFORNIA, BY BOILING
| Portnt DETERMINATIONS,
LZ 57S
Report of summer work.... 70
Tue Macnetic DisTuRBANCE
OF STEEL WIRE PLUMB-
BOBS Peano 4-5
lente Stes eras se eka erties emery 8
Hamilton limestone ........... 81
Hampshire: basin 95.441 scan oe 86
Harp PALATE, OBSERVATIONS ON
ABNORMALITIES OF THE, Clark
SG RIGSS Rees es ee 177
Ebarlemginiverccmcs cess 74, 75, 76
Hauptman Earthwork.......... II
Hayworthis) rete). 6)<2 2 seeioeieee 61
Hay; Of Pi Bellows. -aci-.2 -6e eh yy
Report of summer work..72, 191
The Snout-Fishes of Kansas. 15
| Helderberg Mountains ......... 176
| Helium SAC Te ree 173; 174:
Evelsingtorsy ac. omy. ch-lNes sate oe ers 157
[Pe miy ep srettas a s.ctels ate athave ete 157
Hering, D. W.; Councillor....17, 88
Herophiluss. wet:-5..5¢.-00ceo: - 95
|Herrman Research Fund,
84, 85, 190, 201
Elesperidaeans: ose oh crotiert ors Hise HE
' HETEROCERAS SIMPLICOSTATUM
WHITF., OBSERVATIONS ON AND
EMENDED DESCRIPTION OF, R.
IPS wWihitheld’ 2524 cans cere oe 8-9
Heuvel: Emily Act.) Meni. = 6206
Hiiddentite <1. 4s meatier. eee 203
| Hinton, J. H.; Fin. Comm.17, 18, 209
Hipparchus-sinetem. ry teers ara 95
Hobbs, William H., GroLocy or
THE RIVER CHANNELS ABOUT
MANHATTAN ISLAND...... 73, 74-76
Hoffman, E. A., Death of...... 89
Hokkatdoy, (i508 So icreiars 5 eens 39
Hollister, Geo. B., THe Hypro-
* GRAPHIC WoRK OF THE UNITED
STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY... 159
oloblastionw asosctd create clos hon ke 45
| Homo tocies, CELL-LINEAGE AND
308
THE Stupy or, E. B. Wilson,
66, 67
Hone-STonESs, THE EFFECT OF
Various KINDS OF, ON THE
Cuttinc Epce or Toots, A. A.
hualien\ reer weer ere ..- 15-16 |
Honorary Members, N. Y. Ac.
Seis, eist#Oteccpecteee ore 139-141
HorNBLENDE ScHIST, THE, OF
SpuyTeN Duyvit CREEK, MAn-
HATTAN Istanp, A. A. Julien.. 181
Hororter, On THE, Geo. T.
SEGVENS) en crete wtniciauctene ehele 183, 197
ousatonte River eer. ace 74
Hovey, 2.) OF}; (Councillors... 209
Mellow tessa stone rrene yy 11 7/
OBSERVATIONS ON THE 1902-
1903 ERrupPTIONS OF Mr.
PELE, MARTINIQUE... ..192-193
FREE esa erarslovorohc ook Saas ae 8
Howes ret saan <cen ores iron 237
Hrdlicka, A., Physical Anthro-
pology of the Hyde Expedition
OE GTO OB ee oy stole cvctedolonercarsheters 177-179
Eiidsony Rivets lets eer 74, 76
elvavdistict in) Spaitins ee 9
Eiumehols:: 3 s..o su, sce tet eus enue ereccer 178
Hutton, James, Sketch of life. . 48-49
THEORY OF THE FORMATION
OF River VALLEYS, THE
CENTENARY OF JOHN Pray-
FAIR’S DEFENSE OF: MeE-
MORIALS BY Professors
Stevenson, Kemp and
ID0d gery: roaches ented: 47, 48-49
Huy ohenss:) ref-t occ sec eee 99
Fiyalites be 2 Matern tairekeetee rn oes 202
Hyatt -Alpheus*sreta cee eee 9
Hyprips, CYTOLOGICAL STUDIES OF
Variation 1n, W. A. Cannon,
164-165
Hyper ExPeEDITION OF 1902, PHys-
ICAL ANTHROPOLOGY OF THE,
AS Hrdlickay: iio: aoe 177-179
Hy droclastics rock. 1 -- eee Oe
Ely drocenie yrO0GkK.. 9... eer eee 201
HyprocrapHic, THE, WorK oF
THE UNITED STATES GEOLOG-
ICAL Survey, Geo. B. Hollister.
Eysinicomorphs) econ: orien 14
IcHTHYOSAURIA, THE ANCESTRY
OF THE, J. H. McGregor...... 55
TethyosSamuset ti. e suas cokes ote 187
Imperialipmeanimoth jee seer 187
Imdtarisa yea cewisictcte camaro eke a7
Inpians, Harpa, MyTHoLoGy AND
ORIGIN OF THE, J. R. Swanton,
LO; 11
INDEX.
INDIANS, INVESTIGATIONS AMONG
THE COMANCHE AND Ute, H.
H. St. Clair, 2d 159, 160-161
Indians, Mexican 178
Indians of British Columbia....
INDIANS, RECENT RESEARCHES ON
THE DECORATIVE ART OF THE
Prains, Clark Wissler....204—205
sheleve..sle ls 6 fee, jeioue
Indians, Sahaptin stock of...... 78
Indiansss S10 Uxeaa eer 7
Inpo-Cu1na, A TRIP THROUGH
FrencH, To AnGKorR Wat, W.
Si Kahnwetlerss. saree Bie ye
| INFLUENCE OF NUTRITION ON
THE GROWTH OF YOUNG MAm-
MALS, Graham Lusk...... 174, 175
Inland Sea, Japan, Oyster culture
INl, drone Gree em eee 39
Insectivioral Nascar ccme cekererae 14
Instincts, THE, OF LEPIDOPTERA,
Ay GS Miayet’=. 22s ans ries 180
Institute lof @hrancérs.. ee oer er 99
INTELLIGENCE AND MovEMENT,
R. S. Woodworth........ 193, 198
INTENSITY OF LIGHT AND THE
Error OF Perception, J. McK.
Cattellat2 niet ee eee 61, 63
INTERFEROMETER, A New, METHop
FOR MEASURING THE REFRAC-
TIVE INDEX OF A TRANSPARENT
Pirate, E. R. von Nardroff,
184, 185-186
INTERNAL, THE, Factors oF RE-
GENERATION AND REVERSAL OF
ASYMMETRY IN THE CRUSTA-
cEAN ALpueus, C. T. Brues,
186, 187-188
Invertebrata of Vancouver regon. 72
TRONMOLE — 2 execs clare csr suet ecepe) Ais item ete 189
|TRons, METEORIC, CLACKAMAS,
Gora Kunz? 6 eerie aoe 208
Irving, JjeeDe; ellow 7. 02-5. - 83, 88
litaliane renaissance: ere tee 96
Jackson, R. T., Locattzep STacEs
IN THE DEVELOPMENT OF
PLANTS AND ANIMALS....... 80-81
Jacoby, Harold, and S. A.
Mitchell, A Comsinep Pris-
MATIC TRANSIT AND ZENITH
TELESCOPE: ..-:, c..sn0e.- store 190, I9QI
Jacoby, Harold, Comparison oF
Astro-PHOTOGRAPHIC MEAs-
URES MADE WITH THE RESEAU
AND) “WwitHoum [teem emcees 156-158
James, William; Hon. Mem..12, 17
JAPAN AND THE PHILIPPINES,
JoURNEYINGS OF A NATURALIST
THROUGH, Bashford Dean.... 39
INDEX. 309
Japanese oyster-culture.......... 73 Tue Leuctte Hirrts' oF
JAPAN, Past AND PRESENT STUDY WIOMUNG io amiceraa etl 165, 166
oF ZooLocy 1n, Bashford Dean, WicesBnesme i rt eee tnee 88, 209
TO4M Os) WMeplenrsy rete ccceacy Ruta etre ee 98
Javelle; ref...... 223, 226, 227, 237/| Kiel, Experiments on school chil-
Jesupe Northeeacihic Expeditions Osim Gbem at. 1 -11see eee oe 62
ewsroteNew: Vorkas.o.c.)5 52 sa6 78 | Kiowa-Comanche Reservation... 160
Jews, THE ANCIENT SEMITES SSW Wet ets, cna ict chateea settee el ee 48
AND THE Mopern, M. Fisch- MEGAN ES GIA bod oo oeo be 166, 187
(DE ROMS Gat cum, Senor hate THO—=1O Ol Wonyakespeople uncles eee eee: 63
Johns Hopkins University Ob- KremismUnStets ue ae see einen 235
SEGVALOTYs Soar oni om na aciere 242 | Kroeber, A. L., Report of sum-
Johnson, D. W., Tue GroLocy or INET WOLKE Aer eee ea oat oy)
THE Cerittos Hitts, New Cy DEOL EG cme oe tere aie M7, ay
INNES ORCLOY) ayy eae One cicpceh meee 181-182 | Kunz, Geo. F., BrismuruH (Na-
John Strong Newberry Fund.... 190 TIVE) AND BISMUTH FROM
JOURNEYINGS OF A NATURALIST San BERNARDINO Co., CAL.,
THROUGH JAPAN AND THE 192, 193
PuitipPines, Bashford Dean. 309 CALIFORNITE (VESUVIANITE) ;
Jovian subsystem........:.... 3036 A NEw ORNAMENTAL
Judd, Chas. H., THe Z6LLNER SMONBisghocdaaace so neMo, gos
EUG UR BUNS hits, ohare Sais, ae 193, 195-1096 | CLACKAMAS MetTeortIc Irons. 208
iaihieney SEEING Bo peceoo se eee as 283, 286, | Councillonaeee een oe 88
(julien eALe AU: Curators... 2 o: 17 | Curatore naspciatate oka 17
THe Errect oF VARIOUS | EXHIBITION OF SPECIMENS.. 47
Kinps oF Hone-STONES GeM MINERALS OF SOUTHERN
ON THE CuTTING EDGE oF CATTROR NTA Ene ae oe 208
HOOUST Mya r a eee eae 15-16 MiIneERALoGicaL NOoTES..201, 204
Tue HorNBLENDE SCHIST OF REE Seer ree ie ae encores 203
SPuYTEN Duyvit CREEK, | Report of section of ele-
MaNnHATTAN ISLAND...... 181 | Dhani ptisk err creee 70
Jupiter..30, 219, 220, 221, 222, 223,, Kunz, Geo. F., and Charles
2202 25220, 2285 220. 230,232 ni Baskerville, Notes on Radium,
258-286, 288, 289, 290, 291, 292,| __ : 190, 191
293, 206, 298 Grav anise adleo Aen too cua aap hace 202
Kahnweiler, W. S. A Trip Lactose vette etre tenets 175
THROUGH FrencH Inpo-CHINA LaGRANGE’s Eguations or Mo-
TO THE ANGKOR WaAT........ ite 32) T10N, AN ExpertMEeNT RE-
IAISCT Mehta toe festa roca eh 53 BESS BO) ee
, oF, TO ELectric Currents, W.
i<amichadalspeopleysa. 4... os. 6. 63 S. Da oy
: Ne RMI EE iGo oi, 0. 8-68 65-66
Kansas, THE Snout-FIsueEs oF, ake=Ihouise: <.,.f nee 208
Ue 120 Ch Gane icin aoerecen Elam bertse neta. ae eeeee 220
(ENING Aerie oman : 78, 79| LanpstipzE, AN INTERESTING, IN
Keeler; iEling'y, old crea Caan eee 84 THE CHACO CaNon, NEw
Kelvin, Lady; HONE te UE ears z Mexico, R. E. Dodge.. .-47, 49-50
Kelvin, Lord; ref..... Bongo Ones 7.52) ean cley i crehaeprre irate: 173
Kemp, James F., Comments on Langmann, Gustav; Fellow. ..83, 88
THE GEOLOGY oF BINGHAM La Place; ref.........264, 266, 267
CaNon, UTAH....... Fie O—7 7) law lata ViltSelinne eee nae te 14
Memorial by, THE CENTEN- LaRAMIE GROUP, DESCRIPTION OF
ARY OF JOHN PLAyYFAIR’S A New TEREDO-LIKE SHELL
DEFENSE OF JAMES Hut- FROM THE, R. P. Whitfield..... 8,9
TON’S THEORY OF THE Laudy, Louis’ H:; Curator. ..... 17
ForMATION OF RIVER VAL- Lava fields of Whitney Creek.... 70
TEE VIS) eee thd, wines steed 47, 48-49 | Lava flow on Mt. Whitney...... 165
Retr dius wateve ae 74, 189, 202, 203! LEAD AnD Zinc District, THE
310 INDEX.
MINERALS OF THE JOPLIN, Mo., THE RELATION BETWEEN, AS
AES ROGCLS 5 cre ascii 59, 60-61 | ELucIpATED By EXPERIMENTS
Weadhillite, y..2 .o5\2-0 74 enter 60; upon Meroceny, E. B. Wilson,
Lee, Fred. S.; Councillor....... 17 | 85-86
Report of summer work...71-72 |
Weibnitas) ret. cockecenere cee 100
Bepidopteramercir-c) tiple are 192
LEPIDOPTERA, CoLtor PATTERNS
TNs AS Gp MAVCh:.-..nsc es sore 55-56
LEPIDOPTERA, THE INSTINCTS OF,
ASG Mayer 2) crs. c teeta cee 180
Leucite, Ture, Hirts oF Wy-
oMING, J. F. Kemp........165, 166
Le Verrier; ref....220, 221, 264, 290
Levison, W. G., ExuipiTIon OF
SPECIMENS OF GNEISS AND
SERPENTINE FROM THE
SouTHERN Enp oF MaAn-
EVA AN SISA N Dist eine VTE
Note ON FLUORESCENT
GEMS) so0 ae 7a SOUL O2 203
Lexell; ref..219, 220, 221, 222, 225,
286, 287, 290, 292, 293
Librarian, N. Y. Ac. Sci., An-
nual Report of 21, 92-93, 213
TAbraries in vRomess. 2.2) eee 95
iibranywot Neo Aco Sciam ar 170
Library, Report of Special Com-
mittee on Exchanges’ and
Mransters ote ether. sericea 171-172
Lick Observatory....... PN BB, eh
lire JHistoryv:) DHE, joneGy—
TORYCTES VARIOL#, THE CAUSE
or Sma.tipox, G. N. Calkins.. 201
Life Members of N. Y. Ac. Sci... 124
Lent, INTENSITY OF, AND THE
Error oF Perception, J. McK.
Cattell sa Reet. me ieeictc ad yee 61, 63
Limestone..16, 47, 69, 74, 75, 76, 77,
188, 189
CGorpnilenous) eee eee e eee 81
Onondaga: 9h ei cee oe Noe 176
Hamuiltony; ace seep eee 81
Wiainllittts® ce acratahay orececreate 176
LIMESTONE REGION OF MICHIGAN,
ACA Wi Grabatt + ace .se eee 81
(iMOMIEEY (oc acrnucu eee ei ee 60
LSINMATLLE | ac ee east Stee are 60, 61
inesot Blakiston +c. eerie 39
Linguistic stocks in California.. 77
leiniiean eS OCICLYFy er teense 102
Linville, H. R.; Fellow......83, 88
eiguid. vaireh. cna Soe oa ee 174
Diquid #hivdrocen-e) trois eer oe 174
Wid Chineistandss-1o 4227 titer 39
MODSien'<"Srets sya ke cee 62
LOCALIZATION AND CLEAVAGE, ON
|
LOCALIZATION OF BRAIN FuNc-
TLO NAR Solem EGA TZ. ee oie 193, 194
LocaLizED STAGES IN THE DE-
VELOPMENT OF PLANTS AND
Animats, R. T. Jackson... .80-81
Location, THE, oF MHt1stToric
Towns AND “NATIONS” OF
New Mexico PRIOR TO 1630,
F. S. Dellenbaugh ......... IO-II
Lockyer, INss-Srei.2 saceeeeee 43, 44
Lord, Benjamin, Death of...... 89
Lorentian series of Makes...-.: 74
Lough, J. E., Apparent Morion
IN STEREOSCOPIC VISION,
166, 168
Bellow: asics ote ote cee 83, 88
Memory oF Scuoot CuHIL-
DREN O4esotcc nee koa 61, 62-63
Love, 1. (G:s (Curatomre eee ny
Lowell, Percival, Mopern Mars,
53-54
Lower Olisocene>...5 5-4 tsoe eee 44
Lucretitiss ‘reficyaaci ce emer 95
Luqueer, Lea MclI., On THE DeE-
TERMINATION OF THE RELATIVE
REFRACTIVE INDICES oF MIN-
ERALS IN RocK SECTIONS BY
THE Brcke METHOD 59-60
Lusk, Graham, INFLUENCE OF
NUTRITION ON THE GROWTH OF
Younc MAMMALS......... 174, 075
Lutaceous: rocks. 2a nee 202
Lyceum of Natural History..... IOI
Change of name 74-0. I13-I15
Liyelliss tek. oss Sty. See 48
Madlers. reb. Az,0. 2/068 eee 53
Magnetic observatories......... 70
Macnetic, THE, DISTURBANCES
oF STEEL WIRE PLUMB-BOBS,
Wim Hallock. <n eee 4-5
Maenetite sien. sess nent ele mieee 68
Malachite ©). crc.) atce2 oc oetenonetee 47
MamMats, INFLUENCE OF NuTRI-
TION ON THE GROWTH OF
Younc, Graham Lusk....174, 175
MamMats, THE ORIGIN AND DE-
VELOPMENT OF SouTH AMERI-
GAN, OW. BN SCOLL.. ene ore 14-15
Mammoth, Wniperial’. yas or 187
MANHATTAN ISLAND, EXHIBITION
oF SPECIMENS OF GNEISS AND
SERPENTINE FROM THE SOUTH-
ERN Enp or, W. G. Levison..73, 74
INDEX.
MANHATTAN ISLAND, GEOLOGY OF
THE RIvER CHANNELS ABOUT,
Wm. H. Hobbs 73, 74-76
Manuattran ISLAnp, THE Horn-
BLENDE SCHIST OF SPUYTEN
Duyvit Creek, A. A. Julien. ..181
Manlius limestone 176
ap! e) ave, a Abele ein ieiie ve
Man, NaturAt SELECTION AND
Fertitity 1n, E. L. Thorndike,
186, 187
Mapstot. Mars’. ..3.4 5.9 J cident 53
Mia DLE Sar Sad fete eciaus Po eels sc Oboe 188
IMancasite sas ccce eo rte es oe es 60, 61
Mark, Prof., Report of summer
work IQI
IMarse226, 228, 2290) 230, 232) 250;
260, 261, 262, 263
Marshall, H. R., Primary AnD
SECONDARY PRESENTATIONS.....
Mars, Mopern, Percival Lowell,
53-54
Marsupials) aavoncis ess os stom = 14
Martian) Subsystem)......5.... gi) 936
MartinD: Siviret ccc ssc. 203
Report of summer work
Martin, T. S.; Fellow
Martinique, Island of....... 192, 193
Mastodon, Miocenesss..4: su... 187
Matthew, W. D.; Fellow...... Ta a7,
MaturaTIon, THE CyToLoGIcaL
PHENOMENA OF, AND FIRST
CLEAVAGE IN THE CIRRIPED
Ecc, M. A. Bigelow......... 44, 46
Miaingjiay.OGs sais auc sievechers e setense 39
Niaswelly: iret Such sarterecicle isles 65
Mayer, A. G., Cotor PATTERNS
IN LEPIDOPTERA......... 55-56
Tue CoraLt REEFS OF THE
BATHAMIAS vecrete cribs seus 206, 207
Tue Dry TortTuGaAs AS A
BrioLoGicaL STATION FOR
HRESIBAIRGEL Welk pistel enacts eis, 158
Tue Instincts oF LEpPIpop-
DERAMMOTR Beata cris. eee LOO
MacDougall, Robert, An Ex-
PERIMENT IN FAcIAL
IW DSWOING ete eee ae 167, 168-169
Pelloweaceetintety cies. noel 83, 88
On THE RELATION OF RE-
ACTIONS TO CERTAIN SEC-
ONDARY STIMULI........ 82, 83
Tue SPECIALIZATION OF THE
Hanp IN RELATION TO
MentTAL DEVELOPMENT.... 182
Two EXPERIMENTS IN COLOR
VISION eurenO Le Oe
McGregor, J. H., THe Ancestry
OF THE ICHTHYOSAURIA
311
MEASUREMENT AND CALCULATION,
President’s Address, R. S.
Woodward 22-39
MEASUREMENT OF THE ALTITUDE
oF Mr. WHITNEY, CALIFORNIA,
BY Bortinc Pornrt DETERMI-
nations, Wm. Hallock....172-173
MEASUREMENT, THE, OF RACING
Yacuts, C. L. Poor. ..198, 199-200
IMeEChaniGSs ii yay)ctie eins otieeae's AR, £6)
Medical school of Salerno...... 97
Medici, Cosimo dei; ref........ 94
Meetings of N. Y. Ac. Sci...... 125
Mie oa CenOpSi © ssveas siete sore ames © 44
Mielamtenite ® Factdacisi ats tle sccies ie aie 60
Meltzer, S. J.; Fellow........ TeYy hig
Membership, N. Y. Ac. Sci., List
Ole PS Sievers) @ yarcieheforae sara cto nts 128-152
Memory oF ScHooLt CHILDREN,
[fe dd, WUOUTENS oade.o oe acc 61, 62-63
MeEnpvDEL’s Law, CHROMOSOMIC
REDUCTION IN ITS RELATION TO,
W.S. Sutton 174, 175
MenTAL TRAITS, GRADES FOR, J.
McK Cattellienaeeeee ns 167, 169
MENTAL TRAITS IN THE Two
Sexes, E. L. Thorndike...... 182
MeEROGENY, ON THE RELATION
BETWEEN LOCALIZATION AND
CLEAVAGE AS ELUCIDATED BY
EXPERIMENTS UPON, E. B.
Waals O90 ii crcphers hone rereieeiste a 85-86
Merrill hay. Hes rete. eee se 74
Messier: “rept nwawcece hess s 3 219
Metamorphic, Trocktaces- cee se 202
Meteoric Irons, CLACKAMAS, G.
HAP KUNZ 6. ae ca toe: ee AC 208
Meteor TRAILS, SOME Facts RE-
GARDING PERSISTENT,—THE SIG-
NIFICANCE OF SIZE, CoLorR AND
Drirt, C. C. Trowbridge. .156, 158
MetTEoR TRAINS, THE PHYSICAL
NaTuRE OF PERSISTENT, C. C.
TLOWDIIDSE: esd cceetis. ste oe ates 42-43
Mexican Indiariss= en erie een ain. 178
Mexico, Peoples and ruins in.177, 178
Meyer, Adolph; Fellow....... 83, 88
Ress) Miem 7 fcincisicess: neces 2
| Meyer Olen: + treten trite) i ets = 31
Mica, SoME INCLUSIONS IN, AND
THEIR RELATION TO THE PER-
CUSSION FicurEe, Geo. E.
ASD Waren ser ee ted a aee's 68
Michelsonse Prot] refs aaes-28,, ox
MIcHIGAN, LIMESTONE REGIONS
On wAte Wir GhADAW. co. esc cece cue 81
MiGraAtTIon, THE EFFECT OF THE
312
Winp on Birp, C. C. Trow-
DHGGeHs. ss eee 44, 46
MineratocicaL Notes, Geo. F.
KUNZ Perens 201, 204
Mineralogy, Section of,
Meeting, Jan. 20, 1902..... 8-10
Heb: 07590 02ers 15-16 |
Marsch) “1728 1o02h ee 47-51
April ra mtoO2 7. 59-61 |
Mays 300-910 O2 erie 68-69
Oct 2oys1902h tcmee ae 73-77
INOVi D7, LOO2 etek 81
AEVa AOR SOR ogoaca nade 159
Bebi ose T003"e eee 165-166 |
Marchien6,) 003i 175-176
PNorell Xo, SK si55 pono 181-182
Mia a SaeuiG O39 eeeweeier 188-189
Oct. 165) 1o03 meee 192-193
Nov. 16, 1903......20I—204
IDES I OKO G be Our 207-208
MINERALOGY, THE, AND GEOLOGY
OF THE SUDBURY-ONTARIO-CopP-
PER-NICKEL Deposits, C. W.
Dickson
Minerals exhibited at Charleston.
MINERALS, ON THE DETERMINA-
TION OF THE RELATIVE RE-
FRACTIVE INDICES OF, IN Rock |
SECTIONS BY THE BECKE |
Meruop, Lea McI. Luqueer..59-60 .
MINERALS, THE, OF THE JOPLIN,
Mo., Leap AND Zinc DrstRICctT,
A. F. Rogers 59, 60-61
176
70)
0 Je) e/[e; 0, ©. fave) = (oe ‘s'e\lee) ole ie) ae) v.
Miner, J. B., InvoLtuntary Mus-
CULAR RESPONSES TO
RHYTHMIC STIMULI....40, 41 |
TIME INTERVALS BOUNDED
BY VARIED STIMULI...... 82
MOC Orie os fayainvs suk ne tetas core terone 14
Miocene mastodon’s.cs ces. ce 187
Misakay nc. cites Sete temo oer 39
Mitchell, S. A.; Fellow....... 83, 88
OBSERVATIONS ON THE FLASH
SPECTRUM AT THE Svu-
MATRA ECLIPSE...... 42, 43-44
LNG MR nae Reeeeenets ec ats oe 242
Rés: Memmi. 3 seiateneewere 2
Tue Discovery or NEw
GASES IN THE SuN,
D725 073-174)
Mitchell, S. A., and Harold
Jacoby, A Comsrinep Pris-
MATIC TRANSIT AND ZENITH |
LEDGES COPE Mn neck mone I90, I9I |
MopEern Mars, Percival Lowell,
53-54 |
Moffet, Fred H., Tue Copper
INDEX.
MINES OF CoBRE, SANTIAGO DE
CUBA sata ens PRO CNY er ays 188, 189
Moka towns) a.wasceeieae cee II
Molluscan, eggs cnc ee cee 192
Motiuscan Ecc, An ExpeErti-
MENTAL STUDY OF THE GERM-
REGIONS IN THE, E. B. Wilson,
206, 207
Mongoliany:#ac2 cee ae eee 160
Monohybrids eerste eenten aereecioe 164
Montague, W. P., THe “ Spe-
CIOUS PRESENT” AND THE REAL
PRESENT icersieneet oa he 193, 195
MonTANA, GEOLOGICAL OBSERVA-
TIONS ALONG THE NORTHERN
Bounpary or, Geo. I. Finlay,
68, 69
Moreno; )Driicetya eee ee eee 14
lWGthSe and oe wie Se eee 7 72
|Morus, VariaTION AND REPRO-
DUCTIVE SELECTION IN SATUR-
nip, H. E. Crampton...... 180-181
Motor AND Sensory ASSOCIA-
TIONS, QUANTITATIVE RELA-
TIONS BETWEEN, J. H. Bair.... 40
$Motorm areas) «nie Gcln ois ae 194
Met. Biddlez oe), Seaman Coble ee 208
Mt. Dawsontia.-ricenace secre 208
VES) clita tonne a eee ere 208
Met: (Goodsitwiz tJ oat eee 208
Mt. Hamslton tee erisne 238, 253, 254
Wie laksraterloy Cancadmeaaes os sos 208
Mt: Lefroy2 sick 4eee eee 208
Mt; Pelées Ash frome cee 70
| Mr. Pett, Martinique, OBSER-
VATIONS ON THE 1902-1903
ErupTIons oF, E. 0. Hovey.192—193
Mr. Witney, CALIFoRNIA, AN
ASCENT OF, WITH NOTES ON
THE GeoLocy, William Hal-
VO CK Ase ao Nee Oe at 165-166
Mr. WHITNEY, CALIFORNIA,
MEASUREMENT OF THE ALTI-
TUDE OF, BY BormLinc Point
DETERMINATIONS, William Hal-
LOCK Rees erchic 5 3e ee ae 172-173
Mt. Whitney, Observations on.. 70
MovEMENT, INTELLIGENCE AND,
| R.S. Woodworth.......-: 193, 198
Mudinrock-sern Sos caceie eee 202
Muscutar, INVOLUNTARY, RE-
SPONSES TO RHYTHMIC STIMU-
ET, ls By Miner sntiac5 eee 40, 41
Muscular Work, Effect of alcohol
Cys ECR Rae CC hoor Ab Matic 71
MyTHOLOGY AND ORIGIN OF THE
Haina Inptans, J. R. Swanton,
10, II
INDEX. 313
Weahannmpeoplesiie = -<e11- es 66 «= 177, || Organization (of... =... 109-152
Nahuatl language ........0-%+- 161 Record of Meetings, January
National Academy of Sciences.. 101 |
“Nations” oF New Mexico
PRIOR TO 1630, THE LocaTION
oF Historic Towns AND, F. S.
Dellenbaugh +5. 365. s14ec 7
NATURAL SELECTION AND FER-
TILITY IN Man, E. L. Thorn-
Cikeh a hot cote arene 186, 187
NaturAL SELECTION IN SAMIA
cecropiA, H. E, Crampton..6, 7-8
IN/AGKNESY Ges apooos 39
Naval Observatory.
eile ere af! sie ee 8.6
RUriyeretoe cue 242 |
Nebule, Photographs of......... 84 |
Nematode eggs......2.%5+--055 = 46
INementeanmes asa crete oisietelelerais 192
INGO Qieniciale eee. colon Epona Tew:
NEPHELITE SYENITE AREA AT
San Jos£, TAMAULIPAS, MEXICO,
THe GEoLocy oF THE, Geo. I. |
INDIES Ao op bee be OO OOmOG 188-189
INESO COTM asic ois 2 ere sienstere elle, sueyles cue 15
Neugebauer; ref...........224, 232
Newark aSySteml) Gi. cic se.clew <leiet ete 75
Newer Atlantis: i cst acvers olecs scslers 99
Newberry, Prof:........:... 57, 74
Newcomb; ref.,
228, 242, 243, 266, 268, 279
INiew? (Gaineay > aie sa cs sev ecis als 39
New Mexico prior TO 1630, THE
Location oF Historic Towns
AnD “Nations” or, F. S.
Dellen baw saa oat tsirel> IO-II
ING witons mere tay cress ocrciicts setae oe 9
New York Academy of Sciences,
Annual Meeting, Feb. 24,
OW. ‘Bhs. conce aatwor 16—22
TECK win Gp bOO Zhe ere ss 87-93
DEC ya T1003). i stters 208-215
Monthly Meeting, Jan. 6,
MOO’ xcpatateustelsveyerae ties 3
Ile bw 3, LO O2 cic. ave tie wr 12-13
Miarehinsiy tO 02%. 1.) c16 1 41-42
dopa Gis Se Coyote rence ecrcie 52
dren Yo” ago Sole 58-59
Wien BO OZicn0 oc cte) ons 64-65
OctribyelOO2 nee carey 69
INiOWie Sue LOO erat eralene 2 7
PCCr arn BQO2 acre. vole «i 83-84
JarerSi LO OB) se relcvers sists’ 155
Heb yucte LG Oserasttservesel-ic 161
March 2, 1903.....- 170-172
Atpril Gimeno OSs) sietateicnale 179
Mays 4 eLoosyidrinae mtorr 184
OBES SHIT OS iss wens Orso ce 190
Nias (2s LG OSh eucisvelrere 198
Dees 7p TOOS ee anes oe 205-206
to December, 1902
Record of Meetings, January
to December, 1903....153-215.
|New York University ........: 103
TEIN TG ees dv acaves ober hoes eavevenel aehobeBere cones 223
WINite kel: Wizyg s-tevah-tenetasiajcnel store iencestenets 176
| Nominations for officers of N. Y.
Nee “Scie carracia retorts bates 205:
Norman kelleshallesnecp-tersnre races 176
NionthieRavieting sci siarctereiaeeetocre 74
Note oN Fiuorescent Gems, W.
G. Levison 201, 202-203
Notes on Rapium, G. F, Kunz
and Chas. Baskerville....190, 191
Notes on THE Rio T1nTo Cop-
PER District, James Douglas,
8, 9-10
Notes ON THE WASHINGTON
Meetinc, E. H. Sneath. ..167, 169
INoviacilitesmerromoccccier cho etenactaeters 16
Nova Persei, Photographs of....
NutTRITION, INFLUENCE OF, ON
THE GROWTH OF YouNG MAm-
MALS, Graham Lusk T7Ane W7S}
OBSERVATIONS ON ABNORMALITIES
oF THE Harp Parate, Clark
WHISSIETI Satie etecisictaieine cette
OBSERVATIONS ON AND EMENDED
DESCRIPTION OF HETEROCERAS
SIMPLICOSTATUM WHITF., R. P.
Whitfield
OBSERVATIONS ON THE I902-1903
Eruptions oF Mr. PELE, Mar-
TINIQUE, E. O. Hovey 192-193.
Observatories making observa-
tions of Comet 188 9—1896—
1903 236, 238, 241
Officers of N. Y. Ac. Sci....121-122
| Ogemaw County, Michigan...... II
Ogilvie, Ida H.; Act. Mem.... 64
Bello wats crcstats tore ceatoveives 205, 209
Ohmi'si laiwicciowkeouis ecieverotee teeta. 5
@ld> Camp Vancentese cts aor. II
vk were WES occas berodongedc II
Oligocene’ <a.vens wes Nees sie 44
Onondaga limestones acon 176
On Recent Mopers anp_ ReE-
STORATIONS OF A NUMBER OF
Extinct ANIMALS, WITH A Dis-
CUSSION OF THEIR PROBABLE
Hasits AND Mopes oF LIFE,
HOSE IO Short ore neers a arene 186-187
| On THE CoLors AND CoLor-Pat-
TERNS OF CERTAIN BERMUDA
Fisues, C. L. Bristol..... 174, 175
On THE DETERMINATION OF THE
314 INDEX.
RELATIVE REFRACTIVE INDICES THENOGENESIS In, G. UN.
OF MINERALS IN RocK SEc- Calkins =... 7, is ccneereerere 66, 67
TIONS BY THE BecKE METHOD,
Lea McI. Luqueer........... 59-60
On tHE Hororrer, Geo. T.
StEVENS: 925 Sacraceiaciee ne 193, 197
On THE PRIMARY DIVISIONS OF
THE RepritiaA Into Two Sus-
cLtasses, H. F. Osborn....164, 165
On THE RELATION BETWEEN
LocaALIZATION AND CLEAVAGE AS
ELUCIDATED BY EXPERIMENTS
upon Meroceny, E. B. Wil-
SOM: voyeis cs eyere.5:a) o's od eletansts tes oeenenes 85-86
On THE RELATION OF REACTIONS
TO CERTAIN SECONDARY STIMU-
tt, R. T. MacDougall
48) pall oes arcgs toy cis, yavake tai ena eerie eg eokedete 202
Oppolzer; ref 228, 259, 271
Order of Business of N. Y. Ac.
Sci
Order of Court to change name
of Lyceum of Natural His-
tory II3-115
ORGANISMS, THE RELATION BE-
TWEEN THE VARIABILITY OF
CELLS AND THAT OF ORGAN-
IsMs, Franz Boas
Organization of the N. Y. Ac.
Sci 109-152
ORIGIN AND DEVELOPMENT, THE,
oF SoutH AMERICAN Mam-
AUAT: Sm Wiese (SCOLE AR aerate
Ornithoptera
Osborn, H. F.; Fin. Comm.....
On Recent MopeE.Ls AnD RE-
STORATIONS OF A NUMBER
OF Extinct ANIMALS,
WITH A DISCUSSION OF
THEIR PROBABLE HABITS
AND Mopec oF LIFE...186—187
On THE Primary DIVISIONS
oF Reptiria Into Two
SUBCLASSES
se eee ee
olals\ else 6. (ofeteln ie) e/sie) vpsl.o siecle « (olin
elevieiele: sis s/s) s//s)\e ele) mie\\s\'s) aie
ele Olle \u (elie) ele te e\e).e\01 610’ siete e
Report of summer work.... 191
Tue Four PHyta oF TITANO-
TELERES os, evar ciavece sis: S ee RS 44-45
Osborn, Raymond, Report of
Epbhobavs Vike oo ooo ceoodcodon 72
Oxford Wniversitys «<< scl. NOY
Oxideyor Manganeses.45 6.0446 6: 5
Oyster culture in Japan....... 20,073
Ozationup litte: patient eee ee 61
Pdleozoic coral reefs... sales eee 72
Palisa destin tite riscisie since niet 76
Papiliogy. taecon are. haere ict ie 55, 50
Ranramceituine 2a riences ie 72, 158
PARAM@CIUM, ARTIFICIAL Par-
| PARAM@CIUM, DEGENERATION IN,
| AND SO-CALLED REJUVENESCENCE
witHouT ConjucaTion, G. N.
Calkins see Aan Be 6-7
Paris: -Academiyarn sincere eens 100
Paris basin gy. iercqieniats cir a eee 86
Paris: ESA «5 Scone arage meters eheeroree 157
Parker, H. C., ExpreRIMENTS
CONCERNING VERY BRIEF
ELECTRICAL CONTACTS..161—-163
EXPLORATIONS AND FIRST
ASCENTS IN THE CANADIAN
ROCKIES snc7ansisae ero orn 208
Fellow sss .elss ais sere 83, 88
THE VARIATON OF CONTACT
RESISTANCE WITH CHANGE
OF ELECTROMOTIVE FORCE..4, 5
Parker, S. C., CorrELATION OF
ScHoot ABILITIES....182, 183-184
PARTHENOGENESIS, ARTIFICIAL, IN
ParAMacium, G. N. Calkins.66, 67
Pascal; ret. 99
Patrons, N. Yo Ac) Sciz ist otemn3s
Ratronssoiw Np Ye Ace SCRE 12
Réarl’+ a:eean sere ese ee 202
Pearsons -ret.s 5.2%. 7,
Rearsonjs onmulay, weer 194
PeGOS) c.aca ti onesie eee II
Pectolite” sc.cmcen ane 204
Pegram, G. B., ExperIMENTAL
METHODS OF STUDYING
RVADIO-ACTIVIIY: a) see ere 13-14
EXPERIMENTS ON THE ELEC-
TROLYSIS OF RADIOACTIVE
SUBSTANCES! Js. Mee eee 78-79
Report of summer work.... 70
Relagicsanimalsepr meni iaes 207
Pertacrinus) Gs3).- ha eeeeae eee 80
Pentlandite: 1 ss ccsiacharse:c etic ers 176
PERCEPTION, INTENSITY oF LIGHT
AND THE Error oF, J. McK.
Cattell’ 2 ja mectecteaee eres 61, 63
PERCUSSION FicurEe, SoME In-
CLUSIONS IN MICA AND THEIR
RELATION To, Geo. E. Ashby.. 68
Pericles spenet is,0:5-0:0se ae 96
\ERORIMUI AT a es eo) oYalmale cove.c,ceeteeyeepebate 55
|Peterssh Tei io isrcies~ wks aeeeeepenete 242
Peterson, F.; Fellow........- 83, 88
Ress Meme cis creies s.cieeee eee 42
Peter the. Great;. ref. .ce seks. 100
Pfister, J: C.;, Fellows. :2.--- 84, 88
Pharmacophactisi.. cack cies oe 56
PHILIPPINES, JOURNEYINGS OF A
NATURALIST THROUGH JAPAN
AND THE, B. Dean
INDEX. 315
Piilosamia cyimthial ..-<. «vcs er Shiletadesiay et aay evant tatenes onsite scare TSY7)
Philosophical Clubsof Vale wOnity. a1) || PICISEOCEMEy syle). clev oyu - = 14
IPHenterans i)... 6 iden bees (eee RhMMOCeross (asses ees See ses 187
Puonetic Surveys, E. W. Scrip- Pleutrotoma \-. 2.5. Sa on 86
LEDS) no cack SE CR Ra eee TOG NG 7—enOS) MOULIN Vise h reyaaiieeistae icles telalensie 95
RON OLAP Oly >, « ava.cyeles Seo earedelke kere 167 | PLumMB-Bogs, THE MaGnetic Di1s-
FSHOSPHORUS! 62). \b.005 om oa svcseielclcne oie 189 TURBANCE OF STEEL WIRE,
PuHoToGRAPHY, RECENT RESULTS Wim Halll Ocks Systran: varieties 4-5
In ASTRONOMICAL, WITH THE PoGGENDORFF ILLUSION, THe EF-
Forty-INCH REFRACTOR AND FECTS OF PRACTICE ON THE,
WITH THE Two-Foot REFLECTOR E. H. Cameron and W. H.
OF THE YERKES OBSERVATORY, MILCCLE Gon Lh er pases tamer 193, 195
GraWe “RItChe ys wie cen sae 84-85) Poor, Cyl.) Councillors. o.00.4- 17
Phryetan! mysteries 22 2... ss 96 Brditor dare eae ternens cee ae 88, 209
Puyza, THe Four, oF TITANo- | RESEARCHES AS TO THE
THERES, H. F. Osborn....... 44-45 IDENTITY OF PERIODIC
PHYLOGENY, THE, OF THE FusI- CoMET OF 1889—1896—1903
pa Al Wi. Graba->...- 85, 86-87 | (Brooks) WITH THE
PuHySICAL ANTHROPOLOGY OF THE Prertopic COMET OF 1770
Hype ExprpITIoNn oF 1902, A. GQHEXEDNT)) Wynd aractyce 2208
UC dlickar hy saitslecacietes cotee 177-179 THe MEASUREMENT OF Rac-
IBnySical WSCIENGCE! crs oerctears ce ee 24 | TNE NONE. Als ou 198, 199-200
PuysicaL, THE, NATURE OF PER- | Wa CES PIreSie as, 2. css ores oats 88, 209
SISTENT METEOR Trains, C. C. teimDlahAnia no oo bia decom DC oUe eanE 188
DEOW DIGS Gad sro Bowe stonen 42—Aa\ Pontlandecementir. oem ec cee ee 81
Physical types ofi Jews......... 160 Post, C. A.; Fin. Comm..17, 88, 209
Physics, Section of, WPErath | amideeNctVicmina.re let 190
Meeting, Jan. 6, 1902....... A—halberaiteles ya eile <p -rsrels!cisisesy -1sstelielers 96
iets ht OG2 nee sete ste 13-14 | PRELIMINARY, A, REPORT OF
Marches anoO2emeean: 42-44 ScientiFic Men, W. H. Davis,
April 29026 ace 52-54 167, 182, 183
IMIG By nC on can woo 65-06 | PRESENTATIONS, PRIMARY AND
OcteiGmngo2seneeaee 69-70, Seconpary, H. R, Marshall... 194
INONA, S15 ACOA 56 aac so Gc 78-79 PRESENT, THE SPECIOUS, AND
IDCs 8 WOW dogod Geos 84-85| THE Reat Present, W. P.
Bits Gy MOG cdAocugotosiae. Momntagie® soos scn6 steer 193, 195
Rebie2siro03iae a. ae 161-164 | President’s Address, N. Y. Ac.
Manche. 1908-1441 L72=U7A| EISCls a we. «c mine ora eeiee 22-39, 94-108
ANpyell OF ROMRs5 4 aocccoc TON |g IIMALES) oe vara oo) oheuckerei cs obatoreienel cee 14
WIEN 4h, TOR 4 shoo oos Te64—186 | Prince, J.D:s Bellow... «1. 84, 88
Och Sr elOOsiiete sw ics 190-191 | Prince of Wales Island......... 47
INOVs 2akOQO3 on nace FOS —2O0!| ETOCCOLS Les «eyes al reise - ovate elt 53
Pittard, Ho iG:; Kellow......-- 84988) Proteid, si: <arace sel temeeiee oa era 175
Pineke pen elimar eyes aan nes oes 220 | ProtopLasMic Oxrp Acer, G. N.
BinksstOpazs mows secaveieeet aeer ome = 202h- Calkins tacos cio asseren creeper 158
ECHR Varer ck ich pores oasis aoe, ohenatae- aX 164) | bcotosphly teenie enieyete aaielslet rel olet <a> 15
PLANTS AND ANIMALS, LOCALIZED PP rOLOZOd: reter eeeniaikstetsichetlatersnsts 192
STAGES IN THE DEVELOPMENT Przibramissretaccvy-cl-terci eon Fiesty)
align dad BS ENOLEOO Coc Goose 80-81 | PsycHoLocists, STATISTICS OF
Platosere fics. ce ere esa 94| AMERICAN, J. McK. Cattell. 193, 196
Platonic: Acadetniy srieieeie es cies.< 94| Psychology, Progress in........ 169
PIAEVCrINUS! US)s). Rieter tietene 80, 81 Psychology, Section of,
PLAYFAIR’S, JOHN, THE CENTEN- Meeting, Jan. 27, 1902..... I0-I2
ARY OF, DEFENSE OF JAMES BebipestenG O2hreas.- vere ee 40-41
Hutton’s THEORY OF RIVER March 24. 1902. 2 .)<.0- 51-52
VALLEYS: MeEmMorRIALS By Pro- April’ 28) 1902. ccna. 61-63
fessors Stevenson, Kemp and Octin2z7, ToO2cea ees 77-78
DOUGE: os jsscloeere eres: 47, 48-49 | INOvenldop LOOD aerial icles 82-83
516
Jan. 26, 1903 159-161
Hep523, 903e.0e< ee 166-169 |
Masch':23:) 1903%,0-6 177-179
April 27; 1903 ne2s 5 182-184
Oct 20. 1T903E Eee 193-198 |
INOv.723-91903). see er 204-205
Psycuo-PuysicaL REACTION-
Time, THE MINIMAL VALUE
oF THE, Lightner Witmer. ..193
Ptolemy, ‘reil.s oie. wpe 95.
Publications of N. Y. Ac. Sci... 126
Public lecture by Bashford Dean. 30 |
Pueblos.«. nse = sive cs cere achrree 177
Bupa Sado e acon estore Seve corse Gi te
Pupin, M. 1: Bellows..-- 42-65 84, 88
Putnam, Heshret aon sae 172
IPVTIEE sk ak ve code ose 9, 60, 61
Pyroclastic £0Ck+.. eb ae ee 202
Pyrollectric zinc blende........ 204
Pyrorenic» TOCkne ase se eee 201
Pvrolusite. so sixcecien 1 aero oe 60
ByfOmorphite + xc cicero aalene 60
iPyrrhareticuisabella; se eer ee 180
ByxchHotite. 1g <cisw.2 scot SO 176
QUANTITATIVE RELATIONS’ BE-
TWEEN MotTorR AND SENSORY
Associations, J. H. Bair.... 40
Oarize eee 16, 47, 60, 61
Giaarizite:- fe... 2 acc bec 77
RADIOACTIVE SUBSTANCES, EXPERI-
MENTS ON THE ELECTROLYSIS
OF; GB. begtan eee eee 78-79
RADIOACTIVITY, EXPERIMENTAL
MetHops oF Srupy, G. B.
Pegram. 2). che cece sore 13-14
Radium) - 2. Os ae. oe 7
Rapium, Notes on, Geo. F. Kunz
and Chas. Baskerville ....190, 191
Ramsayseret:<..) oh cece ere 173
Raven clanek. ¢..c.c pe nee eee I2
Rayleign-? rer. odie eee eee 173
REACTIONS, ON THE RELATION OF,
TO CERTAIN SECONDARY STIMU-
1, R. T. MacDougall...... 82, 83
REACTION-TIME, THE MINIMAL
VALUE OF THE PSyYCHO-PHYS-
1caL, Lightner Witmer..... +s 193
REACTION-TIME Work, THE Ap-
PLICATION OF THE CONCEPT OF
VARIABILITY IN, Robt. Yerkes,
193, 194-195
Recording Secretary, N. Y. Ac.
Sci., Annual Report of,
18-19, 89-91, 210-212
Record of Meetings of the N. Y.
Ac. Sci., January to De-
CEMper, pIdO226 ae OF
INDEX.
| January to December, 1903,
153-215
REFRACTIVE INDICES, ON THE DE-
TERMINATION OF THE RELATIVE,
OF MINERALS IN Rock SEeEc-
TIONS BY THE BecKe METHOD,
Lea McI. Luqueer 59-60
| REFRACTIVE INDEX OF A TRANS-
PARENT PxiatTeE, A New INTER-
FEROMETER METHOD FoR MeEas-
URING THE, E. R. von Nardroff,
184, 185-186
| Regeneration in Alpheus....187—188
REJUVENESCENCE WITHOUT COoN-
JUGATION, DEGENERATION IN
PARAMECIUM AND _ SO-CALLED,
GouN. (Calkins3- oer 6-7
RELATION, THE, BETWEEN THE
VARIABILITY OF CELLS AND THAT
OF ORGANISMS, Franz Boas.... 6
Renilla 2 sssc54 Sr es See 71
Report of the Committee on
Budget. pe naet cee ahinvelelantc 04-05
Reéptiliay .36-ccnre-c1ao ere eee 55
REPTILIA, ON THE PrimMary D1-
VISIONS OF THE, INTO Two Sus-
cLasses, H. F, Osborn....164, 165
RESEARCHES AS TO THE INDENTITY
OF THE PERIODIC COMET OF
1889—1896—1903 (BROOKS) WITH
THE PeErtopIc COMET OF 1770
(LExELL), C. L. Poor 217-298
RESEAU, COMPARISON OF ASTRO-
PHOTOGRAPHIC MEASURES MADE
WITH THE, AND WITHOUT Irt,
Harold. Jacobyie---+- rece 156-158
| Reservations, Indian .:..2....- 160
| RESISTANCE, THE VARIATION OF
ConTACT, WITH CHANGE OF
ELECTROMOTIVE Force, H. C.
Parker ns ace h eee 4-5
Revival on learning: =~ soe. a: 95-96
WRBGIOECELOSE oo cece OS ELL Oe 187
iRhyachocephaliay soe o> see one 55
NRA obtets | ake i Pe eee 189
jticheliet( 2, eto. 1.00. sero were 99
| Rio Grande. valley «is een ae)
Rio Tinto Copper District,
Notes on THE, James Douglas,
8, 9-10
Ritchey, G. W., Recent RESULTS
IN ASTRONOMICAL PHOTOG-
| RAPHY WITH THE ForTyY-INCH
REFRACTOR AND WITH THE Two-
FOOT REFLECTOR OF THE YERKES
|| .OBSERVATORNe lepine 84-85
RIvER VALLEYS, JAMES HutTTon’s
THEORY OF THE FORMATION OF,
INDEX.
THe CENTENARY OF JOHN PrLay-
FAIR’S DEFENSE OF : MEMORIALS
By Professors Stevenson,
Kemp and Dodge -47, 48-49
Rocxs, DIscuSSION OF AND SuG-
GESTIONS REGARDING A NEw
CLASSIFICATION oF, A. W.
Grabatl so: 2 eac50s0ae. ase 200=202
ROGEMEST Mee slalenis tire cacicle ctomiere 14
Rogers, Austin F., THe Mrn-
ERALS OF Joprin, Mo., Leap
ANDEZING IOTSTRIGN.. << - 59, 60-61
PROOMATIS tyes odes apaieia(sieekoss. Soniele 9
ROTM OIIED eyo stare oie Seema ates 72
HVOMESET) GAY: ayess)s eye; 1s eiese aie IgI, 202
Rowland objective plane ....... 43
Royal Astronomical Society..... 102
Royal Society of London.gg, 100, 102
QED yamecne 8) Sar crspcy oct cloe aeraerenete 202, 203
Spine ll -dsyroweat eae oa ae 202
RUCKELES, ref: .5 sia seve : 45
Ratdaceousyprockaanccesse eee dee 202
Rutherford; B.: ref. s...2...2+.- 79
SAPILLALITIS! ct cis ~tclcts eieiolon Ietobets 219
Sahaptin stock of Indians....... 78
St. Clair, H. H., 2d, Investica-
TIONS AMONG THE COMANCHE
AND UTE INDIANS..... 159, 160-161
Sisbsaricis, sOrderwobasccsee oes 96 |
St. Petersburg Academy ........ 100
Sabyelantasie ss chrstetaje:o Seyourecisrents 68
Salsa (CECLO PIA, acc ais seis) yates 'ats 181
SAMIA CECROPIA, NATURAL SELEC-
TION IN, H. E. Crampton...6, 7-8 |
San Antonia Station <2)... 22 II
Suny CamoswVMountains. .eeyecs cee 188
SandsStonese sere eucckens asics 50, 69, 81
Sandys TOC wales ate laenrs hia we 202
San JosE, TAMAULIPAS, MExIco,
THE GEOLOGY OF THE NEPHE-
LITE SYENITE AREA AT, Geo. I.
LTE Ae ee Spin oe ae eee ee 188-189
SautasG@ruzmamimals, 2.0.24 14
SANTIAGO DE CusA, THE COPPER
Mines oF Cosre, Fred H.
Moiteie. sacra ase 188, 189
SSE YO) Dane ew alanis a oid Ul GEICO 203
Saskatchewan River ........... 208
Saturn. .222, 226, 228, 220, 230, 232,
259, 260, 261, 262, 263, 287, 288,
289, 290, 291, 292
Saturnian) subsystem) ssei oo << 36
WCchiaparelliy y= we /yerce eee 53) 54
Scuist, THE HorNBLENDE, OF
SpuyTEN Duyvit CREEK, MAn-
HATTAN Istanp, A. A. Julien.. 181
CORRELATION
182, 183-184
Scuoot ABILITIES,
oF, S. C. Parker
317
| Schulhof; ref..221, 222, 290, 292,
Schwalbse tefsacts-1 a s)72 eas cate ere
| Science, A PRELIMINARY REPORT
| oF Tests oF ONE HUNDRED
293
235
| Men of, W. H. Davis.167, 182, 183
| Scientific Alliance........ 84, 85, 190
Scott, W. B., Tue OricIn AND
DEVELOPMENT OF SoUTH AMER-
TCAN (MAMMALS) </0¢ s0:cc0e os 14-15
| Scripture, E. W., PHonetic Sur-
WEL VEV Sto cri tdetartePatcis overs 8 166, 167-168
Seastrehinsye csi sfastalciei ay eestte, elers 80
| Sections of N. Y. Ac. Sci....2.- 125
| SELECTION, REPRODUCTIVE, VARIA-
| TION AND, IN SATURNID Morus,
Hees Crampton... - 180-181
SELKIRKS "sess sis ciseesale ut ase ee 208
SEMITES, THE ANCIENT, AND THE
MopERN Jews, Maurice Fish-
DOL Sete aa mola xuatenctovets 159-160
| SENSory ASSOCIATIONS, QUANTI-
TATIVE RELATIONS BETWEEN
Motor anp, J. H. Bair....... 40
| Sephandimiepa. clos eistsitee oie ene 160
| SERPENTINE, GNEISS AND, Ex-
HIBITION OF SPECIMENS OF,
| FROM THE SOUTHERN END OF
ManuaTTaAN Istanp, W. G.
EOVASONY Sais cisre os cherie eee 774:
| SEx DIFFERENCES WITH RESPECT
TO VartaABILity, E. L. Thorn-
PmiGikele.cmowscetoe oes 61, 63
| Sexes, MENTAL TRAITS IN THE
ena wioleis 1.) ROEnGUKe. ay fereye 182
iV SExtants Sayaaies Anis crapsesions otishetee 38
i hakespeates: refer. (\ss.cs usans 96
| Shales, Norman Kill............ 176
| SHarKS, THE Earty DeEveELop-
| MENT OF, FROM A COMPARATIVE
| Srtanppornt, Bashford Dean,
44, 45-46
johellssiGastropodesneercccmarteies 158
| Shoshonean’ faniilycnc.eeieere ee 160
| Shoshone language ............ 161
| Shriver, Walter, Death of...... 90
SIBERIA, ETHNOLOGICAL OBSERVA-
TIONS IN NORTHEASTERN, W.
Bocoras’ epcc2 eee 62, 63
| Sickels, Ivin; Fellow........ 84, 88
OLCED AS seeere theyre tererei ieee ane eto <tsiore 165
[Sila cairo nsteresrekerepereieravecictare ste ore 16
SiliGated aco ta eliestec chew eiae 61
SilicigusenOCke a cpcciac cctec caer oe 201
Silurian tossils: ericson. eietel= s08 2
Silvers thie Ae cre rere rapans, sactenet sees se)
SS UG Ue ore atte h en ctevey ele, a) oya as ever ays 77, 160
Slavs tire ers cite ace gars 160
SlIOthswect ce rice eck eee 14
318 INDEX.
Sutall poxae see cinereus sis oe eee enor 192 | OF THE FORMATION OF
SMALLPOX, THE CAUSE OF, THE RIVERLWALLEYS a. citecuetee 47, 48
Lire-History OF CyYTORYCTES Reis Pi. mrias ecuador we okie 202
vaRIoLz, G. N. Calkins....... 201 | STIMULI, INVOLUNTARY MusSscu-
Smith, H. I, A Recentty Dts-
COVERED EARTHWORK IN OGE-
Maw County, MICHIGAN.10, II—I2 |
SniuthObservatorye ener reine 234
Smithsonite- frei oisi-te aoe tees 60
Sneath, E. H., Nores on THE
WASHINGTON MEETING....167, 169 |
Snout-FisHes, THE, oF KANSAS,
OS Ps Hays Sic a522 oe ms
Solar system) <i. sai) elspa siete 31, 36
Some IncLusions IN MICA AND
THEIR RELATION TO THE PER-
CUSSION Ficurre, Geo. E.
ASHDY 2 Gsieiscckole ate ae ea ee 68
Some PECULIARITIES OF THE
Gyroscope, G. B. Warring.184, 186
Some Propucts DERIVED FROM
Coat, M. T. Bogert...161, 163-164
Soule, Caroline G.; ref......... 180
SoutH AMERICAN MAMMALS,
THE ORIGIN AND DEVELOPMENT
oF, W. B. Scott 2.2. 14515
SPECIMENS, EXHIBITION oF, G.
Fy AKU (240 22a eee
SPECTRUM, OBSERVATIONS ON THE
FLASH, AT THE SUMATRA
Ecuipse, S. A. Mitchell. ..42, 43-44
Speir, Oswald; Act. Mem...... 206
Sobalentey alate. oe eee 60, 61
Spodumene.abenin- cheer 202, 203
Sporozoa associated with can-
CELrOuSs: jerOw thls +:.ce.1a4 eee 72
Spuyten Duyvil Creek........ 745 75
Starhishts sain). Sees ade eee 72
Starnesroupss aes. cee eee 84
Stari CAL Pellow=... 44 ee 84, 88
Statistics. tsc,icc eo eee eee 33
STATISTICS OF AMERICAN Psy-
cHoLocists, J. McK. Cattell,
193,
Steele, W. M., and E. H. Cam-
eron, THE EFFECTS oF PRAC-
TICE ON THE POGGENDORFF
ILLUSION 193,
STEREOSCOPIC Vision, APPARENT
Motion 1n, J. E. Lough. .166, 168
195
Stevens, G. T.; Fellow........ 84, 88
On THE HorRopTerR......193, 197
RiGhsscysauroe ee ties Qe eee ee TO
Stevenson, Prof., Memorial by,
THE CENTENARY OF JOHN
PLAYFAIR’S DEFENSE OF
JouHn Hurtton’s THEORY
| LAR RESPONSES TO RHYTHMIC,
|. J-BAMinerowes-25 nee oe AO AL
STIMULI, ON THE RELATION OF
REACTIONS TO CERTAIN SEc-
onpary, R. T. MacDougall. .82, 83
| Strmut1, Time INTERVALS
BounpED By VarIED, J. B.
MESO» 5.1.1. cc: 0: bbe aes, cay OL ee 82
Stoney, J. G.s\ sel. <5. <5 eee 29, 30
STREMMATOGRAPH TESTS: PRIN-
CIPLES AND Facts RELATING
| TO THE DISTRIBUTION OF THE
| STRAINS IN THE BASE OF RAILS
UNDER Movine Trains, P. H.
| Dudley sei. -2.: ects eee eee 179
iStrong.C. Al) Bellows seer 84, 88
|Strongylocentrotus ............ - 80
Struves “rely. oso cn Soa eee 242
Sulphur ..4cncentoeeaeeee eee 60, 189
(Sulphuric acids assent ee Io
Sumatra weclipse: 25 -4:)..cem emer 174
SuMaATRA EcLIPSE, OBSERVATIONS
ON THE FLASH SPECTRUM AT
tHE, S. A. Mitchell...... 42, 43-44
| Sumner, F. B.; Fellow........ 84, 88
FurRTHER EXPERIMENTAL
STUDIES UPON FisH DE-
VELOPMENT: «ose 66, 68
Report of summer work.... 191
Sun, THE Discovery oF NEw
Gases 1n THE, S. A. Mitchell,
172, 173-074,
Sutton, W. S., CHromosomic RE-
DUCTION IN ITS RELATION TO
MENDEL’S: IGAWite. 02 = oles 174,075
Swanton, J. R., MyrHotocy anp
ORIGIN OF THE HarpA INDIANS,
10, II
Swittsret... ..voteeceeeer 292, 293
Switzerland of America ....... 208
Symborodon) «5255... .oc8mee eee 44
Mallow=Clay. i.\..0.c..<sts tons neactouate thes 61
PIRAO SHAS ras, oss otc ben cuca nc Aaieetntorees II
Marahwmares® 5.40 Sova caer ree 178
Tar. &€oals :i-.cce cee seer 163
TELESCOPE, ZENITH, A COMBINED
PRISMATIC TRANSIT AND,
Harold Jacoby and S. A.
Matchell nyse ttoctocer ee 190, IQI
TEMPERATURES, Soit, A THER-
MOGRAPH FoR, Wm. Hallock...4, 5
TEREDO-LIKE SHELL FROM THE
LARAMIE Group, DESCRIPTION
or A New, R. P. Whitfield....8, 9
INDEX. 319
ANGCI 7 ARON ROI REE nO ar paul ei ankey=StOrey Poa ch) c ene Stele e 2 16
MIEEEEOTATO™ Gi fos ss sace. os 6. sd leet ash ater ote LOoiMuurduoise deposits. sm ja o< icicle le 182
MB AESUSIT oo Nos as eo ves an ete Blobel Git Patrtlesy hrc eyetets wre snows 2 Gio shaenate eta 72
THERMOGRAPH, A, FOR SoiIL TEM- EDAS AVIAN ec xis oie = 200 siecisicemis a 0
PERATURES, Wm. Hallock...... Ay Sas Onnitahwiceservationi is. eerie csic 160
Thompson, W. G.; Fellow..... 84) 188)| Ultra-vielet light.5.22.5-- 40555: IgI
EHOMSON’ Js Jct rel... 2 coe 32| Underwood, L. M.; Councillor.. 17
BRITTAIN bo ik, Svicd ob dc eee ers 78, 79 IWVACESP TES iis ucaue miedo eas tenta 209
Thorndike, E. L., Mentat Traits Wreulates: cancer we siaee 15
EN: MEER A WOR SESE .Sy. cielo ier. 182| UniTEpD STATES GEOLOGICAL SuR-
NATURAL SELECTION AND FER- vey, THE HyproGraPHiIc WorK
THETTY GN MAN... <.. 0s. 186, 187 or THE, Geo. B. Hollister..... 159
Reha eres craic disua decree 40 | University of Cambridge ....... 08
Sex DIFFERENCES WITH RE- Bolownat svyoch tate tres oes 07
SPECT TO VARIABILITY..61, 63 Oxford’ Poise Gases sce 98
WHCESERESS, i cfeveie ote oe ate ereee 88 APIS ase as ride Oise ee 97
“TTT 2Sc8 8 SOL SN ae REN eit icetic II IPRASUEN cs see ein ie a eteneare 98
TiME INTERVALS BOUNDED BY WR aTNUS) Aico s Stone er sw aie ore crete cae 293
Variep STIMULI, J. B. Miner.. 82| Ure Inpians, CoMANCHE AND,
Tisserand; ref....222, 289, 292, 293 INVESTIGATIONS AMONG THE, H.
TETICE STR R Es aT areas re Mee ica Mee caRe rn 43 He Sts Claire2d i. ...- 159, 160-161
TITANOTHERES, THE Four PHYLA | Vancouver Laboratory ......... 72
On wH-h. OSboMis. =-..- cas 44-45| Van Ingen, G., The Ausable
pMaSCalbeesy than roemianie cloies acter MaGiie COHASHIN Ae ea erate ee ae 47, 50-51
POITE CMe Verein cts. cro el hss e ares mitre et 177| VARIABILITY, THE APPLICATION
sRompiras, town) saise- «.ccesttre clots 11| OF THE CONCEPT OF, IN RE-
ROD Azee te Man Hee crete 203 ACTION-TIME Work, Robt.
Torrey Botanical Club......... 102 Merkes: (3S cocicncencss 193, 194-195
Torrey, J. C.; Act. Mem:.'....... 190| VARIATION AND REPRODUCTIVE
MGT EUCASS 2 oa.5 Ne ts, oe reh cicero 207 SELECTION IN SATURNID MoTHS,
(Kosamtowls. ers sesh ee 39) HoH. Crampton. 2-5... 180-181
Tower, R. W.; Act. Mem...... 170 | VARIATION, THE, OF Contact RE-
GO wa tee cers ta eran foes 206 SISTANCE WITH CHANGE OF
Erb rariatay Weteiow vo cic.c ariteelaer ete 209 ELECTROMOTIVE Force, H. C.
Townsend, C. H.; Fellow....205, 209 PAtkenen soe dee Clerserion Ag AS
Transit, A CoMBINED PRISMATIC, | Venus..232, 233, 234, 259, 260, 261,
AND ZENITH TELEScopPE, Harold We 2625 263
Jacoby and S. A. Mitchell.190, 191 | Vesuvianite ..............- 188, 204
Treasurer, N. Y. Ac. Sci., An- Vienna Academy of Sciences... 167
nual Report..19—-20, 91-92, 212-213 | Virchow, Rudolph; ref......... 18
IETS 0S 6A tees oe Oa ee oa 55 | Vision, AN INSTRUMENT IN
Trilophodon productus ........ 187 | Facrat, Robt. MacDougall,
Triphane Bucy area elo ekcneis ots, wells 6 203 | 167, 168-169
Trowbridge, C. C.; Fellow..... 84, 88| viston, APPARENT MoTION IN
Some Facts REGARDING PER- | Srereoscoric, J. E. Lough,
SISTENT METEOR TRAILS— | SeGeaas
pone Ne erleg cs yee 158 | Vision, Two EXPERIMENTS IN
|
TuHeE EFFECT OF THE WIND
on Brrp MiGRATION 44, 46
Tue Function oF INTER-
LOCKED EMARGINATE PRI-
MARIES IN SOARING FLIGHT,
55, 56-58
Tue Puysicat NATURE OF
PERSISTENT METEOR
TRAINS 42-43
57
Cotor, Robt. MacDougall..61, 62
| VO @eSite? Fe ke oc receuatelorcsstsie. ei. sds 189
|von Leydig, F.; Hon. Mem....
_von Nardroff, E. R., A New In-
TERFEROMETER METHOD FOR
MEASURING THE REFRAC-
TIVE INDEX OF THE TRANS-
PARENT PLATE....184, 185-186
Fellow 88
Wall, Col.; ref
320 INDEX.
Warring, G. B., Some Peculiari- SPRINGS AND WEIGHTS..40, 41
ties of the Gyroscope..... 184, 186 | Tue GrowTH OF Boys..... 51-52
WES viet Boe sccbpaobanuPaoec 253 | Witmer, Lightner, THe MinrmaL
Washington, Hee s.4 teks eer 189 VALUE OF THE PSYCHO-PHYS-
Wasuincton MEETING, NoTES ON ICAL REACTION-UUME. .02--\ch ees 193
THE, E. H, Sneath=....-267, L6o)||\Vollastouite merestters-ttett teeta 204
Water as Uanichsmortae ie cero 163 | Woodbridge, F. J. E.; Act. Mem. 155
\WWENGINIGRioineocooodadedsa05 50 270 Bellow (2.4 ogee ce ee eee 170
Wieber’s Taw? *a., «cies oe: e seciereetyene 63, 82 Vice=Prés: sai a sisi eee 209
Wheeler, W. M.; Act. Mem.... 190, Woodhull, J. F.; Fellow...... 84, 88
Rellow. share a Bone 190! Wood, R. W., Anomatous Dts-
White PheomG ss res... 18 PERSION AND ITS BEARING ON
Whitfield, R. P., Descriprion oF ASTROPHYSICAL PROBLEMS.... 65
A New TEREDO-LIKE SHELL Woodst ‘Hollie artes atomic ee 192
FROM THE LARAMIE GrouP.8, 9 | Woodward, R. S., MeasuREMENT
OBSERVATIONS ON AND AND CALCULATION, President’s
EMENDED DESCRIPTION OF Address: siiav sever tes areas 22-39
HETEROCERAS SIMPLICOSTA- Woodworth, R. S., INTELLIGENCE
STUN WAEEIT Rive cckelsreromerenciete 8-9 AND MOVEMENT.........-- 193, 198
Wilcox (Pass: cakejenccicte ree 208 | Worcester school children...... 168
Wallemite@ tan. = 1b. acer 202| Wundt, Wilhelm; Hon. Mem.12, 17
Wilson, E. B., AN ExperRIMENTAL Waurtzite <> tee ee eee 60
Stupy OF THE GERM-RE- Wyominc, Tue LeucitE Hits
GIONS IN THE MOoLLUSCAN OF 7): EF. Kemp. o-oo 165, 166
HES GGrayavekcscsssrayale (omnioreneltee 206,41 207) I Xenon Je een ele citation 173, 174
CreLL-LINEAGE AND THE STUDY Xylophomia laramiensis......... 9
OF ElOMOLOGIES so sere 66, 67| Yacuts, THE MEASUREMENT OF
Councillor 2.2550. chee 88 Racine, C. L. Poor. ..198, 199-200
ON THE RELATION BETWEEN | Yatsu, Naohide, Report of sum-
LOCALIZATION AND CLEAV- ner’ WOorke) foe eee ee eee 72, 192
AGE AS ELUCIDATED BY Ex- | Yerkes Observatory ...........- 242
PERIMENTS UPON MeERO- YERKES OBSERVATORY, RECENT RE-
GE NWetess cide ba eee atene eae 85-86 SULTS IN ASTRONOMICAL PHO-
PES vens Sirens oe siete EO 209 TOGRAPHY WITH THE Forty-
IRGQE, ooo noognodOeCooK sds s08 187| INCH REFRACTOR AND WITH THE
Report of summer work..71, 192 Two-Foot REFLECTOR OF THE,
Wilson, Margaret B.; ref...... 075)|\ 2G.nW Ritchey... eerie 84-85
Winp, Tue EFFECT OF THE, ON Yerkes, Robt., THE APPLICATION
Birp Miecration, C. C. Trow- | OF THE CONCEPT OF VARIABILITY
DTIGS6 asa k ck ee eee 44, 46 IN ReAcTION-TIME WoORrRK,
Wissler, Clark, CorrELaTIons OF 193, 194-195
MEASUREMENTS OF Zinc District, THE MINERALS
GROWTH 2s hla ores 166 OF THE JopLin, Mo., LEAD AND,
OBSERVATIONS ON ABNOR- Aah ROGCLS «steric ae 59, 60-61
MALITIES OF THE Harp PAA, IESG ein cagaoyoagosca se 166
IATA ES Pier Ais cto eee 177|ZOLLNER, THE, Ficure, C. H.
RECENT RESEARCHES ON THE Judd cee cee 193, 195-196
DEcoRATIVE ART OF THE , ZOOLOGY IN JAPAN, Past AND
PLAINS INDIANS.......204—205 PRESENT Stupy oF, Bashford
Report of summer work.... 77 Dean si. eet 164, 165
THE ErRGoGRAPH: COMPARA- VAC biped AO oe OIE in acico.on 4 II
TIVE RESULTS WIDTH
PUBLICATIONS
OF THE
NEW -YORK ACADEMY OF . SCIENCES
[Lyceum or Natura History 1818-1876]
The publications of the Academy consist of two series, viz :—
(1) The Annals (octavo series), established in 1823, contain
*the scientific contributions and reports of researches, together
with the records of meetings, annual exhibitions, etc. :
Publication of the Transactions of the Academy was discon-
tinued with the issue of Volume XVI, 1898, and merged in the
Annals. A volume of the Annals will in general coincide with
the calendar year and will be distributed in parts. The price
of current issues is one dollar per part or three dollars per
volume. Authors’reprints are issued as soon as the separate
papers are printed, the dates appearing above the title of each
paper.
(2) The Memoirs (quarto series), established in 1895, are is-
sued at irregular intervals. It is intended that each volume shall
be devoted to motiographs relatiris to some particular depart-
ment of science.’ Volume I is devoted to Astronomical Mem-
oirs, Volume II, to Zoological Memoirs, etc. The price is one
dollar per part, as issued.
All publications will hereafter be sent free to fellows and
members who desire to receive them, but other fellows and
members will only receive the Records, issued as a separate
from the Annals. The Annals will be sent, as before, to
honorary and corresponding members desiring them.
Subscriptions and inquiries concerning current and back
numbers of any of the publications of the Academy should be
addressed to THE LIBRARIAN
New York Academy of Sciences
American Museum of Natural History.
New York City.
PRICES OF PUBLICATIONS
Annals of the Lyceum (Vols. I-XI), ... . per Vol., $5.00
Proceedings ‘ Reyne ihe TTD) Sa cee a een, tee Ie GOD
Trans. of the Academy (Vols. I-XVI), . . “ © 5.00
Annals“ fs CWS AEX ia ns a ae Ss <3 SENG OOS
Annals “ aS (Vol. XI e¢ seg.),. . 3.00
Memoirs “‘ ‘ Rees I, Pt. I, Vol. II, Pts. I, I, I),
per, Parte aes: |. 1.00
ak
aay
=
et
INDEX
pr ek
aN
ey
i}
if
3 5185 00258 3514
New York Botanical Garden
LN em a le MN He AL la AN ae EEE RAT 9 Ct a on
a 7
mae Fee Da Mee eh ate AMER OS ee, oe
. Ny